360BEInstallAdminGuide 10 2020

Installation and
Administration Guide
For use with Encompass 20.1 Banker Edition

Copyright Statement
© 2020 Ellie Mae, Inc. Ellie Mae®, Encompass®, AllRegs®, DataTrac®, Ellie Mae Network™, Mavent®, Millennial Tracker™, Mortgage Returns®, Prospect Manager®, Total
Quality Loan®, True CRM®, TQL® and the Ellie Mae logo are trademarks of Ellie Mae, Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Other company and product names may
be trademarks or copyrights of their respective owners.
Encompass Installation and Administration Guide - Banker Edition
Rev. 5/26/2020
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction ................................................................ 1 Pipeline Tab ................................................................. 15
Getting Help with Encompass ................................................... 1 Loan Tab ...................................................................... 16
The Encompass Help Menu ............................................. 1 Forms/Tools Tab ........................................................... 18
Field-Level Help in Encompass ........................................ 2 eFolder Tab .................................................................. 18
Trades/Contacts/Dashboard/Reports Tab ........................ 19
Chapter 2: Installing Encompass............................................... 3 Settings Tab ................................................................. 19
Installation .............................................................................. 3 External Settings Tab .................................................... 20
TPO Connect ............................................................... 21
Chapter 3: Logging In to Encompass ....................................... 6
Consumer Connect ....................................................... 21
System Administrator Log In ..................................................... 6
User Log In ............................................................................ 6 LO Connect .................................................................. 21
Log In Requirements ...................................................... 6 Organizations/Users .............................................................. 21
Log In to Encompass ...................................................... 6 Organization Hierarchy .................................................. 21
Additional Setup Considerations .................................... 22
Chapter 4: Configuration Guidelines ........................................ 8 Setting Up Users ......................................................... 25
Setup Sequence .................................................................... 8 Working with LO Compensation Plans ............................ 28
Access to Loan Files and Data ................................................ 8 Managing Users ........................................................... 28
Organization Hierarchy .................................................. 8 Roles ................................................................................... 30
Sample Hierarchy ........................................................... 9 Role Mapping ............................................................... 30
User Profile Settings ....................................................... 9 Milestones ............................................................................ 31
User Groups ................................................................. 9 Current Milestones ........................................................ 31
Business Rules .............................................................. 9 Archived Milestones ...................................................... 32
Access to Tasks ...................................................................... 9 Milestone Templates ..................................................... 32
Loan Folders .................................................................. 9 Global Milestone Template Settings ................................ 36
User Groups ........................................................................ 37
Chapter 5: Company/User Setup ............................................. 10 Best Practices and Guidelines ........................................ 37
Company Information ........................................................... 10 Members Tab ............................................................... 38
Company Information Tab ............................................. 10 Loans Tab .................................................................... 38
License Tab ..................................................................11 Borrower Contacts Tab .................................................. 39
Services Password Management ............................................ 12 Loan Templates Tab ...................................................... 39
Personas ............................................................................ 13 Resources Tab ............................................................. 40
About Administration Personas ...................................... 13 Role List View Tab ........................................................ 41
Access Tab .................................................................. 14
Home Tab .................................................................... 14
i
Chapter 6: External Company Setup ...................................... 43 Document Category ...................................................... 72
Company Details .................................................................. 43 TPO Fees ............................................................................. 73
Banks ......................................................................... 43 Edit Late Fee Settings ................................................... 74
Lenders ....................................................................... 44 Managing TPO Fees ..................................................... 75
Third Party Originators .................................................. 45 TPO Reassignment ............................................................... 75
Basic Info Tab .............................................................. 45 TPO Custom Fields ............................................................... 76
DBA Tab ...................................................................... 48 Map Custom Fields to Loan Fields (Optional) ................... 76
License Tab ................................................................. 48 All TPO Contact Information ................................................... 77
Loan Criteria Tab .......................................................... 49 TPO Global Lender Contacts .................................................. 78
TPO Contacts Tab ........................................................ 49 Title/Department ........................................................... 78
Sales Reps / AE Tab ..................................................... 50 TPO Docs ............................................................................. 79

TPO Disclosure Settings ........................................................ 81
Lender Contacts Tab ..................................................... 50
Investor Connect Settings ...................................................... 82
Warehouse Tab ............................................................ 52
LO Comp Tab ............................................................... 54 Chapter 7: Loan Setup ................................................................ 85
Commitments Tab ........................................................ 55 Auto Loan Numbering ............................................................ 85
Trade Mgmt Tab ........................................................... 57 Organization-Specific Numbering ................................... 85
ONRP Tab ................................................................... 57 Auto MERS MIN Numbering ................................................... 86
Notes Tab .................................................................... 58 Loan Folders ........................................................................ 87
TPO Connect Setup Tab ............................................... 58 About Archive Folders ................................................... 87
TPO Docs Tab ............................................................. 59 About the Trash Folder .................................................. 87
Attachments Tab .......................................................... 61 Loan Duplication ................................................................... 88
Custom Fields Tab ........................................................ 62 Alerts ................................................................................... 88
Create Branches and Extensions in the External Log Setup ............................................................................. 91
Company Hierarchy ...................................................... 62 Tasks .................................................................................. 91
Search for TPO Companies and Branches Based Default Input Forms .............................................................. 91
on Their Organization Name and/or Organization ID ........ 63 Condition Forms ................................................................... 92
Custom Print Forms .............................................................. 93
Manage TPO Companies and Branches ......................... 63
Print Form Groups ................................................................ 94
Third Party Originator Contacts ...................................... 64
Loan Custom Fields ............................................................... 94
License ....................................................................... 67
Channel Options ................................................................... 95
Manage Third Party Originator Contacts ......................... 68
RESPA ................................................................................. 96
TPO Settings ........................................................................ 70 Changed Circumstances Setup ............................................... 96
Current Company Status ............................................... 70 Disclosure Tracking Settings ................................................... 97
Current Contact Status .................................................. 71 Compliance Calendar ........................................................... 99
Company Rating .......................................................... 71 2009 GFE Print .................................................................. 100
Attachment Category .................................................... 72 Trustee List ........................................................................ 100
Price Group ................................................................. 72 Piggyback Loan Synchronization .......................................... 101
ii
Sync Templates .................................................................. 102 Chapter 10: Secondary Setup ................................................. 135
Privacy Policy .................................................................... 104 Product and Pricing ............................................................ 135
Zipcode Setup .................................................................... 104 Configure User Access to EPPS Summary Documents ... 138
HMDA Profiles .................................................................... 105 Secondary Lock Fields ........................................................ 139
NMLS Report Setup ............................................................ 106 Lock Request Additional Fields ............................................ 139
Verification Contact Setup .................................................... 106 Auto-Lock ........................................................................... 140
FHA Informed Consumer Choice Disclosure .......................... 107 Investor Templates ............................................................. 142
EPPS Loan Program Table ................................................... 143
Chapter 8: eFolder Setup ......................................................... 109 Trade Management Setup .................................................... 143
Document Conversion ......................................................... 109
Adjustment Templates ......................................................... 146
Document Conversion ................................................ 109
Lock Desk Setup ................................................................. 147
Unassigned Document Conversion Preferences ............ 109 Expiration Settings ...................................................... 147
Documents .........................................................................110 Calendar .................................................................... 148
Document Export Templates .................................................112
Lock Desk Schedule/ONRP ......................................... 148
Document Groups ...............................................................112
SRP Templates .................................................................. 151
Document Stacking Templates ..............................................113
Funding Templates ............................................................. 152
Document Identification ........................................................114
Servicing ........................................................................... 152
Document Training ...............................................................114
Correspondent Purchase Advice ........................................... 153
Conditions ..........................................................................115
Purchase Advice Form ........................................................ 154
Condition Sets ....................................................................116
Loan Pricing Decimal Places ................................................ 155
Post-Closing Conditions .......................................................117
Post-Closing Conditions Sets ...............................................117 Chapter 11: Contact Setup ....................................................... 156
HTML Email Templates .........................................................118 Borrower Custom Fields ...................................................... 156
WebCenter Configuration ..................................................... 120 Mapping Borrower Custom Fields to Loan Fields ........... 156
Borrower Contact Status ..................................................... 157
Chapter 9: Docs Setup ............................................................. 121
Borrower Contact Update .................................................... 157
Encompass Docs Solution Prerequisites ................................ 121
Business Custom Fields ...................................................... 158
Docs Setup ........................................................................ 121
Mapping Custom Category Fields to Loan Fields ........... 158
Set Up Initial Disclosure Packages ............................... 121
Business Categories ........................................................... 159
Set Up eDisclosure Plan Codes ................................... 124
Public Business Contact Groups .......................................... 159
Set Up eDisclosure Stacking Templates ........................ 126
Assign Public Business Contact Groups to User Groups . 159
Set Up Closing Doc Plan Codes ................................... 127
Email Server Settings ......................................................... 161
Set Up Closing Doc Stacking Templates ....................... 129
Configure Compliance Audit Settings ............................ 130 Chapter 12: Loan Templates .................................................. 162
eFolder Setup ..................................................................... 132 Loan Programs .................................................................. 162
Loan Templates .................................................................. 133 Closing Costs ..................................................................... 163
Loan Program Templates Based on Plan Codes ............ 133 Input Form Sets .................................................................. 165
Personas Settings ............................................................... 133 Settlement Service Providers ............................................... 166
Affiliated Business Arrangement Templates ............................ 167
iii
Document Sets .................................................................. 168 Role Access to Documents .................................................. 199
Task Sets .......................................................................... 168 Input Form List ................................................................... 200
Data Templates .................................................................. 169 Loan Form Printing ............................................................. 200
Loan Template Sets ............................................................ 170 Print Auto Selection ............................................................ 202
Default Template Setting ..................................................... 171 Using the Advanced Condition Editor .................................... 203
Configurable Workflow Templates ......................................... 172 Activating and Deactivating Business Rules .......................... 204
Appraisal Order Management ............................................... 205
Chapter 13: Tables and Fees .................................................. 174 Appraisal Ordering Options Tab .................................... 205
Escrow and Title Tables ...................................................... 174 Manage Appraisers Tab ............................................... 207
HELOC Table .................................................................... 174 LO Compensation Rule ........................................................ 208
MI Tables ........................................................................... 176
Collateral Tracking Setting .................................................... 209
Create and Manage MI Tables ..................................... 176
Download Pre-Configured Tables ................................ 177 Chapter 16: System Administration ...................................... 211
Create and Manage Sub Tabs ...................................... 177 Current Logins .................................................................... 211
FHA County Limits ............................................................. 177 All User Information ............................................................ 211
City Tax, State Tax, and User Defined Fee ............................ 178 Settings Reports .................................................................. 212
Itemization Fee Management .............................................. 178 Creating Organization-Based Reports ........................... 212
Fee List Tab ............................................................... 179 Creating Persona-Based Reports ................................. 214
Persona Overwrite Tab ................................................ 179 Creating User Group-Based Reports ............................. 215
LO Compensation ............................................................... 181 Managing Settings Reports .......................................... 215
Loan Reassignment ............................................................ 217
Chapter 14: Dynamic Data Management.............................. 183 Unlock Loan Files ................................................................ 217
Top Use Cases for Dynamic Data Management ............. 183 Unlock Trade ...................................................................... 218
Fee Rules .......................................................................... 183 System Audit Trail ............................................................... 218
Field Rules ......................................................................... 183 Register Encompass ........................................................... 219
Data Tables ........................................................................ 183 Encompass Server Manager ................................................ 219
Global DDM Settings ........................................................... 184 Port, Compression, and IP Restriction Settings .............. 220
More Resources for Dynamic Data Management ........... 184 The Configuration Wizard ............................................ 220
Online User Manager ........................................................... 221
Chapter 15: Business Rules.................................................... 185 Settings Manager ................................................................ 221
Loan Folder Business Rule .................................................. 185 Register Encompass SDK .................................................... 229
Loan Action Completion ....................................................... 186 Version Manager ................................................................ 229
Milestone Completion ......................................................... 186 Apply Service Packs or Critical Patches to
Field Data Entry ................................................................. 188 Test Environments ...................................................... 230
Field Triggers ..................................................................... 189
Reporting Database ............................................................ 230
Automated Conditions ......................................................... 191
Import Fields from a Text File ....................................... 232
Persona Access to Fields .................................................... 192
Settings Sync ...................................................................... 232
Persona Access to Loans .................................................... 195
Commitment Terms Data Migration Tool ................................. 233
Conflicts with Access Rules ......................................... 197
iv
Chapter 17: Additional Services ............................................ 235 Export to LEF ...................................................................... 276
E-Document Management ................................................... 235
Company Status Online ...................................................... 235 Appendix A: Administration Personas ................................. 277
About Update Triggers ................................................ 236 Creating Administrators ........................................................ 277
Super Administrator .................................................... 277
Company and TPO Status Online Templates ................. 236
Administrator .............................................................. 277
Work with Status Online Templates .............................. 238
Global Administrators .................................................. 277
Email Templates ......................................................... 239
Local Administrators .................................................... 277
Users ........................................................................ 240
eDisclosure Fulfillment ......................................................... 240
Compliance Review Setup .................................................. 241
Appendix B: Loan Custom Field Calculations.................... 279
Operations and Features ...................................................... 279
Compliance Review Setup Wizard ................................ 244
Arithmetic Operations .......................................................... 279
4506T Service .................................................................... 255
Safe Operations .................................................................. 280
TQL Services ...................................................................... 256
Mathematical Operations ..................................................... 281
Appraisal Service ................................................................ 257
Text-based Operations ......................................................... 282
Merchant Account Setup ............................................. 257
Date-Based Operations ........................................................ 283
Credit Card Payment Setup ......................................... 257
Calendar-Based Operations ................................................. 284
Title Service ....................................................................... 259
Using Loan Field Values ....................................................... 284
Fraud Service ..................................................................... 260
Branching and Logic Operations ........................................... 286
Fannie Mae Services ........................................................... 261
List-Based Operations ......................................................... 287
Enabling Automated Ordering of Fannie Mae Products ... 261
Advanced Functions ............................................................ 288
Valuation Service ................................................................ 263 Calculation Errors ................................................................ 288
Flood Service ..................................................................... 263
Starting Encompass Flood Service (CoreLogic) ............. 263 Appendix C: Advanced Coding for Business Rules ......... 289
Starting Encompass Flood Service (ServiceLink) ........... 264 Prerequisites ....................................................................... 289
Scanned Document Uploader Service ................................... 266 Visual Basic ............................................................... 289
North Carolina Compliance Report ........................................ 267 Advanced Condition Editor ........................................... 289
Submit Reports to the NCCOB ............................................. 269 Loan Custom Field Calculations ................................... 289
Advanced Coding for Conditions ........................................... 289
Chapter 18: File Access Management .................................. 270 Examples ................................................................... 290
Grant File Access ................................................................ 270
Advanced Coding for Field Rules .......................................... 290
Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Data and Settings. 272 Examples ................................................................... 290
Calyx® Point® Settings ....................................................... 272 Additional Examples .................................................... 291
Custom Forms .................................................................... 272 Advanced Coding for Triggers ............................................... 291
Contacts ............................................................................ 273 Examples ................................................................... 292
Import Public or Personal Contacts .............................. 273 Accessing and Updating Non-Field Data ....................... 293
Export Contacts ......................................................... 275 Index .............................................................................................. 295
Loan Files .......................................................................... 275
v
Chapter 1
Introduction
Welcome to the Installation and Administration Guide for Encompass Banker • Training Schedule
Edition. This guide contains installation, system setup, configuration, and The Training website contains detailed information on the programs and options
administration information. available to help you learn Encompass. You can watch video tutorials, sign up
NOTE: To access all of the features described in the guide, you must be logged for online classes and learn about onsite and custom class offerings.
in to Encompass as the admin user. • Technical Support Options
The Technical Support website contains a searchable database of how-to
articles and problem solutions, as well as options for contacting our support
Getting Help with Encompass team.
Many resources are available to help you learn and use Encompass. • Diagnostic Mode
The Encompass Help Menu The Diagnostic Mode – Just in Time option is in the Encompass Help menu for
admin users (and other authorized users provided with the required access
The Help menu at the top of your Encompass window contains options that take
rights via their persona). In addition, the Diagnostic Mode option available in
you directly to the information you need. Each option is described below.
previous versions of Encompass has been renamed to Diagnostic Mode –
• Encompass Help Entire Session.
The online help system provides comprehensive Encompass information, The Diagnostic Mode – Just in Time (JIT) option can be used to perform
including detailed descriptions of features and tools, step-by-step instructions, application logging in real time.
and tutorial videos. You can also open the online help by pressing the F1 key.
Clients can use this to diagnose issues, investigate how features are working,
• Tutorials and monitor activities in Encompass. Users can create a JIT log file with
The Video Tutorials page contains a selection of video tutorials that teach you pertinent application data and then send it to Ellie Mae’s Customer Support
to use Encompass features such as the Pipeline, eFolder, and Dashboard. team so they can analyze it and help diagnose issues or provide guidance on
Encompass usage. Once you click the Diagnostic Mode – Just In Time option,
• Glossary the following actions are provided:
The Glossary contains definitions of the terminology and features in • Start Logging – Click this button to start the logging process. (Once clicked,
Encompass. this button will change to Stop Logging. Click this button to stop the logging
• Guides & Documents process.)
The Guides & Documents contains the latest versions of Encompass • Open Encompass Log - Click this button to open the JIT log file.
documentation, including user guides, white papers, and links to quick reference • Open File Location – Click this file to open the directory where the JIT log
guides and video tutorials. file is located.
• Quick Reference Guides • Add Note – Click this button to enter a note that will be added to the log file.
The Quick Reference Guides are one-page, easy-to-follow workflows of This entry is recorded in real-time to assist you in diagnosing issues. For
common tasks and processes in Encompass. example, you could click Add Note and then enter a note such as Save Loan
File after changing address right before or after you perform the task.
Chapter 1: Introduction 1
• Clear Log- Click this button to clear the log (i.e., remove all data from the log) Field-Level Help in Encompass
without having to restart Encompass. Assuming the JIT Logger was
Field-level help automatically displays when you hover your mouse pointer over a
monitoring your system previously or if there were errors indicated in the log,
field on an input form. The help contains the field ID followed by the description.
clicking the Clear Log button gives you a blank log file to start logging with
(and the old entries are not included).
The HelpPad
It is very important to note the JIT log file is transferred manually to the Customer
The HelpPad allows you to capture field-level help in a separate HelpPad window.
Support team using various methods such as Bomgar, WebEx virtual meeting,
This is especially useful for fields that include detailed definitions or calculations.
or an MIS services/diagnostics site. These are the same methods that were
used with the data generated in Diagnostic Mode in previous versions of 1 To access the HelpPad, press the CTRL key on your keyboard and then click
Encompass and will continue to be used with the Diagnostic Mode – Just In a field on a form.
Time option. These log files may contain sensitive Personally Identifiable HelpPad opens with the selected field-level help displayed.
Information (PII). The PII information in these log files are masked in order to
keep this information (email addresses, phone numbers, and Social Security 2 Repeat step 1 to add more field descriptions to the HelpPad.
Numbers, passwords and date of birth) secure. Instead of plain text, this You can now view, print, copy, or save the information as needed.
information is displayed as a series of special characters.
• Genuine Channels are recorded in the JIT Logger log files. These logs To Disable Field-Level Help:
indicate system connectivity status and are created when a GCTrace is 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
added to your system registry (typically when Customer Support is helping
2 On the left panel, click Personal Settings, and then click My Profile.
you diagnose an issue).
3 Clear the Enable field-level help check box and click the Save icon.
• Feedback
Send your ideas, suggestions, or comments about the Ellie Mae Resource
Center to us.
• Ellie Mae Home Page
The Ellie Mae home page provides the latest company information as well as
links to the Ellie Mae Resource Center, our software, web, paperless, closing,
and compliance solutions.
• Release Notes
The Release Notes page includes links to both current and past release notes.
Chapter 1: Introduction 2
Chapter 2
Installing Encompass
This chapter describes Encompass installation steps. Before installing 4 When prompted, click Install to confirm that you want to install the items
Encompass, verify the system requirements described in the Product System required for the Encompass SmartClient.
Requirements and Compatibility Matrix for Encompass. Additional third-party
applications (such as Adobe Acrobat Reader DC) are installed by the Encompass
Installation Manager if the applications are not already on your computer.
NOTE: System requirements are subject to change as Ellie Mae updates the
software to accommodate new features and regulation requirements.
Installation
Before a user can log in to Encompass for the first time, the Encompass
SmartClient components must be installed. This is a one-time-only procedure
performed by a user logged on to the computer using a Microsoft ® Windows
account with “admin” privileges.
To Install SmartClient:
1 Log in to the computer using a Windows account with admin privileges. The application files are downloaded, and then the Installation Manager is
2 Click the following link to start the installation process. loaded.
http://www.elliemae.com/getencompass360
3 On the File Download - Security Warning window, click Run.
Chapter 2: Installing Encompass 3

5 If the Internet Explorer - Security Warning window displays, click Run. The 6 When the SmartClient Core Installation wizard opens, click Next.
Windows Installer displays a Preparing to install message and then the
Encompass Installation Manager is loaded.
The Encompass Installation Manager installs each required application and

displays the progress of the installation.
7 The Updating System window shows the progress of the installation.

8 When the installation of the SmartClient Core is complete, click Continue. 10 On the License Agreement window, click I accept the license agreement, and
then click Next.
9 When the Encompass SmartClient Installation wizard opens, click Next.

11 When the installation is complete, click Finish.
The SmartClient Installation Wizard and the Installation Manager will
automatically close.

Chapter 3
Logging In to Encompass
System Administrator Log In To Determine the Windows Server Name:
1 On the server machine, right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop, and
As the system administrator, you should log in as the admin user so that you have
then click Properties.
access to all functions. Use the Administrator password you created during
installation. 2 Click the Computer Name tab.
The server name is the value in the Full computer name field.
To Log In as the System Administrator:
1 Double-click the Encompass icon on your desktop. To Determine the IIS Server Name:
2 On the Encompass Log In window, enter the following: The IIS server name is the URL created when you installed the IIS server. If
Encompass is installed using the default options, the URL is:
• User ID: admin
https://<yourcompanydomain>/Encompass
• Password: [created during installation]
• Connection: Networked
• Server: [The name of your Encompass server] User Log In
After you log in as admin user, you will set up your organization and users (Refer
to Chapter 5, “Company/User Setup” and “Organizations/Users” on page 21.)
Log In Requirements
To enable your users to log in to Encompass, you must provide them with a:
• User ID
• Password
• Server Name
Log In to Encompass
The first time a user logs in to Encompass, the Encompass - Launcher opens. For
all following logins, the user will be taken directly to the Encompass Log In window
where the user will enter the Encompass User ID and Password provided by the
system administrator.
IMPORTANT: Before logging in for the first time, make sure the Encompass
administrator has provided the user with the SmartClient ID that is required for this
procedure.
3 Click OK.
Chapter 3: Logging In to Encompass 6

To Log In to Encompass 5 On the Encompass Log In window, enter your Encompass User ID
1 Double-click the Encompass icon on your desktop. and Password.
2 On the Encompass - Launcher, enter the SmartClient ID provided by your 6 If not already populated, type the server name or select it from the drop-down
system administrator. list.
3 The Auto Sign-On check box is selected by default. 7 When finished, click Log In.
• If the check box is selected, the Encompass - Launcher will not display on
future logins.
• If the check box is cleared, the Encompass360 - Launcher will display each
time you log in.
NOTE:If you need to log on to different Encompass environments, for example
test and production environments, use the Manage IDs button to add, delete,
or reorder the SmartClient IDs for the different Encompass environments that
are available for selection from the drop-down list. Make sure you clear the
Auto Sign-On check box so that the launcher displays each time you log on,
allowing you to select the SmartClient ID for the appropriate environment.
4 Click Login.
Chapter 3: Logging In to Encompass 7

Chapter 4
Configuration Guidelines
When you installed Encompass, default settings were created so your users could • Milestones - a step in the workflow that defines a set of tasks and the role
immediately begin to process and manage loans. However, you will likely want to assigned to complete the tasks. “Milestones” on page 31
modify the defaults or create new settings to meet your company’s needs. • Personas - definitions of the job duties in your company, including the allowed
When you plan your setup and configuration, there are two important areas to access to tasks, and tools. “Personas” on page 13
consider; the setup sequence and the configuration of your users as it affects their • Loan Folders - used to organize loan files into logical groups. “Loan Folders” on
access to loan files, data, and tasks. page 87
NOTE: Refer to Chapters 5 through 12 for information and detailed instructions • Users - the profiles for users who will log in to Encompass.
on using all of the system setup, configuration, and administration tools. “Organizations/Users” on page 21
• User Groups - define access to loan and contact data “Organizations/Users” on
page 21
Setup Sequence When you installed Encompass, default settings were created so your users could
Setting up your business environment involves the configuration of many immediately begin to process and manage loans. However, you will likely want to
interrelated components. Because of this, some components must be created modify the defaults or create new settings to meet your company’s needs.
before others. For example, when you create a user, you will assign a persona to
When you plan your setup and configuration, there are two important areas to
the user. If you haven't first created personas, you will not be able to finish creating
consider; the setup sequence and the configuration of your users as it affects their
the user. Encompass is delivered with default configuration data, including all the
access to loan files, data, and tasks.
components described below. You can use any default component, create your
own, or configure your system using a combination of both.
NOTE: There are many other components and configuration options that are not
directly related to or dependent on other components. However, as much as
Access to Loan Files and Data
possible, it is best to configure these options before you begin to originate and Several areas support your ability to control your users’ access to loan files and
process loans. loan-related data. These settings determine whether a user has read-only access,
read/write access, or full right access (read/write right and assignment right) to
The list below describes the recommended order for defining your workflow and
a loan.
users.
• Organizations - the hierarchy of your company and its branches. Your users are Organization Hierarchy
added to the appropriate branches. “Organizations/Users” on page 21 A user's position in the organization hierarchy determines their ability to access
• Personas - definitions of the job duties in your company, including the allowed the loans of other users.
access to tasks, and tools. “Personas” on page 13 • Users can access loans that they originate or loans that are assigned to them
IMPORTANT:At this stage only the names of personas are created so they can as a loan team member.
be used to create roles. After milestones are created, you will come back and • Users can access loans assigned to other users directly below them in the
complete the persona definitions, which include milestone-access settings. organization hierarchy. If permitted in their User Profile, users can also access
• Roles - the job function assigned to carry out the tasks at a specific milestone the loans of users at the same level in the hierarchy.
“Roles” on page 30 • Users cannot access loans assigned to users above them in the hierarchy, or
users in other branches of the hierarchy.
Chapter 4: Configuration Guidelines 8

Sample Hierarchy User Profile Settings
The following sample hierarchy shows a typical organizational structure for a Two settings in the User Profile control access to loan files.
company. Each organization within the company is represented by a folder. • Access to all loans in the same level - permits access to loans in the same folder
at the same level in the hierarchy, and then the access is set to either View Only
or Edit.
• Edit Subordinates' Loans - permits the user to edit loans assigned to
subordinates in the hierarchy.
User Groups
The following examples illustrate how a user’s position in the hierarchy User groups define access to loan and contact data.
determines file access rights. • Loan Access - access to loans and loan folders
• Users in Org A can access loans assigned to users in any folder below Org A, • Borrower Contacts - public access to borrower contacts
but not loans assigned to other users in the Org A folder.
• Loan Templates - access to public templates, such as Loan Programs and
Closing Cost templates
• Resources - access to public resources such as Custom Print Forms, and
Public Business Contact Groups
• Role List View - access to specified users in the Roles lists on milestone
worksheets, Pipeline searches, Dashboard views, and so on.
Business Rules
You can create business rules to define access to loan files and specific
• Users in Org B can access loans assigned to users in the folders below them
loan fields.
(Org C and Org D), but not loans assigned to other users in the Org B folder.
Access to Tasks
Whether or not a user can perform a specific task (such as originating a loan) is
controlled by the persona settings and the personas that are then assigned to
each user. Refer to “Setting Up Users” on page 25 for details on creating a user
profile and assigning a persona.
Loan Folders
• There are no folders below Org E in the hierarchy, so users in Org E cannot
You can also specify the type of tasks a user can perform within a specific loan
access loans assigned to any other users.
folder. For example, you can specify that loans cannot be originated in the Archive
folder. Refer to “Loan Folder Business Rule” on page 185 for details on defining
business rules that limit the loans that can be moved into a folder.
Chapter 4: Configuration Guidelines 9

Chapter 5
Company/User Setup
The remainder of this guide contains information and detailed instructions on To Enter Company Information:
setting up and administering Encompass Banker Edition. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
Your company information is entered when you register Encompass. Use the 2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Company
Company Information settings to edit the name and address information for your Information.
company. Use the Ellie Mae Network Company Password setting to change your
company password for the Ellie Mae Network. Use the Services Password
Management settings to set up login credentials for individual users ordering Ellie
Mae Network services.
Company Information
Use the Company Information tab to enter company information that displays on
reports and loan forms, and to create email signature that can be used in Status
Online templates.
Company Information Tab 3 On the Company Information tab, add or change information in the company
The Company Information is printed on reports and placed in loan forms as fields.
applicable. For example, when you originate a loan, the company fields on Page
3 of the 1003 application are filled with the information entered here. To Add DBA Names:
NOTE: The Company Information is applied to the organization at the top of your If your company does business under different company names, you can enter as
organization hierarchy. You can use this information for the lower-level many as four names in the DBA Name fields. You can select one of the DBA
organizations you create, or create information specific to each organization. names from drop-down lists on forms such as the 1003 Page 3 and the Affiliate
Refer to “Additional Setup Considerations” on page 22. Business Disclosure.
1 Type a name in the DBA Name field.
2 To add additional names, click the Add More button and then type a name in
the new DBA Name field.
Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 10

To Create a Company Email Signature: 7 When finished, click Save.
Use the Email Signature section to create a company email signature that
displays in email notifications for Status Online Updates. The signature is added
License Tab
to an email when content is populated from a template with a signature field. Licensing information is used when running compliance testing on a loan file. The
However, if a signature is configured in the My Profile setting in the Personal License and License Type in sections specify the lender type for your company,
Settings, the personal signature will be used instead. For additional information the home state where the company's main (or home) office is located, and the
about templates, refer to “Company Status Online” on page 235. type of licenses used by your company (or its branches) in one or more states.
1 In the Email Signature section, type the content that you want to display for the
To Enter License Information:
company signature in a Status Online Update email notification.
1 In the License section, select the Use Custom Lender Profile for ECS check
box to apply your company's theory of lending (including custom rules) to be
applied when running Encompass Compliance Service (ECS) tests on a loan
file.
NOTE: Before you can use the custom lender profile for ECS, a named
contact from your company must contact the Ellie Mae Client Care team to
complete a custom theory of lending questionnaire and identify any additional
setup requirements.
2 To insert an image, click the Image icon to open the Insert Image window, 2 Select a Lender Type from the list.
select a file, and then click Insert. 3 If your company is a depository institution, select the company's Home State
• To add an image to the Insert Image window, click the Add icon, browse to from the drop-down list.
the image, and then click Open. • The applicable laws of the home state are applied to the loan.
• To delete an image from the Insert Image window, select an image, and then 4 If your company does business in more than one state, select the All State
click the Delete icon. option from the list.
3 To insert a hyperlink, highlight the link text, click the Hyperlink Icon, and select • Or, if your company does business in just one state, select the state to display
an option: only the licenses for that state.
• To have the link open the WebCenter or Loan Center, select The 5 In the Select column, select each license type that applies to your company.
WebCenter/Loan Center option.
6 When you select a license, the Exempt check box displays. Select the check
• To have the link open a website, select General web address, and then box if you do not want the Encompass Compliance Service to apply any license
enter the URL for the website in the format http://www.websitename.com or compliance rules associated with that license in the property state.
• To have the link open the recipient's email application, select Email address, 7 If your company does business in Maryland or Kansas, select the appropriate
and then enter the email address that you want to display in the email To line. option for Statutory Election for first lien, subordinate lien, junior, closed-end,
4 To insert the signature of the Encompass user who is sending the update, click and open-end loans for subject properties in Maryland or Kansas.
the Insert icon, select the Signature option, and then click Insert. NOTE: For more information about the statutory election options, refer to the
5 To insert a commonly used field, click the Insert icon, select the Commonly “Statutory Elections” online help topic.
Used Field option, select a field from the list, and then click Insert. 8 If your organization utilizes Encompass Consumer Connect websites, type the
6 To insert any Encompass field, select the Other Field option: URL of the site you want to assign to the organization in the Site URL field, and
then click the Search icon (magnifying glass). Encompass Consumer Connect
• Type the field ID.
site URLs that match the URL entered by the administrator (either exact
• Or click the Lookup icon, select a form in the left panel, right-click a field in matches or partial matches) are listed in th Consumer Connect Site URL pop-
the left panel, and then click OK. up window. There you can search for additional sites or select a site to assign
to the organization.

• Alternatively, select the Use Parent Info check box to populate the URL for On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Ellie Mae Network
the Encompass Consumer Connect site associated with the parent Company Password.
organization to this field.
NOTE: If an Encompass Consumer Connect site is deleted, loan officers
assigned to that site must be reassigned to an active Encompass Consumer
Connect site. Otherwise, the borrower will see a 404: Site Not Found message
after clicking the link in the notification email they receive from their loan officer.
ATR/QM
Effective on applications on or after January 10, 2014, the Consumer Financial
Protection Bureau’s (CFPB) amendment to Regulation Z that implements
sections 1411, 1412, and 1414 of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and
Consumer Protection Act (Dodd-Frank Act) prohibits creditors from making most
residential mortgage loans against a closed end first or junior lien secured by a 9 Type the Old Password.
1-4 unit dwelling unless the creditor makes a reasonable, good faith determination 10 Type the New Password and then retype it in the Confirm Password field.
of the consumer's ability to repay the loan. In addition, the rule establishes certain
protections for creditors who make a “qualified mortgage”. The CFPB has also 11 Click the Save icon.
created specific exemptions and modifications to this Ability-to-Repay rule for
small creditors, community development lenders, and housing stabilization
programs. Services Password Management
To indicate your company qualifies as a small creditor or rural small creditor, select Use the Services Password Management setting to set up usernames and
Small Creditor or Rural Small Creditor from the drop-down list. passwords (or other applicable login credentials) for individual Encompass users
to use when ordering Ellie Mae Network services.
One of these options must be selected for the ATR/QM Eligibility checklist (in the
ATR/QM Management tool) to render eligibility results in its Small Creditor
Qualified Mortgage column. To Add a Services Password Account:
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
To indicate your company qualifies as an exempt creditor, select the option that
best describes your business from the Exempt Creditor drop-down list: community 2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Services
development financial institution, community housing development organization, Password Management.
down payment assistance provider, or nonprofit organization. 3 Click the New icon.
Ellie Mae Network Company Password 4 On the Account Details screen, select a Service Category from the
The Ellie Mae Network company password is created by the system administrator drop-down list.
during initial installation of Encompass and is used to prevent unauthorized 5 Select a service provider from the Provider Name drop-down list.
access to the Loan Mailbox and your electronic service providers. • This list contains service providers who are members of the Ellie Mae
Use the Ellie Mae Network Company Password feature to make subsequent Network. If there are no providers listed, you cannot set up a password
changes to the password. If you change the company password, communicate account using the service category you selected in step 4.
the new password to your users. They will be required to type the new password 6 Enter a description for the account.
the next time they access your electronic service providers or the Loan Mailbox.
7 Enter the login credentials that will be used to access the service (for example,
To Change Your Ellie Mae Network Company Password: the User Name, Login, Password, or TPO number).
On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. NOTE: If there are no fields available to enter login credentials, you cannot set up
a password account using the service provider you selected in step 5. Select a
different provider, and then enter the login credentials in the appropriate fields.

8 Click the Lookup icon to select the users who will use the login credentials to • Loan Processor (LP) - Coordinates people and information to construct and
access the service. finalize loans: uses tools such as forms, documents, and communication logs;
• Select a Search by option from the list, and then click to select a name from monitors own pipeline by tracking milestones and items requiring action.
the list. • Underwriter (UW) - Verifies loan accuracy, provides conditions to be met, and
• Select a user in the Enabled Users list, and then click the right arrow to
then verifies that conditions are met.
move the user to the Selected Users list. • Closer (CL) - Manages the closing process: completes and audits the closing
• Repeat these steps to add additional users to the Selected Users list.
information; orders closing documents; reviews, prints, and reorders returned
closing documents.
• When finished, click Select.
• Funder (FN) - Manages the funding process.
9 When finished, click Save.
• Secondary Marketing (SM) - Determines pricing strategies and
develops/implements loan programs.
Personas • Lock Desk (LD) - Receives and processes lock requests.

• Shipper (SH) - Assists with inventory control and provides input to secondary
Personas represent job functions in your company. Each persona defines access
marketing functions; ships loans to document custodians and the investor.
to functions, forms, and tools. One or more personas are assigned to each user,
depending on the job functions they perform in your company. • Manager (MG) - Manages the business: monitors the pipelines of loan team
members; manages the bottom line, such as resource assessment and
NOTE: To enable Encompass clients to have more control over who can access
management, and financial forecasting.
their company’s settings in Encompass Settings, administrators can grant all
personas access to their company’s administrative settings at a granular level. • Marketing (MK) Markets to contacts to generate leads. (Banker)
Options that correspond to each setting provided in the left panel of the • Post Closer (PC) - Confirms all documents are completed and generated.
Encompass Settings screen are provided on the Settings tab provided for each
• Servicer (SV) - Services the loan.
persona. Administrators can use this tab to grant the persona access to the
selected company settings. • Quality Control (QC) - Inspects loans for quality.
Add/edit/delete rights are granted for all settings. For the Personas setting only, • Accounting (AC) - Manages financial documents.
the administrator can choose to provide view-only access or complete • Archiver (AR) - Archives loan documents for the future retrieval.
(add/edit/delete) access.
• Super Administrator - Administers the system: maintains company,
NOTE: Encompass administrators must configure the desired access settings for organization, and user settings; maintains default system settings; has access
each persona. Non-administrator personas are not granted access to all settings to all system features and functions.
by default. If upgrading from an earlier version of Encompass, all existing access
• Administrator - Based on position in company, has access to various company
settings configured for the persona will be migrated to the new version of
settings.
Encompass accordingly.
For information about the Encompass Settings and add-on products that users
The preconfigured personas and their primary functions are described below. can access based on their persona, refer to the Persona Access to Encompass
• Loan Officer (LO) - Develops business and initiates loans: develops new client Settings guide.
relationships and manages relationships over time; initiates the loan process,
gathers basic client information, orders services for pre-qualification and pre- About Administration Personas
approval, and communicates with processor; monitors loans in the pipeline by All users with an Administrator persona have access to loan, contact, and user
tracking milestones and items requiring action. data for users in their own folder, and folders below them in the hierarchy.
• Loan Opener (OP) - Receives loans from the loan officer and then reviews and Encompass also ships with two administration personas that can be assigned to
further prepares them for the loan processor. users who will help with administration:
• Super Administrator
• Administrator (Global or Local depending on location in the hierarchy)

Refer to Appendix A, “Administration Personas” for detailed information. Access Tab
Defines whether a persona can access the Encompass client only or both desktop
To Create a Persona:
and mobile versions of Encompass. Also defines access to Analysis Tools.
2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Personas. Mobile Access
For use with Encompass LO Connect, use this tab to indicate the persona can
access the desktop Encompass client only or if they can access both the desktop
Encompass client only or if they can access both the desktop client and LO
Connect. Options available in the Access tab are:
• Microsoft Windows Encompass Client
• Both Microsoft Windows Encompass Client and Encompass Mobile in a web
browser (default selection)
Web View Access

Settings in this section define the persona's access to Analysis Tools. Select the
Enable Analysis Tool check box to enable the persona to access Analysis Tools.
Home Tab
Defines the default Home Page view and the persona's ability to configure Home
Page modules. Up to 12 modules can display on the user's Home Page at one
time.
3 In the Create a Persona section, click the New icon.

4 On the Create a Persona window, type a Persona Name and select a default
access option, and then click OK.
TIP: When selecting the default access option, you can create the new persona
with access granted to all features or access to no features. Select the option that
will save the most time when you define the persona's access. 1 In the Must Have column, select modules that must always display on the
users Home Page.
To Define Persona Access:
2 In the Show by Default column, select modules that display by default unless
1 In the left panel, select a persona. users reconfigure their Home Page layouts.
2 Select check boxes under each of the tabs to grant access to the functions NOTE: Modules that are selected as Must Have are automatically set to Show
and tools. by Default.
3 When finished, click the Save icon to save the persona.
3 In the Accessible column, select the modules that the persona is permitted to
add or remove from the Home Page.
NOTE: Modules that are selected to Show by Default are automatically
Accessible for personas who can add or remove modules.

4 Select Allow access to the Company's My Account module and pages to 6 The view at the top of the Pipeline Views list is the persona’s default view. Use
enable the persona to view company license information and company the up and down arrows to reposition the views.
transactions from the My Account module.
To Select All Loans or My Loans
Pipeline Tab 1 Select a loan folder, and then select a View option.
Defines whether a persona can view the Pipeline and Loan tabs, and what the
• If you do not select an option from the Loan Folder drop-down list, the custom
persona can see and do on the Pipeline tab.
view will be available to select when the persona is viewing files within any
• Select the check box at the top of the tab to give the persona access to the of their loan folders.
Pipeline and Loan tabs. If you give the persona access, complete the Pipeline • Select My Loans to display only loans where you are a loan team member.
View, Not Accessible Columns, and Pipeline Tasks sections.
• Select All Loans to display all loans that you have permission to view.
To Add or Remove Columns

1 To select one or more fields that will display as columns in the Pipeline view,
click the Edit icon.
2 To add a field, select the corresponding check box.
• To search for a field, type one or more characters and click Find. The first
occurrence of the characters in any column is found.
3 To remove a field, clear the check box.
4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have added all the columns required for the
default view, and then click OK.
• Use the up and down arrows to reposition the columns. After you click OK,
you can also reposition the columns by clicking and then dragging a column
to the desired location.
• Columns arranged from top to bottom on the list will display from left to right
Pipeline View on the Pipeline.
Create the default Pipeline view for the persona by configuring the columns that
display on the Pipeline, the order in which they appear, the sorting order for the To Change Column Order:
loan entries, and by applying search filters to the Pipeline data.
• Click and then drag a column to the desired location.
1 In the Pipeline Views section, click the New icon.
- OR -
2 Select Create a new, empty Pipeline view.
1 Click the Edit icon, and then select a column name in the list.
NOTE: Select Create using an existing Pipeline View to copy the settings
2 Click the up arrow or down arrow in the upper-right corner to move the
from an existing view and then follow the steps below to customize and save it
column up or down in the list.
as a new view. Select a Persona and then select the View to copy. Only
existing views for the selected persona are available to copy. • The column at the top of the list displays on the far left of the table. The
remaining columns display from left to right according to their list order.
3 Type a name for the custom Pipeline view.
3 Click OK.
4 Select loans, configure columns, sort data, and set search filters, as described
below.
To Sort Data:
5 When finished, click OK.
1 To sort the data in a column, click a column header to display data in ascending
order based on the information in the column.

2 Alternately click the header to sort the data in descending or ascending order. • To add more than one field at a time, select a field and then click Add. Repeat
• Example: Click the Loan Amount column to display loans with the lowest
this process for any additional fields. When finished, click OK.
amounts at the top of the Pipeline and loans with the highest amounts at the • The selected fields display in the Not Accessible Columns list.
bottom. Click the header again to display the highest amounts at the top. NOTE: The same field cannot be added to both the Pipeline View and Not
• By default, loans are sorted in ascending order based on the information in Accessible Columns at the same time.
the selected column.
4 To make a field accessible again, select the field on the list, and then click the
NOTE: You can sort loans based on two levels of loan data. For example, you can Delete icon.
sort loans based on the loan amount and the last finished milestone. First, click
NOTE: The selections for the Pipeline columns also apply to the columns
the Loan Amount column header to sort by ascending loan amount. Then, click
accessible on the Trades, Contacts, Dashboard, and Reports tabs.
the Last Finished Milestone column header. The loans are sorted by last
finished milestone, and the loans within each milestone group are sorted in
ascending order by loan amount. Pipeline Tasks
Select the check boxes for each Pipeline task the persona is allowed to perform.
To Apply Search Filters: • For the Duplicate Loans option, a Loan Duplication Templates window lets you
1 To apply a search filter to the Pipeline data, click Advanced Search. select the templates the persona can access, and select a check box to require
2 On the Advanced Search window, click the New icon. the Persona to use one of the selected templates when creating duplicate loans.
3 On the Add/Edit Search Filter window, click the Find icon. • For the Move Loans option, a Select Loan Folders window lets you elect the
loan folders to and from which the persona can move loans.
4 On the Select Field window, double-click to select a field from the list.
• For the Import Loans option, a Select Options window lets you select the
• Or, type one or more characters and click Find. The first occurrence of the sources from which the persona can import.
characters in any column is found.
• For the Manage Pipeline Services option, a Pipeline Services Category
5 Select an Operator, enter (or select) a Value, and then click OK. window lets you select the export options available to the persona.
• The Operator and Value define how the field will be used to search for loans.
For example: Field ID= 1109 (Loan Amount), Operator = Greater than, Value Loan Tab
= 250000. Defines access to Milestone/Workflow Management features, miscellaneous
6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add more filters. Other tasks, and Print tasks.
NOTE: You can use parentheses to control the order in which multiple filters Milestone/Workflow Management - Select tasks that can be carried out as loans
are evaluated. Click Parentheses, select the filters to group, click the New are processed. For each task you select, a window opens and allows you to select
icon, and then click OK. the milestones at which the persona can carry out the task.
7 Click Apply. Itemization Fee Management - Select the check boxes in this section to grant
access to specific fee attributes on the 2015 Itemization input form, such as fee
Not Accessible Columns descriptions and amounts, along with the Borrower can shop for and Borrower did
shop for indicators. Personas must be provided with the required access rights via
Select the columns that the persona cannot add to the Pipeline.
these settings in order to edit these fee attributes. For example, to enable a
1 To make a column inaccessible to the persona, click the New icon. persona to enter a fee in the Borrower column on the 2015 Itemization, the
2 On the Select Field window, select a field from the list, and click OK. administrator must select the Borrower amount only check box for the persona.
By selecting this check box, you authorize users assigned to the selected persona
• To search for a field, type one or more characters in the Find field, and then to enter and edit fees in the Borrower column.
click Find. The first occurrence of the characters in any column is found.
Continue clicking Find to view additional occurrences. • The Fee Management Persona Overwrite options will continue to be provided in
the separate Itemization Fee Management setting. By default, when users are
3 Continue selecting fields until you have added all the inaccessible fields. entering fee descriptions on the 2015 Itemization they must select fees (i.e., fee

descriptions) from the predefined drop-down list. However, administrators can Closing Docs - Select tasks that can be carried out during the loan's Closing
use the Persona Overwrite tab to give permission (based on persona) to users process, including permission to order closing documents, rearranging closing
to manually enter their own fee descriptions or overwrite existing fee documents stacking orders, and the option to select Closing Doc Plan Codes and
descriptions in these fields. You can grant this permission for specific sections Closing Doc Stacking Templates when ordering closing documents.
of the forms or for 2015 Itemization sections 800 through 1300.
NOTE: The options provided in the Closing Docs section are determined by your
• The Itemization Fee Management settings impact the following Persona company's Encompass Docs Solution license. The View Closing Document Data,
Overwrite settings: Manage Closing Plan Codes, and Manage Closing Stacking Templates options
• If persona access has not been granted via the Persona Overwrite settings are provided only for customers licensed to order closing documents using the
nor the Itemization Fee Management settings in the Personas setting, the Encompass Docs Solution.
persona will not be able to edit the fee description.
Manage Service Providers List
• If persona access has only been granted via the Persona Overwrite settings,
the persona cannot edit the description at all since they have not been Use the Manage Service Providers List setting to control the persona's ability
granted persona access to the field in the Itemization Fee Management to search for a service provider or add and select a service provider of their
settings in the Personas setting. choice when ordering a service in Encompass.
• If the persona has only been granted access to the Fee Description option 1 Click the Manage Service Providers List link.
via the Itemization Fee Management settings in the Personas setting, the • Select All to select all the service providers listed in Categories list. By
persona can select a value for the fee description from the drop-down list. default, all service providers are selected. Authorized personas will be able
• If the persona has been granted access to the Fee Description option via to search for and add and select a service provider of their choice when
the Itemization Fee Management settings in the Personas setting and been ordering services.
granted access via the Persona Overwrite settings, the persona can choose NOTE:For the Appraisal service, you can also use the Appraisal Order
a value from the drop-down or enter their own description (if the Apply to Management setting to control the persona's ability to search for a service
Itemization check box in the Itemization Fee Management setting has been provider and manage the providers that are available for the persona to
selected). order from. Note that the Appraisal Order Management settings override
NOTE: When the Templates Ignore Fee Mgmt Persona/Biz Rules setting in the settings you configure in the Manage Service Providers List. For
the Encompass Admin Tools is enabled, applicable fee data in public Loan example, if the Appraisal check box in the Manage Service Providers list
Program, Closing Cost, and Data templates will overwrite existing Itemization is not selected, a user with the selected persona will still be able to search
fee attributes entered by these authorized personas when the template is for, add, or select an appraiser if the administrator has granted them
applied to the loan file. For more information, refer to the Settings Manager permission to do so using the Appraisal Order Management setting.
topic in the Encompass Admin Tools online help. • Select Custom, and then clear a check box to prevent the persona from
Print - Select the Print Button check box to grant access to the Print icon from searching for a service provider or adding and selecting their own service
within a loan file. Below this check box you can set access to the Standard Forms provider when ordering a service. For example, to configure Encompass
tab, Custom Forms tab, and the Preview button, and the Print to File option. These so that only company-approved Title and Closing service providers are
settings also apply to the Secure Forms Transfer feature. available to select when the user is ordering title and closing, clear Title &
Closing. The user will not be able to search for nor add and select their
Other- Establish the persona's ability to manage borrower, apply loan templates own Title and Closing service providers.
and manage the service providers list (for details, refer to the Manage Service
NOTE:For the Appraisal service, you can also use the Appraisal Order
Providers List section below).
Management setting to control the persona's ability to search for a service
provider and manage the providers that are available for the persona to
order from. Note that the Appraisal Order Management settings override
the settings you configure in the Manage Service Providers List. For
example, if the Appraisal check box in the Manage Service Providers list

is not selected, a user with the selected persona will still be able to search • Fee Variance Worksheet- Select the Fee Variance Worksheet check box to
for, add, or select an appraiser if the administrator has granted them grant the persona write access to the Fee Variance Worksheet. To prevent a
permission to do so using the Appraisal Order Management setting. persona from accessing specific fields on this worksheet, set up a Persona
Access to Fields business rule or rules.
• Select None to clear all the check boxes in the Categories list. Personas
will not be permitted to search for a service provider nor add and select a • The Cure Variance check box controls access to the following features.
service provider of their choice when ordering a service. When the check box is cleared, these features will be inactive (grayed out)
NOTE:For the Appraisal service, you can also use the Appraisal Order for the persona.
Management setting to control the persona's ability to search for a service • All of the fields in the Tolerance Cure section of the Fee Variance
provider and manage the providers that are available for the persona to Worksheet, including the Lock icon for the Required Cure Amount field.
order from. Note that the Appraisal Order Management settings override • All of the fields in the Tolerance Cure section of the Closing Disclosure Page
the settings you configure in the Manage Service Providers List. For 1, including the Lock icon for the Required Cure Amount field.
example, even though the Appraisal check box in the Manage Service
Providers list is not selected, a user with the selected persona will still be • The Cure Variance button on the Good Faith Fee Variance Violated alert
able to search for, add, or select an appraiser if the administrator has only. When the Good Faith Fee Variance Violated alert is triggered and a
granted them permission to do so using the Appraisal Order Management user views the alert details, authorized users can click the Cure Variance
setting. button and correct the fees to address the violation. Select this check box
to grant the persona access to the alert's Cure Variance button.
2 Click OK.
• TQL Services - To allow the persona to use the TQL Services tool, select
Forms/Tools Tab investors, publish documents on the TQL Portal, add comments in the tool,
add comments to fraud reports and alerts, and comments to compliance
Define access to the options on the Forms and Tools tabs from within a loan file.
reports.
• TPO Information - To allow the persona to view and update information in the • Collateral Tracking - To allow the persona to use the Collateral Tracking tool to
TPO Information tool, select the TPO Information check box. track and captures date and information for the Final Docs (Recorded Deed of
NOTE: All the check boxes under the TPO Information option are selected by Trust (DOT)/Mortgage and the original/paper copy of the Final Title Policy).
default indicating that the persona has access to all the External Company • LO Comp Tool - To allow the persona to use the LO Compensation tool to view
Setup settings via the View Details button in the TPO Information tool. and modify the loan originator compensation being documented in the loan file,
• Clear the check box corresponding to the settings tab that you do not want select the LO Comp Tool check box.
the persona to access. NOTE: The Base Plan fields in the tool are editable by default. You may create
• File Contacts - To allow the persona to grant write access to loan team a field access business rule to prevent users from editing these fields.
members, select the Grant Write Access to Loan Team Members check box. • When the LO Comp Tool check box is selected, the Broker Comp and
On the Grant Write Access window, select the roles that the persona can grant Loan Officer Comp check boxes are selected by default. When selected,
access to. the persona can view and edit compensation details for lenders or third party
• Disclosure Tracking - Select the Change disclosure Information check box to originators/brokers (Broker Comp) and loan officers (Loan Officer Comp). To
grant a user access rights to the following fields on the Disclosure Tracking tool: hide a section in the tool, clear the appropriate check box.
• Compliance Timeline section: Application Date, Estimated Closing Date
eFolder Tab
• Other Tracking section: Affiliated Business Disclosure Provided, CHARM
Defines each persona's access to the features in the Encompass eFolder.
Booklet Provided n HELOC Brochure Provided n 1st Appraisal Provided,
Subsequent Appraisal Provided, AVM Provided, Home Counseling • Select the check box at the top of the tab to give the persona access to the
Disclosure Provided, High Cost Disclosure eFolder's Documents tab. If you give the persona access, complete the General,
Unassigned Files (File Manager), Unprotected Documents, Protected
NOTE: If this option is not selected, these fields will be inactive (grayed out)
Documents, and Conditions sections.
for the persona.

• General - Select the check boxes to allow a persona to add, delete, duplicate, • In the Reports section, select the Allow loan files to be opened for data
request, or manage access to documents; send borrowers eDisclosure (slower performance) check box to enable the option to use fields from the
Agreements that must be accepted before borrowers can receive documents Reporting Database or to use fields that are not included in the Reporting
electronically; enter custom names for documents; request or retrieve Ellie Mae Database when running a report. If you do select this check box and then the
Network services, generate, send, and retrieve eDisclosure packages; send Use fields from the Reporting Database for better performance option is not
files to borrowers and partners; archive documents; and print fax cover sheets. selected when running the report, reports will rely on field data in individual loan
• Unassigned Files (File Manager) - Select the check boxes to allow users to
files instead. Since the loan files need to be opened in order to acquire the field
attach, edit, merge, split, delete, add notes to, and enable the auto assign data, the time it takes to run reports may increase.
function for files in the File Manager, as well as to allow users to suggest or
approve files to be automatically assigned to specified eFolder documents.
Settings Tab
Selecting the Edit File check box also enables the Convert button in the File Defines access to the tasks and options in the Settings tool.
Manager, which allows a user to convert an unassigned native-format file to an Company Settings
image file if the image conversion option is selected in the eFolder Setup setting.
Authorized users can grant all personas access to their company’s administrative
• Unprotected Documents - Select the check boxes to allow users to edit or
settings at a granular level to enable Encompass users to have more control over
delete unprotected documents. If you select the Edit check box, select or clear who can access the company settings in Encompass Settings. Options that
the additional selections as needed. Selecting the Edit check box also enables correspond to each setting provided in the left panel of the Encompass Settings
the Convert button on the Document Details and File Manager windows, which screen are listed on the Settings tab provided for each persona. Authorized users
allows a user to convert an unprotected native-format file to an image file if the may use this tab to grant the selected persona access to the desired company
image conversion option is selected in the eFolder Setup setting. settings.
• Protected Documents - Select the check boxes to allow users to edit or delete
protected documents. If you select the Edit check box, select or clear the
additional selections as needed. Selecting the Edit check box also enables the
Convert button on the Document Details and File Manager windows, which
allows a user to convert a protected native-format file to an image file if the
image conversion option is selected in the eFolder Setup setting.
• Conditions - Select the conditions tabs in the eFolder that are accessible by the
persona and the tasks the persona can perform on each tab; and provide access
to the eFolder’s History tab.
Trades/Contacts/Dashboard/Reports Tab
Defines access to features and tasks on the Trades, Contacts, Dashboard, and
Reports tabs. All other features on the Contacts tab (Calendar, Tasks, Campaigns,
and Lead Center) are available to all personas. Access to Public Campaign
When persona access is granted, complete add/edit/delete rights are granted for
Templates is defined on the Resources tab on the User Groups settings screen.
the setting. For the Personas setting only, the authorized user can choose to
• For Encompass 20.1 and later in the Trades section, if Access to Trades tab is provide view-only access or full add/edit/delete access.
selected, users will only have read only access to trades. If Edit Trades is
NOTE: Non-Administrator personas are not granted access to all company
selected, users will have the ability to create and make changes to trades.
settings by default. Encompass administrators must configure the desired access
NOTE: Existing Personas with the Access to Trades Tab setting selected will settings for each persona. If upgrading from an earlier version of Encompass, all
automatically have the Edit Trades setting selected. existing access settings configured for the persona will be migrated accordingly.
• In the Contacts section, click the Originate Loan/Order Credit/Product and The main administrator of the Encompass environment assigned with the admin
Pricing link, clear the Order Credit check box, and click OK to prevent users user ID will continue to be the only user with complete access to all Encompass
from ordering credit from the Borrower Contacts screen and ensure compliance settings.
with ECOA (Equal Credit Opportunity Act) and credit regulations.

Personal Settings • TPO Contacts - enables access to the Third Party Originator Contacts setting in
the Encompass Settings> External Company Setup> Company Details section.
• The My Profile option enables you to select which profile fields the persona can
change. • Use the options within this section to define the level of access for the
persona within the Third Party Originator Contacts setting, such as the ability
• The Default File Contacts check box grants access to the Default File Contacts
to create/edit, export, and delete TPO contacts. Select the Sales Rep check
tool where you can enter your most commonly used service providers. When
box to assign Sales Rep privileges to the persona. Users indicated as the
you originate a loan, the default providers are copied to the appropriate loan
Sales Rep are displayed for selection in the Add Sales Rep window available
forms and to the File Contacts tool for the loan.
in:
• The Grant File Access check box grants access to the Grant File Access tool
• Encompass Settings > External Company Setup > Company Details >
where you can grant or revoke loan file access rights. By default, the ability to
Company Details window > Basic Info tab
access loans is based on settings in your user profile, your position in the
organization hierarchy, and the access granted when you are a member of a • Encompass Settings > External Company Setup > Company Details >
loan team. For more information, see Organizations/Users. Company Details window > Sales Reps / AE tab
Other • Encompass Settings > External Company Setup> Company Details >
Third Party Originator Contacts > TPO Contact Details window > TPO
• The Access to Input Form Builder option grants access to the Input Form Builder Sales Rep Information section
tool.
• TPO Settings - enables and defines access to the TPO Settings in Encompass
• The Diagnostic Mode option enables a user to access and enable diagnostic Settings > External Company Setup
mode from the Encompass Help menu.
• TPO Fees - enables and defines access to the TPO Fees setting in Encompass
External Settings Tab Settings > External Company Setup
Defines access to the External Company Setup settings in Encompass Settings. • TPO Reassignment - enables and defines access to the TPO Reassignment
When you select the Company Details check box, all check boxes in this tab are settings in Encompass Settings > External Company Setup
selected, enabling the persona to access all the settings within the External • TPO Custom Fields - enables and defines access to the TPO Custom Fields
Company Setup setting. Clear each check box to limit persona access to the settings in Encompass Settings > External Company Setup
corresponding external company setup setting. • All TPO Contact Information - enables and defines access to the All TPO
• Create Organizations - enables the persona to create TPO companies and Contact Information settings in Encompass Settings > External Company Setup
branches • TPO Global Lender Contacts - enables and defines access to the TPO Global
• Delete Organizations - enables the persona to delete TPO companies and Lender Contacts setting in Encompass Settings>External Company Setup
branches • TPO WebCenter Document List Settings - enables and defines access to the
• Export Organizations - enables the persona to export TPO companies and TPO WebCenter Docs setting in Encompass Settings > External Company
branches Setup
• Create/Edit Banks - enables the persona to create and edit banks • TPO Connect Site Management - enables and defines access to the TPO
• Delete Banks - enables the persona to delete banks.
Connect Site Management setting in Encompass Settings>External Company
Setup
• TPO Organization Settings - enables access to the Company Details window in
• TPO Disclosure Settings - enables persona to access the TPO Disclosure
the Encompass Settings> External Company Setup> Company Details section.
Settings tool in Encompass Settings > External Company Setup. Here
• Use the options within this section to enable/disable access to individual tabs authorized users can select the Creditor Override on Statement of Denial
within the Company Details window. You can enable access to selected tabs check box to enable Encompass to automatically populate their company's
within the Company Details window and restrict access to others, if needed. contact information (as entered in the Company Information setting) to the
You can also define the persona's editing and viewing rights by selecting the Creditor Contact Information section of the Statement of Denial input form only
Edit check boxes for each tab. for loan files in the Correspondent loan channel with non-delegated
underwriting.

• Investor Connect Settings - Enables the persona to access and mange the • The Custom Forms section lists each custom form in Encompass LO Connect
options in the External Company Setup > Investor Connect Settings screen. that has been built using the Encompass Web Input Form Builder. Select each
This enables administrators to delegate tasks to other users so they can form that the persona can access.
manage Investor Connect settings without having to assign a new Super • In the Custom Tools section, the custom tools in Encompass LO Connect that
Administrator persona to the user. have been built using the Encompass Web Input Form Builder are listed. Select
• Global Company/User Delegation Access - When the administrator selects this each tool that the persona can access.
option for a persona, users assigned with that persona can then access and edit • In the Global Custom Tools section, the global custom tools in Encompass LO
the settings in External Company Setup > Company Details settings. This Connect that have been set up in the Encompass Web Input Form Builder are
enables administrators to delegate tasks to other users so they can manage listed. Select each global custom tool that the persona can access.
TPO company settings without having to assign a new Super Administrator
persona to the user or classifying the user as a Sales Rep or Account Executive Based on these persona settings in Encompass, the custom forms and custom
for every TPO company that is managed in the External Company Setup tools that the administrator has granted access to will display in the left navigation
settings. menu in Encompass LO Connect. Any custom forms or custom tools that the
persona does not have access to will not display in the left navigation menu. Any
TPO Connect custom forms or custom tools that the persona does not have access to will not
display in the left navigation menu.
Defines user access to the TPO Connect Administration settings for
TPO Connect. Use the TPO Connect Site Settings options to select the features
and actions to provide to TPOs accessing and using your company's
TPO Connect website. Organizations/Users
Use the Organization/Users setting to establish and maintain a hierarchy of your
Consumer Connect company and its branches as well as the users within each branch.
Defines user access to Encompass Consumer Connect administration tools and
website content. Organization Hierarchy
• WebAdmin - Grants administrator access to the persona. Permissions include The organization hierarchy is used to establish the relationships between users in
full access to the administration portal and website builder features and your company. The hierarchy is depicted as a series of related folders that
functions. typically represent organizations, departments, branch offices, or job functions
(such as loan processor). Each folder contains the users who work at that level in
• WebContent - Grants partial access to the persona. Permissions include
the hierarchy.
access to the website builder and access to the Manage Sites page of the
administration portal. Users cannot create or delete websites and cannot access
other pages in the administration portal.
LO Connect
Use the LO Connect settings to configure user access to custom forms and
custom tools in Encompass LO Connect that have been built using the
Encompass Web Input Form Builder. Use the Custom Forms, Custom Tools, and
Global Custom Tools sections of this tab to control the custom forms, custom tools
and global custom tools that users can access in Encompass LO Connect.
Although the hierarchy typically matches the structure of your business, it is not
NOTE: By default, no personas (with the exception of the Super Administrator) an organizational chart. The hierarchy's main function is to determine which users
will have access to the custom forms, tools, and global custom tools. In order for will have default access to other users' loan files.
Encompass LO Connect users to have access to these items, the administrator
Even if your company does not have other organizations or branch offices, you
must update their persona settings to grant them access to these items.
will probably want to create a hierarchy to control your users' access to each
other's loans. Access includes viewing and editing rights, as well as the ability to
run reports and display loan file data on the dashboard.

Additional Setup Considerations New organizations are added below the selected folder.
The primary consideration when setting up the organization hierarchy is your
users’ need to access loan files. Additional considerations are:
• Different Address Information - Each branch can have its own address and
contact information, or use the parent organization’s information. The name and
address is printed on reports and used on loan forms as applicable, such as
Page 3 of the 1003 application. When a user originates a loan, the information
from the organization in which the user is a member is applied.
• Different Organization Code - Each organization can have its own
organization code. The code is used by the Auto Loan Numbering feature. If
specified in the Auto Loan Numbering configuration, the organization code is
incorporated at the beginning of the loan number and indicates the organization
in which the loan was originated.
To Add an Organization:
2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click
Organization/Users.
3 Select an organization folder, and then click the New icon. You may need to
expand the organization hierarchy to locate the desired folder.
4 On the Organization Details window, type the Organization

and Description.
5 In the Organization Information section:
• Select the Use Parent Info check box to use the information from the
organization above this one. If you select the check box, the remaining fields
in this section are filled with the parent's information.
• Type a Code if you want the Auto Loan Numbering feature to include an
organization code at the beginning of assigned loan numbers.
• Type name and contact information, or click Select to open the Business
Contacts window and select from the list of organizations you have already
created.
6 In the NMLS section, enter the organization's Nationwide Mortgage Licensing
System (NMLS) license number.
• Select the Use Parent Info check box to use the NMLS license number
assigned to the organization above this one.
7 In the MERS MIN section, enter the organization's seven-digit Organization
ID assigned by the Mortgage Electronic Registration System (MERS).

• Select the Use Parent Info check box to use the MERS Organization • If you have more than one organization in your Organization//Users folder
ID assigned to the organization above this one. hierarchy, and you do not select the License section's Use Parent Info check
NOTE: To apply this organization-specific MERS MIN numbering only to box on the topmost organization, repeat these steps for each applicable
loans started by one of this organization's loan team members, use the Auto organization.
MERS MIN Numbering setting to enable the feature. 16 For the ATR/QM section:
8 In the Legal Entity Identifier section: • Using the Small Creditor indicator, you can indicate if your organization is a
small creditor or rural small creditor. If you select Small Creditor, Encompass
• Click the Add icon to add an LEI. When the HMDA Profile pop-up window
assumes the organization is a “small creditor” as defined under 12 CFR §§
opens, select a profile and then click OK.
1026.35(b)(2)(iii)(B) and (C);§ 1026.43(e)(5)(i)(D). If the administrator
• If the Use Parent Info check box is selected, clear the check box and then selects Rural Small Creditor, Encompass assumes the organization is a
click the Add icon to select a different LEI. “small creditor” as defined under 12 CFR §§ 1026.35(b)(2)(iii)(A), (B) and
• Click the View icon to view LEI information. (C); 1026.43(f).
• Click the Edit icon to edit the LEI information. • To indicate your organization qualifies as a small creditor or rural small
creditor, select Small CreditorClosed or Rural Small CreditorClosed
9 By default, license information is inherited from the organization directly above
from the drop-down list.
in the hierarchy. To edit the license information, clear the Use Parent Info
check box, and then complete steps 9-13. NOTE: One of these options must be selected for the ATR/QM Eligibility
checklist (in the ATR/QM Management tool) to render eligibility results in its
10 In the License section, select Use Custom Lender Profile for ECS to apply Small Creditor Qualified Mortgage column.
your company's theory of lending (including custom rules) to be applied when
running Encompass Compliance Service (ECS) tests on a loan file. • To indicate your company qualifies as an exempt creditor, select the option
that best describes your business from the Exempt Creditor drop-down list:
NOTE: Before you can use the custom lender profile for ECS, a named
community development financial institution, community housing
contact from your company must contact the Ellie Mae Client Care team to
development organization, down payment assistance provider, or non-profit
complete a custom theory of lending questionnaire and identify any additional
organization.
setup requirements.
• The CFPB created specific exemptions and modifications to their Ability-
11 Select a Lender Type from the list. to-Repay rule for community development lenders and housing
12 If your company is a depository institution, select the company's Home State stabilization programs. Using the Exempt Creditor indicator here, you can
from the drop-down list. indicate if your company is a community development financial institution,
• The applicable laws of the home state are applied to the loan.
community housing development organization, down payment assistance
provider, or nonprofit organization and thereby qualifies for exemption from
13 If your company does business in more than one state, select the All State the ATR/QM rule.
option from the list.
NOTE: You also can make both of these ATR/QM small creditor indications
• Or, if your company does business in just one state, select the state to display on the License tab on the Company Information setting in Encompass
only the licenses for that state. Settings, however this is not required.
14 In the Select column, select each license type that applies to your company. 17 If your company does business in Maryland or Kansas, select the appropriate
15 When you select a license, the Exempt check box displays. Select the check option for Statutory Election for first lien, subordinate lien, junior, closed-end,
box if you do not want the Encompass Compliance Service to apply any license and open-end loans for subject properties in Maryland or Kansas.
or compliance rules associated with that license in the property state. NOTE: For more information about the statutory election options, refer to the
• Enter the license number and other information about the license. To enter “Statutory Elections” online help topic.
data in a license table column (or to select a value to populate to a column 18 If the organization utilizes Encompass Consumer Connect websites, type the
from the drop-down list or calendars provided), double-click the desired cell URL of the site you want to assign to the organization in the Site URL field, and
in the column. A text entry field, drop-down list, or date field will display. then click the Search icon (magnifying glass). Encompass Consumer Connect
site URLs that match the URL entered by the administrator (either exact

matches or partial matches) are listed in the Consumer Connect Site URL pop- organizational hierarchy. If you select this check box without first assigning a
up window. There you can search for additional sites or select a site to assign plan to the parent company or branch, you will receive a warning message
to the organization. stating that there is currently no plan to assign, but any plans that are
• Alternatively, select the Use Parent Info check box to populate the URL for
assigned to the parent company or branch in the future will then be applied
the Encompass Consumer Connect site associated with the parent to the child company or branch.
organization to this field. • In the Details section, you can change the Start Date of the plan if necessary.
NOTE: If an Encompass Consumer Connect site is deleted, loan officers By default, Encompass sets the Start Date to one day after the compensation
assigned to that site must be reassigned to an active Encompass Consumer plan was assigned to the organization (i.e., the “next day”).
Connect site. Otherwise, the borrower will see a 404: Site Not Found message • If there are no other plans assigned to the user, if the Start Date occurs
after clicking the link in the notification email they receive from their loan officer. today (i.e., on the “current day”) or on any other day prior to today, it cannot
19 In the Assigned Compensation Plans section: be changed. This helps ensure the accuracy of originator compensation
audit reports
• After you have created and activated a compensation plan, you can assign
the plan to different organizations. Click the New icon. • If the plan has not started yet, you can change the Start Date to today or
any day going forward from today.
• If another plan is already in effect, the new plan must start the next day to
ensure that two plans are not being applied to the originator on the same
day.
NOTE:The Earliest Change Date is calculated based on the Start Date and
Minimum Term # Days fields. After the plan is activated (i.e., when the plan
is started), if you try to assign a new compensation plan before the
minimum term of days is reached, a warning message displays indicating
that the start date for the new plan occurs prior to the “earliest change date”
(i.e., prior to the minimum term of days being reached). You can then
continue to add a plan or cancel the operation. After the Earliest Change
Date is reached, the warning message will no longer be triggered.
• Click Select.
• The compensation plan is now listed in the Assigned Compensation Plans
section. Click the plan to view its details in the LO Comp Plan section. You
can change the Start Date of the plan if necessary However, if the current
Start Date occurs in the past, it cannot be changed.
NOTE: After you assign a plan, you may assign additional plans as needed.
If you assign a plan with a start date that occurs prior to the Minimum Term #
Days (i.e., the earliest change date), a warning message displays that states
that you are assigning a plan prior to the earliest change date. You can
cancel this operation or proceed with adding the plan. The end date for the
current plan will be updated to one day prior to the start date of the second
• In the LO Compensation Plans window, click the compensation plan to apply plan you just added.
to the organization. 20 In the Branch Settings for Overnight Rate Protection, specify time and dollar
NOTE: You can assign a compensation plan to a company as well as limits for Overnight Rate Protection (ONRP) by branch, if applicable.
branches within the company. With a company or branch compensation plan NOTE: The Branch Settings for Overnight Rate Protection cannot be edited
in place, you can then select the Use Parent Info check box to assign the on the Administration folder's Organization Details screen.
parent company or branch plan to a child company or branch within the

• Select Use Parent Info to inherit the branch ONRP settings from the parent • Select whether you want the ONRP coverage to be continuous or a specific
entity. time period.
NOTE: If selected, the branch ONRP settings cannot be edited. • The ONRP Start Time is set to the Lock Desk End Time and cannot be
edited.
• Click View/Edit Settings. The Branch Settings for ONRP pop-up window
displays. • The ONRP End Time cannot be past the Lock Desk Start Time.
• If Weekend/Holiday Coverage is selected, the ONRP End Time must be
set to A.M.
• If the Lock Desk is set for 24 hours, the ONRP Start Time is blank and the
ONRP End Time is disabled for all ONRP settings (if central Lock Desk is
set) or the corresponding ONRP settings (if Lock Desk is set by channel).
For Saturday and Sunday, the Saturday/Sunday Hours check box is also
disabled.
• If you select Continuous Coverage:
• The ONRP End Time is set to the Lock Desk Start Time and cannot be
edited.
• Saturday Hours, Sunday Hours, and Weekend/Holiday Coverage are
disabled.
• If you select Specify Time:
• Enter the ONRP End Time. For Saturday and Sunday, you must select
Saturday Hours and/or Sunday Hours first.
• The Saturday/Sunday Hours fields are available if enabled in Lock Desk
Hours.
• Select whether you want Weekend/Holiday Coverage.
• If Saturday Hours and/or Sunday Hours is selected in Lock Desk Hours,
the Weekend/Holiday Coverage check box is disabled.
• Select whether you want No Maximum Limit or not.
• If selected, the ONRP Dollar Limit $ and ONRP Tolerance % are blank
and cannot be edited.
• If not selected, the ONRP Dollar Limit $ and ONRP Tolerance % can be
edited.
• ONRP Dollar Limit $ is a required field and supports up to 8 digits.
• ONRP Tolerance % is an optional field and supports up to 2 digits.
• Select Enable ONRP for the branch to enable the settings.
21 Click OK.
• To enable these settings, you must also select Enable ONRP for Retail
on the Lock Desk Schedule/ONRP tab under Lock Desk Setup. Setting Up Users
• Select whether you want to Use Channel Defaults or Customize Settings. As the administrator, you create a user profile for each user in your organization
• If Use Channel Defaults is selected, the settings are populated by the hierarchy. The user profile contains information such as name and contact
global channel settings and cannot be edited. information, loan officer licensing, and assigned personas and user groups.
• If Customize Settings is selected, the settings can be edited.

To Add a User: 8 Select the Force user to change password check box to force the user to
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. change the password based on the requirements in the Settings Manager.
2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click NOTE: This password setting is not enforced for dedicated user accounts that
Organization/Users. access Encompass via the Encompass SDK since there is no physical user in
place to actually change the password if prompted. To control which dedicated
3 In the upper panel, select an organization folder to which to add the user. You user accounts in your organization can access Encompass via the SDK, it is
may need to expand the hierarchy to locate the folder. recommended that you utilize the Disable Login or Disable Account options
4 In the lower panel, click the New icon. (discussed above) in the SDK account’s user profile.
NOTE: When you add a user to an organization, keep in mind that access to 9 API User check box: The purpose of the API User check box is to give
another user's loan files depends on the position of the user in the hierarchy. Encompass administrators the means to grant a Supported Encompass
Consulting Partner access to their company's Encompass instance via
Encompass Developer Connect APIs. This check box is intended for use with
Supported Encompass Consulting Partners only and should not be used for
users within your organization. Note that once the consulting Partner and the
Encompass administrator complete the required process (described below),
the consulting Partner will be recognized as a Supported Encompass
Consulting Partner and they will be able to access your company's Encompass
instance via the APIs. The administrator will be able to assign the required
privileges to this API user just as they would for any other Encompass user.
However, this API user will not be able to log into any Encompass instances
via the SmartClient.
• In order for a consulting Partner you are working with to become a Supported
Encompass Consulting Partner and have access to your company's
Encompass instance via the APIs, they must first request an API Key from
Ellie Mae by sending an email to EMPro_APIkey@elliemae.com. Once they
receive this API Key (which consists of a client ID and a client secret), they
can provide it to you. Note, they should only share the client ID with you, not
their client secret. Once you receive the client ID, you must create a new user
profile for them by performing the following steps:
• On the Organization/Users screen, in the upper panel, click to select an
organization folder to which to add the user. You may need to expand the
5 On the User Details window, the Disable Login check box is automatically hierarchy to locate the folder.
selected if a user exceeds the allowed failed log-in attempts (as specified in the • In the lower panel [Enabled Users], click the New icon.
Password Management tool). Clear the check box to remove the restriction
• On the User Details screen, in the left panel, type a User ID.
and allow the user to log in again.
• Select the API User check box.
6 Select the Disable Account check box to deactivate the user's account,
prohibiting the user from logging in. • Enter the consulting Partner's API Client ID. This is the API Client ID that
has been provided to the consulting Partner by Ellie Mae. Note that your
7 On the left panel, type a User ID, and then type and re-type the user's company's assigned Client ID cannot be used here.
password. The password must meet the requirements established in the
Settings Manager in the Admin Tools. • Follow the remaining steps in the Add a User process below as applicable.
Note that only required fields (denoted with red asterisk) need to be
• To open the Admin Tools, click the Start menu or Start icon on your Windows provided in order to save this new user profile.
task bar, navigate to the Ellie Mae Encompass program folder, and then
click Admin Tools.

• You are required to assign a persona to this user profile. You can select 16 The Group Membership list contains the groups of which the user is a member.
any persona for assignment. Since the Supported Encompass • Click View Rights to view the user's specific access rights, based on the
Consulting Partner will be restricted from logging into Encompass, none combined access of the listed user groups.
of the access rights defined in the persona will come into play.
17 In the Access to Subordinates' Loans section:
NOTE: Please note that new users indicated as an "API User" as described
here do count against your company's enabled user license limits as described • Select the Access to all loans in the same level check box to grant access
above. to all loans in the same level of the organization hierarchy. Then indicate if
the access is View Only or Edit.
10 Type basic user information (first name, last name, phone number, cell phone
• Select the second check box to allow the user to edit subordinates' loans.
number, fax number, email, and CHUM number).
NOTE: If this user is loan officer, enter the user's officer's first name, middle 18 If this user utilizes Encompass Consumer Connect websites, type the URL of
name, last name, and suffix for compliance with CFPB regulations. the site you want to assign to the organization in the Site URL field, and then
click the Search icon (magnifying glass). Encompass Consumer Connect site
11 Select the Working Folder that opens the first time the user accesses the URLs that match the URL entered by the administrator (either exact matches
Pipeline. Refer to “Loan Folders” on page 87 for information about creating or partial matches) are listed in the Consumer Connect Site URL pop-up
loan folders. window. There you can search for additional sites or select a site to assign to
12 If the user will be originating loans, enter their Nationwide Mortgage Licensing the organization.
System (NMLS) Loan Originator ID (NMLS number). • Alternatively, select the Use Parent Info check box to populate the URL for
13 Optionally, type the expiration date (MM/DD/YYYY) in the NMLS Expiration the Encompass Consumer Connect site associated with the parent
Date field or click the drop-down arrow and click a date on the calendar. organization to this field.
• When the NMLS number expires, loan team members will not be able to NOTE: If an Encompass Consumer Connect site is deleted, loan officers
assign loans in that state to the user. If the NMLS Expiration Date is left assigned to that site must be reassigned to an active Encompass Consumer
blank, Encompass assumes the NMLS number never expires. Connect site. Otherwise, the borrower will see a 404: Site Not Found message
after clicking the link in the notification email they receive from their loan officer.
14 If the user will perform loan officer responsibilities, click the Edit icon in the
Loan Officer Active Licenses section to specify the states in which the user is 19 In the Assigned Compensation Plans section:
licensed to originate loans. For more information, refer to “To Specify LO • After you have created and activated a compensation plan, you can assign
Licensing:” on page 29. the plan to different loan officers. Click the New icon.
• To specify the states in which the license is applicable, select the Active • In the LO Compensation Plans window, click the compensation plan to apply
check box for the state. to the loan officer.
• Enter the license number and other information about the license. To enter NOTE: While you can assign a compensation plan to an individual loan
data in a license table column (or to select a value to populate to a column officer, you can also assign a compensation plan to a company or branch.
from the drop-down list or calendars provided), double-click the desired cell With a company or branch compensation plan in place, you can then select
in the column. A text entry field, drop-down list, or date field will display. the Use Parent Info check box to assign the company or branch plan to a
15 Click the New icon in the Personas section to assign one or more personas to loan officer. If you select this check box without first assigning a plan to the
the user. The persona controls the features and tasks available to the user. company or branch, you will receive a warning message stating that there is
currently no plan to assign, but any plans that are assigned to the company
• In the Persona Selection window, select personas to assign to the user and
or branch in the future will then be applied to the loan officer.
then click OK.
• Click View/Edit Rights to view the specific persona settings for the user, • In the Details section, you can change the Start Date of the plan if necessary.
based on the combined rights of the assigned personas. If a user is assigned By default, Encompass sets the Start Date to one day after the compensation
multiple personas, the greater rights are given to the user. You can also edit plan was assigned to the loan officer (i.e., the “next day”).
the rights granted by the assigned personas to meet the user's specific
requirements.

• If there are no other plans assigned to the user, and if the Start Date occurs To View LO Compensation Plan Details:
today (i.e., on the “current day”) or on any other day prior to today, it cannot 1 In the Organization/Users setting, open the user's User Details window, select
be changed. This helps ensure the accuracy of originator compensation the compensation plan from the list, and then click the Lookup (magnifying
audit reports. glass) icon.
• If the plan has not started yet, you can change the Start Date to today or
NOTE: You cannot change the values in the plan once it is assigned to
any day going forward from today. the user.
• If another plan is already in effect, the new plan must start the next day to
2 Click OK.
ensure that two plans are not being applied to the originator on the same
day.
To Delete an LO Compensation Plan:
NOTE: The Earliest Change Date is calculated based on the Start Date and
NOTE: You cannot delete an active plan that is currently assigned to the loan
Minimum Term # Days fields. Once the plan is activated (i.e., when the plan
officer or organization.
is started), if an administrator tries to assign a new compensation plan before
the minimum term of days is reached, a warning message is displayed that 1 Open the user's User Details window, select the compensation plan from the
informs the administrator that the start date for the new plan occurs prior to list, and then click the Delete icon.
the “earliest change date” (i.e., prior to the minimum term of days being 2 Click Yes to proceed with the deletion.
reached). The administrator can then continue to add a plan or cancel the
operation. Once the Earliest Change Date is reached, the warning message 3 Click Save to save the changes on the User Details window or click OK to save
will no longer be triggered. the changes on the Organization Details window.
• Click Select. To Export LO Compensation Plan Data to Excel:

The compensation plan is now listed in the Assigned Compensation Plans
section. Use the export option to download and save the LO Compensation Plan data for
future audit purposes.
• Click the plan to view its details in the LO Comp Plan section. You can
change the Start Date of the plan if necessary. However, if the current Start 1 Click the Excel icon.
Date occurs in the past, it cannot be changed. The details for each plan, such as % Amount, $ Amount, Minimum $, Maximum
NOTE: After you assign a plan, you may assign additional plans as needed. $ amounts, Trigger Basis field, and so on, listed in the table are exported to the
If you assign a plan with a start date that occurs prior to the Minimum Term # spreadsheet.
Days (i.e., the earliest change date), a warning message displays that states
that you are assigning a plan prior to the earliest change date. You can Managing Users
cancel this operation or proceed with adding the plan. The end date for the In addition to creating users, you can view and edit the users’ persona rights,
current plan will be updated to one day prior to the start date of the second specify Loan Officer Licenses, edit, and delete users.
plan you just added.
To View and Edit Persona Rights:
20 Click Save.
When you click the View/Edit Rights button, the Persona Settings window opens.
Working with LO Compensation Plans You can override the rights from the persona to expand or decrease the user's
After you have assigned LO Compensation Plans to your users (as discussed in specific rights as needed.
“To Add a User:” on page 26, step 17), you can view the plan details, delete LO 1 On the User Details window, click the View/Edit Rights button.
Compensation Plans, and export the plan data to MS Excel.
The Persona Settings window displays the user's current rights.
• A Link icon indicates that the right is associated with an assigned persona.
• A broken-link icon indicates that the right is not associated with an assigned
persona.

2 To customize the user's rights, select the Modify this user's rights check box, required in all states). Note that even if a loan officer has been issued a valid
and then click Yes in the message box to proceed. license, in many cases they can’t legally represent a new company until their
3 Select or clear check boxes on each tab to modify the assigned rights. license sponsorship transfers to their new employer.
4 To reconnect a broken link to the rights from a persona, right-click the link, and • To specify an expiration date, type the expiration date (MM/DD/YYYY) or
then select Link with Persona Rights. click the drop-down arrow and click a date on the calendar in the End Date
column.
5 When finished making your selections, click the Save icon.
• When a state license expires, loan team members will not be able to assign
loans in that state to the loan officer. If a loan has already been assigned to
To Specify LO Licensing:
the loan officer and their license subsequently expires (or if the loan officer
1 On the User Details window, click the Edit icon in the Loan Officer Active tries to originate a new loan after their license expires) they will not be able
Licenses section. to enter the Subject Property State in the loan file. If the End Date field is left
blank, Encompass assumes the license never expires.
• To enter the license status, click the row in the Status column, and then select
an option from the drop-down list provided.
• To specify the Status Date (date that the status is in effect) and/or the Last
Checked date (date that the status was last reviewed), type the status and/or
last checked date (MM/DD/YYYY) or click the drop-down arrow and click a
date on the calendar in the End Date and/or Last Checked column.
5 Click OK.
To Edit a User:
1 Open the user's organization folder, select the user from the list, and then click
the Edit icon.
2 On the User Details window, update information as required.
You cannot change the value in the User ID field.
NOTE: If you change a user’s password, the next time the user enters the Ellie
2 On the Loan Officer Licenses window, select the Active check boxes for the Mae Network, they will be prompted to type their old password.
states in which the loan officer is licensed to originate loans. 3 Click Save.
3 Use the Deselect All and Select All buttons to clear and select all states.
4 To enter the license number and other data in a license table column (or to To Delete a User:
select a value to populate to a column from the drop-down list or calendars NOTE: Before you delete a user, reassign the loans owned by that user. Refer to
provided), double-click the desired cell in the column. A text entry field, drop- “Loan Reassignment” on page 217.
down list, or date field will display.
1 Open the user's organization folder, select the user from the list, and then click
• Enter the License # (number), Issue Date, Start Date, and End Date license the Delete icon.
information. To enter data, click the row in the column and enter data in the
2 Click Yes to proceed with the deletion.
text box provided.
3 On the next window, select an option for disposition of contacts that are owned
• The Issue Date is the date the license is issued to the loan officer.
by the user.
• The Start Date is the date that the loan officer’s license becomes associated
4 Click OK to complete the deletion.
with the company and they can start taking loan applications on behalf of the
company. In most states this is referred to as the Sponsorship Date (not

To Move a User to Another Organization: 3 On the Roles screen, click the New icon.
• Drag and drop a user from the User ID list onto any other organization folder.
Roles
Roles carry out loan tasks in the workflow. A role (such as Loan Originator) can
be associated with each milestone in the workflow. For example, when tasks are
completed at the Processing milestone, the loan is handed off (assigned) to the
loan team member who will fulfill the Underwriter role.
A role can consist of multiple personas and user groups. For example, the Loan
Originator role can include a junior loan officer and senior loan officer persona. If
you assign a user group to a role, all members of the group will have access to a
loan when it is assigned to the role.
The default roles and their primary functions are described below.
Loan Officer (LO) - Develops business and initiates loans.
Opener (OP) - Reviews and prepares loan for processing.
Processor (LP) - Coordinates people and information to construct and finalize loans.
Underwriter (UW) - Determines if loan terms are acceptable.
Closer (CL) - Manages the closing process. 4 On the Create/Edit Role window, type the Role Name and a 2-character
Role Abbreviation.
Funder (FN) - Manages the funding process.
The Role Abbreviation displays on the Pipeline and the header of an open loan file.
Post Closer (PC) - Confirms all documents are completed and generated.
5 In the Personas section, click the New icon to assign personas to the role.
Lock Desk (LD) - Locks loan at current rate.
6 On the Select Personas window, select one or more personas, and then
Shipper (SH) - Assists with inventory control and provides input to the secondary click Select. This selection determines which personas are qualified to take on
marketing functions; ships the loans to document custodians and the investor. the role.
Servicer (SV) - Services the loan. 7 In the User Groups section, click the New icon to assign user groups to the
role.
Quality Control (QC) - Inspects loans for quality.
8 On the Select User Group window, select one or more user groups and then
Accounting (AC) - Manages financial documents. click Select.
Archiver (AR) - Archives loan documents for future retrieval. 9 On the Create/Edit Role window, click Save.
To Create a Role: Role Mapping

1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Select the roles in your company that carry out Loan Officer, Loan Processor,
2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Roles. Loan Closer, and Underwriter tasks. These designations are used when importing
loans and for controlling loan officer license settings in the user profiles of those
users.
1 After selecting a role, click the Save icon to save your changes.

2 Click the Refresh icon to discard changes and restore the previous settings. 4 In the Milestone Name field, enter a unique name for the milestone. If the
(All changes made prior to clicking the Save icon will be disregarded.) milestone name already exists in the system, you will be prompted to enter
another value. You can enter up to 15 characters in this field.
Milestones
A milestone is a step in the workflow that contains loan tasks that are performed
by an assigned loan team member. When a loan team member opens a loan file,
each milestone that is applied to the loan is listed in the Log. Each milestone must
be finished to complete the loan process. Using the Milestones setting, you can
update the properties for existing milestones and create new milestones as
needed. You can also configure milestone templates that consist of a set of
milestones grouped together by a common factor such as loan origination
channel, loan type, and other company-specific conditions.
Current Milestones
The Current Milestones list is a library of all the active milestones in Encompass
which can be selected to be included in a milestone template. Use the icons on
the upper right to create a new milestone, modify existing milestones, and move 5 In the As Shown in Log field, enter the milestone’s names as they will display
the milestones up and down within the Milestones list. in the Log, before and after the milestone is finished.
6 In the TPO Connect Status field, enter a custom TPO Connect status to be
assigned to the milestone. When a TPO Connect Status field is populated in
the Milestone settings, that value will appear in the Status column on the TPO
Connect loan pipeline when the matching milestone is current. If the TPO
Connect Status field is not populated, the Status column of the of the TPO
Connect loan pipeline will be blank for that milestone.
NOTE: This setting is only displayed if the site for the TPO has been
provisioned.
7 In the Milestone Color field, click the color wheel, select or define a color, and
then click OK.
8 In the Role drop-down list, select the role authorized to work on this milestone.
NOTE: It is important to note that this role assignment feature works slightly
differently from previous versions of Encompass. In previous versions, this
feature was used to select a new role that you were authorizing to work on the
next milestone. In Encompass 9.0, you are selecting the role authorized to
work on the current milestone (i.e., the milestone you are configuring right
now).
Creating a New Milestone 9 Optionally, select the check box to indicate that assigning a loan team member
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. to the milestone is required.
2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Milestones. 10 In the Days to Finish field, enter the number of days required to complete the
3 Click the New icon. milestone.

11 In the Field Summary Form field, click the magnifying glass icon, select a 1 To archive a milestone, select Current Milestones, select a milestone, and
form, and then click OK to assign a form to the Field Summary button that then click the Archive button.
displays on the Milestone Worksheet.
NOTE: The Field Summary button on the Milestone Worksheet provides the
ability to easily access and review the values in key loan fields before moving
a loan to the next milestone. To view fields that appear on multiple loan forms,
you can create a custom form that contains all of the key fields, and then assign
the custom form to the Field Summary button.
12 Click Save.
Moving a Milestone
• On the Milestones list, select a milestone and then click the up or down arrows
to change the milestone’s position in the list.
OR
• You can select a milestone and drag and drop it to the desired location.
NOTE: When moving milestones within the list, you cannot move them above
Started or below Completion.The order in which the milestones are listed here has
no impact on how the milestones will be organized in a workflow when added to
a milestone template. You can organize this milestone list to best suit your needs. 2 If the milestones to be archived are part of an existing milestone template, a
message displays indicating that the milestones will be removed from the
Archived Milestones corresponding templates. Click Continue.
Milestones can be saved for future use. Instead of deleting milestones that are no NOTE: You cannot archive the Started and Completion milestones.
longer being used, you can archive them so that the Current Milestones list is up- 3 To enable an archived milestone, select Archived Milestones, select a
to-date and more manageable. Archived milestones can be enabled as required. milestone, and then click Move to Current.
NOTE: When an archived milestone is moved to the current list, it is not

automatically added back to any milestone templates.
Milestone Templates
After configuring milestones, you can configure new milestone templates. A
milestone template is a set of milestones grouped together by a common factor
such as channel, loan type, or other company-specific conditions. Different

milestone templates can be created with each template addressing a specific 3 Click the New icon.
business scenario. After a template is created, it can be activated. Once activated,
a milestone template is available to be applied to a loan file. By default,
Encompass automatically reviews the data in the loan file, reviews the activated
milestone templates, and then applies the template that best suits the loan file any
time key loan data is updated or when a new loan is originated. Users can also be
authorized to manually apply a new milestone template to a loan file at any time.
Default Milestone Template Settings

For new Encompass installations, the Default Template milestone template
provided “out of the box” contains the following milestones: Started, Qualification,
Processing, Submittal, Cond Approval, Resubmittal, Approval, Doc Preparation,
Docs Signing, Funding, Post Closing, Shipping, Completion.
• If you are upgrading to Encompass from a previous version, all of the current
milestones available in the previous version are grouped together in the same
order to create the Default Template milestone template. The Days to Finish
setting for each milestone is carried over into Encompass as well, along with all
additional settings configured in the previous version (milestone color, milestone
names to display in the Log, requirement to assign a loan team member to a
milestone, and so on).
• In both circumstances, the Default Template is set to apply to all loan origination
channels and no conditions are applied to the milestone template. These
channel and conditions settings cannot be modified, but you can add, remove,
or reposition the template's milestones, manage trigger milestones, and add
roles to the template as needed. Details Tab
1 In the New Template panel near the bottom of the screen, click the Details tab.
To Create a Milestone Template:
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. NOTE: Use the Save icon to save updates you make to the template settings.
Use the Reset icon to discard any un-saved changes to the template settings.
2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, click Milestones, and then click
the Milestone Templates tab. 2 In the Details tab, enter a new Template Name. (By default, the name is set to
New Template).
3 In the Channels this template applies to section:
• Select the origination channels where this milestone template will be applied.
(By default, all channels are selected).
• Select No channel selected to apply this milestone template to a loan where
none of the channel options are selected.
NOTE: The origination channel for each loan is specified on the Borrower
Summary form (field ID 2626).
4 In the Conditions for this template section:
• Select No to always apply this milestone template.

• Select Yes to create a condition for when this milestone template will be 3 In the Milestone Selection window, select the milestones to add, and then click
applied. Add.
• Select a category for the condition: Loan Type or Loan Purpose.
• Select a value for the category, such as VA or Purchase.
NOTE: If you select the Advanced Conditions option, you can create
expressions to define custom conditions. Click the Lookup icon (magnifying
glass) to select filters for the Advanced Conditions option. For detailed
instructions on how to create your own code, refer to the “Advanced Coding for
Business Rules” document.
5 In the Notes/Comments section, enter additional information if required.
Milestones Tab
Manage the milestones contained in this milestone template. Here you can add,
remove, and arrange milestones in the desired order in the template.
1 Click the Milestones tab.
NOTE: Each milestone template can include a milestone only once. All
templates must start with the Started milestone and end with the Completion
milestone.
2 To add milestones to the template, click the New icon.
4 To remove a milestone from the template, select the milestone, and then click
the Delete icon.
NOTE: The milestone is removed from this milestone template only.
5 To move a milestone up or down in the list, select the milestone, and then click
the up or down arrows accordingly. Milestones should be arranged in a logical
order for the loan workflow.
• You can also select a milestone and then drag-and-drop it to its desired
position.
Settings Tab
Use this tab to select a trigger milestone for auto loan numbering and eDisclosure
package selection. When this milestone template is applied to a loan file, the auto
loan numbering and/or eDisclosure package selection action will start when the
selected milestone is completed. If you want to use the trigger milestone indicated
in the global Loan Setup > Auto Loan Numbering setting or the Docs Setup >
eDisclosure Package setting, do not select a different trigger milestone here.
1 If needed, click the Settings tab.

2 Select a milestone from the When to Start Loan Numbering drop-down list to • Click the View link to view the Docs Setup > eDisclosure Packages global
indicate when the loan number will be assigned. The loan number will be setting. If a different trigger milestone has been selected for a package
assigned to the Loan Number field (field ID 364) in the loan file at the condition in the global setting, double-click the package condition, and then
completion of the selected milestone. click Manage Exceptions to view the milestone templates that have been
• Click the View link to view the Loan Setup > Auto Loan Numbering global
set up to use a different trigger milestone for eDisclosure package selection.
setting. If a different trigger milestone has been selected for the global You can update the trigger milestones in the milestone templates as needed.
setting, click Manage Exceptions to view the milestone templates that have • The trigger milestones you select in the milestone template will override the
been set up to use a different trigger milestone for auto loan numbering than milestones selected in the Docs Setup > eDisclosure Packages setting.
the trigger milestone indicated on the global Auto Loan Numbering setting.
You can update the trigger milestones in the milestone templates as needed. Roles Tab
• The trigger milestone selected in the milestone template will override the Here you can add roles from the Roles setting in Encompass Settings to the
milestone selected in the global Auto Loan Numbering setting. milestone template without assigning them to specific milestones. When the
3 In the eDisclosure Initial Package section (if needed and available), select a template is applied to a loan file, the roles assigned to the template will have
trigger milestone for each eDisclosure package. The eDisclosure package will access to the loan file.
become available to send to the borrower at the completion of the selected 1 Click the Roles tab.
milestone.
NOTE: The eDisclosure Initial Package options are displayed here only if the NOTE: Roles are assigned when creating or editing a milestone on the
administrator has already set up the Docs Setup > eDisclosure Packages global Milestones tab.
setting to set criteria that make different packages available when specified 2 To add a role to the milestone template, click the New icon.
milestones have been completed.
3 Select the role(s) you want to add, and then click Add. The role(s) are listed in
• If the administrator has selected a trigger milestone for a package in the Docs the ----- Roles Not Tied to a Milestone ------ section.
Setup > eDisclosure Packages setting, it is displayed here. If they select a
4 To remove a role from the template, select the role, and then click the Delete
trigger milestone for a package that does not exist in this milestone template,
icon.
the Started (system default) milestone is used.

To Save Your Milestone Template Settings: 2 Click the Duplicate icon.
• When finished configuring the milestone template, click the Save icon. 3 With the new milestone template selected, update the information on the
Details, Milestones, Settings, and Roles tabs as needed.
To Activate a Milestone Template: 4 When finished, click the Save icon.
A milestone template needs to be activated so that it is available for assignment
to loan files. To Manage the Order of Milestone Templates:
• To activate a milestone template, select a template from the list, and then click The order in which milestone templates are listed in the Templates list is very
Activate. important. When Encompass reviews the milestone templates to determine which
one to apply to a loan file, the system applies the first activated template it finds
in this list that matches the loan's data and meets the template’s conditions.
• To deactivate a milestone template, select a template from the list, and then click
Deactivate. • Select a template, and then use the up and down arrows to change the
template’s position in the list.
NOTE: If you deactivate a milestone template that is currently applied to a loan
file, the Default Template will automatically be applied to the loan file. NOTE: The Default Template is always located at the bottom of the Templates list
and cannot be moved.
Working with Milestone Templates
To Delete a Milestone Template:
To Duplicate a Milestone Template: • To delete a milestone template, select the template, and then click the Delete
Duplicate an existing template and then modify it as needed to save time when icon.
creating new milestone templates. NOTE: If you delete a milestone template that is currently applied to a loan file,
the Default Template will automatically be applied to the loan file the next time the
NOTE: Duplication copies all information except the original template name and
loan file is saved.
the information in the Settings tab.
1 Select the milestone template to duplicate. Global Milestone Template Settings
Use the Global Template Settings to globally enable automatic mode or manual
mode for milestone templates, set email notification preferences, and indicate the
days to count when Encompass calculates milestones’ expected completion
dates.

To Configure Global Milestone Template Settings: sent to the loan team member who was assigned to the milestone. Since they
1 On the Milestone Templates tab, click View Global Template Settings. are no longer assigned to a milestone in the loan file, they may lose access
to the loan file.
4 In the Milestone Days section, specify your company’s business days. When
calculating a milestones expected completion date (i.e., “days to finish”), only
the specified business days are counted.
• Week Days: Monday through Friday
• Calendar Days: U.S. Postal Service calendar days; excludes Sundays and
legal holidays
5 Company Calendar: Uses the business days indicated on the Our Company
Calendar in the Compliance Calendar setting.
User Groups
Use the User Groups setting to create groups of users that define access to loan
and contact data.
NOTE: The All Users group is the default group that contains all of your users.
2 Select Template Selection Settings options to determine how the system or You cannot delete or modify the members. You can however edit the access
individual users may apply milestone templates to loan files. When a milestone settings.
template is applied to a loan, the milestones in the template replace the
milestones that were previously being used in the loan file. Best Practices and Guidelines
• Automatic Mode - The system reviews the data in the loan file each time it • Use the All Users group to grant the minimum access that you want all users to
is saved. If the data in the loan file satisfies all the conditions in a milestone have.
template, that milestone template is automatically applied to loan file. This is
• Create user groups to grant additional access specific to the needs of each
the default setting.
group. For example, you could create a user group for a specific state that
• Manual Mode - Authorized users can manually apply any available grants access to templates and forms used only in that state.
milestone template to a loan file at any time. (When this option is used, the
• If access conflicts occur between user groups, members are granted the
administrator must also use the Personas setting to grant individual users
greatest access. For example, a user could be a member of the All Users group
permission to manually add milestone templates.)
and a group called Branch 1. If the Branch 1 group grants access to a loan folder
• Allow matching and non-matching templates to be applied to loans - called “B1”(which is not granted by the All Users group), members of the Branch
All active milestone template templates are eligible to be applied to a loan, 1 group will be able to access the “B1” loan folder.
including those templates with conditions that are not met by the loan file.
• If access conflicts occur within a user group, the most specific access will take
NOTE: Both modes may be enabled at the same time. If neither mode is precedence. For example, if you set Edit as the Access Right to all loan
selected, the Default Milestone template will be used for all loan files. programs in the Companywide Loan Program folder, but then set View Only as
3 In the Email Notification Preferences section, select the check box to send the Access Right to one of the individual loan programs, the access to the
automatic email notifications to loan team members when they are no longer individual loan program will be View Only.
assigned to a milestone in the loan file. • When you are presented with an option to set an Access Right, (on the Loans,
• When a new milestone template is applied to a loan file and replaces the Loan Templates, and Resources tabs) select Edit only for users who will create
milestones that were previously being used, there may be milestones that and maintain the item, such as Loan Programs, or Closing Cost templates.
are no longer included in the loan. When this occurs, an automated email is

To Create a User Group: 3 Add individual users or all users in an organization as follows.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. • Individual user - Select the user, and then click the Add to Group - this
2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click User Groups. level/user only icon on the upper-right of the screen.
3 On the User Groups screen, click the New icon. • Individual organization and its users - Select an organization folder, and
then click the Add to Group - this level/user only icon on the upper-right of
4 Type a Group Name, and then click OK. the screen.
5 Specify group members and group members’ access to loan files, features, • An organization and its users, and all organizations and users below it
and tools, as described in the Members Tab section on page 38. in the hierarchy - Select an organization folder, and then click the Add to
6 When finished, click the Save icon. Group - this level and below icon on the upper-right of the screen.
4 Click OK to add the selections to the user group.
Members Tab
Use the Members tab to maintain the list of members in the user group. Loans Tab
Use the Loans tab to define access to other user's loans (in addition to the access
To Add Members to the User Group: designated in each user's profile), and loan folders.
1 Click the Members tab, and then click the New icon to open the User Group
Configuration window. To Define Access to Loans:
1 Click the Loans tab, and then click the New icon.
2 On the User Group Configuration window, open the organization hierarchy to
the users and/or organizations whose loans you want to grant access to.
3 Select individual users and/or all users in organizations as follows.
• Individual user - Select the user, and then click the Add to Group - this
level/user only icon on the upper-right of the screen.
• Individual organization and its users - Select an organization folder, and
the screen.
• An organization and its users, and all organizations and users below it
in the hierarchy - Select an organization folder, and then click the Add to
Group - this level and below icon on the upper-right of the screen.
2 Open the organization hierarchy to the users and organizations you want to
add to the user group.

4 Click OK to add the selections to the user group. 5 Select individual users and/or all users in organizations as follows.
level/user only icon in the upper-right of the screen.
then click the Add to Group - this level/user only icon in the upper-right of
the screen.
Group - this level and below icon in the upper-right of the screen.
5 On the Access to Other’s Loans list, select a name or organization, click the
associated Access Right field, and then select View Only or Edit.
6 In the Access to Loan Folders section, select the loan folders that members of
the user group can access.
Borrower Contacts Tab

Use the Borrower Contacts tab to set the access to the borrower contacts owned
by members of this group, and to set access by members of the group to other
user’s contacts.
To Define Access to Borrower Contacts:

1 Click the Borrower Contacts tab.
2 Select the check box to make borrower contacts created by members of this 7 On the Access to Other User’s Borrower Contacts list, select a name or
group public and accessible to the group members' superiors in the organization, click the associated Access Right field, and then select View
organization hierarchy. Only or Edit.
• Select View Only or Edit to set Access Right to the public borrower contacts. NOTE: If a conflict is created between the Public check box (access by group
3 To allow group members to access the borrower contacts of other users in the members' superiors) and the settings for access to other user's contacts, the
organization, click the New icon. greater access (Edit) will take precedence.
NOTE: Group members do not automatically gain access to each other’s Loan Templates Tab
borrower contacts. Add group members to this list to grant access to their
borrower contacts. Use the Loan Templates tab to define access to public loan templates.
4 On the User Group Configuration window, open the organization hierarchy to NOTE: Encompass provides the ability to maintain public and personal versions
the users and/or organization folders whose contacts you want grant access to. of resources such as loan templates, reports, and custom print forms. Personal
resources are created and maintained by each user for their own use. Public
resources are available to an expanded group of users.

To Define Access to Loan Templates: To Define Access to Public Resources:
1 Click the Loan Templates tab. NOTE: This procedure covers access definitions for all resource types except
2 Click the New icon next to one of the categories of templates. Standard Print Forms, Public Business Contact Groups, and Condition Forms. To
define access to those resources, refer to the specific procedures that follow.
3 On the User Group Configuration window, open the folder hierarchy to the
templates or folders you want to grant access to. 1 Click the Resources tab.
4 Select individual templates or all templates in a folder as follows. 2 Click the New icon next to one of the resource categories.
• Individual templates - Select the template, and then click the Add to 3 On the User Group Configuration window, open the folder hierarchy to the
Group-this level/ user only icon in the upper-right of the screen. resources and/or folders you want grant access to.
• Template folders and their templates - Select a folder, and then click the 4 Select individual resources and/or all resources in a folder as follows.
Add to Group - this level and below icon in the upper-right of the screen. • Individual resources - Select the resource, and then click the Add to
5 Click OK to add the selections to the user group. Group - this level/user only icon on the upper-right of the screen.
• Resource folders and their resources - Select a folder, and then click the
Add to Group - this level and below icon on the upper-right of the screen.
6 Back on the Loan Templates tab, select one of the listed template names
or folders, click the associated Access Right field, and then select
View Only or Edit.
Resources Tab
6 Back on the Resources tab, select one of the listed resource names or folders,
Use the Resources tab define access to public resources, including print groups, click the associated Access Right field, and then select View Only or Edit.
business contacts, and reports.

To Define Access to Standard Print Forms: only Change of Circumstance options available for the user to select on the LE
1 Click the Resources tab. Page 1 or CD Page 1 when they click the Lookup icon to select a Change of
Circumstance option to populate into the Changed Circumstance field (field ID
2 Click the New icon next to the Standard Print Forms category. 3169 on the LE, CD1.X64 on the CD).
3 On the Standard Print Forms window, select forms from the All Standard Print 4 Click OK.
Forms list, and then click the right-arrow button to move the forms to the
Selected Forms list. Role List View Tab
4 Click OK to add the selections to the user group. Use the Role List View tab to define the users that display in selection lists, including
those on milestone worksheets, Pipeline searches, and Dashboard views.
To Define Access to Public Business Contact Groups:
1 Click the Resources tab. To Define Role List Views:
2 Click the New icon next to the Public Business Contact Groups category. 1 Click the Role List View tab.
3 On the Public Business Contact Groups window, select groups from the All 2 Select a role for which to define a selection list.
Public Business Contact Groups list, and then click the right-arrow to move
the groups to the Selected Public Business Contact Groups list.
5 Back on the Resources tab, select one of the listed groups, click the associated
Access Right field, and then select View Only or Edit.
To Define Access to Condition Forms:

1 Click the Resources tab.
2 Click the New icon next to the Condition Forms category.
3 On the Condition Forms window, select forms from the All Condition Forms list,
and then click the right-arrow to move the forms to the Selected Forms list.
To Define Access to Change of Circumstance Options:

Set up and control user access to different Change of Circumstance options
accessible from the Good Faith Fee Variance Violated alert screen, LE Page 1,
and CD Page 1 based on User Groups. When a user selects the Changed 3 Select one of the three options:
Circumstance check box (field ID 3168 on the LE, CD1.X61 on the CD) on one of • All <role name> - All users associated with the role will display in the
these forms, and then clicks the Lookup icon to pick from a list of options to selection list.
populate the Changed Circumstance description field (field ID 3169 on the LE,
CD1.X64 on the CD), only the options selected by the administrator in this User • <Role name> below in organization hierarchy - All users associated with
Groups setting will be available for the user to select. the role, and below the user group member in the organization hierarchy, will
display in the selection list.
1 Click the Resources tab.
• Some <Role name> - All users associated with the role, from the specified
2 Click the New icon next to the Change of Circumstance Options section. list of users, will display in the selection list.
3 In the Change of Circumstance Options window, click to select an option (or 4 If you chose the third option, click the New icon.
options) in the All CoC Options list, and then click the right arrow to move the
5 On the User Group Configuration window, open the organization hierarchy to
selected options to the Selected CoC options. The selected options will be the
the users and/or organizations you want to include in the selection list.

6 Select individual users and/or all users in organizations as follows.
level/user only icon on the upper-right of the screen.
the screen.
Group - this level and below icon on the upper-right of the screen.
7 Click OK to add the users to the selection list. Only users who are also
associated with the selected role will display in the list.
8 Repeat steps 2 through 7 to create selection lists for other roles.

Chapter 6
External Company Setup

Use the External Company Setup settings to create and manage lenders, brokers, 4 In the Bank Details window:
and third party originators (TPO) with whom your company does business,
Company Details
Use the Company Details setting to create and manage lenders, brokers, and
third party originators (TPO) with whom your company does business.
Banks
Use the Banks setting to manage (create, edit, and delete) banks used by TPO
companies. After a bank is created in this setting, authorized users can add the
bank to the TPO company that uses this warehouse bank to indicate which bank
to pay, when loans are submitted by the TPO company.
To Add a Bank:
2 In the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Company
Details.
3 In the Company/Branches panel, click to select the Banks folder, and then
click the New icon.
• Type the bank name, the bank address, contact person for the bank and their
details.
• In the ABA Number field, type the nine digit routing transit number for the
bank.
5 Click OK.
To Edit a Bank:
1 In the Company/Branches panel, select the bank, and then click the Edit icon.
2 In the Bank Details window, update the information, and then click OK.
Chapter 6: External Company Setup 43

To Delete a Bank: Assign an LO Compensation Plan to a Lender
You cannot delete a bank if a TPO company is associated with it. You need to first Here you can assign an active compensation plan to a lender (the compensation
remove the bank from the TPO company (Company Details page > Warehouse your company is being paid by the lender for brokering a loan).
tab) and then delete the bank here.
• In the Company/Branches panel, select the bank, and then click the Delete icon. To Assign an LO Compensation Plan to a Lender:
1 In the Lender folder hierarchy, double-click the company or branch to which
Lenders you are assigning the compensation plan.
Before you can assign an LO Compensation plan to lenders to which your 2 In the Company Details window, click the New icon.
company brokers loans, you must first add these companies or branches to the
3 In the LO Compensation Plans window, click the compensation plan to apply
External Company Setup setting. After adding to this setting, you can then assign
to the company or branch.
an LO Compensation plan to these companies or branches. After assignment,
authorized users can use the LO Compensation tool to track the amount of 4 In the Details section, you can change the Start Date of the plan if necessary.
compensation to be paid. By default, Encompass sets the Start Date to one day after the compensation
plan was assigned to the company or branch (i.e., the next day).
To Add a Lender: NOTE: If another plan is already in effect, the new plan must start the next day
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. to ensure that two plans are not being applied to the originator on the same
day.
2 In the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Company
Details. NOTE: The Earliest Change Date is calculated based on the Start Date and
Minimum Term # Days fields. After the plan is activated (i.e., when the plan is
3 In the Company/Branches panel, click to select the Lenders folder, and then
started), if an administrator tries to assign a new compensation plan before the
click the New icon.
minimum term of days is reached, a warning message is displayed that informs
4 In the Company Details window, select Broker and/or Correspondent check the administrator that the start date for the new plan occurs prior to the "earliest
box(es) to indicate that your company can originate loans through a Brokered change date" (i.e., prior to the minimum term of days being reached). The
and/or Correspondent channel for the lender. administrator can then continue to add a plan or cancel the operation. After the
Earliest Change Date is reached, the warning message will no longer be
triggered.
5 Click Select.
• The compensation plan is now listed in the Assigned Compensation Plans
section.
• Click the plan to view its details in the LO Comp Plan section. You can
change the Start Date of the plan if necessary, however you cannot change
the start date here once the plan has started.
6 Click OK.
5 Type the Company Legal Name, Company DBA Name, and street address in
the appropriate fields.
NOTE: If you select only Correspondent, you will not be able to assign a
compensation plan to this company, as Correspondent loans are exempt from
LO compensation plans.
6 Click OK.

Third Party Originators Basic Info Tab
All TPO management settings have been deactivated on the Originator
Management page in TPO Connect Administration and are now provided in the To Complete the Basic Info Tab:
Third Party Originators setting in the External Company Setup settings in 1 In the Organization panel, Organization Name field, enter the name of the TPO
Encompass Settings. Use these settings in Encompass to manage the third party company. This is the unique identifier for the company.
originators, such as brokers and correspondents, with whom your company does
business.
To Create a New Company:

2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Company
Details.
3 Click the Auto Org ID Numbering button to open the Auto Organization ID
Numbering window and set the starting number for auto-generating
Organization IDs.
4 In the Company/Branches panel, click Third Party Originator, and then click
the New icon.
5 Follow the instructions in the next sections to complete each tab in the
Company Details window. Enter information in the required fields. For non-
required fields, enter information depending on your business requirements.

• If you enter a name that has already been assigned to another company, an • In the Timezone field, indicate the time zone of the TPO organization to help
alert displays indicating that an organization with the same name already determine when the purchasing wire cut off time is.
exists. • Select the No After Hour Wires check box to indicate that this organization
does not accept wire transfers sent outside of normal business operating
hours. This enables lenders to indicate that they prefer to receive wire
transfers only during funding hours and simplify the reconciliation process.
• In the Organization ID field, enter a maximum of six characters for the
organization code of the TPO company. You can enter any value that suits
your company’s business needs.
• In the Owner’s Name field, enter the name of the owner of the company.
• In the Company Legal Name field, enter the name of the TPO company. This
may be the same as the Organization Name above.
• In the Address, City, State, Zip, Phone Number, Fax Number, Email, and
Website fields, enter the TPO company’s corporate contact information.
2 Select the Disable Login check box to deactivate the TPO company if you are
no longer doing business with or need to prevent the company from uploading • In the TPO Manager drop-down field, select the TPO contact who creates
loan files. Typically, you will not need to use this option during creation of a TPO and manages the TPO contacts on your TPO WebCenter website and to
company. whom the Welcome emails will be sent.
3 Select the Multi-Factor Authentication check box to require multi-factor This drop-down field will be empty when you are creating a TPO company or
authentication for your Encompass TPO Connect sites. branch record for the first time. This drop-down list will be populated with
eligible contacts once you have created one or more TPO contacts for the
NOTE: This field was introduced in the Encompass 19.1 release.
TPO company or branch and have assigned the Manager role to them. For
4 Select whether you want to “Disable Fee Management” for your brokers more information, refer to “Third Party Originator Contacts” on page 64.
(default) or enable them to “Request LE & Disclosures”.
• If a selection is entered in this field, you cannot delete this company.
NOTE: This setting was introduced in the Encompass 19.1 release and
• To delete this company, you must select the “Blank” option for this field,
moved to this location in the Encompass 19.3 release. When this setting was
save the record, delete any associated contacts to this company, return
first introduced, it was located under the Broker Channel Type check box in the
to the Company Details screen, select this company, and then click on
Company Details section.
the Delete icon
5 In the Company Details panel, enter basic and corporate information related NOTE: This feature was introduced in the Encompass 19.1 release.
to the TPO.
• The Last Loan Submitted Date field is a read-only field and automatically
• In the Channel Type field, select the Broker or Correspondent (or both)
populates when loans are submitted from this TPO company.
check boxes to identify the type of TPO company.
6 In the Rate Sheet and Lock Information panel, enter the TPO’s email
• Select the Delegated check box if the TPO client has delegated authority
address(es) and fax number(s) to which the system will send the Rate Sheet
and/or select the Non-Delegated check box if the TPO client has non-
and Lock information.
delegated authority. (This setting is currently used by TPO Connect.).
7 In the Product and Pricing panel, enter the TPO’s Product and Pricing
• If Correspondent is selected as the Channel Type, then Non-Delegated is
account information:
automatically selected as the Underwriting Type.
• For EPPS (Encompass Product and Pricing Service) customers,
• If Correspondent is blank, then Delegated and Non-Delegated are blank.
• If Delegated and Non-Delegated are blank, then Correspondent is blank. • Select their Price Group information from the drop-down lists by channel.
This enables multiple price groups to be applied to a TPO company.
• If Correspondent is blank and either Delegated or Non-Delegated is
selected, then Correspondent is selected. NOTE: This feature was introduced in the Encompass 19.1 release.

• These price groups can only be applied if the corresponding channels have 9 In the Primary Sales Rep panel, indicate your company’s Account Executive
been enabled. assigned to this TPO. Click the New icon, select your Primary Sales Rep
• The available price groups are managed in the TPO Settings. (PSR), and then click OK.
• Type the EPPS username, and select the EPPS Comp. Model from the
drop-down list.
• For Optimal Blue customers, select their Price Group information from the
drop-down list.
• For PriceMyLoan customers, enter their user name, password, and customer
code.
8 In the Approval Status panel, enter the details related to the TPO’s approval
status with your company. The Current Status and Company Rating drop-down
fields in this panel have customizable values and can be configured by your
Encompass administrator. For detailed information, refer to “TPO Settings” on
NOTE: The Add Sales Rep window displays a list of Encompass users with
page 70.
Sales Rep personas. For more information on Sales Rep personas, refer to
• From the Current Status drop-down list, select the status of the TPO. “External Settings Tab” on page 20. If you do not find the Encompass user you
• Select the Add to Watchlist check box if you need to track and monitor this want to assign as the PSR for this TPO, go to Encompass Settings>
company. Company/User Setup> Organization/Users, select the organization to which
the user belongs, and then in the Enabled Users section, click New. Enter the
• The Current Status Date field automatically populates the current date when
user details, assign a Sales Rep persona to the user, and then click Save.
you enter the Current Status of the TPO company. If you want to enter a Repeat step 6 to select the user.
different date, click the down arrow at the end of the field, and then in the
calendar, click to select a date. 10 In the Business Information panel, enter the TPO’s general business
information such as if the company is incorporated, state in which it is
• In the Approved Date field, click the down arrow at the end of the field, and
incorporated, LEI, NMLS ID, whether the company is DU Sponsored, and
then in the calendar, select a date indicating when the TPO was approved by
whether the company is LPA Sponsored.
your company. You can also manually enter information in this field.
11 Click the Save icon.
• In the Application Date field, click the down arrow at the end of the field, and
then in the calendar, select a date indicating when the TPO was approved by 12 In the alert window that displays after clicking the Save icon, click Yes if you
your company. You can also manually enter information in this field. want to assign this PSR to all branches and extensions under this TPO
organization. Click No to assign the PSR at the Company level only.
• From the Company Rating drop-down list, select the rating assigned to this
TPO.
NOTE: Ratings are based on your company’s own scale and requirements.
A rating of 1 may be considered the top rating or it can be the lowest rating
depending on your company’s scale. This drop-down is configurable in the
TPO Settings. For detailed information, refer to “TPO Settings” on page 70.

DBA Tab To Complete the License Tab:
Use the DBA tab to manage multiple DBA (Doing Business As) names associated 1 Click the License tab.
with the TPO company. Authorized users have the ability to add, edit, delete, and 2 Select a Lender Type from the drop-down list.
arrange the sequence of DBA names displayed in the DBA list. You can also
NOTE: For more information on lender types, see the Encompass
identify the default DBA using options in this tab. DBAs selected for the TPO
Compliance Service Lender Type and License Setup Guide in the Ellie Mae
organization in this tab are also displayed in the TPO Information tool.
Resource Center or the Encompass Compliance Service Help site.
3 If your company is a depository institution, from the Home State drop-down list,
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Company select the TPO’s home state.
Details.
• The applicable laws of the home state will be applied to the loan.
3 In the Company/Branches panel, click Third Party Originator, and then select
4 If the TPO company does business in more than one state, in the License Type
an existing TPO company.
in drop-down list, select All States.
4 Click the DBA tab.
• Or, if the TPO company does business in just one state, select the state to
5 To add a DBA name, click the New icon, enter information, and then click OK. display only the licenses for that state.
5 In the Select column, select each license type that applies to the TPO company.
6 When you select a license, the Exempt check box displays. Select the check
box if you do not want the Encompass Compliance Service to apply any license
or compliance rules associated with that license in the property state.
NOTE: For information on how licenses are applied by channel, see the
Encompass Compliance Service Lender Type and License Setup Guide in the
Ellie Mae Resource Center or the Encompass Compliance Service Help site.
• To identify this DBA as the default DBA for this TPO company, select Set as 7 Enter the license number, issue date, start date, and end date license
default. information. To enter data, click the row in the column and enter data in the text
box provided.
6 To edit a DBA name, select the name, click the Edit icon, update the
information, and then click OK. 8 To enter the license status, click the row in the Status column, and then select
an option from the drop-down list provided.
7 To change the sequence of DBA names in the DBA list (TPO Information tool),
select the name, and then click the up and/or down arrows. 9 In the Statutory Election panel, select the appropriate option for Statutory
Election for first lien, subordinate lien, junior, closed-end, and open-end loans
8 To delete a DBA name, select it, and then click the Delete icon. for subject properties in Maryland or Kansas, if the TPO company does
business in Maryland or Kansas.
License Tab
10 If you have selected a single state from the License Type in drop-down list and
Use this tab to manage a TPO’s license information to help ensure compliance for
only the licenses available for that state are displayed in the list, you can move
the loans received from the TPO. When a TPO tries to submit a loan for a property
licenses up or down in this list. Select a license and then click the up or down
in a state where they are not licensed, a warning message is displayed to them.
arrows accordingly to move a license.
A standard warning message is available out-of-the-box, however you can create
your own custom message here. You can also indicate how your company will NOTE: The order in which these licenses are listed is important. When a loan
manage loans submitted for properties in unlicensed states (allow TPOs to submit is received from your TPO WebCenter or TPO Connect website, the TPO’s
loans without any restrictions, don’t allow lock requests or submission, don’t allow company information, including state license information, is populated to the
loan creation). TPO Information tool in the loan file. The license information populated to the
tool is based on the licenses you configure on this License tab. The first
applicable state license that is listed on the License tab with its Select check

box selected is used to populate the TPO Information tool. When an loan acceptance criteria for each channel. When a TPO tries to submit a loan that
Encompass Compliance Service (ECS) review is run for this loan, the ECS will does not meet the criteria you have configured here, a warning message is
use this license to determine which license-related compliance reviews to run. displayed to them. A standard warning message is available out-of-the-box,
however you can create your own custom message here. You can also indicate
11 In the ATR/QM panel, indicate if the TPO company qualifies as a small creditor,
how your company will manage these types of loans (allow TPOs to submit loans
rural small creditor, or an exempt creditor.
without any restrictions, don’t allow lock requests or submission, don’t allow loan
• To indicate if the TPO company qualifies as a small creditor or rural small creation).
creditor, select Small Creditor or Rural Small Creditor from the drop-down
list. To Complete the Loan Criteria Tab:
NOTE: A Small Creditor is usually a community bank or credit union that 1 Click the Loan Criteria tab.
has less than $2 billion in assets and in the previous 12 months made 500 or
• The tab for the Broker loan origination channel displays by default.
fewer first-lien mortgages. A Rural Small Creditor is usually a community
bank or credit union that has less than $2 billion in assets, in the previous 12 2 Clear the check boxes corresponding to the loan types that your organization
months made 500 or fewer first-lien mortgages, and made more than 50% of will not accept from the TPO.
its residential mortgage loans in counties designated as “rural” or 3 In the Purpose of Loan panel, clear the check boxes corresponding to the
“underserved”. loan purposes for which your organization will not accept loan submissions
NOTE: One of these options must be selected for the ATR/QM Eligibility from the TPO.
checklist (in the ATR/QM Management tool) to render eligibility results in its 4 From the Policy for Unapproved Loans drop-down list, select the appropriate
Small Creditor Qualified Mortgage column for a loan submitted by this TPO. option to indicate how your company manages loans that do match the loan
• To indicate if the TPO company qualifies as an exempt creditor, select the type and purpose requirements, based on the definitions below:
option that best describes the business from the Exempt Creditor drop- • No Restrictions: All loans can be submitted
down list: Community Development Financial Institution, Community
• Don’t allow lock or submission: Loans can be created but lock requests
Housing Development Organization, Downpayment Assistance Provider, or
cannot be made and loans cannot be submitted
Nonprofit organization.
• Don't allow loan creation: Loans cannot be created
12 From the Policy for Loans in Unlicensed States drop-down list, select the
appropriate option to indicate how your company manages loans that do match 5 In the Warning Message text box, you can update the out-of-the-box warning
the licensing requirements, based on the definitions below: message that will be displayed when loans submitted by the TPO do not match
your company’s loan type and purpose criteria.
• No Restrictions: All loans will be created and submitted
6 In the FHA / VA Information panel, set the loan acceptance criteria for FHA
• Don’t allow lock or submission: Loans can be created but lock requests
and VA loans.
cannot be made and loans cannot be submitted
7 Click the Correspondent - Delegated tab and repeat steps 2 - 6 to indicate
• Don't allow loan creation: Loans cannot be created or submitted
your company’s loan acceptance criteria for delegated correspondent loans.
13 In the Warning Message text box, you can update the out-of-the-box warning
8 Click the Correspondent - Non Delegated tab and repeat steps 2 - 6 to
message to display when a TPO submits a loan for a property located in a state
indicate your company’s loan acceptance criteria for non-delegated
where they are not licensed (i.e., you have not entered any license information
correspondent loans.
for the state on the License tab).
TPO Contacts Tab
Loan Criteria Tab
Use the Key Contacts tab to view and manage information related to the most
Use the Loan Criteria tab to specify the type of loans, and from which loan
prominent TPO contacts, such as the owner, managers, and executives employed
origination channel, the TPO can submit to your company. The settings for the
with the TPO company. Here you can manually add new contacts, import existing
Broker channel display by default, followed by additional tabs for Correspondent
contacts associated with this TPO from within Encompass, export contacts into an
- Delegated and Correspondent - Non Delegated. Click each tab to set up the
Excel spreadsheet, and edit and delete contacts as required.

To Complete the Key Contacts Tab: 4 Only users with Sales Rep personas (i.e. TPO Contacts > Sales Rep option is
1 Click the Key Contacts tab. selected in the persona setting) are displayed in the Add Sales Rep window. If
you want to add a user who is not displayed on this list, contact your
2 To manually add a new key contact, click the New icon, enter information in the administrator to update the user’s persona. For more information, refer to
Add Key TPO Contact window, and then click OK. “Personas” on page 13.
• To import one or more key contacts from your list of Third Party Originator 5 Select from the channel indicators (Wholesale, Non-Delegated, and
Contacts, click the Import icon. In the Import Third Party Originator Contacts Delegated) to indicate which channel/channels a Sales Rep/AE is assigned
window, select the contacts you want to import, and then click Select. To to.These channel indicators are only available for the Current Org TPO Sales
import more than one contact, press the Ctrl key, select multiple contacts, Reps View.
and then click the Select button.
NOTE: If you are creating a company but have not yet created Third Party To Assign a Primary Sales Rep (PSR):
Originator Contacts, this list is empty. You can use the import function after
• Select a sales rep and then click Set As Primary.
you have created Third Party Originator Contacts employed with this TPO.
For more information on creating Third Party Originator Contacts, refer to see • The PSR is automatically assigned as the sales rep all new TPO contacts
“Third Party Originator Contacts” on page 64. created for the organization.
3 To edit key contacts that were manually created in this tab, select the contact, • The Sales Rep column for the PSR is updated with Primary.
click the Edit icon, update information, and then click OK.
To Delete a Sales Rep:
NOTE: You can delete key contacts that were created in this tab, as well as
the key contacts imported from the Third Party Originator Contacts panel. • Select a sales rep and then click the Delete icon.
Contacts created in this tab will be deleted permanently; contacts imported NOTE: You cannot delete a primary sales rep. You need to first assign another
from Third Party Originator Contacts will be deleted from the Contacts tab, but sales rep as the primary sales rep for this company, and then delete the previous
their records will remain in the Third Party Originator Contacts panel. primary sales rep.
Sales Reps / AE Tab To View Sales Reps Based on TPO Company Assignment:
Use this tab to add your company's sales reps or account executives who manage • From the View drop-down list, select Company TPO Sales Reps to view sales
this TPO company account. After adding your sales reps, authorized users can reps assigned to the current TPO company at any level in the company/branch
view their company employees while managing this account. Assigning the sales hierarchy.
rep in this tab enables them to access and manage all loans submitted by the TPO
company. • From the View drop-down list, select Current Org. TPO Sales Reps to view
sales reps assigned to the current TPO company only.
Use the View drop-down list to view sales reps assigned to the current TPO
company only or sales reps assigned to the current TPO company at any level in Lender Contacts Tab
the company/branch hierarchy. For more information on TPO company
Use the Lender Contacts tab to display the contacts that will be listed in the Lender
hierarchies, refer to “Create Branches and Extensions in the External Company
Key Contacts widget for Encompass TPO Connect. In addition, you can manage
Hierarchy” on page 62.
contacts that are not in the TPO Global Lender Contacts setting or the Sales
Reps/AE tab.
To Assign a Sales Rep to the TPO Company:
1 Click the Sales Reps / AE tab. NOTE: The feature to manage contacts directly on this tab was introduced in the
Encompass 19.1 release.
2 Click the New icon.
• The contacts displayed on this tab are populated from the TPO Global Lender
3 In the Add Sales Rep window, select a user, and then click OK. Contacts setting and the Sales Reps/AE tab.

• A Primary check box is displayed (and selected) if the contact was populated • If the Title/Department is blank in the user’s Encompass User record, an
from the Sales Reps/AE tab and that contact was Set As Primary on that tab. error message, “The selected User Contact record must first be updated
NOTE: For information on how to set a primary contact, refer to the Sales before it can be used in this Key Lender Contacts feature. ‘Job Title’ must be
Reps/AE tab section of the Company Details setting in the Encompass online entered in the Job Title field of the selected User Contact record', is
help. displayed.
• If you clear the Name, the Title/Department, Phone, and Email fields are
• To hide a contact from the Lender Key Contacts widget for Encompass TPO
cleared.
Connect, select the Hide check box on that contact’s row.
4 In the required Title/Department field, enter a title or department for the user,
To Add a Contact: up to 30 characters.
1 Click the Add icon. 5 In the Phone field, enter the user’s phone number, up to 30 characters, if you
manually entered a Name. There is no special formatting or validation of this
field.
• If you selected a Name, this field cannot be edited.
• If you clear or enter the Name, this field is cleared and you can edit it.
• You must enter a Phone, Email, or both.
6 In the Email field, enter the user’s email address, up to 40 characters, if you
manually entered a Name.
• If you clear or enter the Name, this field is cleared and you can edit it.
7 Select the Hide check box if you want to hide this contact from the Encompass
TPO Connect Lender Key Contacts widget.
8 Click OK.
• If the Title/Department field is blank, the OK button is grayed out until all
2 Select a Channel (Channels) if you want the contact to be displayed under that validation requirements are satisfied.
channel/channels contact grouping in the Encompass TPO Connect Lender • If both the Phone and Email fields are blank, the OK button is grayed out
Key Contacts widget. or example, if you select Wholesale, the contact will be until all validation requirements are satisfied.
grouped and displayed in a “Wholesale” section.
• If the Email address format is not valid, the OK button is grayed out until all
NOTE: If you do not select a Channel, the contact will be displayed in an “All validation requirements are satisfied.
Channels” section.
9 Your new contact is added to the bottom of the Lender/Investor Contact grid.
3 In the Name field, click on the arrow to select a user from the drop-down list or
manually enter a name, up to 30 characters. To Edit a Contact:
• While the options in the drop-down list display the user’s first name, last 1 Select the contact you want to edit, and then click on the Edit icon.
name, and email, only the first and last name are populated into the Name
2 Make your changes.
field.
NOTE: You can only edit contacts you have added directly in this tab. All other
• If you select a Name, the Title/Department, Phone, and Email fields are
contacts will be disabled and cannot be edited.
populated and cannot be edited.
• If you select a Name, the Phone and Email fields are populated and cannot
be edited.

• If you clear the Name, the Title/Department, Phone, and Email fields are 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
cleared. 2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Company
• You must have a Title/Department. Details.
• You must enter a Phone, Email, or both. • You must select the Approved check box for the bank in order for it to be
• When you edit an existing contact, the Title / Department, Phone and Email listed in the Warehouse Bank Selector pop-up window. When you select
can be manually edited and saved. Approved, the current date will be populated to the Status Date field. You
can then use the drop-down option in this field to select a different date as
NOTE: This manual update will save into the Lender Contacts table, however, needed.
will not be updated in the Existing Encompass User profile.
3 In the Company/Branches panel, click Third Party Originator, and then select
3 Click OK. an existing TPO company.
• If the Title/Department field is blank, the OK button is grayed out until all 4 Click the Warehouse tab.
validation requirements are satisfied.
5 To add a bank, click the New icon, select a bank from the External Bank List
• If both the Phone and Email fields are blank, the OK button is grayed out window, and then click OK.
until all validation requirements are satisfied.
6 To view bank details, select the bank, and view the information in the
• If the Email address format is not valid, the OK button is grayed out until all Warehouse Bank Details panel.
7 To update bank information, select the bank, enter the information in the
Warehouse Bank Details panel, and then click the Save icon in the Warehouse
To Delete a Contact:
Bank Details panel.
1 Select the contact you want to delete, and then click on the Delete icon.
8 To update contact information, select the bank, clear the Use Default Contact
NOTE: You can only delete contacts you have added directly in this tab. All check box, enter the information in the Contact Information panel, and then
other contacts must be deleted from where they were added (i.e., TPO Global click the Save icon in the Warehouse Bank Details panel.
Lender Contacts setting or the Company Details Sales Reps/AE tab).
9 To include additional information about a bank, select the bank, type the
2 A warning message is displayed: “Deleting this contact will permanently information in the Notes panel, and then click the Save icon in the Warehouse
remove the entry from the settings. Do you wish to continue?”. Bank Details panel.
3 Click Yes. 10 To delete a bank, select it, and then click the Delete icon.
To Sequence Contacts in the Grid: Fees Tab

1 In the Company/Branches panel, click Third Party Originator, select the TPO Use the Fees tab to assign fees (such as Property Inspection Waiver fees, Flood
company where you want to sequence contacts. Certificate fees, and Finding Fees) to the TPO so that fees charged for each loan
2 Select the entry you want to move, and then click the Up and Down arrows. are automatically calculated and applied to the loan. Authorized users have the
ability to create a new fee manually or select from the list of TPO fees with active
Warehouse Tab and pending statuses in External Company Setup settings. TPO Fees can also be
filtered by loan channel type and/or the status of the fee (active, pending, or
Use the Warehouse tab to manage the warehouse banks associated with the
expired).
selected TPO. Authorized users have the ability to select from a list of banks set
up by the Encompass administrator in the Banks setting. You can also update NOTE: You can apply TPO Fees to the Correspondent channel only.
business information related to the bank, include notes, and update contact
information associated with the bank. To Add a TPO Fee
Each bank can be added to the same TPO company multiple times since a TPO You can manually add TPO fees or select from the set of fees configured by your
may have multiple account numbers with the same bank for handling different Encompass administrator.
types of loans.

To Add a TPO Fee Manually: • Or, click the Find icon (magnifying glass), select a field from the
1 Click the Fees tab. list, and click OK.
• Or, click the Find icon (magnifying glass), type one or more
characters in the Find field and then click Find. The first
3 In the Add New TPO Fee window, click Create new fee manually and then occurrence of the characters in any column is found. Continue
click OK. clicking Find to view additional occurrences. Select a field from
4 In the second Add New TPO Fee window: the list, and click OK.
• In the Name field, enter the TPO fee name. This will be displayed as the title • Select an Operator, select an option, and then click OK.
on the Correspondent Purchase Advice Form when the fee is itemized. NOTE: The Operator and Option define how the filter will be used. For
• In the Description field, enter a brief explanation of the fee. example: Field ID= 1172 (Loan Type), Operator = Is any of, Options = VA.
• Currently, TPO fees can only be applied to Correspondent loans. Therefore, • In the Advanced Condition Editor window, click OK.
Correspondent is automatically populated to the Channel drop-down list. • In the Add New TPO Fee window, click OK.
• In the Fee Amount field:
To Add a Fee from Pre-Defined TPO Fees:
• Select Total or Base Loan Amount, depending on how the fee is calculated
(as a percentage of the total or base loan). 1 Click the Fees tab.
• Type the fee percentage. 2 Click the New icon.
• In the +$ field, type any additional amount, if applicable. 3 In the Add New TPO Fee window, click Add fee from existing TPO Fees, and
• In the Code field, type the general account for the fee. then click OK.
NOTE: This need not be a unique value since a fee code may be listed 4 In the Add fees from Global TPO Fees list window, select the check boxes
multiple times with different effective dates or channels. corresponding to the fees you want to add, and then click OK.
• In the Start Date field, select the date from which the fee will be applied to TIP: Filter the fee list based on their channel type and/or status by using the drop-
loans based on the loan lock date. down options in this window. Type the complete name of the TPO fee and then
click the Find icon to search for a fee by name.
NOTE: If the current date is prior to the start date, the fee will not be applied
to the loan. Start date does not have to be entered. This means the fee will be To Add a Late Fee
effective immediately and be active up to the end date.
You can create late fees to apply to this TPO company or select the Late Fee set
NOTE: In the TPO Fees list, a fee is displayed as Pending if Start Date is in up by your Encompass administrator.
the future; Active if the current date is in between the start and end date or if
the start and end dates are unspecified; Expired if the End date has occurred To Add a Late Fee Manually:
in the past. 1 Click the Fees tab.
• In the End Date field, select the last date for the fee period based on the loan 2 Click Late Fee Settings.
lock date.
3 In the Edit Late Fee Settings window:
• In the Fee is Triggered field:
• Click TPO Specific Settings.
• Select Always to always apply the fee.
• In the Late Fee Grace Period (days) field, type the number of days past the
• Or, select Conditional to create a condition for when the fee is applied. deadline for which the late fee will be waived.
• Click the Find icon (magnifying glass).
• In the Grace Period uses field, select:
• In the Advanced Condition Editor window, click the New icon.
• Week Days if only week days are included
• In the Add/Edit Search Filter window: • Calendar Days if weekdays and weekends are included
• Type a Field to add as a filter. • Company Calendar if the Company Calendar dates are used

• In the Grace Period Starts field, select: To Add the Pre-Defined TPO Late Fee:
• On - if the grace period is calculated starting from the day selected below 1 Click the Fees tab.
• Day After - if the grace period is calculated from the day after the selected 2 Click Late Fee Settings.
below 3 In the Edit Late Fee Settings window, select Global TPO Settings, and then
• In the Later of section, select one or more of the following options: click OK.
• Purchase Suspense Date - the date on which the purchase was Manage TPO Fees
suspended
Use the options on the TPO Fees panel to filter and search for fees, and then edit
• Purchase Approval Date - the date when the purchase was approved or delete them. If you are dissatisfied with your updates to the TPO fees, you can
• Delivery Expiration Date - the date on which the trade expires reset them to the out-of-the-box list.
• Latest Cond’s Issued Date - the date the latest stipulations were issued
To Reset to Default:
• Other Date - Click the Find icon and then in the Select Loan Field
• Click the Reset to Default button.
window, select the date and then click Select.
• In the Days Cleared field select:
To Filter Fees:
• Purchase Approval Date - the date when the purchase was approved
• To filter fees by channel, select the appropriate channel from the Channel Type
• Cleared for Purchase Date - the date when the buyer approved the loan drop-down list.
for purchase
• To filter fees by status (Active, Pending, Expired), select the value from the
• Other Date - Click the Find icon and then in the Select Loan Field Status drop-down list.
window, select the date and then click Select.
TIP: You can use both filters to refine your search.
• In the Late Fee Can Start on a weekend field, select:
• To search a fee by name, type the complete name of the fee, and then click the
• Yes - if the late fee will be calculated starting from the weekend Lookup (magnifying glass) icon.
• No - if the late fee is calculated from Monday
• In the Include Day Cleared as Late Day field, select: To Edit a TPO Fee:
• Yes - if the late fee calculation adds one day for the day cleared • Click the fee to select it and then click the Edit icon.
• No – if the late fee calculation does not include the clearance day TIP: Use the search and filter options explained above to find the TPO fee.
• In the Fee Handled As field, select:
To Delete a TPO Fee:
• Fee - if the fee will be copied to a fee line item
Click the fee to select it and then click the Delete icon.
• Price Adjustment - if the fee is deducted from the loan price as an
adjustment TIP: Use the search and filter options explained above to find the TPO fee.
• In the Fee Percent field, enter the fee percentage.
LO Comp Tab
• In the Late Fee Dollars +$ field, type any additional amount, if applicable.
Use the LO Comp tab to assign an active compensation plan to a TPO (the
• In the Calculate As field, select: compensation your company is paying to the third party originator). After this
• Flat - if it is a one time fee assignment, authorized users can use the LO Compensation tool to track the
amount of compensation to be paid.
• Daily Fee - if the fee is calculated daily
• In the Maximum Late Days field, type the number of late days after which the NOTE: Before assigning a plan, go to LO Compensation to create LO
TPO loan will be repriced. compensation plans.
4 Click OK.

To Complete the LO Comp Tab: The key to managing commitment authority is to track three (3) data points; Max
1 Click the LO Comp tab. (Maximum) Commitment Authority, Outstanding Commitments, and Available
Amount. The Max Commitment Authority is the total dollar amount of loans
2 To assign an LO Comp plan to the TPO, in the Assigned Compensation available to be committed to the Investor that have not yet been “delivered”
Plans panel, click the New icon, click an LO Comp plan, and then click Select. (Received Date (field ID 3917) is blank on the Correspondent Loan Status Tool).
NOTE: In the Details section, you can change the Start Date of the plan if
• As loans are locked or correspondent trades are created, those amounts
necessary. By default, Encompass sets the Start Date to one day after the
increase the Outstanding Commitments amount (by commitment type - Best
compensation plan was assigned to the company or branch (i.e., the next day).
Efforts or Mandatory).
NOTE: If another plan is already in effect, the new plan must start the next day • As loans are delivered (Received Date (field ID 3917) entered for the Investor),
to ensure that two plans are not being applied to the originator on the same the loan amounts reduce the Outstanding Commitments amount.
day. The Earliest Change Date is calculated based on the Start Date and
Minimum Term # Days fields. After the plan is activated (i.e., when the plan is • The Maximum Commitment Amount less the Outstanding Amount equals the
started), if an administrator tries to assign a new compensation plan before the Available Amount. If the Available Amount will become negative with a new
minimum term of days is reached, a warning message is displayed that informs individual loan lock or correspondent trade, Encompass may prevent the loan to
the administrator that the start date for the new plan occurs prior to the “earliest be locked or the correspondent trade to be created.
change date” (i.e., prior to the minimum term of days being reached). The Another important aspect of the Commitments tab is to restrict the types of lock
administrator can then continue to add a plan or cancel the operation. After the commitments and loan delivery that a given TPO company has the authority to
Earliest Change Date is reached, the warning message will no longer be deliver.
triggered.
• Commitment types may be enabled for Best Efforts, Mandatory, or both.
3 To view an LO Comp plan’s details, in the Assigned Compensation Plans
• The delivery type of Mandatory can be enabled for Individual, Bulk, AOT, Bulk
panel, select it, and then click the View icon. You can change the Start Date of
AOT, Direct Trade, Co-Issue, and Forward.
the plan if necessary, in the LO Comp Plan section, but you cannot change the
start date here after the plan has started. NOTE: The Bulk AOT and Co-Issue delivery types are available in
Encompass 20.1 and later.
4 To delete an LO Comp plan, in the Assigned Compensation Plans panel,
select it, and then click the Delete icon. • Individual loan lock can only occur for the commitment types (Best Efforts or
Mandatory) indicated.
NOTE: This only deletes the LO Comp assignment from the TPO. The LO
Comp plan still exists in the system in Encompass Settings > Tables and Fees • Correspondent trade delivery types are only available based on the delivery
> LO Compensation. types enabled on this tab.
5 To export the LO Comp assignment history into an Excel spreadsheet and NOTE: If none of the settings are enabled on this tab, the default will be “Best
save it on your computer, in the Assigned Compensation Plans panel, click the Efforts” and “Unlimited”.
Excel icon, select the location on your computer, enter a file name, and then Master commitments created for TPO companies are configured such that they
click Save. are limited to only the types and amounts for which the TPOs are approved. The
6 On the LO Comp tab, click the Save icon. TPO's master commitments can include Best Effort and/or Mandatory and the
amount of their limit for each. These values will be used by the Trade
Commitments Tab Management tool when master commitments are created for the TPO.
Use the Commitments tab to track the TPO company's assigned commitment
authority. This commitment authority can be managed in three (3) different ways:
• Restricting individual loan locks for Best Efforts and Mandatory based on
available commitment authority.
• Restricting new correspondent trades based on available commitment authority.
• Restricting new correspondent master commitments based on available
commitment authority.

To Create a Commitment Authority for Individual Best Efforts: • Daily Volume Limit
1 Click the Commitments tab. • The Daily Volume Limit cannot exceed the Max Commitment Authority.
• If the amount is exceeded, a warning message “The Daily Volume Limit
cannot be more than the Max Commitment Authority.” is displayed.
• If an amount is not entered, the Policy for loans that exceed Daily Volume
will have no effect.
• Policy for Best Efforts Tolerance
• If “Flat Tolerance” is selected as the Tolerance Control Option, a Flat
Tolerance % field is displayed.
• If “Conditional Tolerance” is selected as the Tolerance Control Option, a
Lesser of % or $ fields are displayed. Enter both a percentage and dollar
amount to send the conditions.
• Policy for loans that exceed Daily Volume Limit
• Select No Restrictions to enable sellers to lock loans over the daily
volume limit.
• Select Don’t allow lock (default) to restrict sellers from locking loans that
are over the daily volume limit amount.
• If the policy is violated, a warning message “The loan amount exceeds the
available amount of the daily volume limit.” is displayed and the seller
2 Select the Best Efforts check box to include the TPO's best efforts in their cannot submit the lock request.
commitment authority. NOTE:This is the default message but it can be customized.
• Unlimited is automatically selected and is for the TPO that does not have • If a Daily Volume Limit is not entered, this policy will not be in effect.
any limits in their best effort commitments. 4 Click the Save icon to save your settings.
• Or, select Limited, and then enter the Max Commitment Amount for the
TPO. To Create a Commitment Authority for Individual Mandatory:
NOTE: The Outstanding Commitments field displays the total amount of 1 Click the Commitments tab.
outstanding commitments and includes all active best efforts and non-
2 Select the Mandatory check box and then enter the Max Commitment
allocated best efforts loans for this TPO. The Available Amount field displays
Amount for the TPO.
the calculated value for the Max Commitment Authority - Outstanding
Commitments. This is also represented visually as a pie chart. When the 3 If you want to configure the tolerance for each TPO, select the appropriate
Available Amount is a positive number, the pie chart will be green in an Tolerance Control Option under the Policy for Mandatory Tolerance. When
equivalent amount to the percentage available. a trade is created, the tolerance will be mapped from this new policy.
NOTE: If the Outstanding Commitments exceeds the Max Commitment NOTE: This policy is available in Encompass 20.1 and later.
Authority, the Outstanding Commitments value displays in red, the Available • The policy is enabled when the Mandatory check box is selected.
Amount displays a negative value in red, and the pie chart displays 100% in
• The mapped tolerance can be overridden on the Correspondent Trades
red.
Details tab by clicking the Lock icon next to the Tolerance field.
3 Enter a Daily Volume Limit, Policy for Best Efforts Tolerance, and Policy for
• By default, the policy is blank. If no option is selected, the Tolerance field on
loans that exceed Daily Volume Limit to define the maximum number of locks
the Correspondent Trade Details tab can continue to be manually entered.
allowed per day.
NOTE: These fields are available in Encompass 20.1 and later.

• If “Flat Tolerance” is selected as the Tolerance Control Option, a Flat To Set Policy for Trades Exceeding Max Commitment Authority:
Tolerance % field is displayed. • Select No Restrictions if there are no limitations for the TPO when they exceed
• If “Conditional Tolerance” is selected as the Tolerance Control Option, a their Maximum Commitment Authority. In this scenario, new correspondent
Lesser of % or $ fields are displayed. trades (and any correspondent master commitments) can be created for the
• Enter a tolerance percentage for mandatory trades and a dollar amount for
TPO with no limit to the Trade Amounts.
the delivery variance. • Select Don’t allow Trade creation if you do not want to enable the TPO to
4 Select the Individual delivery type. create new correspondent trades or correspondent master commitments that
when added to the current Outstanding Commitments, will exceed the Max
NOTE: If there are other delivery types to be enabled, refer to the “To Create Commitment Amount. In this scenario, when a new correspondent trade or a
a Commitment Authority for Trade Delivery Types” section below. correspondent master commitment is created, and it exceeds the Available
5 Click the Save icon to save your settings. Amount for the Mandatory commitment type, the correspondent trade or
correspondent master commitment cannot be saved and a custom Warning
To Create a Commitment Authority for Trade Delivery Types: Message is returned to the requestor.
1 Click the Commitments tab. NOTE: In the Encompass Settings > Secondary Setup > Trade
Management Setup > Trade Management Tabs section, when Enable Auto
2 Select the Mandatory check box and then enter the Max Commitment – create of Correspondent Trades for Individual Delivery Type has been
Amount for the TPO (if not previously entered). enabled, and you want to restrict trades, Ellie Mae strongly recommends that
3 Select all the delivery types that the TPO company is authorized to submit. you also restrict loans to prevent loans from being locked but not assigned to an
NOTE: Every time a Mandatory loan is locked or a correspondent trade is individual trade.
created, the associated delivery type’s Outstanding Commitments amounts will
increase along with the percentage of the Mandatory Max Commitment To Set Restricted Loans – Warning Message:
Amount. As long as the Mandatory Available Amount is positive, the pie chart In the Restricted Loans field, you must have a warning message that displays
and bar charts will display in green. when the Don’t allow lock or Don’t allow Trade creation settings are selected
NOTE: If the Outstanding Commitments exceed the Max Commitment and the associated Available Amount has been exceeded.
Authority, the Outstanding Commitments value displays in red, the Available
Amount displays a negative value in red, and the pie chart/bar graph displays
Trade Mgmt Tab
100% in red. Use the Trade Mgmt tab to manage TPO Trade Management features by TPO
client, The company-level settings for TPO Trade Management which can
4 Click the Save icon to save your settings. override these settings are located on the Trade Management Setup setting.
To Set Policy for Loans Exceeding Max Commitment Authority: • If Enable TPO Trade Management is not selected on the Trade Management
Setup setting, this tab will be disabled.
• Select No Restrictions if there are no limitations for the TPO when they exceed
their Maximum Commitment Authority for either Individual Best Efforts or • If Use Company-level – TPO Trade Management Settings is selected, the
Individual Mandatory loans. In this scenario, the TPO can lock individual loans settings selected on the Trade Management Setup setting will be used and the
above any established limit without recourse. settings on this tab cannot be edited.
• Select Don't allow lock if you do not want to enable the TPO to submit lock • If Customize Settings is selected, all settings that are enabled at the company
requests when they exceed their Maximum Commitment Authority. In this level can be edited but all settings that are disabled at the company level cannot
scenario, when a lock request is submitted and it exceeds the Available Amount be edited.
for that commitment type, the Lock Request is declined and a custom Warning
message is returned to the requestor. ONRP Tab
Use the ONRP tab to specify time and dollar limits for ONRP by Third Party
Originator (TPO) and channel.

1 Click the ONRP tab. • Saturday Hours, Sunday Hours, and Weekend/Holiday Coverage are
disabled.
6 If you select Specify Time:
• Enter the ONRP End Time. For Saturday and Sunday, you must select
Saturday Hours and/or Sunday Hours first.
• The Saturday/Sunday Hours fields are available if enabled in Lock Desk
Hours.
7 Select whether you want Weekend/Holiday Coverage.
• If Saturday Hours and/or Sunday Hours is selected in Lock Desk Hours,
the Weekend/Holiday Coverage check box is disabled.
8 Select whether you want No Maximum Limit or not.
• If selected, the ONRP Dollar Limit $ and ONRP Tolerance % are blank and
2 Select Enable ONRP for the appropriate channels to enable that channel’s
settings. cannot be edited.
• To edit a channel’s settings, you must also select:
edited.
• The related channel check box (Enable ONRP for Wholesale or Enable
ONRP for Correspondent) on the Lock Desk Schedule/ONRP tab under
Lock Desk Setup. • ONRP Tolerance % is an optional field and supports up to 2 digits.
• The related Channel Type check box (Broker or Correspondent) on the 9 Click the Save icon.
Basic Info tab.
3 Select whether you want to Use Channel Defaults or Customize Settings.
Notes Tab
Use the Notes tab to view and manage notes, comments, and additional
• If Use Channel Defaults is selected, the settings are populated by the global
information about the TPO company.
channel settings and cannot be edited.
• If Customize Settings is selected, the settings can be edited. To Complete the Notes Tab:
4 Select whether you want the ONRP coverage to be continuous or a specific 1 Click the Notes tab.
time period.
2 To create a note, click the New icon, enter information, and then click OK.
• The ONRP Start Time is set to the Lock Desk End Time and cannot be
3 To view note details, select the note, and then click the View icon.
edited.
4 To export the Notes history into an Excel spreadsheet and save it on your
• The ONRP End Time cannot be past the Lock Desk Start Time.
computer, click the Excel icon, select the location on your computer, enter a
• If Weekend/Holiday Coverage is selected, the ONRP End Time must be file name, and then click Save.
set to A.M.
5 To delete a note, select it, and then click the Delete icon.
• If the Lock Desk is set for 24 hours, the ONRP Start Time is blank and the
ONRP End Time is disabled for all ONRP settings (if central Lock Desk is TPO Connect Setup Tab
set) or the corresponding ONRP settings (if Lock Desk is set by channel). For Use the TPO Connect Setup tab to specify the TPO Connect site that the TPO
Saturday and Sunday, the Saturday/Sunday Hours check box is also company will use to manage loan files. You can access the list of all TPO Connect
disabled. websites that have been set up for your Encompass account, select from the list,
5 If you select Continuous Coverage: specify the loan originator channel, and add and remove TPO Connect sites.
edited.

To Manage the TPO Connect Setup Options: TPO Docs Tab
1 Click the TPO Connect Setup tab. Use the TPO Docs tab to view and manage the documents this TPO can access
2 Select the Test Account check box to test the features of the TPO Connect in on your TPO Connect website. Documents from the TPO Docs setting are
a test environment instead of in a live production environment. When Test automatically listed here. Authorized users can add TPO documents from their
Account is selected, loans submitted from your TPO Connect site are sent to desktop or select from the document list created by the Encompass
a loan folder you create in Encompass that is designated for test loans. administrator..
NOTE:To create the folder in Encompass Settings, go to Loan Folders. Then,
to designate this folder as the folder where test loans will be sent, use the Loan
Setup section of the Loan Settings page in TPO Connect Administration. There
you can designate a Test Pending Loans Folder and/or a Test Live Loans
Folder.
3 In the Site URL field, manually enter or select the TPO Connect URL from the
list of all TPO websites that have been set up for your Encompass account. If
this is a test record, select or enter the test TPO Connect URL.
4 From the Channel Type drop-down list, select the loan originator channel for
the TPO company.
5 Click the Add More button to include additional TPO Connect URLs
associated with the TPO.
6 Optionally, click the Delete icon in a Site URL row to remove the TPO Connect
site from the TPO company.
7 Click Save.
Add a TPO Document

You can manually add TPO documents or select from the list of documents
provided by your administrator.
NOTE: Only the following document types can be uploaded as TPO documents
- pdf, xls, xlsx, csv, xml, doc, docx, txt, tiff, jpeg, and jpg.
To Add a TPO Document from your Desktop:

1 Click the TPO Docs tab.
3 In the Add Document window, click to select Add document from your
desktop, and then click OK.

4 In the Add New Document window: • In the Add Document from existing TPO Docs window:
• In the File Name field, click the Folder icon on the far right.
• In the Browse and Attach window, select a document from your computer,
and then click Open.
• In the Document Display Name field, type the name of the document. • Click to the select the document.
• In the Start Date and End Date fields, optionally, select the period for which Tip: Type the name of the document (full or partial), click the Find icon, and
the document is valid/active. then select the document.
NOTE: A document is listed as Active in the TPO Connect Docs tab, Status • From the Place document drop-down list, select an option to define the
column, if the current date is within the validity period defined in these fields, positioning of the document within the document category.
or if the validity period is not specified. A document is listed as Pending if the • Click OK.
current date is before the Start Date; and Expired if the current date is past
the End Date defined here. 4 In the confirmation window, click OK.
• From the Category drop-down field, select the TPO Connect document Manage TPO Documents
category.
You can edit, delete, archive, and unarchive documents that you have added.
• From the Channel drop-down field, select the TPO channel for which the These documents are listed in the TPO Docs tab with a display the value of
document will be available. Uploaded in the Source column.
• From the Place document drop-down list, select the positioning of the
Documents that were not uploaded by you can only be viewed and moved within
document within the document category selected in the Category field above. their categories.
• Click OK.
To Edit a TPO Document:
To Add a TPO Connect Document from the Documents Uploaded by Your Use the Edit icon to modify TPO documents that you have uploaded. You can only
Administrator: update attributes such as the document display name, period of validity, and
1 Click the TPO Connect Docs tab. availability to loan channels. You cannot change the TPO document.
2 Click the New icon. TIP: To replace an existing document, add a new document and then delete the
3 In the Add Document window, click to select Add document from existing existing document.
TPO Docs, and then click OK. 1 Click the TPO Docs tab.
2 Click to select a document, and then click the Edit icon.
3 In the Edit Document window, update the information, and then click OK.

Activate/Deactivate TPO Connect Documents Archive/Unarchive TPO Documents
Use the document activation feature to control access to active documents for Use the archive feature to move documents, that are no longer being used, to the
your TPO Connect website users. You can deactivate documents to limit access Archived Docs tab. Instead of deleting the documents that are no longer being
to them temporarily. used, you can archive them so that the document list in the TPO Docs tab is up-
This feature works on active documents (uploaded by you and the Encompass to-date and more manageable. Archived documents can be moved back to the
administrator) in toggle mode - selecting the Active check box for Inactive TPO Docs tab if required.
documents deactivates the documents, selecting the same check box for Inactive NOTE: You can only archive/unarchive documents that you uploaded.
documents activates them.
To Archive a TPO Document:
To Deactivate TPO Documents:
• Click the TPO Docs tab, click to select the document, and then click Archive
• Click the check box in the Active column corresponding to the active document Selected to move the document to the Archived Docs tab.
to deactivate a document.
• Click the check box in the Active column corresponding to the Category to To Unarchive a TPO Document:
deactivate all documents within the document category. • Click the Archived Docs tab, click to select the document, and then click
Unarchive to move the document to the TPO Docs tab.
To Activate TPO Documents:
• Click the check box in the Active column corresponding to the Inactive
Attachments Tab
document to activate a document. Use the Attachments tab to include attachments such as financial documents and
loan applications related to the TPO. You can add attachments from your
• Click the check box in the Active column corresponding to the Category to
computer (max file size is 25 MB), enter the filing date and the date on which the
activate all documents within the document category.
document will expire. Encompass calculates the countdown to the expiration date
and enters the value in this tab. You can view and edit the attachment details and
To View a TPO Document:
also view the attachment in its original format.
You can view all documents in the TPO Docs tab irrespective of their status and
by whom they were uploaded. To Create an Attachment:
• Click to select the document and then click the View icon. 1 Click the Attachments tab.
2 Click the New icon to add an attachment to the TPO company.
To Delete a TPO Document:
3 In the Attachment page, click the Folder icon, locate and select the attachment
You can delete documents that were uploaded by you only (Source of document on your computer.
displays Uploaded in the TPO Docs tab).
4 In the Open window, click the Open button.
• Click to select the document and then click the Delete icon.
5 In the Attachment window, update the Attachment Name.
To Move a Document Within Its Category:
6 In the Description field, enter a brief explanation of the attachment.
You can move any document within its category. The sequence of the documents
7 From the Category drop-down list, select the type of attachment.
listed here is reflected in the document list in the TPO Connect website.
8 In the File Date field, enter the date of application from the calendar.
• Click to select the document and then click the up or down arrows to change
the document's position in the category. 9 In the Expiration Date field, enter the attachment’s expiration date, if
applicable.

• The Days to Expire field automatically displays the countdown to the TPO ID of the company above it in the hierarchy. When you change the
expiration date. Organization Type from Company Extension to Branch, the TPO ID updates
NOTE: If the document has expired, a red alert is displayed in the Attachment automatically. If the parent company is on your company’s watchlist, the sub-
window (next to the Days to Expire field) and on the Attachments tab. organizations are automatically added to the watchlist and can be updated only
when you remove the parent organization from the watchlist. Other information
inherited from the parent company such as the channel type, address, approval
status, assigned primary sales rep, business information, license, loan type, and
TPO Connect website URL can be updated without changing the parent company
information.
To Create a Branch:
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Company
Details.
3 In the Company/Branches panel, select the company under which you want to
create the branch, and then click the New icon.
-OR-
Right-click the company under which you want to create the branch, and then
select Add Organization.
• The Company Details page displays with the Use Parent Info check boxes
selected, and applicable information from the parent company inherited by
10 Click OK.
the branch or extension.
To Manage Attachments: 4 In the Organization Name field, enter the name of the company branch or
extension.
• To edit an attachment, select a document, click the Edit icon, and in the
Attachment window, update the information, and then click OK. 5 To update the information, clear the Use Parent Info check boxes and then
enter information as needed.
• To view an attachment in its original format, select the document, and then click
the View icon. 6 To identify the company as a branch, in the Company Details panel, clear the
Use Parent Info check box, and from the Organization Type drop-down list,
• To delete an attachment, select the document, and then click the Delete icon.
select Branch.
Custom Fields Tab NOTE: A Company Extension inherits the TPO ID of the organization folder
above it in the Company/Branches hierarchy. When you create a sub-
Use this tab to track the custom fields for the TPO company. The custom fields are
organization from a company, the system identifies it as a Company Extension
configured in the TPO Custom Fields setting, but when viewing the fields on the
and assigns it the same TPO ID as that of the company directly above it in the
Custom Fields tab authorized users can also enter custom data for these fields as
company hierarchical structure. When you update the Company Extension to
needed. To create and manage custom fields, refer to “TPO Custom Fields” on
Branch, the TPO ID updates automatically. When you create a Branch
page 76.
Extension under that Branch, the Branch Extension again inherits the TPO ID
Create Branches and Extensions in the External Company from the Branch.
Hierarchy 7 Click Save.
After you have created a TPO company, you can create branches and extensions
nested under the company in hierarchical order. When you create the sub-
organization, it is automatically listed as a Company Extension and inherits the

Search for TPO Companies and Branches Based on Their To Delete TPO Companies or Branches:
Organization Name and/or Organization ID • To delete a TPO organization, select the company or branch, and then click the
Use the Search TPOs by Organization panel to search TPO companies and Delete icon.
branches based on their Organization Name or Organization ID.
To Export TPO Companies and Branches:
To Search for TPO Companies Based on Their Organization Name: • In the Company/Branches panel, click the Third Party Originators folder, and
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. then click the Export icon.
2 In the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Company NOTE: You can export all the companies in the Third Party Originators folder
Details. and/or individual TPO companies and branches. When you select a folder and
click the Export icon, the selected organization and all folders below it are
3 In the Company/Branches panel, select Name, type the full or partial name of exported to an Excel file.
the TPO Organization, and then click the Lookup icon.
4 Click the Down button to see more results that match your search criteria.
TIP: For example, if you type the search string “mont”, results such as
“Fremont Mortgage”, “Mont Claire Holdings”, and “Bank of Belmont” will be
highlighted as your search results.
5 Click the Clear button to remove the search string.
To Import TPO Companies Using the Sample CSV File in Encompass:
6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to start a new search.
You can import one or more companies using a CSV file instead of manually
To Search for TPO Companies Based on Their Organization ID: creating the records in Encompass. A sample CSV file is available for you to use
as a template for your company information.
2 In the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Company NOTE: The following are mandatory fields for TPO Company imports, as
Details. designated by red stars in the Company Details window: Organization Name,
Channel Type, Company Legal Name, Address, City, State, Zip, Phone Number,
3 In the Company/Branches panel, select ID, type the full or partial Organization Primary Sales Rep. Name.
ID of the TPO Organization, and then click the Lookup icon.
1 In the Company/Branches panel, click the Third Party Originators folder, and
4 Click the Down button to see more results that match your search criteria. then click the Import icon.
TIP: For example, if you type the search string “543”, results such as “54321”, 2 In the File Selection section, click the or click here to open import template
“12543”, “15430” will be highlighted as your search results. link.
5 Click the Clear button to remove the search string. 3 Enter information in the sample file, making sure that you have information for
6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to start a new search. the mandatory fields, and save as a CSV file.
4 In the TPO Organization Import Wizard window, click Browse.
Manage TPO Companies and Branches
5 In the Select File to Import window, locate and select the file, and then click
Use the options in the Company/Branches panel to edit, delete, export, and import
Open.
TPO companies.
6 In the TPO Organization Import Wizard window, click Next.
To Edit an Existing TPO Company or Branch:
1 In the Company/Branches panel, select the organization, and then click the
Edit icon.
2 In the Company Details window, update the information, and then click Save.

7 In the Parsing Options window, select the First row contains header To Export Company License Information:
information check box, and then click Next. Using the License tab in the Company Details setting, authorized Encompass
users have the ability to manage a Third Party Organization's (TPO) license
information. Starting in Encompass 15.2, these authorized users can also export
a TPO company or branch's license information using the options in Encompass
Settings. Only licenses that have the Select check box selected in the Company
Details window, License tab are included in the export.
NOTE: Users with Personas that have access to Company Details in External
Settings have the ability to export TPO licenses.
1 Go to Encompass > Settings > External Company Setup> Company
Details.
2 Click the + sign next to the Third Party Originators folder to view all the TPO
8 In the Data Mapping window, if required, click each column header to assign companies.
the data to a field, and then click Import.
3 Right-click the company from which you want to export license information and
9 Click OK in response to the confirmation message. select Export Licenses.
To Import TPO Companies Using Your Own CSV File:

NOTE: The following are mandatory fields for TPO Company imports, as
designated by red stars in the Company Details window: Organization Name,
Channel Type, Company Legal Name, Address, City, State, Zip, Phone Number,
Primary Sales Rep. Name.
1 In the Company/Branches panel, click the Third Party Originators folder, and
then click the Import icon.
2 In the TPO Organization Import Wizard window, click Browse.
3 In the Select File to Import window, locate and select the file, and then click
Open.
4 In the TPO Organization Import Wizard window, click Next. 4 In the Save File window, click Save.
5 In the Parsing Options window: TIP: If the downloaded file does not open due to invalid file format or file
• If the first row in your data file contains column headers, select the First row extension issues, rename the downloaded file extension as .csv, and then open
contains header information check box to prevent the headers from being the file.
imported.
Third Party Originator Contacts
• Click Next.
Third Party Originator Contacts for a TPO company are employees of the TPO
6 In the Data Mapping window, if required, click each column header to assign company with whom your organization conducts business.
Use the Third Party Originator Contacts panel to add and manage contacts for
7 Click OK in response to the confirmation message.
the selected TPO and include information such as their last name, first name,
roles, NMLS ID, and status of the ID. New contacts can be created by manually
adding individual records or by importing multiple records using a CSV file. You

can also export a subset of data for all TPO Contacts from Encompass onto your To Enter TPO Contact Information:
computer using the options in this panel. Authorized users have the ability to drag 1 Enter the first name, last name, and email address of your TPO contact.
contacts between organization folders within the same company.
NOTE: The Use Company Address check box is selected by default and the
NOTE: Contacts cannot be moved between different companies and cannot be TPO contact’s address fields are not editable and are automatically populated
deleted from a branch or a company if they are the primary manager for that with the TPO company’s information. To enter a different address, clear the
branch or company. If you attempt to delete the primary manager of a company, Use Company Address check box, and enter the information.
a warning message displays, indicating that a new primary manager must be
assigned before deleting the contact. 2 Enter additional contact information as needed.
• The email address you enter in the Email field will automatically copy to the
To Create a New Third Party Originator Contact: Login Email field in the TPO WebCenter Setup section.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 3 In the NMLS ID field, enter the contact’s NMLS license number.
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Company • Select the NMLS Current check box if the contact’s NMLS credentials are
Details. valid and up-to-date.
3 In the Company/Branches panel, select the TPO company.
Rate Sheet and Lock Information
4 In the Third Party Originator Contacts panel, click the New icon.
The Use Parent Info check box is selected by default, and if the rate sheet and
NOTE: The TPO Contact Details page opens with an auto-generated Contact lock information for the associated TPO company is already entered in the TPO
ID assigned to this contact. Company Details page, the same information is automatically populated here.
To Enter Rate Sheet and Lock Information:

1 If the TPO contact’s email address and fax number to which the system will
send the Rate Sheet and Lock information is different from the TPO company’s
contact information, clear the Use Parent Info check box.
2 Enter contact information as applicable.
TPO WebCenter Setup

Use this section to define the TPO Connect websites that the TPO contact can
access and the TPOs login information (such as user ID and password). The
Login Email field will already be populated with the contact’s email address if it
was already entered in the TPO Contact Information section.
To Complete the TPO WebCenter Setup:

1 If the TPO contact’s email address for logging in to the TPO Connect website
is different from the email address entered in the TPO Contact Information
section, enter the TPO Connect email address.
2 If the TPO contact has forgotten their TPO Connect login credentials, in the
Password field, click Reset.
5 Follow the instructions in the following sections to add or edit contact • Typically, you will not need to use this during contact creation, but later, when
information. You must enter information in the required fields; for non-required the contact has already started using TPO Connect, and forgotten their
fields, enter information depending on your business requirements. password.
6 Click Save.

3 In the message window confirming the temporary password creation, click OK. • The Sent Date field is automatically updated with the current date and time,
and the Sent By field is updated with the first name and last name associated
with your Encompass profile.
4 In the message window displaying the temporary password, click OK.
5 After creating a contact, in the Welcome Email field, click Preview and Send.
7 From the Site URL 1 drop-down field, select the TPO Connect site that the
6 In the Welcome Email message window, click Send. contact will use to submit loans to your company.
8 To add additional websites for this contact to use, click the Add More button
and then select the website from the Site URL drop-down list. Repeat this step
for each additional website you want to add.
Approval Status
Use the Approval Status panel to indicate the TPO contact’s approval condition
with your company. The Current Status drop-down field in this panel has
customizable values and can be configured by your Encompass administrator
using TPO Settings.
To Update a Contact’s Approval Status:

1 From the Current Status drop-down list, select the TPO contact’s current
status.
2 Select the Add to Watchlist check box if loans submitted by the contact need
to be monitored. This will result in this TPO’s loans having a watchlist warning
in the loan header.
3 The Current Status Date field automatically populates the current date when
you enter the Current Status in step 1. If you want to enter a different date, click
the downward arrow at the end of the field, and then in the calendar, click to
select a date.
4 In the Approval Date field, enter the date the contact was approved by your
company.

TPO Sales Rep Information • Contacts to whom you assign the Manager role here are displayed for
By default, the primary sales rep assigned to the contact’s company is auto- selection in the Manager drop-down list located on the Company Details
populated in this section. However, you can assign a different sales rep to the window's Basic Info tab. The Welcome email will be sent to the manager you
contact as needed. select from that drop-down list.
NOTE: If you intend for this contact to be eligible to be assigned to a loan file
To Assign a Sales Rep to the Contact: so they can perform loan officer or loan processor tasks, you must also
1 In the TPO Sales Rep Information panel, click the New icon. assign the Loan Officer or Loan Processor role to the contact as applicable.
Contacts with only the Manager role assigned to them will not be listed in the
2 In the Add Sales Rep window, select a sales rep, and then click OK. Loan Officer or Loan Processor drop-down lists located on the Loan Details
• The TPO Sales Rep Information panel is populated with the selected sales page (Loan Summary tab) on your TPO WebCenter website and therefore
rep’s information. will not be eligible to be assigned to the loan file by another loan team
member.
Roles • Administrator - An administrator can be assigned to maintain the day-to-day
You must assign a role to the contact to define the contact’s access rights to the set up of the company's contacts.
TPO Connect site. If you do not assign a role, an alert message displays, • A company can have multiple administrator contacts.
indicating that the contact must have at least one role assigned to them.
• Administrators may view, edit and create contacts, originate and edit loans,
and view or edit loans created by other contacts in their company.
NOTE: If you intend for this contact to be eligible to be assigned to a loan file
so they can perform loan officer or loan processor tasks, you must also
assign the Loan Officer or Loan Processor role to the contact as applicable.
Contacts with only the Administrator role assigned to them will not be listed
in the Loan Officer or Loan Processor drop-down lists located on the Loan
Details page (Loan Summary tab) on your TPO WebCenter website and
therefore will not be eligible to be assigned to the loan file by another loan
team member.
To Assign a Role to the Contact: • Loan Officer - Loan officers can edit only their contact information. They may
1 In the Roles panel, click the New icon. create loans and edit loans where they are the assigned loan officer.
• Loan Processor - Loan processors can edit only their contact information. They
2 In the Add roles for the contact window, select one or more roles, and the
click Add. may edit loans where they are the assigned loan processor or they may edit
loans created by other contacts in their company. (Loan access is determined
• For additional information, refer to “Types of Roles” on page 67. by the Access to loans when the role is Loan Processor setting on the Loan
3 To delete a role, select the role in the Roles panel, click the Delete icon, and in Settings page in TPO WebCenter Administration.)
the confirmation window, click Yes.
License
Types of Roles When you create a TPO contact whose role includes loan officer responsibilities,
The following types of roles can be assigned. Multiple contacts can have the same you can specify the states in which the contact is licensed to originate loans.
role within a TPO company and multiple roles can be assigned to one contact.
To Specify TPO Contact Licensing:
• Manager - This user is the primary contact for the company or branch and is
1 In the Licenses panel, select the Active check boxes for the states in which the
often the broker/owner. Managers may create and manage the user accounts
loan officer is licensed to originate loans.
on your TPO WebCenter website and update the company or branch account
information in Encompass. They also have access to all loan files originated 2 Use the Deselect All or Select All buttons to clear or select all the check boxes.
under their branch and can set up a user as an Administrator.

3 To specify a license number, click to highlight a state, and then type the license • Select Replace URLs with one or more selected URLs, and then select
number in the License Number field. the check boxes corresponding to the TPO WebCenter websites that you
4 To specify an expiration date for the license, click to highlight a state, and then want to assign to the contact.
in the End Date field, enter the expiration date (MM/DD/YYYY). NOTE: If you choose this option, the contact cannot access their existing
TPO WebCenter websites and will now have access to the selected
Notes TPO WebCenter websites only.
Use the Notes panel to enter additional information about the contact. • Select Add one or more URLs to their existing URLs and then select the
check boxes corresponding to the TPO WebCenter websites that you want
Manage Third Party Originator Contacts to assign to the contact.
Use the Company Details setting to create and manage lenders, brokers, and NOTE: If you choose this option, the contact will have access to the selected
third party originators (TPO) with whom your company does business. Use the TPO WebCenter website(s), in addition to their current TPO WebCenter
options in the Third Party Originator Contacts panel on this screen to edit, website assignments.
export, delete, and import TPO contacts from CSV files.
4 Click the Move button.
To Edit an Existing TPO Contact: 5 If the contact's existing TPO WebCenter websites are not associated with the
1 In the Third Party Originator Contacts panel, select the contact, and then click destination organization, a warning message displays indicating that those
the Edit icon. websites will be deleted. Click OK to confirm.
2 In the TPO Contact Details page, update the information, and then click Save. 6 If the Sales Rep /AE assigned to the contact does not exist in the destination
company, a warning message displays indicating that the destination
company's Primary Sales Rep will be assigned to the contact. Click OK to
Move Contacts to a Different Organization confirm.
Use this feature to move multiple TPO contacts between companies and then
consolidate the contacts within one company, especially during migration. When Move Contacts Within an Organization
you move the contact, you have the option to keep the contact's original
You can move contacts within the same TPO company (and across hierarchies)
TPO WebCenter website assignment, replace the contact's existing
by dragging the contact from the Third Party Originator Contacts panel to the
TPO WebCenter website URLS with the destination organization's URLs, or
destination organization folder.
enable the contact to access their existing TPO WebCenter websites as well as
the destination organization's TPO WebCenter websites. If the Account Executive
assigned to the contact is not listed with the destination company, you can assign To Move Contacts Within an Organization:
the destination company's Primary Sales Rep to the contact. 1 In the Third Party Originator Contacts panel, select the contact.
2 Drag the contact to the destination organization in the Company/Branches
To Move Contacts to a Different Organization: panel.
1 In the Third Party Originator Contacts panel, select a contact and then click the
Move Contacts icon. Export TPO Contacts
2 In the Consolidate Contacts window, select the organization to which you want Use the Export feature to save the displayed contact information on to your
to move the contact. computer in Excel spreadsheet (CSV) format. You can export one or more
• The TPO WebCenter websites assigned to the organization are listed in the contacts at a time.
right panel.
To Export TPO Contacts:
3 To assign TPO WebCenter website URLs to the contact, perform one of the
following: 1 In the Third Party Originator Contacts panel, click the Export icon.
• Select Keep existing URLs to retain the contact's current TPO WebCenter • This will export all your TPO contacts. If you want to export only some of the
website assignment TPO contacts, select them in the Third Party Originator Contacts panel, and
then click Export.

2 In the Save File window, browse to the location where you want to save the file. 5 In the Parsing Options window, select the First row contains header
3 In the File name field, enter the file name, and then click Save. information check box, and then click Next.
Delete TPO Contacts

Use the Delete icon to delete one or more TPO contacts.
To Delete TPO Contacts:

1 To delete a single contact, select the contact, and then click the Delete icon.
2 To delete multiple contacts, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard, click the
contacts to select them, and then click the Delete icon.
NOTE: Contacts cannot be deleted from a branch or a company if they are the
primary manager for that branch or company. If you attempt to delete the
primary manager of a company, a warning message displays, indicating that a
new primary manager must be assigned before deleting the existing one. A
contact is assigned as a TPO company’s manager in the Company Details
page > Company Information tab > Company Details panel > Manager field.
Import TPO Contacts Using CSV Files

You can import one or more contacts using a CSV file instead of manually creating
the contacts in Encompass. A sample CSV file is available for you to use as a 6 In the Data Mapping window, if required, click each column header to assign
template for your contact information, or you can use your own CSV file. the data to a field, and then click Import.
To Import TPO Contacts Using the Sample CSV File in Encompass:
NOTE: The following are mandatory fields for TPO Contact imports: First name, To Import TPO Contacts Using Your Own CSV File:
Last name, Login Email, Email, Sales Rep Userid, Role.
NOTE: The following are mandatory fields for TPO Contact imports: First name,
1 In the Third Party Originator Contacts panel, click the Import icon. Last name, Login Email, Email, Sales Rep Userid, Role.
2 In the File Selection section, click the or click here to open import template 1 In the Third Party Originator Contacts panel, click the Import icon.
link.
2 In the TPO Contact Import Wizard window, click Browse.
3 Enter information in the sample file, making sure that you have information for
the mandatory fields, and save as a CSV file. 3 In the Select File to Import window, locate and select the file, and then click
Open.
4 In the TPO Contact Import Wizard window, click Next.
4 In the TPO Contact Import Wizard window, click Next.
5 In the Parsing Options window:
• If the first row in your data file contains column headers, select the First row
contains header information check box to prevent the headers from being
imported.
• Click Next.
6 In the Data Mapping window, if required, click each column header to assign

Send Welcome Emails to TPO Contacts 5 In the Save File window, click Save.
Use the Send Welcome Email icon to send welcome email(s) to one or more TIP: If the downloaded file does not open due to invalid file format or file
TPO contacts. After the welcome email is sent, a Welcome Email Sent column is extension issues, rename the downloaded file extension as .csv, and then open
added to the Third Party Originator Contacts panel listing the date and time of the file.
email delivery to the contact(s).
To Send Welcome Emails to TPO Contacts: TPO Settings

1 In the Third Party Originator Contacts panel, select one or more contacts.
Use the TPO Settings option to create custom values for drop-down menus in the
2 Click the Send Welcome Email icon. Company Details and Contact Details settings such as company and contact
NOTE: If a welcome email was previously sent to the contact, in the Send status, company rating, attachment category, and price groups. Some values are
Welcome Email window, click the Include button to reset the contact's available out of the box. You can edit or delete these values, if required.
TPO WebCenter website password and include a new password in the welcome
email. Or, click the Don't Include button to keep the password unchanged. Current Company Status
Use the Current Company Status drop-down list to configure the values in the
NOTE: Click the Export button to download the list of contacts who had
Current Status drop-down list located on the Company Information tab in the
previously received welcome emails and save a copy of the MS Excel file on your
Company Details window. The following values are available by default:
computer.
• Application Pending
To Export TPO Contact License Information: • Application Denied
Using the License section in TPO Contact Details setting, authorized Encompass • Active
users have the ability to manage a TPO Contact's license information. Starting in
• Inactive
Encompass 15.2, these authorized users can also export a TPO contact's license
information using the options in Encompass Settings. Only licenses that have the • Suspended
Active check box selected in the License section of the TPO Contact Details • Cancelled
window are included in the export.
You can update the values listed above as well as add new values as needed.
NOTE: Users with a persona that has access to Company Details in External
Settings have the ability to export TPO contact licenses. To Add a New Current Company Status Value:
1 Go to Encompass Settings > External Company Setup> Company Details. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
2 Click the + sign next to the Third Party Originators folder to view all the TPO 2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO
companies. Settings.
3 Click to select the company to which the TPO contact belongs. 3 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Current Company Status.
4 Right-click the contact whose licenses you want to export and then select 4 Click the New icon.
Export Licenses.
5 In the Add New Setting window, enter the company status value, and then
click OK.
You can update the values listed above as well as add new values as needed.
To Edit a Current Company Status Value:

1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Current Company Status.
2 Select a status and then click the Edit icon.

3 In the Edit Setting Window, enter the new name of the Company Status, and To Delete a Current Contact Status Value:
then click OK. 1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Current Contact Status.
2 Select a status and then click the Delete icon.
To Move a Current Company Status Value Up or Down In the List:
1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Current Company Status. Company Rating
2 Select a status and then click the Up or Down arrow to change the position of Use the Company Rating drop-down list to configure the values in the Company
the value in the Current Company Status drop-down list. Rating drop-down list located on the Company Information tab in the Company
Details window. Ratings are based on your company’s own scale and
To Delete a Current Company Status Value: requirements. A rating of 1 may be considered the top rating or it can be the lowest
1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Current Company Status. rating depending on your company’s scale. Ratings of 1 - 5 are provided by
default.
2 Select a status and then click the Delete icon.
You can update these values or replace the list based on how your company
Current Contact Status tracks company ratings.
Use the Current Contact Status drop-down list to configure the values in the
Current Status drop-down list in the TPO Contact Details page. This setting is not To Add a New Company Rating Value:
available with default values. Some suggested values are Approved, Exempt, 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
Denied, Suspended, Expired, or Surrendered. 2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click
TPO Settings.
To Add a New Current Contact Status Value:
3 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Company Rating.
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO
Settings. 5 In the Add New Setting window, enter the company rating value, and then click
OK.
3 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Current Contact Status.
4 Click the New icon. To Edit a Company Rating Value:
5 In the Add New Setting window, enter the contact status value, and then click 1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Company Rating.
OK. 2 Select a rating and then click the Edit icon.
To Edit a Current Contact Status Value: 3 In the Edit Setting Window, enter the new value of the Company Rating, and
then click OK.
1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Current Contact Status.
2 Select a status and then click the Edit icon. To Move a Company Rating Value Up or Down In the List:
3 In the Edit Setting Window, enter the new name of the Contact Status, and then 1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Company Rating.
click OK. 2 Select a rating and then click the Up or Down arrow to change the position of
the value in the Company Rating drop-down list.
To Move a Current Contact Status Value Up or Down In the List:
1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Current Contact Status. To Delete a Company Status Value:
2 Select a status and then click the Up or Down arrow to change the position of 1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Company Rating.
the value in the Current Contact Status drop-down list. 2 Select a rating and then click the Delete icon.

Attachment Category Document Category
Use the Attachment Category drop-down list to configure the values in the Use the Document Category option to create custom values for document
Category drop-down list in the Attachments tab in the Company Details setting to categories that are available in TPO Connect.
enable users to choose consistent categories for files attached to a TPO
NOTE: Out of the box values are not available for this setting. You can add values
company. The following values are available by default:
and then edit and delete them as required.
• Application Files
• Financial Files
• License Files
• Other Files
You can update the values listed above as well as add new values to suit your
business needs.
To Add a New Attachment Category Value:

2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click To Add a Document Category Value:
TPO Settings. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
3 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Attachment Category. 2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO
4 Click the New icon. Settings.
5 In the Add New Setting window, enter the category value, and then click OK. 3 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Document Category.
To Edit an Attachment Category Value:
5 In the Add New Setting window, enter the document category value, and then
1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Attachment Category. click OK.
2 Select a category and then click the Edit icon.
To Edit an Existing Document Category Value:
3 In the Edit Setting Window, enter the new value of the Attachment Category,
and then click OK. 1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Document Category.
2 Select a document category and then click the Edit icon.
To Move an Attachment Category Up or Down In the List:
3 In the Edit Setting window, enter the new name of the document category, and
1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Attachment Category. then click OK.
2 Select a category and then click the Up or Down arrow to change the position
of the value in the Category drop-down list. To Move an Existing Document Category Value Up or Down in the List:
1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Document Category.
To Delete an Attachment Category Value:
2 Select a category and then click the Up or Down arrow to change the position
1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Attachment Category. of the category in the Documents page of your TPO Connect website.
2 Select a category and then click the Delete icon.
To Delete a Document Category Value:
Price Group 1 From the TPO Settings drop-down list, select Document Category.
Use the Price Group drop-down list to configure the values in the Price Group 2 Select a document category and then click the Delete icon.
drop-down list in the Company Details setting > Basic Info tab > Product and
Pricing panel. This setting is available for Optimal Blue customers only.

TPO Fees • In the Description field, type a brief explanation of the fee.
• Currently, TPO fees can only be applied to Correspondent loans. Therefore,
Use the TPO Fees setting to configure how fees are calculated in TPO loans.
“Correspondent” is automatically populated to the Channel drop-down list.
To Add a TPO Fee: • In the Fee Amount field:
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. • Select Total or Base Loan Amount, depending on how the fee is
calculated (as a percentage of the total or base loan).
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO Fees.
• Type the fee percentage.
3 In the TPO Fees panel, click the New icon.
• In the +$ field, type any additional amount, if applicable.
• In the Code field, type the general account for the fee.
NOTE: This need not be a unique value since a fee code may be listed
multiple times with different effective dates or channels.
• In the Start Date field, select the date from which the fee will be applied to
loans based on the loan lock date.
4 In the Add New TPO Fee window, enter the following details: NOTE: If the current date is prior to the start date, the fee will not be applied
to loan. Start date does not have to be entered. This means the fee will be
NOTE: Required fields are marked with red asterisks and must be completed.
effective immediately and be active up to the end date.
• In the End Date field, select the last date for the fee period based on the loan
lock date.
NOTE: If the current date is after this date, the fee will not be applied to loan.
End date does not have to be entered. This means the fee will not
automatically end after it is past the start date.
NOTE: In the TPO Fees list, a fee is displayed as Active if Start Date is in the
future; Active if the current date is in between the start and end date or if the
start and end dates are unspecified; Expired if the End date has occurred in the
past.
• In the Fee is Triggered field:
• Select Always to always apply the fee.
• Or, select Conditional to create a condition for when the fee is applied.
• Click the Lookup icon (magnifying glass).
• In the Advanced Condition Editor window, click the New icon.
• In the Name field, enter the TPO fee name. This will be displayed as the title
on the Correspondent Purchase Advice Form when the fee is itemized.

• In the Add/Edit Search Filter window: 4 In the Edit Late Fee Settings window:
• Type a Field to add as a filter.

• Or, click the Lookup icon (magnifying glass), select a field from the list,
and click OK.
• Or, click the Lookup icon (magnifying glass), type one or more characters
in the Find field and then click Find. The first occurrence of the characters
in any column is found. Continue clicking Find to view additional
occurrences. Select a field from the list, and click OK.
• Select an Operator, select an option, and then click OK. • In the Late Fee Grace Period (days) field, type the number of days past the
deadline for which the late fee will be waived.
• The Operator and Option define how the filter will be used. For example:
Field ID= 1172 (Loan Type), Operator = Is any of, Options = VA. • In the Grace Period uses field, select:
• In the Advanced Condition Editor window, click OK. • Week Days if only week days are included
5 In the Add New TPO Fee window, click OK. • Calendar Days if weekdays and weekends are included
• Company Calendar if the Company Calendar dates are used
Edit Late Fee Settings • In the Grace Period Starts field, select:
Use the Late Fee Settings option to configure late fee settings for each TPO.
• On - if the grace period is calculated starting from the day selected below
To Edit Late Fee Settings: • Day After - if the grace period is calculated from the day after the selected
below
• In the Later of section, select one or more of the following options:
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO Fees.
• Purchase Suspense Date - the date on which the purchase was
3 Click the Late Fee Settings button. suspended
• Purchase Approval Date - the date when the purchase was approved
• Delivery Expiration Date - the date on which the trade expires

• Latest Cond’s Issued Date - the date when the latest stipulations were To Search for a TPO Fee by Name:
issued. • Type the complete name of the TPO fee and then click the Lookup icon
• Other Date - Click the Lookup icon and then in the Select Loan Field (magnifying glass).
window, select the date, and then click Select.
• In the Day Cleared field, select: To Edit a TPO Fee:
• Purchase Approval Date - the date when the purchase was approved • Select a TPO fee and from the TPO Fees list and then click the Edit icon.
• Cleared for Purchase Date - the date when the buyer approved the TIP: Locate the TPO fee by using the filtering options described above.
loan for purchase
To Delete a TPO Fee:
• Other Date - Click the Lookup icon and then in the Select Loan Field
window, select the date, and then click Select. • Select a TPO fee and then click the Delete icon.
• In the Late Fee Can Start on a weekend field, select:

• Yes - if the late fee will be calculated starting from the weekend
TPO Reassignment
• No - if the late fee is calculated from Monday
Use the TPO Reassignment tool to view TPO companies and contacts assigned
• In the Include Day Cleared as Late Day field, select:
to a TPO sales rep and reassign the company/contact to another sales rep. For
• Yes - if the late fee calculation adds one day for the day cleared example, if a TPO sales rep is no longer with your company, use this feature to
• No – if the late fee calculation does not include the clearance day reassign the TPO organizations and contacts the TPO sales rep was managing to
a different TPO sales rep.
• In the Fee Handled As field, select:
• Fee - if the fee will be copied to a fee line item To Reassign the TPO Company/Contact Assigned to a Sales Rep to Another
• Price Adjustment - if the fee is deducted from the loan price as an Sales Rep:
adjustment 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
• In the Late Fee Percent field, enter the fee percentage. 2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO
• In the Late Fee Dollars +$ field, type any additional amount, if applicable. Reassignment.
• In the Calculate As field, select: 3 Click the Lookup icon (magnifying glass).
• Flat - if it is a one time fee 4 In the Sales Rep window, select the sales rep whose companies and contacts
• Daily Fee - if the fee is calculated daily need to be reassigned, and then click OK.
• In the Maximum Late Days field, type the number of late days after which the 5 n the TPO Organizations and Contacts column, select the TPO company
TPO loan will be repriced. and/or TPO contact that needs to be reassigned.
5 Click OK. • Press Ctrl or Shift on your keyboard and simultaneously click a row in the
first column to select multiple TPO companies and contacts.
Managing TPO Fees 6 In the Reassign to a Sales Rep column, select the new sales rep, and then
Use the options in the TPO Fees panel to filter fees by loan channel type and/or click Reassign.
the status of the fee (active, pending, or expired), search for the fee by name, and 7 In the success confirmation message window, click OK.
then edit or delete the fee.
NOTE: You can use one or more filters at a time.
To Filter TPO Fees by Channel Type:

• Select an option from the Channel drop-down list.

TPO Custom Fields To Delete a TPO Custom Field:
1 Clear the text from the Field Description.
Use the TPO Custom Fields setting to create up to 100 custom fields for your TPO
companies and contacts. There are a variety of field types, two of which are drop- 2 Change the Field Type selection to blank.
down lists of predefined selections that you create. TPO custom fields configured 3 Click the Save icon.
within this setting are displayed in the Custom Fields tab on the Company Details
window. Map Custom Fields to Loan Fields (Optional)
You can map custom TPO fields to loan fields in Encompass so that when a loan
To Create TPO Custom Fields: is submitted from this TPO company or contact, the custom fields will be
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. automatically copied to the corresponding field in the loan file.
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO Custom In the Map Custom TPO Fields to Loan Fields (Optional) section, in the Loan Field
Fields. ID field, enter the ID for the loan field that will be mapped to the custom field. The
3 Enter a name for the tab. loan field description populates automatically.
• The name will display on the Custom Fields tab of the Company Details page.
To Map Custom TPO Fields to Loan Fields:
4 In the first field (Custom Field 1), enter a Field Description, and then select a 1 In the Map Custom TPO Fields to Loan Fields (Optional) section, in the Loan
Field Type (Field Types are optional). Field ID field, enter the ID for the loan field that will be mapped to the custom
5 If you selected the field types DROPDOWN or DROPDOWN - Editable, field. The loan field description populates automatically. When loans are
complete the steps below to add options to the list from which the user will received from the TPO, the value in the custom field is imported into the field
select. The DROPDOWN - Editable type enables users to select from a list or in the loan file.
enter a value. NOTE: To find a loan field ID, open the loan and move your mouse over a
• Click the Edit icon to the right of the Field Type field. field. The field ID displays.
• On the Custom Field Options window, click New. 2 Click the Save icon.
• Enter the name of the option and click OK. To look up or view the field IDs, descriptions, types, and mapping relationships for
• Add additional options as required. Use the Edit and Delete buttons to the configured fields, click the Find (magnifying glass) icon to the right of the Loan
change or delete entries. Field ID field.
• Click OK.
6 Add additional custom fields as required.
7 When finished, click the Save icon.
NOTE: You can map custom TPO fields to loan fields in Encompass so that when
a loan is submitted from this TPO company or contact, the custom fields will be
automatically copied to the corresponding field in the loan file. For more
information on mapping TPO custom fields, refer to “Map Custom Fields to Loan
Fields (Optional)” on page 76.
To Edit a TPO Custom Field:

1 Change the Field Description or Field Type of an existing field.

All TPO Contact Information To Export the Displayed Contact Information to an Excel Spreadsheet:
1 In the All TPO Contact Information panel, click the Excel icon.
Use the All TPO Contact Information setting to view the list of all TPO contacts
within the system and edit the information if required. You can sort, filter, and • An export progress status window displays and then an Excel file with the
export the list, locate the contact in the company hierarchy, and email the contact. exported records opens.
NOTE: You cannot create or add TPO Contacts using this setting. Contacts that
are managed in the Third Party Originator Contacts section of the External
Company Setup > Company Details screen are displayed here. The contacts from
all of the TPO companies with which your company conducts business are listed
here.
2 Save the file on your computer.
To Locate the Contact in the Company Hierarchy:

1 In the All TPO Contact Information panel, click a contact to select it.
To View All TPO Contact Information: 2 Click the Find in Hierarchy button.The Company Details window opens with
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. the company highlighted within the organization hierarchy structure and the
contact highlighted in the Third Party Originator Contacts panel.
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click All TPO
Contact Information.
• In the Select drop-down list, All TPOs is selected by default and information
for all contacts associated with the TPO companies with which your company
conducts business is displayed in the table below.
To Filter Contact Information Based on TPO Company:

• In the Select drop-down list, click the TPO company for which you want to view
contacts.
• The information is displayed in the table below.
To Email a Third Party Originator Contact:
1 In the All TPO Contact Information panel, click a contact to select it.
To Edit a TPO Contact:
1 In the All TPO Contact Information panel, select a contact and then click the 2 Click the Email button.
Edit icon. • Your email application opens a Compose Email window with the contact’s
2 In the TPO Contact Details page, modify the contact information, and then email address entered in the To field.
click Save.

TPO Global Lender Contacts 3 Click on the Add icon.
Use the TPO Global Lender Contacts feature to maintain a global list of contacts
for Encompass TPO Connect. These contacts will be included in the Lender Key
Contacts widget in Encompass TPO Connect.
NOTE: These contacts will be combined with a Third Party Originator’s (TPO’s)
Sales Rep/AE contacts to build the list displayed in the Lender Key Contacts
widget.
Title/Department
In the Encompass 19.1 release, a new User Title field was added to the User
Details setting to contain a user's job title or department.
4 Select a channel/channels if you want the contact to be displayed under that

channel/channels contact grouping in the Lender Key Contacts widget for
Encompass TPO Connect. For example, if you select Wholesale, the contact
will be grouped and displayed in a “Wholesale” section.
NOTE: If you do not select a Channel, the contact will be displayed in an “All
Channels” section.
5 In the Name field, click on the arrow to select a user from the drop-down list or
manually enter a name, up to 30 characters.
• If you select a Name, the Phone and Email fields are automatically
populated and cannot be edited. In addition, if the selected user’s
Comments field in their User Details setting is not blank, the first 30
To Add a New Contact characters will populate the Title/Department field.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. • If you clear the Name, the Phone, Email, and Title/Department fields are
cleared.
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO Global
Lender Contacts. 6 In this required field, enter or change a Title/Department for the user, up to
30 characters.
7 In the Phone field, enter the user’s phone number, up to 30 characters, if you
• If you clear the Name, this field is cleared and you can edit it.
8 In the Email field, enter the user’s email address, up to 40 characters, if you

• If you clear the Name, this field is cleared and you can edit it. 2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO Global
Lender Contacts.
9 Click OK. 3 Select the entry you want to delete, and then click on the Delete icon.
4 A warning message is displayed: “Deleting this contact will permanently
validation requirements are satisfied. remove the entry from the settings. Do you wish to continue?”
• If both the Phone and Email fields are blank, the OK button is grayed out 5 Click Yes.
How sequencing affects the order of the Lender Key Contacts widget in
• If the Email address format is not valid, the OK button is grayed out until all
Encompass TPO Connect
The sequence of the TPO Global Lender Contacts list directly affects the
10 A new contact entry is added to the bottom of the Lender/Investor Contacts
sequence of the TPO Company level Lender Contacts list and the subsequent
grid.
rendering of the Lender Key Contacts widget in Encompass TPO Connect. The
TPO Company level Lender Contacts list is ordered by "Primary" Sales Reps
To Edit a Contact followed by other Sales Reps (alphabetical by name), and then the TPO Global
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Contacts in the order in which they have been sequenced.
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO Global The Lender Key Contacts widget in Encompass TPO Connect follows the same
Lender Contacts. order as above, except that the entries are grouped by channel as follows: All
3 Select the entry you want to edit, and then click on the Edit icon. Channels (where no channel has been selected), Wholesale, Non-Delegated, and
then Delegated. If a specific contact has more than one Channel selected, it is
4 Make your changes. displayed in each selected section.
• If you select a Name, the Phone and Email fields are automatically
populated and cannot be edited. To Sequence Contacts in the Grid
• If you clear the Name, the Phone, Email, and Title/Department fields are 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
cleared.
2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO Global
• You must have a Title/Department. Lender Contacts.
• You must have a Phone, Email, or both. 3 Select the entry you want to move, and then click the Up and Down arrows.
• When you edit an existing contact, the Title / Department, Phone and Email
can be manually edited and saved.
NOTE: This manual update is saved into the Global Contacts table. TPO Docs
However, it is not updated in the existing Encompass User profile. Use the TPO Docs setting to upload documents that can be accessed from the
5 Click OK. TPO Connect websites and manage these documents from within Encompass.
Using the TPO Docs setting, you can control the access to documents and define
which documents each TPO can and cannot view.
NOTE: Only the following document types can be uploaded as TPO Connect
• If both the Phone and Email fields are blank, the OK button is grayed out
documents - pdf, xls, xlsx, csv, xml, doc, docx, txt, tiff, jpeg, and jpg.
• If the Email address format is not valid, the OK button is grayed out until all To Add a TPO Document:
To Delete a Contact 2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO Docs.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 3 Click the New icon.

4 In the Add New Document window: • From the Assign To drop-down list, select TPOs accessing related
document, if you want to share the document only with TPOs who have
access to another (related) document.
• In the File Name field, click the folder icon on the far right.
• In the Browse and Attach window, select a document from your computer,
and then click Open.
• In the Document Display Name field, type the name of the document.
• In the Choose an existing related document panel, select the related
• In the Start Date and End Date fields, optionally, select the period for which document to share the new document with the TPOs that have access
the document is valid/active. to the document selected here.
• From the Category drop-down field, select the TPO document category. • In the Choose an existing related document search field, type the
NOTE: Authorized users can create TPO document categories using the name of the document (full or partial), and then click the Lookup icon
Document Category option in TPO Settings. to search for the document. You can then select the document from
the search results.
• From the Channel drop-down field, select the TPO channel for which the
document will be available. • In the Move chosen document to archive field, click Yes to archive the
selected document and replace it with the document that you are
• In the Available to All TPOs field, select:
adding.
• Yes - if the document needs to be accessed by all TPO Connect users.
• From the Assign To drop-down list, click Select TPOs to define the TPO
• No - if you need to restrict access to the document. companies that will have access to this document.
• In the Choose TPO Companies panel, click the Lookup icon.

• In the Choose TPO Companies window, select one or more TPO Delete a TPO Document
companies and then click OK.
• From the Place document drop-down list, select the positioning of the To Delete a TPO Document:
document within the document category selected in the Category field above. 1 Archive the document using the instructions in To Archive a TPO Document.
5 Click OK. 2 Click the Archived Docs tab.
3 Select the document and then click the Delete (X) icon.
Edit a TPO Document
Use the Edit icon to modify existing TPO documents. You can only change Unarchive a TPO Document
attributes such as the document display name, period of validity, and accessibility
to TPO companies. You cannot change the TPO document. To Unarchive a TPO Document:
TIP: To replace an existing document, add a new document and then delete the 1 Click the Archived Docs tab and then select a document from the Document
existing document. List.
2 Click the Unarchive button.
To Edit a TPO Document:
1 In the TPO Docs panel, select the document you want to edit, and then click
the Edit icon. TPO Disclosure Settings
2 Update information using the instructions in “To Add a TPO Document:” on
Use this setting to manage the behavior and content of specific disclosure
page 79.
documents generated on behalf of a third party originator (TPO).
• In the Available to All TPOs field, select No if you do not wish to share the
document with any TPO company. Statement of Denial
3 Click OK. By default, the Lender information entered on the Closing Vendor Information
input form is populated to the Creditor Contact Information section of the
Statement of Denial input form. This information will print to page 3 of the
Archive a TPO Document
Statement of Denial output form. Specifically, to the section of the form that states
TPO documents can be saved for future use. Instead of deleting documents that “If you have any questions regarding this notice, you should contact...” For loans
are no longer being used (inactive), you can archive them so that the TPO Docs in the Correspondent loan channel with non-delegated underwriting, your
Document List is up-to-date and more manageable. Archived documents can be company information should be entered here (rather than the Lender information)
moved back to the TPO Docs list as required. since your company is acting as the Correspondent investor in these types of
NOTE: TPO documents cannot be deleted from the TPO Docs tab. You need to transactions.
archive the document and then delete it. Use this Statement of Denial option to control the contact information that will be
populated to the Creditor Contact Information section of the Statement of Denial
To Archive a TPO Document: input form.
1 Click the TPO Docs tab and then select a document from the Document List.
To Access TPO Disclosure Settings:
2 Click the Archive Selected button.
View a TPO Document 2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click TPO
Disclosure Settings.
To View a TPO Document:
1 Click the TPO Docs tab and then select a document from the Document List.
2 Click the Lookup icon.

3 In the Statement of Denial section, select the Creditor Override on Statement Notifications Tab
of Denial check box to enable Encompass to automatically populate your
Use the Notifications tab to enable or disable email notifications that are sent to
company's contact information (as entered in the Company Information
an Encompass user after the user sends a submission request to a partner via
setting) to the Creditor Contact Information section of the Statement of Denial
Encompass Investor Connect. Previously, an email was always sent by default to
input form only for loan files in the Correspondent loan channel with non-
the user who submitted the submission request.
delegated underwriting.
• By default, this check box is not selected. The Creditor Contact Information To Enable or Disable Email Notifications
fields are populated with the Lender information entered on the Closing
1 Click the Notifications tab.
Vendor Information input form.
2 Clear or select the Notify when delivery requests have been processed
check box. The check box is enabled by default.
Investor Connect Settings
Use the Investor Connect Settings to enable or disable email notifications when
delivery requests have been processed and to configure the conditions delivery
process in Encompass Investor Connect.
To Access the Setting:

2 On the left panel, click External Company Setup, and then click Investor
Connect Settings.
3 Click the Save button on the upper-right to save your changes. Or, click the
Reset button to undo all recent changes and return the setting to the state it
was in the last time it was saved.
Condition Delivery Tab
If your company has partners who have configured the workflow for returning
condition responses via Encompass Investor Connect, use the Condition Delivery
tab to configure the workflow for the condition responses. The Condition Delivery
tab has two sections that control how conditions are handled in Encompass
Investor Connect.
• Ready for Delivery Statuses – Select the appropriate check boxes in this
section to indicate when a condition will be available for delivery to a partner.
Each check box represents a status assigned that can be selected for a delivery
condition in the eFolder.
NOTE: A lender must complete this section before the lender can send
condition responses to a partner.

When one of the selected statuses is assigned to a Delivery Condition in the 3 Select a partner from the Partner drop-down list.
Encompass eFolder, the conditions is available to be sent to a partner. The lender
can select the condition by clicking the Deliver Condition Responses button on the
Delivery Conditions tab in the eFolder. Clicking this button opens the Delivery
Conditions Responses window, where the condition can be selected and sent to
a partner.
• Conditions Status Mapping – Use this section to map conditions statuses
used by each partner to the condition statuses in the Encompass eFolder. You
can add multiple partners and create a different mapping configuration for each
partner.
NOTE: A lender must complete this section or the lender will not be able to
view the status of a condition that was sent or updated by a partner.
To Add a Partner: 4 Partner names display in the Partner column as they are added. Click the
1 Click the Add icon (+) at the top of the Partners column. Delete icon to remove a partner. A confirmation messages asks you to verify
that you want to delete the partner. If you delete all partners, a confirmation
message states that the last partner is being deleted.
NOTE: Only partners who are configured for status mapping are available in
drop-down list.
2 On the Add Partner window, select a Category for the Investor Connect
service.
5 To map condition statuses for a partner, select the radio button to the left of the
partner’s name.

6 If the partner is set up for status mapping, the Lender Conditions Status column Access to the Investor Connect Settings
displays the condition statuses that are available on the Delivery Conditions
To enable Encompass administrators to configure access to the setting, a new
Details window for the conditions on the Delivery Conditions tab in the eFolder,
Investor Connect Settings check box is being added to the Personas setting in
and Not mapped yet displays in the right column for the partner condition
Encompass. Administrators can select or clear the check box to enable or disable
statuses.
access to the setting for selected personas.
To Enable Access to the Investor Connect Settings:

2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Personas.
3 Select a persona and then click the External Settings tab.
4 Select the Investor Connect Settings check box.
7 To map a partner condition status to a lender condition status (eFolder status),

click the drop-down icon on the far-right and select the check box for a status.
The statuses in the drop-down list are pre-configured based on information
provided by each partner.
The setting is visible and enabled for Encompass users who have been assigned
The selected status is added to the condition status column for the partner. a persona that has the Investor Connect Settings check box selected.
This status is now mapped to the corresponding eFolder status.
NOTE: The settings change described above has also been updated in the
NOTE: After a partner status is mapped to a lender status, the partner status window that opens when an administrator clicks the View/Edit Rights button in
is no longer available as an option in the partner status drop-down list when the User Details window that opens after double-clicking a user name in the
mapping additional statuses in the setting. This prevents a partner status from Organization/Users setting for an Encompass user (Encompass Settings >
being mapped to two or more lender statuses. Company/User Setup > Organization/Users).
8 Click the Save button on the upper-right to save your changes. Or, click the
Reset button on the top right to undo all recent changes and return the setting
to the state it was in the last time the setting was saved.

Chapter 7
Loan Setup
Auto Loan Numbering • Use Month - If checked, a two-digit number to indicate the current month
(for example, 06 for the month of June) is placed in the third position of the
Use the Auto Loan Numbering feature to define how loan numbers are assigned loan number.
to your loans. You can include as many as six different components in the loan
• Loan Number Prefix - An alpha-numeric prefix placed in the fourth position
number definition, up to a maximum length of 18 alpha-numeric characters.
of the loan number.
To change a loan number once it is assigned, type the new number in the Loan
• Next Number - This is a required entry. The value must be numeric and no
Number field (field ID 364) on an input form such as the Borrower Summary,
more than 9 digits long. The value defines both the next number in the
Transmittal Summary, or Loan Estimate.
assignment sequence and the length of the numeric portion of the loan
number.
To Set Up Auto Loan Numbering:
• Loan Number Suffix - An alpha-numeric suffix placed in the last (sixth)
position of the loan number.
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Auto Loan Numbering.
4 Watch the Example area (below the Loan Number Suffix field) to see how the
loan number will be assigned using your selections.
NOTE: A definition cannot be greater than 18 characters. The number of
characters is counted from left to right.
5 Using the When to Start Loan Numbering drop-down list, select File Started or
Sent To Processing to indicate when the loan number will be assigned.
Organization-Specific Numbering
The Auto Loan Numbering feature contains an option to set up loan numbering by
organization. Using the settings on the main Auto Loan Numbering window, you
can click the Organization Loan Numbering button to specify the Next Number
value by organization code.
Numbering Guidelines
• The assigned organization-specific loan number is composed of the specified
Organization Code and Next Loan Number, and any values specified on the
3 Define up to six loan numbering components as described above. Only the
main Auto Loan Numbering window (Use Year, Use Month, Prefix, and Suffix).
Next Number component is required.
• If the same organization code is assigned to more than one organization, the
• Use Organization Code - If checked, the value in the Code field (on the
loan numbers are incremented from the same number sequence.
Add/Edit Organization screen) is placed in the first position of the loan
number. • If an organization does not use organization-specific numbering (or the
numbering is disabled), the Next Loan Number value on the main Auto Loan
• Use Year - If checked, the last two numbers of the current year (for example,
Numbering window is used.
12 for the year 2012) are placed in the second position of the loan number.
Chapter 7: Loan Setup 85

To Set Up Organization-Specific Numbering: To Activate Auto MERS MIN Numbering:
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click 2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and click Auto MERS MIN Numbering.
Organization/Users.
3 Select an organization, and then click the Edit icon.
4 Clear the Use Parent Information check box, and then enter an organization
code in the Code field.
5 Add an organization code to each organization that will use organization-
specific numbering.
TIP: You can use the same code for more than one organization.
6 For those organizations that will use the Organization Code assigned to their
parent organization, leave the Use Parent Information check box selected.
8 On the Encompass Settings window, click Loan Setup, and then click Auto
Loan Numbers.
9 On the Auto Loan Numbering window, click the Organization Loan
Numbering button.
10 On the Organization Auto Loan Numbering window, select an organization
code, and then click Edit. 3 Enter the Organization ID provided by MERS.
11 Select the Generate Organization Specific Loan Numbers check box, type 4 Enter the Next Number that your company will assign when registering a loan
the Next Loan Number, and then click OK. with MERS. The Next Number is a 10-digit number.
• Note that the Status is changed to Enabled. 5 Select the Auto Create MERS MIN Numbers check box to activate the auto-
numbering feature.
12 Click Close to close the Organization Auto Loan Numbering window.
6 To assign organization-specific MERS MIN numbering only to loans started by
13 Select the Use Organization Code check box if you want to use the
the organization's loan team members:
company's organization code when numbering loans for users who are not in
an organization that has been assigned an organization code. • Click MERS MIN Numbering, select the Organization ID, and then click the
Edit icon.
14 Click the Save icon to save your changes.
NOTE: The Organization ID numbers in this list are assigned using the
Organization/Users setting.
Auto MERS MIN Numbering • Enter the Next Number that your company will assign when registering a loan
with MERS that was started by one of the organization's loan team members,
Use the Auto MERS MIN Numbering feature to define assignment of MERS MIN
and then click OK.
numbers to your loans. The number is a combination of the Organization ID
assigned to your company by MERS and a sequential number that your company • Select Generate Organization Specific MERS MIN to enable the feature.
assigns to each loan registered with MERS. You can also enable organization- • Click OK, and then click Close to close the MERS MIN Numbering window.
specific MERS MIN numbering that is assigned only to loans started by a
specified organization's loan team members.

7 Click the Save icon. • The (Trash) folder is used to improve control and management of deleted loan
• When you create a new loan, the next MERS MIN number will automatically
files as described below.
be assigned to the loan. • Loans in the (Trash) folder can be viewed but not changed. Access to the
• If you have enabled Organization Specific MERS MIN numbering, the next (Trash) folder is controlled at the User Groups level.
organization-specific MERS MIN number will be assigned to the loan started • When a loan is deleted from a non-(Trash) folder, it is moved to the (Trash)
by one of the organization’s loan team members. folder. A server log entry is made to indicate the user who deleted the loan and
• To change a MERS MIN number once it is assigned, enter the new number
when it was deleted.
in the MERS MIN field on the Borrower Summary, Closing RegZ, or Shipping • Only users who are authorized to do so (through their assigned persona), can
Details forms. permanently remove (or restore) a loan from the (Trash) folder.
NOTE: By default the Organization ID number is 0000000, the Next Number is • When a loan is deleted from the (Trash) folder, a server log entry is made to
0000000001, and the Auto Create function is turned off. When a number is indicate the user who permanently deleted the loan and when.
assigned, an 18th number is assigned to guarantee uniqueness based on the • When a loan is restored from the (Trash) folder, a server log entry is made to
standard MERS algorithm. The generated number is stored in the database in indicate the user who restored the loan and when.
field ID 1051.
To Create a Loan Folder:
Loan Folders
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and click Loan Folders.
Use loan folders to organize your loans into groups. You can create folders to group
loans by categories such as month of origination, loan status, or loan type.
When you generate reports and view the Dashboard, you can select which folders
to include. Keep this in mind when managing your folders.
The (Archive) and (Trash) folders are added to the loan folder list when you install
Encompass. You cannot delete the (Trash) folder. Loans are moved to the (Trash)
folder when you delete them from other folders.
About Archive Folders

You can designate any folder (other than the Trash folder) as an archive folder.
Loans in archive folders are handled differently on the Pipeline, Dashboard, and
in reports as follows.
3 Click the New icon, and in the Create New Folder dialog box, enter a folder
• Archived loans appear on the Pipeline without displaying their alerts. name, and if appropriate, select the Archive Folder and/or Include in
• When viewing only loans in a selected archive folder, the loans are sorted by Duplicate Loan Check check boxes, and then click Save.
borrower last name by default. • Archive Folder: This column displays the archive status of each folder.
• Loans in archive folders are not displayed on Dashboard snapshots or included NOTE: Loans in folders that are designated as archive folders are not
in report output. The exception is Dashboard snapshots or reports that are included in reports. Alerts for archived loans do not show on the Pipeline.
created specifically to display loans in a designated archive folder.
About the Trash Folder

The Trash folder is used to improve control and management of deleted loan files
as described below.

• Duplicate Loan Check: This column indicates if loan files in that loan folder 9 Type the field IDs for the fields you want to add.
are included in the duplicate loan check performed by the Duplicate Loan • To add more than 10 fields, enter the first 10 fields, click Add More, and then
Check component. enter additional fields.
NOTE: When enabled in the Encompass Admin Tools, the Duplicate Loan 10 When finished, click Add.
Check component provides a pop-up message when a user attempts to save
a loan file that contains data that matches the data in another loan file. When 11 When finished configuring your field selection, click Save.
the Duplicate Loan Check window displays, all potential duplicate loans are
listed. For more information, see “Settings Manager” on page 221.
Alerts
To Delete a Loan Folder:
An alert is a notification that indicates an event has occurred, is pending, or is due.
1 Select a folder from the Loan Folders list and click Delete. Alert information displays on the Pipeline and in the loan file. For a description
• You cannot delete a folder that contains a file. of each type of alert and how it is used, refer to the help topic, Alerts Overview.
2 Click Yes in response to the confirmation message. Use the Alerts screen to define:
• Which alerts to enable, and for which milestones.
• The message that displays when a Compliance alert or custom alert is triggered.
Loan Duplication
• Which fields will trigger the Send Initial Disclosures alert.
Use the Loan Duplication setting to create templates that control the field data
copied from an existing loan when a duplicate loan is created. • When to show each alert, if applicable.
• When to show the Redisclose REGZ-TIL (APR Change) alert for regular and
NOTE: Accessibility to the templates is configured for each persona on the
irregular loans.
Pipeline tab in the Personas setting.
• Whether or not an alert will trigger an additional notification, if applicable.
To Create a Loan Duplication Template:
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. To Configure an Alert:
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Loan Duplication.
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and click Alerts.
3 On the Loan Duplicate Template list, click the New icon, and type a name for
the template.
4 Select the template and click the Edit icon.
• Or double-click the template.
5 Type a Description for the template. The description displays on the Loan
Duplicate Template template list.
6 Select the check boxes to select the borrower, co-borrower, and address fields
that will be copied to the duplicate loan.
NOTE: The fields in each section are preconfigured. All the fields in the
selected sections will be copied into the duplicate loan.
7 If you select a check box for a property section, use the drop-down list to select
the address fields on the duplicate loan where the selected address fields will
be copied.
8 To select additional fields to copy, click the New icon in the Additional Fields
section.

3 On the Alerts screen, double-click the alert you want to configure. • Select the second option to trigger the alert when the APR amounts
4 To change a Compliance alert message: differ by more than 0.125% for regular loans and 0.25% for irregular
loans.
• Click in the Message section and enter the message that will display when
the alert is triggered. 2 Select an Alert Option setting:
• To enable an alert, select Yes. • Select Alert when APR increases or decreases by more than the
APR tolerance to always trigger the alert when the APR increases or
• If you selected Yes, click Select Milestones to select the milestones at decreases by more than 0.125% (0.25% for irregular loans).
which to enable the alert.
• Select Alert only when APR increases by more than the APR
• For the Milestone Finished alert, you can change the default alert message tolerance to only trigger the alert when the APR increases by more
that displays when the milestone is completed. Click in the Alert Message than 0.125% (0.25% for irregular loans).
field and enter the new message.
• Click OK. Redisclose Closing Disclosure (APR, Product, Prepay)
5 Enter the number of days before the trigger event occurs that you want to 1 Select an APR Tolerance setting:
trigger the alert, if applicable. • Select 0.125% for all loans to trigger the alert when the Current APR
6 When finished, click Save. differs from the Disclosed APR by more than 0.125% in both regular
and irregular loans.
Additional Compliance Alert Settings • Select the second option to trigger the alert when the APR amounts
Two of the Compliance alerts have additional settings that you can use to differ by more than 0.125% for regular loans and 0.25% for irregular
determine when the alerts are triggered. loans.
Send Initial Disclosures Alert 2 Select an Alert Option setting:
To add or remove field triggers for the Send Initial Disclosures alert: • Select Alert when APR increases or decreases by more than the APR
tolerance to always trigger the alert when the APR increases or
1 In the Field Triggers section, click the New icon.
decreases by more than 0.125% (0.25% for irregular loans).
2 Enter the Field ID of the field you want to add.
• Select Alert only when APR increases by more than the APR tolerance
3 Click Add. to only trigger the alert when the APR increases by more than 0.125%
NOTE:The alert is triggered only when all the trigger fields are populated. (0.25% for irregular loans).
However, when the total monthly income field (field ID 736) is designated as
a trigger field for the alert, the system will not recognize it as a trigger field To Configure a Custom Alert:
for FHA or USDA-RHS streamline refinance loans. For these types of loans, You can create custom alerts that will be triggered under the following
the system generates the alert even when the monthly income is not circumstances:
provided.
• When a date is entered in a specific date field or on a specific day before or
4 To delete a field, select a field from the Field Triggers list and click the after the date that is entered in the date field
Delete icon.
• When a specific value is entered in a field
NOTE:You cannot delete any of the 10 default trigger fields.
• When a value that is entered in a field falls between a specific value range
Redisclose REGZ-TIL (APR Change) • When a combination of the previous circumstances occurs
1 Select an APR Tolerance setting: 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
• Select 0.125% for all loans to trigger the alert when the Current APR 2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Alerts.
differs from the Disclosed APR by more than 0.125% in both regular 3 On the Alerts setting, click the New icon.
and irregular loans.
4 Enter the name of the alert.

5 Click in the Message section and enter the message that will display when the • Or, click the Lookup icon, enter one or more characters in the Find
alert is triggered. field, and then click Find. The first occurrence of the characters in any
6 In the Trigger section, select one of the following options, complete the column is found. Continue clicking Find to view additional occurrences.
appropriate steps to configure the trigger, and then click Save. Select a field from the list and click OK.
Date Field 3 Select an Operator, enter (or select) a Value, and then click OK.
Use this option to trigger an alert when a date is entered in a specific date field • The Operator and Value define how the field will be used. For example,
or on a set number of days before or after the date that is entered in the date Field ID = 1335 (Down Payment Amount), Operator = Greater than,
field. Value = 25000.
1 Enter the field ID of the date field you want to trigger the alert. 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add more filters.
• Or, click the Lookup icon, select a form from the left, right-click to select 5 To use parentheses to control the order in which multiple filters are
the field, and then click OK. evaluated, click Parentheses, select the filters to group, click the New
icon, and then click OK.
2 Select Apply calculation to Trigger Date to set the number of days
before or after the date in the date field that the alert will be triggered. 6 Use the AND/OR button to determine how search filters are used
together.
• For example, to set up the alert to trigger four calendar days before the
date that is entered in the Final Payment field on the REGZ-TIL (field ID Date Field & Condition
1961), you would:
Use this option to trigger an alert when a date is entered in a specific date field
• Select Subtract from the drop-down list. and when a specific value is entered in a field (or when the value entered is
• Enter 4 in the days field. between a specific value range). Follow the steps in the previous sections to
configure this option.
• Select Calendar from the drop-down list.
• Or, to set up an alert to trigger seven business days after the date that
1 For a Condition alert or a Date Field & Condition alert, select the Provide
is entered in the Final Payment field on the REGZ-TIL, (field ID 1961), Clear Alert button option to provide a Clear Alert button on the alert
you would: worksheet.
• Select Add from the drop-down list. • The alert worksheet is displayed when a loan team member clicks the
alert entry on the Alerts & Messages tab in the Loan Log. The loan team
• Enter 7 in the days field. member can click the Clear Alert button on the worksheet to remove the
• Select Business from the drop-down list. alert from the Log and the Pipeline.
NOTE: A Calendar day is any of the seven days of the week. A Postal day is NOTE: The loan team member can also clear the alert by changing the
any day of the week excluding Sundays and Legal Holidays according to the values in a trigger field. Clicking the Clear Alert button removes the alert from
U.S. Postal Calendar.A Business day is any day an institution is open to the Log and the Pipeline, but does not affect the values in the trigger fields.
conduct business according to the Our Company Calendar. • Clear this check box if you do not want to display the Clear Alert button
on the alert worksheet.
Condition
2 To enable the alert, select Yes.
Use this option to trigger an alert when a specific value is entered in a field or
when the value entered is between a specific value range. • If you selected Yes, click Select Milestones to select the milestones at
which to enable the alert, and then click OK.
1 Click the New icon to add a condition to apply to the field that will trigger
the alert. 3 Enter the number of days before the due date that you want to activate
the alert.
2 Enter the field to add as a filter.
• Or, click the Lookup icon, select a field from the list, and then click OK.

Log Setup 3 Click the New icon.
Configure the Log settings to enable or disable these features:

• Automatically create a Log entry when a user prints a form.
• Prohibit users from changing the Conversation Log after exiting a loan.
To Configure the Log Settings:

2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Log.
4 Enter a Name and Description for the task.
3 Clear or select the appropriate check boxes.
5 In the Days to Complete field, enter the expected number of days required for
• Printing Log - If the Show Printing Records in Log check box is selected, completion of the task.
a Conversation Log entry is created each time a form is printed.
6 In the Priority field, select an option to indicate the general level of importance
• Log Data Security - If the Lock Conversation Log check box is selected, of the task.
users are unable to edit previous entries in the Conversation Log. Only an
administrator can change a locked Conversation Log entry. 7 When finished, click OK.
NOTE: Both check boxes are selected by default.

4 Click the Save icon. Default Input Forms
Use the Default Input Forms setting to specify the default list of input forms, and
the order in which those forms display on the Forms tab.
Tasks
NOTE: The list of forms displayed on the Forms tab for a given loan is also
Use the Tasks setting to create predefined tasks that can be associated with affected by input form lists, and loan templates, business rules associated with the
milestones. Users can select tasks as needed and add them to a milestone loan, and the persona permissions granted to the logged in user.
worksheet. The user then selects the check box for each task as it is completed.
You can also group individual tasks into task sets that are associated with a To Set the Default Forms and Display Order:
particular milestone. A task set can then be added to a loan template. When the 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
loan template is used to create a loan, the tasks in the task set automatically
display on the appropriate milestone worksheet.
To Create a Task:
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Tasks.

2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and click Default Input Forms. 3 Click the New icon, type a name, and then click the Edit icon.
3 Select a form and click Default to add it to the default list, or click Not Default
to remove it from the default list.
4 Select a form and click the Up or Down arrows to move it to a new position.
5 Click the Save icon. 4 On the Condition Form Details window, select External or Internal for the
Letter Type.
NOTE: This selection is used to filter the conditions included on the form.
Condition Forms When a condition is created (using the Conditions setting or one of the
condition tabs in the eFolder), the condition can be configured to print on
Use the Condition Forms setting to create customized templates for the condition
internal or external condition forms (as well as both or neither).
forms. Create multiple versions of the form to describe conditions that require the
attention of borrowers, vendors, or personnel within your company. 5 Use the Starting Pages and Ending Pages fields to select forms to print before
and after the condition form, if needed. These pages can be standard
NOTE: After you create a template, use the User Group setting to grant access
Encompass forms or custom forms that you create.
to the appropriate user groups.
NOTE: Click the New icon to open the Select Custom Print Form window.
To Create a Condition Form: Select the form and then click Select. Click the Delete icon to remove a form
from the field.
6 In the Content section, select the conditions to include from the list, and then
2 In the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Condition Forms.
select the check boxes for the condition information to include in the form.
7 For options that do not display N/A in the Status Print Options column, select
the option and click the Edit icon to include Date, Name, or Name and Date.

8 In the Presentation section, select sorting, grouping, and page numbering
options for the content in the printed condition form.
• Select Condensed from the Line Spacing drop-down list to increase the
number of conditions to display on a page.
• Select Legal from the Paper Size drop-down list to print the conditions on
8.5” x 14” paper.
To Print or Preview Condition Forms:

1 Open a loan file and click the Print icon on the upper-right.
2 On the Print window, click the Standard Forms tab, and then select Condition
Forms from the Look In list.
3 In the left panel, select one or more forms, and then click Add to move the
selection to the Selected Forms list on the right.
4 Click Print or Preview.
Custom Print Forms

Use the Custom Print Forms tool to create custom templates for forms, letters,
and other documents. You can include references to fields such as Borrower Last
5 Create the form content, layout, and formatting as required.
Name, Loan Number, and Loan Amount, so that the appropriate loan-specific
values are automatically added to the printed form. 6 Use the Insert Fields window to add variable fields as follows:
To create a custom print form, you can start a new form, copy an existing custom • Select the type of field you want to add from the Category list.
form, or import .doc or .rtf formatted forms from Calyx Point or other sources. • Select the name of the field from the Field list.
NOTE: The Custom Print Forms feature does not support the use of variable • Click Insert to add the field to the form.
fields within text boxes.
NOTE: It is highly recommended that you follow these steps to insert variable
fields. Using other techniques, such as copying and pasting a field and then
To Create a New Form: modifying the field label, can cause problems. For example, if you copy a field
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. and modify the label, the underlying field code doesn't change to match the
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Custom Print Forms. label. If you do not change the field code as well, the fields may not pull the
loan information you expect when the form is printed.
3 On the Custom Print Forms setting, select the Public or Personal folder in which you
want to add the custom form. 7 To search for a field, type a keyword in the Search field, and then click Search.
4 Click the New icon, type the name of the custom form, and then (with the new form 8 To add a field that is not in one of the category lists, click Insert Other.
selected) click the Edit icon. • Type the Field ID and click OK. To determine a field ID, move your mouse
• Microsoft Word and the Insert Fields window open. over a field on an input form. The ID will display in a pop-up box.
9 If this form is going to be included in an eDisclosure package that requires
eSigning, insert eSigning signature points as follows:
• Position the curser in the document where you want to add the signature
point.

• In the Insert Fields window, click the signature point you want to insert.
10 When finished click Save, and then click Close.
Microsoft Word and the Insert Field window close the form is added to the
custom forms list, and is available for printing.
To Import a Form:
You can import .doc or .rtf formatted forms from Calyx Point or other sources.
2 On the Encompass Settings menu bar, click Import, and then click Custom
Forms.
3 Select Calyx Point or Other Custom Forms, and click Continue.
4 In the Source section on the window, open the folder containing the forms, and
then click one or more forms.
• If you clicked the Other Custom Forms option and are importing documents
from another LOS, clear the check box at the bottom of the window to remove
data fields from the document.
5 Change the folder in the Destination section if desired.
6 Click Import.
5 On the Print Form Group details window, enter a description for the group.
6 Select forms to include in the group as follows. You can add forms from one or
Print Form Groups both tabs.
Use the Print Form Groups setting to create groups of forms that you regularly use • Click the Standard Forms tab and then select a category of forms (such as
(or send) together. When you print forms (or send forms using the Secure Forms Verifications).
Transfer tool), you can save time by selecting a form group, rather than searching • Or, click the Custom Forms tab and select a Public or Personal folder.
for each individual form.
7 Select forms from the left-hand list and click Add to move them to the Selected
Forms list.
To Create a Print Form Group:
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Print Form Groups.
3 Select a personal or public folder in which to add the form group. Loan Custom Fields
4 Click the New icon, type the name of the Print Form Group, and then (with the Use the Loan Custom Fields setting to create an unlimited number of loan fields
new group selected) click the Edit icon. to meet the specific requirements of your business. For example, you may need
to add data required only by the city in which you do business. Once you have
defined custom fields, use the Custom Fields form (on the Forms tab) to add field
values specific to each loan.
NOTE: When you create custom input forms using the Input Form Builder, you
can add custom loan fields to the form using the Custom Field Editor tool. Refer
to the Input Form Builder User’s Guide for detailed instructions.

Pre-Defined Custom Field IDs 5 If you select String, type the maximum number of characters in the Max
There are 100 pre-defined custom field IDs, in the format “CUST99FV”. You can Length field.
create a description, set the maximum field length, and select a format for these 6 If you selected DROPDOWN or DROPDOWN - Editable, complete the steps
fields. You cannot delete predefined field IDs. below to create a list of valid values for the field.
• Click Add, type the value, and then press Enter.
User-Defined Custom Field IDs
• Add additional options as required.
You can also create an unlimited number of your own custom field IDs. These
custom field IDs always begin with a CX. prefix, followed by an ID of your choice. • To remove an option, select the option, and then click Delete.
For example, “CX.TEST.1”. • Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to set the display order for
the options.
Custom Calculations 7 If you selected Audit for the field Format, the custom field will contain last-
You can create custom calculations for pre-defined and user-defined field IDs. A change information for the field ID you specify.
custom calculation is an expression that returns a number or text value, which is • In the Audit Field field, type the field ID for which to display the
then saved into the associated custom field. last-change information.
Custom calculations can contain simple arithmetic operations, mathematical • Select one of the three Audit Data options to specify the type of last-change
operations, text-based operations, date-based operations, values from other information to display.
fields in the same loan, and branching and logical operations. Refer to Appendix
B, “Loan Custom Field Calculations” on page 279 for detailed instructions and
examples for creating each type of custom calculation.
To Create a User-Defined Custom Field ID:
To Create Custom Fields: 1 Click the New icon.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 2 Type the Field ID, and then complete the remaining fields as described above.
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Loan Custom Fields.
To Enter Data in Custom Fields:
1 Open a loan, click the Forms tab, and then click Custom Fields.
2 Type data into the custom fields as required.
Channel Options
Use the Channel Options setting to indicate the options available on the Channel
list on the Borrower Summary form and to configure how NMLS reports will handle
certain types of loans. The selected channel option indicates how your company
is handling a specific loan, such as Brokered or Banked. You can also create
business rules that are based on a loan's channel selection. The NMLS Channels
Options section includes two drop-down lists that allow administrators to configure
how NMLS reports will handle Correspondent loans and loans that do not have a
channel option selected.
To Select Channel Options:

3 Double-click to open a Defined Custom Field (CUST01FV). 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
4 Enter a Description, and then select a field Format.

2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Channel Options. 2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click RESPA.
3 On the Channel Options setting, all four options are selected by default. Clear
the check boxes for the options that will NOT be available for selection on the
Borrower Summary form.
3 Select the option that describe whether or not the servicing for the loan may be
transferred to a different to a different loan servicer.
4 In the NMLS Options section, select an option from the drop-down list for each Changed Circumstances Setup
loan type. Use the Changed Circumstances Setup tool to manage the list of changed
5 Click the Save icon. circumstances users can select from when indicating a change in circumstances
on the Loan Estimate Page 1, Closing Disclosure Page 1, and 2010 GFE input
form.
RESPA When indicating a changed circumstance on one of these forms, users select the
Changed Circumstance check box, click the Lookup icon, and then select a
Use the RESPA worksheet to create default Real Estate Settlement Procedures
changed circumstance from the Changed Circumstance list. The selected
Act (RESPA) data. When you originate a new loan, the data is placed on the
circumstance description and associated comments are then populated to the
RESPA Servicing Disclosure.
form.
To Create RESPA Information:
To Create a New Changed Circumstance Option:
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Changed Circumstances
Setup.

3 Click the New icon. To Edit a Changed Circumstance Option
1 Click to select a changed circumstance option, and then click the Edit icon.
2 Type the new information, and then click OK.
NOTE: The Code field is read-only and cannot be edited. This code is applied
to the change in circumstance and remains associated with it even if the
description of the changed circumstance is modified later. Encompass relies
on this code when the administrator configures the criteria for a document's
inclusion in an eDisclosure package, sets up and generates reports, and when
configuring a Field Trigger business rule.
To Reposition an Option on the Loan Estimate Page 1, Closing Disclosure

Page 1, and 2010 GFE Changed Circumstance List
1 Select a changed circumstance option.
2 Click the Up arrow to move the option up in the Changed Circumstance list on
the Loan Estimate Page 1, Closing Disclosure Page 2, and 2010 GFE.
3 Click the Down arrow to move the option down in the list.
To Delete a Changed Circumstance Option

1 Click to select a changed circumstance option, and then click the Delete icon.
2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
4 In the Detail panel enter information in the following fields:
• Description: Type in a brief overview of the changed circumstance option.
• Reason: From the drop-down list, select the reason to associate with the
Disclosure Tracking Settings
changed circumstance option. This drop-down list is based on the Reason Use the Disclosure Tracking Settings to define:
list provided on the LE Page 1, CD Page 1, and 2010 GFE input form. When • The forms to track in the Disclosure Tracking tool.
a user selects a changed circumstance from the Changed Circumstance list
on the LE, CD, or 2010 GFE in a loan file, the associated Reason check box • How disclosure history entries are added to the Disclosure Tracking tool.
on the form will be selected automatically (based on the reason you select • Whether or not to include the day when a disclosure is sent when calculating the
from the drop-down list). Compliance Timeline.
• Code: Type the code for the changed circumstance. This code is applied to
the changed circumstance and remains associated with it even if the To Configure Disclosure Tracking:
description of the change in circumstance is modified later. Encompass relies 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
on this code when the administrator configures the criteria for a document's
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Disclosure Tracking
inclusion in an eDisclosure package, sets up and generates reports, and
Settings.
when configuring a Field Trigger business rule.
• Comments: Type additional details about the changed circumstance.
• The new changed circumstance option is added to the Changed
Circumstance Options list.

• Select Create a record when disclosures are printed to automatically add

a disclosure history entry every time a form is printed.
• Select Prompt users before a record is created to trigger a Disclosure
Tracking prompt every time a form is printed. Users will click Yes when
prompted to add the disclosure history entry.
• Select Create a record when disclosures are previewed to automatically
add a disclosure history entry every time a form is previewed.
• Select Prompt users before a record is created to trigger a Disclosure
Tracking prompt every time a form is previewed. Users will click Yes when
prompted to add the disclosure history entry.
• Select Create a record when disclosures are sent using the eFolder to
4 On the Disclosure Tracking Forms window, select the forms to track as follows: automatically add a disclosure history entry every time a form in the forms list
• Click the Form Groups tab, and then select a Public or Personal forms group
is sent, printed, or previewed using the eFolder.
• Select Users can manually create disclosure records to enable users to
• Or, click the Standard Forms tab, and then select a category of forms (such
as General Forms) manually add disclosure history entries on the Disclosure Tracking tool.
• Or, click the Custom Forms tab and select the Public or Personal folder
10 In the Copy of disclosures section, select a check box if you want Encompass
containing the custom forms. to save a local copy of a disclosure document when it is printed or sent
electronically from within the eFolder. If a copy has been saved, loan team
5 Select forms from the left-hand list and click Add to move them to the Selected members can click the View Document button on the Disclosure Tracking tool
Forms list: to view and print a copy of the document(s).
6 On the Selected Forms list: • Select Save copy of disclosures when disclosing from Print Menu to
• Select a form and click the Up or Down arrows to change the list order. save a local copy of disclosure documents that are printed.
• Select a form and click Remove to remove it from the list. • Select Save copy of disclosures when disclosing from eFolder to save a
local copy of disclosure documents that are sent electronically. (These are
7 Click OK to close the window.
disclosures sent to borrowers for their information only, as part of an
8 Select a form and click the Delete icon to delete it from the list. eDisclosure package, or in separate document requests).
• The REGZ-Truth-In-Lending, 2010 GFE, Anti-Steering Safe Harbor • If you do not select a check box, no copies are saved and the View Document
Disclosure, Loan Estimate, Closing Disclosure, and 2015 Settlement Service button will be hidden, thus preventing the loan team member from viewing or
Provider List forms are listed by default and cannot be deleted. printing the document(s).
9 In the center section, configure how disclosure history entries are added to the
Disclosure Tracking tool. The settings applied here apply only to the forms
listed in the upper section of the Disclosure Tracking Settings.

11 In the Compliance Timeline Calculation for RESPA-TILA section: • A business day is any day the lender is open to conduct business
• Initial Disclosure Due Date: Select the check box to include the Application
according to the Our Company Calendar in the Compliance Calendar
Date (field ID 3142; the day when the 2010 GFE is received with all of the settings.
required fields populated or the day when the Loan Estimate is received with NOTE: As an example, in this scenario the GFE Expiration Date check box is
all of the required fields populated) when calculating the 2010 GFE's Initial not selected, GFE Expires in is set to 10 business days, and Saturday has
Disclosure Due Date (field ID 3143) or the LE Due date (field ID 3143) on the been designated as a business day on the Our Company Calendar. If the GFE
Disclosure Tracking tool. is sent on 4/01/2016, the GFE will not expire until the end of 4/12/2016. Since
• Redisclosure Due Date: Select the check box to include the Changes
the GFE Expiration Date check date is not selected, the day when the initial
Received Date (field ID 3165 or CD1.X62; the day when the changed GFE is sent is not included when calculating the GFE Expiration Date.
circumstance is indicated on the 2010 GFE (field ID 3168)) or the Closing 13 In the Changed Circumstances section, select the Require fee level Changed
Disclosure Page 1 (field ID CD1.X61) when calculating the Revised GFE Due Circumstances prior to disclosure check box to require fee level disclosures
Date (field ID 3167) or the Revised CD Due Date (field ID CD1.X63) (i.e., the to indicate a changed circumstance reason for each revised fee prior to
Changes Received Date is considered Day 1). sending a revised disclosure. When this check box is selected, the new Fee
• Enter the number of days before the Loan Estimate expires. For example, if Level Disclosures check box (field ID 4461 on the LE Page 1 and CD Page 1
you enter 10, the Loan Estimate will expire on the 10th day. A minimum of 10 input forms) will be selected and then cannot be changed by users.
days is required by law. • If this check box is not selected, authorized users will be permitted to select
• Enter the time of day when the closing costs disclosed on the Loan Estimate or clear the Fee Level Disclosures check box on the LE Page 1 and CD Page
expire. 1 as needed. (Once the loan’s initial disclosure has been sent, users cannot
change the Fee Level Disclosures check box. Once disclosed at a fee level,
• Select the time zone to use for the closing costs expiration time.
users must continue to redisclose at a fee level for the remainder of the loan’s
12 Use the Compliance Timeline Calculation for GFE/TIL section to determine lifecycle (and vice versa if they initially disclosed at a disclosure level).
whether or not to include the day a disclosure was sent to the borrower when 14 Click the Save icon.
calculating the Compliance Timeline dates on the Disclosure Tracking tool.
• Earliest Closing Date: Select the check box to include the Initial TIL Sent
Date (field ID 3152; the day the first version of the REGZ-TIL is sent to the Compliance Calendar
borrower) or the Revised TIL Borrower Received Date (field ID 3155; the day
the revised version of the REGZ-TIL is received by the borrower) when Use the Compliance Calendar settings to specify your company's business days.
calculating the Earliest Closing Date (field ID 3147). The setting includes three separate calendars, which can be accessed by
selecting an option at the top of the setting.
• GFE Expiration Date: Select the check box to include the Initial GFE Sent
Date (field ID 3148; the day the first version of the GFE is sent to the • Our Company Calendar is used to calculate the dates in the Compliance
borrower) when calculating the GFE Expiration Date (field ID 3140) on the Timeline fields on the Disclosure Tracking tool which helps ensure compliance
2010 GFE. with the 2010 and 2015 Real Estate Settlement Procedures Act
(RESPA) regulations. Dates with a pink background are excluded from Our
• Enter the number of business days for which the GFE will be effective after
Company Calendar. All other dates are considered business days and included
it is disclosed in the GFE Expires in text box.
in the calendar.
• This number is added to the GFE Date (field ID 3170) to determine
• U.S. Postal Calendar is used when calculating days to comply with
Important Dates #2 (field ID NEWHUD.X2).
MDIA regulations. Settings on this calendar cannot be changed.
• Once disclosed, Important Dates #2 (field ID NEWHUD.X2) will copy
over to the GFE Expiration Date (field ID 3140).

• Reg-Z Business Day Calendar is used to calculate the Earliest Fee Collection 8 Select Exclude Sundays to exclude all Sundays from the calendar.
Date for loans subject to 2015 RESPA regulations. Settings on this calendar 9 Click the Save icon.
cannot be changed.
NOTE: The Compliance Calendar supports a specific range of years. Dates
entered on the Disclosure Tracking tool must fall within this specified range. Use 2009 GFE Print
the Back or Forward arrows on the upper-right to view the calendars for each
supported year. Use this feature to select the GFE output forms to print by default. When you
initiate printing of the GFE, the default forms are placed on the list of Selected
To Configure Your Company Calendar: Forms to print.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. NOTE: This setting applies only to the 2009 (and earlier) version of the GFE. This
setting does not apply to the 2010 GFE input form.
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Compliance Calendar.
To Select Default Forms to Print:
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click GFE Print.
3 Select one or more forms.

Trustee List
Use the Trustee List to create trustees with whom your company does business.
Users can then select a trustee from the Closing Vendor Information form.
3 At the top of the screen, select the Our Company Calendar option. To Create a Trustee:
4 At the top-right of the screen, click the Back or Forward arrows to change the 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
calendar year. 2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Trustee List.
5 Click a date to exclude it from the calendar.
• A pink background is added to the date.
6 Click an excluded date to include it in the calendar.
• The pink background is removed from the date.
7 Select Exclude Saturdays to exclude all Saturdays from the calendar.

3 On the Trustee List screen, click the New icon. 2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click
Piggyback Loan Synchronization.
4 On the Trustee Details window, enter the trustee name, address, and phone
number.
• Or click the Address Book icon to populate the information from your
business contacts.
5 In the Trust Date field, enter the date the trustee was incorporated.
6 Select the state in which the trust does business, and then select the trust's
organization type.
7 Click Save.

Piggyback Loan Synchronization
4 On the Add Required Fields window, enter up to 10 Field IDs. When finished
Use the Piggyback Loan Synchronization setting to manage the fields that are click Add.
synchronized when users update loans using the Piggyback Loans tool. These
fields are also applied when users create new piggyback loans using the • If you need to add additional fields, click Add More.
Piggyback Loan tool. 5 To add fields by selecting them from input forms, click the Lookup icon.
• On the Find Fields window, select a form from the list on the left.
To Select Piggyback Loan Synchronization Fields:
• Right-click the fields you want to add to the synchronization list.
7 To remove a field, select it from the Field ID list, and then click the Delete icon.
8 To include fields from verifications, select the appropriate check boxes. All
fields on the selected verification will be synchronized.
• Or click the Reset icon to return to the previously saved list.
NOTE: To return to the original list of default synchronization fields, click Default
List. Any changes you have made to the list will be lost.

Sync Templates • Intent to Proceed Comments (field ID 3976)
Use the Sync Templates setting to create and manage templates that define fields Additionally, for linked loans, selections made in the construction loan file for the
and verifications that are synchronized between two loan files that are part of the Secured by Customer’s Current Principal Dwelling (field ID CONST.X2) and
same construction-to-permanent loan transaction. If an Encompass user plans to Non-rescindable Transaction (field ID 3942) check boxes on the Construction
send the borrower separate Loan Estimates and Closing Disclosures for the Management form are automatically copied to the permanent loan file. Changes
construction-only and permanent portions the transaction, the Encompass user made to the check boxes in the permanent file will be overwritten by the selections
utilizes the Construction Management form to link a construction-only loan file and in the construction file.
a permanent loan file. The template is applied when linking the loans initially and
when manually synchronizing the loans later. If an administrator creates more Enable Access to the Sync Templates Setting
than one sync template, an Encompass user can select the appropriate template. Administrators configure access to the Sync Templates setting from the Personas
Th following fields are automatically synchronized when a Disclosure Tracking setting by selecting the Sync Templates check box on the Settings tab in the
entry is created for a linked loan: Company Settings section.
• Borrower Type (field ID 4008)

To Create a Sync Template:
• Borrower First Name (field ID 4000) 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
• Borrower Middle Name (field ID 4001) 2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Sync Templates.
• Borrower Last Name (field ID 4002) 3 To create a new template, click the New icon.
• Borrower Suffix (field ID 4003)
• Borrower Home Email (field ID 1240)
• Co-Borrower Type (field ID 4009)
• Co-Borrower First Name (field ID 4004)
• Co-Borrower Middle Name (field ID 4005)
• Co-Borrower Last Name (field ID 4006)
• Co-Borrower Suffix (field ID 4007)
• LE Date Issued (field ID LE1.X1)
• Closing Cost Estimation Expiration Date (field ID LE1.X28)
• Time (field ID LE1.X8)
• Time Zone (field ID LE1.X9)
• Estimated Closing Date (field ID 763)
• CD Date Issued (field ID CD1.X1)
• Closing Date (field ID 748)
• Intent to Proceed (field ID 3164)
• LE Sent On (field ID 3972)
• Intent to Proceed Received Date (field ID 3197)
• Intent to Proceed Received By (field ID 3973)
• Intent to Proceed Received Method (field ID 3974)
• Intent to Proceed Received – Other Description (field ID 3975)

4 Type a Template Name and Description. • If you need to add additional fields, click Add More.
6 To add fields by selecting them from forms, click the Find icon.
• On the Find Fields window, select a form from the list on the left.
• Right-click the fields you want to add to the synchronization list. Selected
fields are highlighted a peach color.
5 To specify synchronized fields using field IDs, click the New icon, enter up to
10 field IDs on the Add Required Fields window, and then click Add.
• When finished, click OK.

7 To remove a field, select a field from the Field ID list, and then click the Delete
icon.
8 To include fields from verifications, select the appropriate check boxes in the
Verifications section at the bottom of the screen. All fields on the selected
verifications will be synchronized.
9 To replace the selected fields and verifications with a list of default fields and
verifications set by Encompass, click the Default List button.

To Duplicate, Edit, or Delete a Template: • If you configure the date here, Encompass users cannot edit the revision date
• To duplicate a template, select a template on the list, click the Duplicate icon on
on the Privacy Policy input form.
the upper-right, rename the template, and then click Save. • If you do not configure the date here, the month defaults to 1 and the year
• To edit a template, double-click a template on the list, edit the name, description, defaults to 11, but Encompass users can then edit the date on the Privacy
field list, and verifications as needed, and then click Save. Policy input form.
• To delete a template, select a template on the list and then click the Delete icon.
4 In the Privacy Policy section, select the form that your company will use when
printing or ordering disclosures.
5 In the Facts section, select the types of information that your company collects
Privacy Policy about the borrower and indicate whether you want to refer to the borrower as
a customer or member.
Use the Privacy Policy setting to select the privacy policy statement to use when
6 In the Reasons We Can Share section, for each type of information, indicate
printing or ordering disclosures. Then select the default content that displays in
whether you share the borrower information, and whether the borrower can
the Privacy Policy input form when you start a new loan.
limit the sharing.
7 In the How Do We Protect Personal Information? section, type or select the
following information:
8 Type a description of additional privacy safeguards your company offers, if
applicable.
9 Select options that describe how you collect personal information.
10 Type a description of additional rights to limit sharing the borrower may have,
if applicable.
11 In the Definitions Select section definitions that define how you share personal
information with affiliates, non-affiliates, and financial companies with whom
you do joint marketing.
12 In the Other Important Information section, type any other important
information that you want to disclose on the Privacy Policy form.
13 In the Opt-Out Section section, enter or type information that will apply if the
privacy policy allows the borrower to opt-out of information sharing. Include
contact information the borrower can use to limit sharing or to inquire about
additional information related to information sharing.
Zipcode Setup
To Configure the Setting: Use the Zipcode Setup setting to add custom ZIP code/city combinations to the
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Encompass ZIP code database. If you add a ZIP code that was already assigned
2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Privacy Policy. to a city in the database when Encompass was shipped, the new ZIP code/city
combination will replace the existing combination in the database.
3 In the Revision Date section, select a month and year to set the revision date
that displays on the Privacy Policy output form. After entering a ZIP code on any Encompass input form, the corresponding City
field is automatically populated based on the ZIP code/city combinations in the
Encompass ZIP code database. When a ZIP code that has been assigned to

multiple cities by the US Postal Service (USPS) is entered, a pop-up window created by Encompass users within each organization are assigned the HMDA
listing all applicable cities displays, enabling you to select the city to add to the profile associated with the organization's LEI. When making 2018 HMDA
field. If a USPS ZIP code/city combination is not reflected in the Encompass calculations, Encompass uses the HMDA Profile settings for the LEI for the
ZIP code database, the city will not be available to select. organization.
To Create a Custom ZIP code/City Combination: To Create a HMDA Profile:

1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
2 In the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Zipcode Setup. 2 In the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click HMDA Profiles.
3 Click the New icon, and then type a ZIP code. 3 In the List of HMDA Profiles section, click the New icon.
4 Type the city to associate with the ZIP code. 4 In the HMDA Profile Details section, type the name of the profile.
5 Select the state to associate with the ZIP code, and then type the county. 5 In the Respondent Information section, enter the Respondent name, address,
6 When finished, click OK. and contact information.
6 Selected the Use Non Universal Loan Identifier (NULI) for Loans Reported
To Edit ZIP Code Information as Partially Exempt check box to control how the Universal Loan ID (field ID
1 Click to select the ZIP code in the list, and then click the Edit icon. HMDA.X28) is populated on the HMDA Information input form. When this
check box is selected and the Loan is Partially Exempt check box is selected
2 Type the new information, and then click OK. on the HMDA Information input form for a loan file, the loan number is
populated to the Universal Loan ID field and the field’s name is changed to Non
To Delete a ZIP Code Universal Loan ID.
1 Click to select the ZIP code in the list, and then click the Delete icon. 7 In the Parent Mailing Address section, enter the mailing address for the
2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion. reporting institution's parent company.
NOTE: The Parent Mailing Address fields are used only for loans with data
collected in 2017 and reported by March 1, 2018.
HMDA Profiles 8 In the HMDA Application Date section, to use a field other than the default
Use the HMDA Profiles settings to create one or more HMDA Profiles for your Encompass Application Date (field ID 745) in the HMDA report, select Other,
company. Enter HMDA information (such as your Respondent information) to be select a date field from the list, and then click OK.
included in the HMDA report generated for each profile. You can also configure • To search for a field, enter all or part of a search term in the Find field and
the default content that displays in the HMDA Input form when you start a new then click the Find button to locate the first occurrence of a field containing
loan, such as the HMDA application date, how loans without channel selections the search terms. Click Find again to advance to the next occurrence.
are treated, and which income, DTI, and CLTV fields are used for purposes of
HMDA reporting. 9 Select options for the Institution Type and the Channel Option
10 In the Relied Upon Factors section, select alternative DTI, CLTV, or Income
Use the List of HMDA Profiles section at the top of the HMDA Profiles setting to
fields to use for HMDA reporting purposes.
create one of more HMDA reporting profiles for a company. When a profile is
created, it is added to the List of HMDA Profiles section. Administrators can use • To search for a field, select Other. On the Select Field pop-up window, enter
the icons on the upper-right of the table to add, edit, and delete profiles. Each all or part of a search term in the Find field and then click the Find button to
profile is assigned a unique Legal Identity Identifier (LEI). Use the LEIs to locate the first occurrence of a field containing the search terms. Click Find
associate HMDA profiles with different organizations within the company. again to advance to the next occurrence.
To assign an LEI to an organization, double-click an organization folder in the 11 In the Purchased Loans section, select options for reporting on loans that you
Organization/User Setup setting (Encompass Settings > Company/User Setup have purchased from other institutions.
> Organization/Users) and then use the Legal Entity Identifier (LEI) section on 12 In the Rate Spread section, indicate whether the rate spread will display to 3
the Organization Details window to associate the organization with an LEI. Loans decimal points.

13 When finished, click the Save icon. 4 To change the application date used when including loans in NMLS reports:
14 The profile is added to the List of HMDA Profiles table at the top of the setting. • In the Reports Setting section, select a date for the Application Date Field.
• Or select Other from the Application Date Field list, and then select a date
To Edit a HMDA Profile: from the Reporting Database.
1 In the List of HMDA Profiles section, double-click a profile on the list. 5 To prevent NMLS Mortgage Call Reports from reflecting fees collected after
2 Edit the profile information, and then click the Save icon. credits to the borrower have been deducted, select Exclude Origination
Credits from Fees Collected.
To Delete a HMDA Profile: 6 When finished, click the Save icon.
1 In the List of HMDA Profiles section, select a profile on the list.
2 Click the Delete icon.
Verification Contact Setup
Use the Verification Contact Setup setting to select the default contact phone
NMLS Report Setup number (field BE144) and fax number (field BE145) for your company that display
Use the NMLS Report Setup tool to select the states to include when generating in the From section on the phone VOD, VOE, VOL, VOM, and VOR verification
loan data needed for an NMLS Mortgage Call Report (in XML format) from the input forms. The numbers are then populated to the verification output forms. By
Encompass Pipeline. Select each state in which your company is licensed and is default, the Current User option is selected.
required to submit an NMLS Mortgage Call Report. By default, Encompass
considers the 1003 Signature Date (field ID 3261) to be the loan’s initial To Configure the Contact Phone and Fax Numbers:
application date. When generating NMLS Mortgage Call Report data, the initial 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
application date determines whether or not the loan file is included in the report
(based on the time period the report is covering). Administrators can use the
NMLS Report Setup tool to designate the date field that will be used as the initial
application date.
To Configure the Setting:

2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click NMLS Report Setup.
3 Select each state in which your company is licensed and is required to submit
an NMLS Mortgage Call Report.
• Click Check All to select every state in the list.
• Click Uncheck All to clear the check box for each state in the list.

2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click Verification Contact NOTE: If the Current User or the user associated with the selected
Setup. persona/milestone has no phone or fax number entered in their user profile, or
if the user associated with the selected role has no phone or fax number
entered in the File Contacts tool, then the default phone and fax number fields
will be populated from the Company/User Setup setting. The numbers from the
Administration folder in the Organization hierarchy in the Organization/Users
setting will be used first. If the Administration folder has no numbers entered,
then the numbers from the Company Information setting will be used.
NOTE: If the phone numbers are deleted on the input form, the input fields will
remain blank, but the output form fields will be populated with the default numbers
described in the note above.
FHA Informed Consumer Choice Disclosure

Originators of FHA loans can use the FHA Informed Consumer Choice Disclosure
setting to populate default data to the loan comparison table on the Informed
Consumer Choice Disclosure tab on the FHA Management form as needed to
comply with regulatory requirements. The data is then populated to the FHA
Informed Consumer Choice Disclosure Notice output form.
3 Select the user, persona, or role whose title, phone and fax number will display
on the verification forms:
• Select Current User to populate contact information for the user who is
currently working in the loan.
• Select a persona/milestone option to populate contact information for the
user/persona assigned to the loan at the selected milestone.
• Select a role (Lock Desk, Servicer, Quality Control, Accounting or any
The FHA Informed Consumer Choice disclosure Notice provides a one-page
additional roles created for your company) to populate contact information for generic analysis comparing the mortgage costs of an FHA-insured mortgage with
the user assigned to the specified role in the File Contacts tool for a loan. the mortgage costs of similar conventional mortgage products offered by the
lender for which the borrower may qualify. The setting includes two columns that
are populated with default data: one for FHA Financing 203(b) Fixed Rate and one

for Conventional Financing 95% with Mortgage Insurance. The data can be
updated as needed. The recommended best practice is to revise the entries at
least once a year to reflect prevailing market conditions.
NOTE: The seed data for the conventional financing interest rate has been set to
5% by default to match the calculations in the FHA 203(b) portion of the setting. If
you clear all the options in the setting, Encompass generates a default disclosure
form with a 7% scenario.
To Access the FHA Informed Consumer Chose Disclosure Setting:

2 On the left panel, click Loan Setup, and then click FHA Informed Consumer
Choice Disclosure.
3 Using the fields provided, enter or modify the default data to populate to the
loan comparison table located on the Informed Consumer Choice Disclosure
tab of the FHA Management form. The data is then populated to the FHA
Informed Consumer Choice Disclosure Notice output form when it is generated
or printed.
NOTE: It is recommended that you revisit this setting at least once a year to
ensure this data reflects prevailing market conditions and is compliant with
regulatory requirements.

Chapter 8
eFolder Setup
Document Conversion • When the setting is enabled, document files are converted into images when
they are added to the eFolder and are viewed in the Document Details
Use the Document Conversion setting to enable the conversion of document files window and File Manager in an image viewer that delivers faster loading
into image files when they are added to the eFolder. Converting document files times and allows thumbnail views of pages in the file.
into image files reduces the time need to loan and view documents in the eFolder.
• When the setting is disabled, document files are added to the eFolder in their
You can also set the conversion preferences for document files that are added to
original format and are viewed in the Document Details window and File
the Unassigned File section of the eFolder file manager.
Manager in a PDF viewer.
Document Conversion • After the setting is changed, the new file conversion method applies only to
Use the Document Conversion setting to enable the conversion or document files new documents that are added to the eFolder. The file formats for documents
into image files in the eFolder, and to configure the image conversion options for that were previously imported into the eFolder do not change, which means
unassigned document files that are imported into the eFolder File Manager. that a user can have both image files and native-format files associated with
the same loan.
To Enable Document Conversions: 4 When finished, click Save.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. IMPORTANT:When the setting is enabled, the original document file will not be
2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Document Conversion. saved, unless an administrator enables the save option in the document
conversion preferences that are configured in the Documents setting. For
additional information, refer to “Documents” on page 110.
Unassigned Document Conversion Preferences

Use the Unassigned Document Conversion Preferences section to configure the
image conversion options for unassigned document files that are imported into the
eFolder File Manager.
To Set Unassigned Document Conversion Preferences:

1 Select the Keep a copy of the document in its original format check box to keep
a copy of the document in its original file format.
• If the check box is selected, the file is converted into an image file, and a copy
of the file in its original format is saved. Users can click the View in Original
Format button on the Document Details window or File Manager to view the
file in native format.
3 Select or clear the Enable Document Conversion check box to configure the • If the check box is cleared, the file is converted into an image file, and the
conversion method used when document files are imported into the eFolder. original file is not saved.
2 Select the format used when the document file is converted into an image.
• Color - Pages with color are converted as color images. Pages with minimal
color are converted as black & white images.
Chapter 8: eFolder Setup 109

• Black & White - All pages are converted as black and white images. Documents
Consumes a reduced amount of space and delivers faster retrieval times The Documents section displays the document information that is configured
when viewing files. when you create or edit Documents from this setting. Use the icons on the
NOTE: The default selection for a new document type is Black & White. upper-right to create, edit, and delete the document entries.
3 Select the resolution for the image.
To Create a Document:
2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Documents.
Documents 3 Click New.
Use the Documents setting to create and manage the tracking information
associated with loan documents (including standard forms, custom forms,
settlement services, verifications (verifs)), to set the conversion preferences used
when document files are converted into image files in the eFolder, and to select
the documents that are added to initial disclosure (i.e., eDisclosure) and closing
document (i.e., Encompass Closer) packages based on specific criteria. The
document is included only when one or more of the criteria are met.
• Tracking Information - When custom forms and needed documents (supplied
by the borrower) are requested for a loan, the expected receipt and expiration
dates are calculated based on the default days entered in the Documents
setting. You can also modify the preconfigured expected receipt and expiration
dates for Encompass standard documents, verifications, and settlement
services as needed.
• Document Conversion Preferences - When you create or edit documents,
you can select the file format to use when a document is imported into the
eFolder and converted into an image. By default, the original document file is
not retained unless you configure the setting to retain a copy of the document in
its original file format (Step 9 in the Create a document procedure below).
NOTE: Although the conversion preferences are selected on the Documents
setting, you must use the Document Conversion setting to enable the document
conversion process.
• eDisclosure and Encompass Closer Packages - When you create or edit
documents, you can configure the document so that it is included in all initial
4 In the Name field, type the name of the document.
disclosure (i.e., eDisclosure) or closing document (i.e., Encompass Closer)
packages, or included in packages only when specified criteria are met. 5 In the Type field, select one of the three options.
TIP: Use the Document Sets setting (in the Loan Templates setting) to create The Type field is used to indicate the type of document being requested from
groups of documents. Within a document set, each document is associated with the borrower. If the type is Standard Form or Custom Form, the document
the milestone at which it is used. Document sets are then used as components of exists in Encompass and is associated with the document selected from the
loan templates. Source list. When you request the document (usually from the eFolder) the
source document is used as the template to which it adds data for the specific
loan. The borrower is typically requested to sign and return the document. The
Needed type indicates that the document is not an existing Encompass
document but is provided by the borrower, such as a pay stub or W-2 form.

6 In the Source field, select the name of the existing document associated with • Click the Criteria button to specify criteria for including the document in an
the new document. This field is only active if you selected Standard Form or eDisclosure, Encompass Closer, or Pre-Closing package. The document is
Custom Form for the Type field. included only when one or more of the criteria are met.
7 Enter the Days to Receive and Days to Expire. NOTE: To include the document any time a specific plan code is applied to the
8 In the Available section, select a check box to configure whether documents eDisclosure, Encompass Closer, or Pre-Closing package, select the Plan
are visible externally: Code check box, and then select the specific plan code(s). Only custom plan
codes or plan codes created as an alias are available to select here.
• WebCenter - The document or service will be visible to borrowers or partners
via the WebCenter or Loan Center. This option is used when documents are 12 Select a Signature Type from the list.
sent by clicking the Send button in the eFolder, and then clicking Send Files. 13 Click OK.
• TPO WebCenter Portal - When a loan has been originated fromTPO
WebCenter or Encompass TPO Connect, the document or service will be Options
visible to the loan originator via TPO WebCenter or Encompass TPO Additional options display in the Options section at the bottom of the setting.
Connect. The document will become visible after the loan file is saved in
Encompass.
• EDM Lenders (Send Files to Lender) - The document or service is visible
when files are sent to lenders. This option is used when documents are sent
by clicking the Send button in the eFolder, and then clicking Send to Lender.
9 In the Conversion Preferences section, select the check box to maintain a copy
of the document in its original file format when the Enable Document
Conversion check box is selected in the Document Conversion setting. To Configure the Options:
NOTE: If this option is selected, the document can be viewed later in its • Use the Document Days to Count options to calculate the expected receipt
original format by clicking the View in Original Format button in the Document and expiration dates for requested documents based on week days or calendar
Details or File Manager window in the eFolder. days.
10 Select the image format to used when the file is imported into the eFolder and • Select the Create a document entry when Informational Documents are
converted into an image file. The default selection for a new document type is sent to borrower check box to create a document entry in the eFolder when
Black & White. you send an informational document (no signature required) to a borrower.
When you select this check box, the following check box is enabled for selection.
• Color - Pages with color are converted as Color. Pages with minimal color
are converted as Black & White. • Select the Save copy... check box to save a copy of information documents in
the eFolder when the documents are sent to a borrower.When you select this
• Black & White - Consumes the least amount of space and delivers the
check box, the following check box is enabled for selection.
fastest retrieval times when viewing files.
• Select the Insert Date and Time in the Document check box to add date/time
NOTE: Although the conversion preferences are selected on the Documents
stamps to copies of information documents stored in the eFolder.
setting, you must use the Document Conversion setting to enable the
document conversion process. • Select the Queue Documents for Upload/Conversion check box to allow
users to continue working in Encompass while files are uploaded and converted
11 In the Encompass Docs Service section, select a check box to add include the (when document conversion is enabled) into the eFolder in the background. this
document in all eDisclosure, closing, or pre-Closing electronic disclosure allows users to continue working in Encompass while file uploads and
packages. conversions are in process.
• If the document is a custom form and the package requires eSigning, be sure
the form includes the required eSigning signature points.

Document Export Templates 7 Select an Annotations Export option to configure the notes that will be included
in the exported .pdf files.
Use the Document Export Templates setting to create and manage templates that
8 Select the Set and Define Export Location check box to have all Encompass
control how loan documents are exported from the Pipeline. Templates control the
users export files to a predefined folder, and then type the file path in the
document stacking template used for document selection, password protection,
Document Export Location field or click the Browse button to browse to the
whether notes are included, the location where exported documents are stored,
folder.
the naming convention used for exported document files, and whether the
documents are exported as a single .pdf file or a .zip file containing multiple .pdf • Clear the check box to allow users to select their own location for storing the
files. export files.
After templates have been created by the administrator, users can apply the 9 In the File Name Builder section, select up to three components to use when
templates when they export loan documents from the Pipeline. naming the exported .pdf or .zip file.
10 If you select the Other option for a naming component, use the text box to
To Create a Document Export Template: enter the text that will display in as the naming component.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. • The File Name example at the bottom of the File Name Builder section
2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Document Export provides an example of the name that each export file will be given.
Templates. 11 When finished, click Save.
3 In the Document Export Templates section, click the New icon, and then
rename the template as needed.
Document Groups
Use the Document Groups setting to create groups of related documents that
simplify the management of documents in the eFolder. When a user selects a
document group from the Document Group drop-down list in the eFolder, only the
documents included in the document group will display in the eFolder.
For example, you can create a request group that contains all the disclosures that
you want to request from your borrower. If the documents listed in the document
group have been added to the eFolder, a user can open the eFolder, select the
document group, select the appropriate documents, and then click the Request
button to request the documents from the borrower.
The four default document groups are:
• (All Documents) - Contains all documents. As new documents are created using
4 In the Templates Details section, select Export as PDF to export the the Documents setting, the documents are added to this group.
documents as a single .pdf file. • (Closing Documents) - Contains documents with the Add this document to the
• Or, select Export as ZIP to export the files as a .zip file containing individual Encompass Closer packages check box selected in the Documents setting.
.pdf files for each document. • (eDisclosures) - Contains documents with the Add this document to the
5 Select the Protect File with Password check box to use password protection eDisclosure packages check box selected in the Documents setting.
for the exported .pdf files, and then type the password in the Set Password and • (Settlement Services) - Contains all settlement services. This group cannot be
Confirm Password fields. modified.
6 Select an option from the Document Stack to Export list to apply a Document
Stacking Template, which configures the selection of documents and the order
in which they are exported.

To Create a Document Group: 2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Document Stacking
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Templates
2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Document Groups.
3 In the Stacking Templates section, click the New icon, double-click the new
template, and then type a name for the document stacking order template.
4 With the new stacking order selected, click the New icon in the documents
section.
4 In the Document Groups section, replace the New Group name with a name
for the group.
5 From the Documents list on the left, select a document, and then drag it onto
the name of the new document group.
6 To remove a document from the group, select a document, and then drag it
back to the Documents list.
Document Stacking Templates

Use the Document Stacking Templates setting to define the stacking order
templates that can be applied to configure the order in which documents display 5 On the Update Document Stacking Template window, type a Description.
in the Documents list in the eFolder and when you click the Send button in the
6 In the New Documents list, select a category from the Source drop-down list to
eFolder. You can create multiple stacking order sets and also designate a default
display only documents in the selected category:
stacking order.
• To reposition a document in the New Stacking Order Template list, select a
NOTE: Before you can create a stacking order set, you must create the document, and then click the Up and Down buttons.
documents that you will add to the set. Use the Documents setting to create
documents. • To remove a document from the set, select a document in the New Stacking
Order Template list, and then click the Delete icon.
To Create a Document Stacking Template: NOTE: The first four selections are generated by the Encompass Docs
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Solution document generation engine and can include individual documents or
sets of documents. Sets are clearly marked in the document list with the word
set preceding the entry name. Entries for individual documents are slightly off
set to the right on the list.

7 Select a document in the New Documents list, drag it to the New Stacking 2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Document
Order Template list in the left panel, and then drop it in the location where you Identification.
want it to display in the stacking order.
• Or, select a document, click the right Arrow icon to move the document to the
New Stacking Order Template list, and then use the Up or Down button to
reposition the document in the stacking order.
8 To remove a document from the set, select a document in the New Stacking
Order Template list, and then click the Delete icon.
9 In the New Stacking Order Template list, select a check box in the Required
column to indicate that an attachment is required for the document when it is
sent to a borrower, lender, or partner.
10 Select the Display only the documents included in the stacking order
check box to create a filtered stacking order, which displays only the
documents in the stacking order when the stacking order is applied.
• Or clear the check box to display eFolder documents that are not in the
stacking order. These documents display in alphabetical order at the bottom 3 To enable bar codes, select the Enable the bar code feature check box.
of the list below the documents in the stacking order. 4 In the left panel, select the check boxes to enable bar coding when the subject
11 Select the Auto-select all documents in the stacking order for Print and property is in one of the selected states.
Save check box to print or save all of the documents in the stacking order 5 In the right panel, select the types of documents to which bar codes will be
template even if the user clears some of the check boxes. added.
• Or clear the check box to allow users to clear the check boxes in the stacking • Select the Existing Attachments in eFolder check box to add bar codes to
order template to print or save individual documents. existing eFolder attachments.
12 Click OK. • Clear the check box to disable bar codes for existing eFolder attachments
(this avoids inserting a new bar code on an attachment that might already
have a bar code).
Document Identification • Select the Informational Documents options to indicate the type of
Use the Document Identification setting to enable or disable bar codes on files that informational documents where bar codes will be added.
are managed in the eFolder. Bar codes allow the Encompass intelligent document 6 When finished, click the Save icon.
recognition (IDR) feature to accurately identify files and automatically assign them
to the appropriate document tracking records in the eFolder.
If you enable the bar code feature, you can indicate whether bar codes are used Document Training
in specified subject property states, and whether bar codes are added to initial
disclosures (that are sent using the eDisclosure feature in the eFolder) or included Use the Document Training setting to specify eFolder file attachments that will be
in the closing documents. automatically assigned to selected eFolder documents. After a file has been
trained, any future copies of the file attachment imported into the eFolder will be
automatically assigned to the specified document.Suggestions are submitted
To Configure Bar Code Settings:
from the eFolder File Manager by Encompass users who want to automatically
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. assign a file that is currently being imported into the Unassigned section of the File
Manager. The suggestions display in the Document Training setting, where an
administrator (or other designated approver) approves or rejects them. Approvers
can also use the setting to make their own suggestions.

• When a suggestion is approved, the file is automatically assigned to the 9 To delete unwanted entries in the Templates section, select an entry and then
document when the file is imported into the eFolder. click the Delete button.
• When a suggestion is rejected, the file will continue to be added to the
Unassigned section of the eFolder File Manager. To Add a Suggestion:
NOTE: By default, only a user with the superadmin user ID has permission to 1 To open the Suggest Training window and add a suggestion, click the Suggest
approve or reject suggestions. Permission to approve documents is granted by button in the Templates section.
selecting the Approver check box in the Personas settings on the eFolder tab in • Or, select a document in the Documents section, and then click the
the Unassigned Files (File Manager) section. A persona with Approver rights also Suggest button.
has the right to suggest documents for training from both the Document Training 2 In the Destination section, select the Document Class (name of the eFolder
setting and the File Manager. document) to which the file will be assigned.
• If you selected a document before clicking the Suggest button, the
To Approve or Reject a Suggestion:
Document Class field will already be populated with the selected document.
3 In the Source section, select Browse to File, and then click the Folder icon to
2 In the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Document Training. select a file from your computer. When you browse to select a file, the Suggest
3 In the Documents section, select a document. Training window will close and you will be returned to the Document Training
• Documents in bold font have suggestions that are awaiting approval.
setting.
• Or, click Templates, select a template from the list, view the selected
4 The Templates section displays all suggestions that have been submitted for
the selected document, including the following information: template file in the viewing area (the file text displays in the Text box), and
then click OK when finished. This options is typically used to reassign an
• Status - The status of the suggestion: Suggested, Approved, or Rejected. Encompass form to a different eFolder document.
• Status By - The Encompass user who placed the suggestion in its current 4 The new suggestion displays in bold font in the Templates section on the
status. If the status is Suggested, this will be the user who submitted the Document Training setting with a status of Suggested. A file with multiple
suggestion. pages will display individual entries for each page in the file.
• Status Date - The date when the status was last changed. If the status is
Suggested, this field displays the date the suggestion was submitted.
Conditions
• Suggested By - The Encompass user who submitted the suggestion.
Use the Conditions setting to create templates of preliminary and underwriting
• Suggested Date - The date when the suggestion was submitted.
conditions that you can add to a condition set and import into the eFolder for a
5 Select a suggestion in the Templates section. a Suggestion specific loan. The underwriter is primarily responsible for managing conditions,
• Suggestions in bold font are awaiting approval. however other loan team members (if authorized) can import, track, and clear
conditions on the eFolder’s Preliminary Conditions and Underwriting Conditions
6 Use the viewing panel below the list to view the file. tabs.
7 Use the Text panel to view the text in the file.
8 After reviewing the file, click the Approve or Reject button to change the status. To Create a Condition:
• After a file has been approved for document training:

•When the file is imported into the eFolder via fax, the file is automatically
2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Conditions.
attached to the document.
•When the file is imported into the eFolder using the eFolder Browse and
Attach or Scan and Attach icon, users can attach the file to the document
by clicking the Auto Assign button in the File Manager.

3 Click the New icon. Condition Sets
Use the Condition Sets setting to create sets of preliminary and underwriting
conditions to meet the requirements of different loan criterion, such as by loan
type. Conditions from a Condition Set can then be imported into the eFolder for a
specific loan.
To Create a Condition Set:

2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Conditions Sets.
4 Type the Name and Description of the condition.

5 Click the Documents button to select one or more documents that are required
to satisfy the condition.
6 In the Category field, select one of the six condition categories.
7 In the Prior To field, select one of the options to describe when the condition
must be satisfied.
8 In the Owner field, select the role that is expected to the provide the condition
requirements to the underwriter.
9 Select the Allow to Clear check box to allow the role to clear the condition.
10 Enter a number to automatically populate the Days to Receive field for a
condition.
4 Type the name and description of the condition set.
11 Select the Internally or Externally check boxes (or both) to indicate which
5 To add conditions to the set, select one or more conditions in the All Conditions
type of Condition Form this condition will be printed on.
list, and then click Add.
NOTE: The two print options are used to determine the type of Condition
6 To remove conditions from the set, select one or more conditions from the
Forms on which a condition will be printed. If neither option is selected, the
Selected Conditions list, and then click Remove.
condition will not be included on any Condition Forms.
7 Click Save.
12 Click Save.

Post-Closing Conditions Post-Closing Conditions Sets
Use the Post-Closing Conditions setting to create post-closing conditions that you Use the Post-Closing Conditions Sets setting to create sets of post-closing
can add to a post-closing condition set and import into the Post-Closing conditions that must be met after a loan has closed. Conditions from a Post-
Conditions tab on the eFolder for a specific loan. The Post-Closing Conditions tab Closing Condition Set can then be imported into the eFolder’s Post-Closing
is typically used by your shipper or post-closer to track and manage trailing Condition tab for a specific loan.
documents and any other outstanding conditions.
To Create a Post-Closing Condition Set:
To Create a Post-Closing Condition: 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Post-Closing Condition
2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Post-Closing Sets.
Conditions. 3 Click the New icon.
4 Type the Name and Description of the condition.

5 Click the Documents button to select one or more documents that are required
to satisfy the condition.
6 In the Source field, select an option to indicate who will provide the required
information.
7 Select the Recipient with whom the condition will be cleared.
4 Type the Name and Description of the post-closing condition set.
8 In the Days to Receive field, enter the expected number of days required for
the condition to be cleared with the recipient. 5 To add conditions to the set, select one or more conditions in the All Conditions
list, and then click Add.
9 Click Save.
6 To remove conditions from the set, select one or more conditions from the
Selected Conditions list, and then click Remove.
7 Click Save.

HTML Email Templates
Administrators can use the HTML Email Templates setting to set up
company-wide templates for HTML emails that can be sent from the eFolder when
requesting documents via the Request button, sending eDisclosures via the
eDisclosure button, or sending files via the Send button. Encompass ships with
one template for each category: document requests, eDisclosures, and sending
files. Administrators can create new templates for each category. Users can then
select one of the preconfigured HTML email templates from a drop-down list when
requesting a document, sending eDisclosures, or sending files from the eFolder.
To Create an eFolder HTML Email Template

2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click HTML Email Templates.
5 Select a Template Type:

• Loan Level Consent - Used when sending borrowers a request to agree to
receive loan documents electronically.
• Document Requests - Used when requesting documents via the eFolder
Request button.
• eDisclosures - Used when sending eDisclosures via the eFolder
eDisclosure button
4 Select a Loan Source:
• Pre-Closing Documents - Used when sending Pre-Closing Documents to
• Consumer Connect - Used for loans that originate from an Encompass borrowers via the Order Docs button on the RegZ-CD and Closing
Consumer Connect website. Conditions input forms.
• Non-Consumer Connect - Used for loans that originate from a source other • Sending Files - Used when sending files to borrower, lenders, or partners
than Encompass Consumer Connect, for example, loans that are originated via the eFolder Send button.
in Encompass or on an Encompass WebCenter or Loan Center website.
NOTE: Consumer Connect templates include an additional custom field for
Recipient Full Name that is used to insert individual recipient names into each
email. When a template includes this field and you try to change the Loan
Source from Consumer Connect to Non-Consumer Connect, a notification
informs you that you cannot change the Loan Source for a template that
includes the Recipient Full Name field.

.
4 To insert a hyperlink, highlight the link text, click the Hyperlink Icon, and select
an option.
• To have the link open the WebCenter or Loan Center, select The
• To have the link open a website, select General web address, and then
enter the URL for the website in the format http://www.websitename.com
• To have the link open the recipient's email application, select Email address,
and then enter the email address that you want to display in the email To line.
5 To insert the signature of the Encompass user who is sending the update, click
the Add a field icon, select the Signature option, and then click Insert.
6 Type a Subject line.

7 In the email message text box, type the content of the HTML email.
To Format a Template
Use the toolbar above the email message text box to format the content.
NOTE: If you paste content into the HTML editor from another text editor (for
1 Select text and use the drop-down lists to adjust the font type and size. example Word or Notepad), additional paragraph tags may be copied into the
HTML code from the other text editor, which could cause the signature to
2 Click the formatting icons to make the text bold, italic or underlined, or to display below the location where you pasted it. To adjust the signature location,
change the font color. open the source code, as described in Step 7, and remove the duplicate <P>
3 To insert an image, click the Image icon to open the Insert Image window, and </P> tags from around the signature.
select a file, and then click Insert. 6 To insert a commonly used field, click the Add a field icon, select the
• To add an image to the Insert Image window, click the Add icon, browse to Commonly Used Field option, select a field from the list, and then click Insert.
the image, and then click Open.
7 To insert any Encompass field, click the Add a field icon, and select the Other
• To delete an image from the Insert Image window, select an image, and then Field option:
click the Delete icon. • Type the field ID.
• Or click the Lookup icon, select a form in the left panel, right-click a field in
the left panel, and then click OK.

8 To modify the HTML code for the template, or to insert your own HTML code 3 Select or clear the Borrower will use one WebCenter site to retrieve, send,
for a template, right-click the content screen, click View Source, edit or enter and return updates and documents check box.
the HTML code, and then click Update. • Select the check box to enable borrowers to use the same log in account to
9 When finished, click Save. manage their updates and documents. When the setting is enabled, in order
to retrieve, send, and return loan status updates and documents, borrowers
can always use the Encompass WebCenter site belonging to the Encompass
WebCenter Configuration user who sends the first update, document request, or disclosure package.
• By default, the check box is cleared (i.e, not selected) and the setting is
Use the WebCenter Configuration setting to enable borrowers to always use the
disabled. If disabled, in order to retrieve, send, and return loan status updates
same WebCenter site to retrieve, send and return loan status updates and
and documents, borrowers are required to log in to the Encompass
documents, regardless of who sends the update, document request, or disclosure
WebCenter site belonging to the Encompass user who sends the update,
package. Borrowers can then use the same log in account to manage their
document request, or disclosure package to them. If multiple Encompass
updates and documents.
users send updates, document requests, or disclosure packages, borrowers
By default, the setting is disabled. If multiple Encompass users send updates, are required to create separate log in accounts for each Encompass
document requests, or disclosure packages, borrowers are required to create log WebCenter site in order to manage their respective updates and documents.
in accounts for each user’s WebCenter site in order to manage the respective
updates, document requests, or disclosure packages. .
To Enable or Disable the WebCenter Configuration Setting:

2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click WebCenter
Configuration.

Chapter 9
Docs Setup
Encompass Docs Solution Prerequisites
Prior to using the Encompass Docs Solution document generation engine, the
Ellie Mae team will coordinate setting up and activating your company’s
Encompass Docs Solution account, and then guide you through the following set
up and configuration tasks in Encompass:
• Docs Setup
• eFolder Setup
• Loan Templates
• Persona Settings
Docs Setup
Use the Docs Setup settings to create and manage the initial disclosures and
closing document packages that will be provided to users when they generate
documents. In addition, you must also use the Compliance Audit Settings to help
ensure compliance with regulations regarding high cost loans and to help prevent
users from originating high cost loans for states in which they are not permitted to
do so.
Set Up Initial Disclosure Packages

Use the eDisclosure Packages tool to select the eDisclosure packages that will be
sent to borrowers by your users and to enable or disable the eSigning option for
the disclosures.
In Encompass, “initial disclosures” are called “eDisclosures” and “initial disclosure
packages” are called “eDisclosure packages”.
Chapter 9: Docs Setup 121

eDisclosure packages include forms that are selected based on the subject TIP: If the eSigning option is enabled and the eDisclosure package contains
property state, loan channel, and other information selected in the loan file (for custom forms that require a signature, be sure you have inserted eSigning
example, loan program, loan type, lien type, and subject property location), as signature points in the forms. For detailed instructions, refer to the Custom Print
well as your company's status as a lender or broker. A package can contain Forms topic in the Encompass online help.
standard forms and custom forms from Encompass, as well as additional Ellie
Mae disclosure forms that are dynamically selected based on the information To Set Up eDisclosure Packages:
entered in the loan file. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
Your administrator can select one or more predefined eDisclosure packages to 2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click eDisclosure Packages.
use for all loans, or set criteria that make different packages available when
specified milestones or fields have been completed. Administrators can also allow
individual users to select their eDisclosure packages.
Administrators can select one or more predefined eDisclosure packages to use
for all loans, or set criteria that make different packages available when specified
milestones or fields have been completed. Administrators can also allow
individual users to select their eDisclosure packages. Administrators can also
allow individual users to select their eDisclosure packages, and personas who
have permission can add and remove documents from packages before sending
them to borrowers.
NOTE: Add/remove permission is configured in the Persona settings on the
Loans tab in the Closing Docs section.
The content of the predefined eDisclosure packages is designed to meet the
requirements for the stages in the loan process listed below:
• At Application
• Three-day
• At Lock
• Approval
Three additional options allow you to include the GFE, RegZ-TIL, or Loan 3 On the upper-right, select a default option to use if no channel is selected for a
Estimate in a package: loan file.
• Include GFE 4 Click a channel tab at the top of the Ellie Mae eDisclosure Packages section.
• Include TIL 5 For the Entity Type, select Broker Disclosures, Lender Disclosures, or both.
• Include LE NOTE: If you select both entity types, the packages will include all forms used
by brokers and all forms used by lenders. The packages include only one copy
NOTE: To view the list of forms that are inside the different eDisclosure
of forms that are used by both.
packages, refer to the eDisclosure Matrix document, which is available in the Ellie
Mae Resource Center and the Ellie Mae Knowledge Base. 6 For Banker-Wholesale loans, you can select the Make the Package
Informational Only check box to make all disclosures informational. The
The eSigning option allows borrowers to access the documents online using the
packages will not provide signing options or fax cover sheets.
Loan Center (or WebCenter). After consenting to receive electronic disclosures,
the borrower reviews the documents online and then signs the documents 7 On the Initial Packages section, select a Control Option from the list.
electronically. Your users will receive an email notification that the signed
documents are available.

Company selects a package for all loans • For each condition you have selected, select the check box for one or more
• Select the check box for one or more packages on the list.
preconfigured packages that will be used when the condition exists.
NOTE: If multiple packages are selected, the package contains all the forms NOTE: If multiple packages are selected, the package contains all the forms
listed in each package. The package includes only one copy of forms that are listed in each package. Duplicate copies of forms should not be included in
used by multiple packages. the final package.
Company selects a different package based on condition User selects a package for each loan (no company control)
1 Click to select a package on the list, and then click Modify Condition. • No additional configuration is required when you select this option. The user
is allowed to select the package when generating an eDisclosure package.
2 On the Condition window, in the Select Condition Type field, select
Milestone Finished or Field Value Entered. 9 For each channel tab, repeat steps 5-8 in the “To Set Up eDisclosure
Packages” instructions starting on page 122.
3 If you selected Milestone Finished, select a milestone from the Finished
Milestone list, and then click Save. 10 When finished, click the Save icon.
4 If you selected Field Value Entered, click the New icon, enter the Field IDs
To Set the Borrower Signing Options:
for the fields that must be completed before the condition is met, and then
click Add. 1 In the Borrower Signing section, clear or select the Provide eSigning option
check box to disable or enable the option, and then clear or select the check
• Or, to locate a field on a form, click the Find icon, select a field on the left boxes to disable or enable the option for each loan type.
panel, right-click a field on the form, and then click OK.
2 To configure the eSigning process so that the loan officer must eSign initial
5 After all the fields have been selected, click Save. disclosure before they are sent to other parties, select the Configure signing
NOTE: When multiple fields are selected, all the fields must be completed order with initial disclosures check box, click the Select States button,
before the eDisclosure package selection is triggered. select the state where you want the loan officer to eSign before initial
disclosure are sent to other parties, and then click OK.
6 Repeat steps 1-5 to modify conditions for additional packages.
7 Select the check box for a package to make it available to users when the To Set the Consent Options:
condition is met.
1 Select a Consent Required option:
8 Select the check boxes in the Include GFE, Include TIL and Include LE
• Once per loan - With this option (known as loan-level consent), the borrower
columns to include those forms in a package.
is required to consent only once per loan to receive any documents
NOTE: If a user sends additional disclosures and no loan data has changed, electronically. This loan-level consent status is applied and tracked on all
a message asks the user to confirm that the same eDisclosure package will current and future electronic document packages. When a borrower accept
be sent again. If changes to the loan data have triggered a new condition, a consent, all loan documents are accessible electronically. When a borrower
new eDisclosure package will be sent and a message will not display. declines consent, no loan documents are accessible electronically. During
the loan process, borrowers can change their minds and accept or decline
User selects a package for each loan (no company control) the agreement at any time. When the loan-level consent status changes, the
• No additional configuration is required when you select this option. The user following rules apply:
is allowed to select the package when generating an eDisclosure package. • When a borrower changes the loan-level consent status from decline to
8 On the Re-disclosure Package section, select an option from the Control accept, all document packages are accessible electronically, even
Option list. packages that were sent previously when consent was declined.
• When a borrower changes the loan-level consent status from accept to
Company selects a package for all loans decline:Packages where consent was accepted prior to the status change
accepted are still accessible electronically.
• Select the check box for one or more conditions that require different
eDisclosure packages. • Packages sent after the consent status change are not accessible
electronically.

• Packages sent that were not accessed prior to the consent status 3 Clear or select the The eDisclosure Consent form will state... check box to
change are no longer accessible electronically. include or exclude a statement on the eDisclosure Agreement stating the
• For loan and each package - With this option (known as loan-and- amount of any additional fees that will be charged if the borrower opts to
package-level consent), an initial consent agreement is sent to the receive printed copies of documents rather than electronic ones.
borrower before any electronic documents are sent. Separate • Enter the dollar amount that will be charged for printed copies in the text box..
consent agreements are also sent with each document package. 4 When finished, click the Save icon.
Borrowers must accept the agreement for each document package in
order to receive the documents electronically. Set Up eDisclosure Plan Codes
NOTE:This option provides an easy way to reaffirm prior loan level Use the eDisclosure Plan Codes setting to set up the plan codes your company
consent with each package. The package level consent is not a will use when generating initial disclosures (i.e., eDisclosures). When users
replacement for the loan-level consent. It is important to get prior loan- generate initial disclosures, they will select one of these plan codes and apply its
level consent before sending any eDisclosure. loan program data to the initial disclosures. Here you can select from a list of
With loan-and-package-level consent, a record is maintained for each investor-specific plan codes or create your own custom plan code.
package, regardless of the accept/decline option selected for other
packages. To Add eDisclosure Plan Codes:
Example: When a borrower accepts packages 1 and 2, declines 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
package 3, and then accepts package 4, packages 1, 2, and 4 are still 2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click eDisclosure Plan Codes.
accessible electronically, but package 3 is not.
The loan-and-package-level consent method also maintains a loan-
level consent status for the borrower that changes based on whether
the borrower has accepted or declined the previous disclosure
package.
Example: When a borrower accepts the initial loan-level consent
request, receives an eDisclosure, and then declines a package-level
consent request, the borrower’s loan-level consent status is set to
Declined.
The loan-level consent for the borrower is used to ensure compliance
with RESPA-TILA regulations that require a borrower's eConsent prior
to sending electronic disclosures. A separate attribute, loan-level
consent when eDisclosure was sent, tracks this prior loan-level
consent. When a borrower’s loan-level consent status has been
changed to declined, you must send a new loan-level eConsent
request to the borrower before you send any additional packages.
This ensures that your packages continue to be compliant with 2015
RESPA-TILA regulations.
2 Clear or select the option to use your company's branch office address in the 4 At the top of the Select Plan Code window, select an investor from the drop-
eDisclosure Agreement that borrowers must accept before they can receive down list.
loan documents electronically.
• A list of loan programs provided by the investor is displayed.
• The agreement uses the address in the Organization Details window
(Encompass Settings > Company Details > Organization/Users) for the
Organization hierarchy folder that contains the Encompass user who is
sending the consent.

• Select the Show already added plan codes check box to identify the plan • On the Status line, select the Active check box to include the program in
codes that have already been added and are available to users to select from the plan codes list that users select from when generating initial
when ordering eDisclosures. (The already added plan codes will be grayed- disclosures.
out in the list). • Enter the desired plan code ID, Description, and Investor name.
5 To view details about the loan program, including the values that will be added • The plan code ID is an investor-specific or company-specific identifier
to the loan file if selected, select the loan program, and then click the View for the program. Users selecting a plan code for their initial disclosure
Plan Code Details icon (magnifying glass). (i.e., eDisclosure) package may find it helpful if you create a plan code
6 To add the program to your company's plan codes list that users can select ID that helps describe the program (for example, C.30YRFIXED) so it's
from when generating initial disclosures, click to select one or more plans, and easy for them to look at the plan code and know what's being used for
then click Add. the loan.
7 Click Yes to confirm the addition of the plan to your company's plan code list. • Select the Do not import investor name to loan check box to prevent
• The program is added to the Company Plan Codes list. the investor name from being automatically populated to the loan file
when selected. When selected, the investor name will be blank in the
8 To add additional plans to your company's plan codes list, repeat steps 4 plan codes list that users select from when generating initial disclosures.
through 7.
4 Click Add.
NOTE: To add one or more programs to your company’s plan codes list at the
same time, press Ctrl on your keyboard, and then click to select the programs to Creating a Custom Plan Code
add.
You can create your own custom plan codes to add to your company's plan
codes list.
Creating an Alias for a Plan Code
You can add an investor's loan program to your company's plan codes list, but 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
change the program's plan code ID, description, and investor name 2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click eDisclosure Plan
beforehand by using the Add as Alias option. The loan program itself does not Codes.
change, but when the user is selecting a plan code for their initial disclosure
(i.e., eDisclosure) package, the plan code ID, description, and investor name
will be displayed to them according to your settings. 4 In the lower-left corner, click Create Custom.
For example, you could add the generic All Fixed Rate Conventional 1st Lien 5 Enter a custom plan code ID, Description, and Investor name.
Loans plan code to your company's plan code list and use it for any agency
loans your company is selling to Fannie Mae or Freddie Mac. Then you can
select the All Fixed Rate Conventional 1st Lien Loans plan code again and add
it as an alias. You can alias this plan code multiple times for use with your
Portfolio loans that you are keeping in house and make the plan codes match
your company's internal naming on your Rate sheets. You can also program
custom documents based on the unique [alias] plan code IDs you create.
1 Follow steps 1 through 4 in the “To Add eDisclosure Plan Codes”
instructions starting on page 124.
2 To create an alias for a program and then add it to your company's plan
codes list that users can select from when generating initial disclosures,
click to select a plan, and then click Add as Alias.
3 In the Add EM Plan Code as Alias window: 6 Select the Active check box to include the program in the plan codes list
that users select from when generating initial disclosures.

7 Click Add. • A link icon displays next to loan programs that are created based on a plan
NOTE: To include field values in the plan code that will populate to the loan code.
file when the plan code is selected for the eDisclosure package, use the
Create a Loan Program button to create a loan program template based on
the plan code. (See the “To Create a Loan Program Based on a Plan Code”
instructions below.) Or, you can use the Loan Programs template setting to
apply the plan code to a loan program template and enter the desired field
values. (The Loan Programs setting is located under the Loan Templates
folder in Encompass Settings.)
To Create a Loan Program Based on a Plan Code:

When working with the Loan Templates setting in Encompass Settings, a “loan • When working with the loan program, you cannot change any of the plan
program” is a template of predefined values that display primarily on the Truth-In- code data that is included in it. (Fields populated with plan code data are not
Lending Disclosure statement and the 1003 application. You can significantly editable in the loan program.) In order to change plan code properties (plan
reduce data entry time and improve accuracy by setting up loan programs for the code status, description, and investor), you must use the eDisclosure Plan
types of loans you process most often. Code setting. Any changes you make to the plan code properties are
automatically applied to the loan programs that are “linked” to the plan code.
Here you can create a loan program based on the predefined values set up in a
• To create multiple loan programs based on multiple plan codes, press Ctrl on
plan code. When a user selects the plan code to use with a loan, the data from the
loan program template is copied to the loan forms. The user can leave the data as your keyboard, select one or more plan codes, and then click the Create
is, or change values as needed. The original data on the template is not affected. Loan Programs button. A new loan program is created for each plan code
selected.
2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click eDisclosure Plan Codes. Set Up eDisclosure Stacking Templates
3 Select a plan code, and then click the Create Loan Programs button. Use the eDisclosure Stacking Templates setting to set up the order in which the
initial disclosures (i.e., eDisclosures) are organized and sent to the borrower. Here
4 In the Select Folder window, browse to the folder where you want to store the you can control which documents are included in the initial disclosure package,
loan program, and then click OK. and the order in which they are organized. When a user generates the initial
• The loan program template is saved to the location you selected. This loan disclosures, they can select the eDisclosure Stacking Template they want to apply
program is also added to the Loan Programs list in the Loan Programs to the initial disclosure package.
setting. Use this setting to update field values in the loan program template NOTE: The Default Stacking Template - eDisclosures template is provided by
as needed. default with Encompass. Administrators can rename this template and modify the
NOTE: When added to the Loan Programs template setting, the program’s documents within the template as needed.
Name and Program Description are based on the plan code’s Description
(i.e., the plan code’s Description matches the loan program’s Name and To Create an eDisclosure Stacking Template:
Product Description).
2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click eDisclosure Stacking
Templates.
3 In the Stacking Templates section, click the New icon.
4 To rename the template, double-click the New Stacking Template entry to
make the name editable. You can then enter the new template name.

5 With the template selected, click the New icon in the Documents section to add • To add multiple documents, select a document, press Ctrl on your keyboard,
documents to the template. and then click to select additional documents. Then use one of the methods
described in step 7 to add the documents to the template.
• To change the order in which the documents are organized in the template,
click a document, and then click the up arrow or down arrow to move the
document up or down in the list.
• To remove a document from the template, select the document, and then
click the Delete icon.
NOTE:The documents are returned to the New Documents section.
8 To save the template, click OK, and then click the Save icon.
NOTE: Documents that are returned when the loan originator generates their
eDisclosure package that are not part of the eDisclosure stacking template will be
placed at the bottom of the document list, highlighted in yellow.
Set Up Closing Doc Plan Codes

Use the Closing Doc Plan Codes setting to set up the plan codes your company
will use when ordering closing documents. When users order closing documents,
they will select one of these plan codes and apply its loan program data to the
closing documents. Here you can select from a list of investor-specific plan codes
or create your own custom plan codes.
To Add Closing Doc Plan Codes:

2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click Closing Doc Plan Codes.
6 In the New Documents section, select a Source for the documents.

• The Ellie Mae eDisclosures (Returned) source option lists only the
documents that have been returned to the user via Encompass at least once.
• The Ellie Mae eDisclosures (Default) source option lists all the documents
included in the original Default Stacking Template - eDisclosures stacking
template shipped with Encompass.
• The eFolder Documents source option lists all of the documents set up in
the Documents setting under eFolder Setup (in Encompass Settings).
7 To add documents to the template, click to select a document and then drag it
to the New Stacking Template section.
OR
Click to select a document and then click the right arrow to add it to the New
Stacking Template section.

4 At the top of the Select Plan Code window, select an investor from the drop- 1 Follow steps 1 through 5 in the “To Add Closing Doc Plan Codes”
down list. instructions starting on page 127.
2 To create an alias for a program and then add it to your company's plan
codes list that users can select from when ordering closing documents, click
to select a plan, and then click Add as Alias.
3 In the Add EM Plan Code as Alias window:
• On the Status line, select the Active check box to include the program in
the plan codes list that users select from when ordering closing
documents.
• Enter the desired plan code ID, Description, and Investor name.
• The plan code ID is an investor-specific or company-specific identifier
for the program. Users selecting a plan code for their closing document
package may find it helpful if you create a plan code ID that helps
describe the program (for example, C.30YRFIXED) so it's easy for
them to look at the plan code and know what's being used for the loan.
4 Select the Do not import investor name to loan check box to prevent the
investor name from being automatically populated to the loan file when
selected. When selected, the investor name will be blank in the plan codes
list that users select from when ordering closing documents.
A list of loan programs provided by the selected investor is displayed.

5 To view details about the loan program, including the values that will be added
to the loan file if selected, click the View Plan Code Details icon (magnifying
glass).
6 To add the program to your company's plan codes list that users can select
from when ordering closing documents, click to select one or more plans, and
then click Add.
7 Click Yes to confirm the addition of the plan to your company's plan code list.
• The program is added to the Company Plan Codes list.
8 To add additional plans to your company's plan codes list, repeat steps 4
through 7.
Creating an Alias for a Plan Code

You can add an investor's loan program to your company's plan codes list, but 5 Click Add.
change the program's plan code ID, description, and investor name
beforehand by using the Add as Alias option. The loan program itself does not
change, but when the user is selecting a plan code for their closing document
package, the plan code ID, description, and investor name will be displayed to
them according to your settings.

Creating a Custom Plan Code • The loan program is saved to the location you selected. This loan program is
You can create your own custom plan codes to add to your company's plan also added to the Loan Programs list in the Loan Programs template setting.
codes list. Use this setting to update field values in the loan program template as
needed.
NOTE: When added to the Loan Programs template setting, the program’s
2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click Closing Docs Plan Name and Program Description are based on the plan code’s Description
Codes. (i.e., the plan code’s Description matches the loan program’s Name and
3 Click the New icon. Product Description).
4 In the lower-left corner, click Create Custom. • A link icon displays next to loan programs that are created based on a plan
5 Enter a custom plan code ID, Description, and Investor name. code.
6 Select the Active check box to include the program in the plan codes list
that users select from when ordering closing documents.
7 Click Add.
NOTE: To include field values in the plan code that will populate to the loan
file when the plan code is selected for the closing document package, use the
Create a Loan Program button to create a loan program template based on
the plan code. (See the “To Create a Loan Program Based on a Plan Code”
instructions on page 129.) Or, you can use the Loan Programs template
setting to apply the plan code to a loan program template and enter the • When working with the loan program, you cannot change any of the plan
desired field values. (The Loan Programs setting is located under the Loan code data that is included in it. (Fields populated with plan code data are not
Templates folder in Encompass Settings.) editable in the loan program.) In order to change plan code properties (plan
code status, description, and investor), you must use the Closing Doc Plan
To Create a Loan Program Based on a Plan Code: Codes setting. Any changes you make to the plan code properties are
automatically applied to the loan programs that are “linked” to the plan code.
When working with the Loan Templates setting in Encompass Settings, a “loan
program” is a template of predefined values that display primarily on the Truth-In- • To create multiple loan programs based on multiple plan codes, select one or
Lending Disclosure statement and the 1003 application. You can significantly more plan codes, and then click the Create Loan Programs button. A new
reduce data entry time and improve accuracy by setting up loan programs for the loan program will be created for each plan code selected.
types of loans you process most often.
Set Up Closing Doc Stacking Templates
Here you can create a loan program based on the predefined values set up in a
plan code. When a user selects the plan code to use with a loan, the data from the Use the Closing Doc Stacking Templates setting to set up the list order in which
loan program template is copied to the loan forms. The user can leave the data as the closing documents are organized. Here you can control which documents are
is, or change values as needed. The original data on the template is not affected. included in the closing document package, and the order in which they organized.
When a user orders the closing documents, they can select the Closing Doc
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Stacking Template they want to apply to the closing document package.
2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click Closing Doc Plan Codes. NOTE: The Default Stacking Template - Closing template is provided by
3 Select a plan code, and then click the Create Loan Programs button. default with Encompass. Administrators can rename this template and modify the
4 In the Select Folder window, browse to the folder where you want to store the documents within the template as needed.
loan program, and then click OK.

To Create a Closing Doc Stacking Template: • To change the order in which the documents are organized in the template,
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. click a document, and then click the up arrow or down arrow to move the
document up or down in the list.
2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click Closing Doc Stacking
Templates. • To remove a document from the template, select the document, and then
3 In the Stacking Templates section, click the New icon.
NOTE: The documents are returned to the New Documents section.
4 To rename the template, double-click the New Stacking Template entry to
make the name editable. You can then enter the new template name. 8 To save the template, click OK, and then click the Save icon.
NOTE: Documents that are returned when a closer generates a closing
document package that are not part of the closing documents stacking template
are placed at the bottom of the document list, highlighted in yellow.
Configure Compliance Audit Settings

The Encompass Compliance Service (powered by Mavent) provides an instant
loan file check and determines if a loan complies with selected state and federal
regulations.
This Compliance Audit Settings setting allows administrators to select whether
their company supports Federal high cost loans (Section 32) and to select the
5 With the template selected, click the New icon in the Documents section to add individual states in which the company supports state/local high cost loans.
documents to the template. Configure this setting to help ensure compliance with regulations regarding high
6 In the New Documents section, select a Source for the documents. cost loans and to help prevent users from originating high cost loans for states in
which they are not permitted to do so.
• The Ellie Mae Closing Docs (Returned) source option lists only the
disclosures that have been returned to the user via Encompass at least once. NOTE: Many of the settings on this Compliance Audit Settings screen are also
• The Ellie Mae Closing Docs (Default) source option lists all the documents
available in the Compliance Review Setup setting. If you are a current Encompass
included in the original Default Stacking Template - Closing stacking template Compliance Service customer, the settings configured in the Compliance Review
shipped with Encompass. Setup setting will be applied to this Compliance Audit Settings screen (and vice
versa). For non-Encompass Compliance Service users, the Ellie Mae team will
• The eFolder Documents source option lists all of the documents set up in guide you through the process of configuring these Compliance Audit Settings,
the Documents setting under eFolder Setup (in Encompass Settings). including mapping fees to specific fields in the Encompass Compliance Service.
7 To add documents to the template, click to select a document and then drag it
to the New Stacking Template section
OR
Click to select a document and then click the right arrow to add it to the New
Stacking Template section.
• To add multiple documents, select a document, press Ctrl on your keyboard,
and then click to select additional documents. Then use one of the methods
described in step 7 to add the documents to the template.

To Configure Compliance Audit Settings: 5 Select the Use Encompass Finance Charge Indicator for Unmapped Fees
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. check box to enable the loan's APR setting to determine how unmapped fees
are categorized by the Encompass Compliance Service.
2 On the left panel, click Docs Setup, and then click Compliance Audit
Settings. • When selected, an unmapped fee will be categorized as Other - Non-Finance
Charge (Fee ID 998) if the fee's APR indicator check box (field ID SYS.X17)
on the 2010 Itemization form is not selected.
• An unmapped fee will be categorized as Other - Finance Charge (fee ID 999)
if the fee's APR indicator check box on the 2010 Itemization form is selected.
NOTE: If you are a current Encompass Compliance Service customer and
have already mapped fees, you can proceed to the next step below. Non-
Encompass Compliance Service customers need to work with the Ellie Mae
team to map fees to specific fields in the Encompass Compliance Service
before proceeding. For more information about unmapped fees, refer to the
Compliance Review Setup help topic.
6 Select the Run MDIA Check check box to include the MDIA review in the loan
check. When this check box is selected, the MDIA review will be performed on
all loans, including investment properties.
• The MDIA check includes comparisons, tests, functions and calculations
based on the Truth In Lending Act and Mortgage Disclosure Improvement
Act (MDIA). Specifically, the Encompass Compliance Service recalculates
the finance charge amount, amount financed, APR, total of payments,
payment schedule, and the amortization schedule. The MDIA check
validates that the loan's disclosure dates are in compliance with the “3-7-3
rules” set forth in the MDIA.
7 Select the tolerance to apply to loan reviews using the APR and Finance
Charge Tolerance options.
• Select 0.125% for all loans to set up the report to note a violation if there is
a difference between the disclosed APR and the current APR greater than
3 Select a Default Channel option to indicate how your company is handling loan .125% when reviewing any type of loan.
files, such as Brokered or Banked.
• Select the 0.125% for regular loans... option to set up the report to note a
4 Enter one or more email addresses in the Admin Email text box. If a processing violation if there is difference between the disclosed APR and the current
error occurs during the loan review due to a fee that was not mapped or was APR greater than .125% when reviewing a loan or if there is a difference
mapped incorrectly, an email alert message will be sent to these email between the disclosed APR and current APR greater than .25% when
addresses. reviewing an irregular loan.
• All fees must be mapped to specific fields in the Encompass Compliance 8 To enable users to originate Federal high cost (Section 32) loans, select the
Service in order for the compliance reports to produce complete and Allow Federal High-Cost (Section 32) Loans check box.
accurate results. By default the Encompass Compliance Service uses the
mapping configured in the Itemization Fee Management setting. For more • The Encompass Compliance Service calculates the high cost thresholds as
information about unmapped fees, refer to the Compliance Review Setup defined in HOEPA and by applicable state and local jurisdictions to determine
help topic. if a loan is considered a high cost loan. The federal, state, and local APR and
Points and Fees threshold calculations ensure proper classification of fees
• When adding multiple email addresses, separate each one using a comma by ascertaining to whom the fee is paid (for example, lender, affiliate,
or semicolon. originator, or provider) and by whom the fee is paid.

9 Select the individual states in which your company supports state/local high 3 On the Documents list, select a document, and then click the Edit icon.
cost loans.
eFolder Setup
Use the Documents setting (under the eFolder Setup setting) to create and
manage the tracking information associated with loan documents and services,
including standard forms, custom forms, settlement services, verifications (verifs),
and needed documents (documents that are supplied by the borrower). Here you
can specify when the document is to be included in an initial disclosure (i.e.,
eDisclosure) package or closing document package based on specific criteria.
The document is included only when one or more of the criteria are met.
To Indicate When a Document is to be Included in Document Packages:

2 On the left panel, click eFolder Setup, and then click Documents.
4 In the Encompass Docs Service section of the Documents window, select the
Add this document to eDisclosure packages check box to include the
document in all eDisclosure packages.
• If the document is a custom form and the eDisclosure package requires
eSigning, be sure the form includes the required eSigning signature points.
• Click the Criteria button to specify criteria for including the document in an
eDisclosure package. The document is included only when one or more of
the criteria are met. When finished, click OK.
NOTE: To include the document any time a specific plan code is applied to
the eDisclosure package, select the Plan Code check box, and then select
the specific plan code(s). Only custom plan codes or plan codes created as
an alias are available to select here. (For instructions for creating custom
plan codes or adding a plan code as an alias, refer to Creating a Custom Plan
Code and “Creating an Alias for a Plan Code” on page 125.)

5 Select Add this document to Encompass Closer packages to include the Personas Settings
document in all closing document packages.
Personas represent job functions in your company. Each persona defines access
• Click the Criteria button to specify criteria for including the document in a
to functions, forms, and tools. One or more personas are assigned to each user.
closing package. The document is included only when one or more of the
criteria are met. When finished, click OK. NOTE: Encompass ships with the admin user ID, for use by the main system
administrator. Encompass also ships with two administration personas that are
NOTE: To include the document any time a specific plan code is applied to
assigned to users who help with administration: the Super Administrator and the
the closing document package, select the Plan Code check box, and then
Administrator. These personas are not configurable, and are assigned when
select the specific plan code(s).
creating or maintaining individual user IDs.
6 Click OK.
To Define Persona Access:
Loan Templates 2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Personas.
Use the Loan Programs setting (under the Loan Templates setting) to create
3 In the left panel, select a persona.
templates of predefined values that display primarily on the Truth-In-Lending
Disclosure statement and the 1003 application. You can significantly reduce data 4 Select check boxes in the General section of the eFolder tab to allow the
entry time and improve accuracy by setting up loan programs for the types of persona to generate eDisclosure packages, access eDisclosure plan codes,
loans you process most often. and access eDisclosure Stacking Templates when generating initial
disclosures.
Loan Program Templates Based on Plan Codes
Loan program templates that you created based on eDisclosure or Closing Doc
plan codes are automatically added to the Loan Programs setting. Here you can
update field values in the loan program template as needed.
• A link icon displays next to loan program templates that are created based on
a plan code.
• When working with the loan program, you cannot change any of the plan code • Select eDisclosures to allow the persona to generate and send initial
data that is included in it. (Fields populated with plan code data are not editable disclosures (i.e., eDisclosures). Select the related check boxes to allow the
in the loan program.) In order to change plan code properties (plan code status, persona to manage and reorganize documents in the initial disclosure
description, and investor), you must use the eDisclosure Plan Codes or Closing package.
Doc Plan Codes settings. Any changes you make to the plan code properties • Select Order Closing Docs to allow the persona to order closing
are automatically applied to the loan programs that are “linked” to the plan code. documents. Select the related check boxes to allow the persona to manage
• When you select a loan program to use with a loan, the data from the template and reorganize documents in the closing document package.
is copied to the loan forms. Users can leave the data as is, or change values as
needed. The original data on the template is not affected.

• As needed, select additional check boxes to allow the persona to perform • Property Information
additional actions when ordering closing documents. • Closing Disclosure Page 1
• Closing Disclosure Page 2
• Aggregate Escrow Account
8 When finished, click the Save icon to save the persona settings.
5 Use the eDisclosure Plan Codes and Closing Plan Codes options located
in the Company Settings section of the Settings tab to allow the persona to
select a plan code (and update it as needed) to apply to the initial disclosures
and closing documents.
6 Use the eDisclosure Stacking Templates and Closing Stacking Templates
options located in the Company Settings section of the Settings tab to allow the
persona to select a stacking template (and update it as needed) to apply to the
initial disclosures and closing documents.
7 Select the following forms in the Input Forms section of the Forms/Tools tab
to grant the persona access to the required closing forms:
• For loans using pre-2015 input forms:
• Borrower Information - Vesting
• Property Information
• Closing RegZ
• Closing Conditions
• 2010 HUD-1 Page 1
• 2010 HUD-1 Page 2
• 2010 HUD-1 Page 3
• Closing Vendor Information
• For loans using 2015 input forms:
• Borrower Information - Vesting
• Closing Vendor Information
• RegZ - CD

Chapter 10
Secondary Setup
Product and Pricing • This will be your company's default product and pricing provider. When a
user clicks the Get Pricing button on the Lock Request Form or the Get Buy
Use the Product and Pricing setting to configure your pricing options with your Side Pricing or Get Sell Side Pricing button on the Secondary Lock Tool,
preferred product and pricing service. the default provider will supply product and pricing information.
NOTE: You can create and save different option settings for each preferred 2 Click a provider's Admin link to manage your account settings.
provider. When you select a provider, any previously configured settings for the
3 Click the More Info link to view the provider's website.
provider are applied.
4 If your provider has integrated their product and pricing process with
To Access the Setting: Encompass, a list of available integration options will display on the screen.
Complete steps 5-7 to configure these options. Not all options will be available
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. for all providers. Check boxes are disabled for options that are not available.
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Product and Pricing. NOTE: The Get Pricing and Import Data to Lock Request Form options are
3 Complete the configuration sections described below, and then click the Save permanently selected by default and cannot be cleared.
icon.
5 Select the Import Data to Loan File check box to import rate lock data into the
loan file when a pricing option is selected on the providers website.
CAUTION:Enabling this option causes the rate lock data currently in the loan
file to be permanently overwritten when a user selects a pricing option from the
provider.
6 Select the Request Lock check box to select and request a lock by accessing
the provider's interface via a browser screen in Encompass.
• When you request a lock from the provider, a matching lock request is also
submitted in Encompass and displays on the Secondary Registration tool.
• Select Enforce only when no current lock exists to require users to select
and request a lock by accessing the provider's interface via a browser screen
in Encompass only if the loan does not have a current, non-expired lock. This
enables users to request a re-lock on an existing lock without having to visit
the provider’s interface, re-price the lock, and submit the lock request.
NOTE: Currently, the Enforce only when no current lock exists setting is
only available for the Optimal Blue - Enhanced service provider.
Product and Pricing Provider Integration 7 If you are using Encompass 17.1.0.7 and earlier, select the Lock and Confirm
1 In the Product and Pricing Provider Integration section, select your preferred check box to lock and confirm a rate by accessing the provider's interface via
provider from the list. a browser screen in Encompass. If you are using Encompass 17.2 and later,
this setting is now located on the Auto-Lock settings screen.
Chapter 10: Secondary Setup 135

• When you lock and confirm a rate with the provider, the request is also locked 2 Then type the number of minutes (15 is entered by default).
and confirmed in Encompass in the Secondary Registration Tool, and the NOTE: When a user requests a lock after the limit has expired, a message
rate lock data is copied into the loan file. instructs the user to retrieve updated pricing before requesting the lock.
8 If you are using Encompass 17.1.0.7 and earlier, select the Enable Auto Lock
3 Select the Apply pricing timer only when there is no current lock check box
and Confirm upon lock request check box to enable automatic lock and
to enforce the time limit only if the loan does not have a current, non-expired
confirmation of lock requests. If you are using Encompass 17.2 and later, this
lock. This enables authorized users to request a re-lock on an existing lock
setting is now located on the Auto-Lock settings screen.
without having to request new pricing.
9 If you are using Encompass 17.1.0.7 and earlier, select the Enable Auto-Lock
for Re-Locks check box to enable automatic lock and confirmation of re-lock Re-Lock Enablement
requests. For Encompass 17.2 and later, this setting is now located on the
NOTE: This section was renamed in the Encompass 17.3 August Service Pack
Auto-Lock settings screen.
from Lock Request Type Setting to Re-Lock Enablement.
• Get Pricing requests will also be automatically locked and confirmed.
1 In the Re-Lock Enablement section, select the Enable Re-Locks check box to
10 If you are using Encompass 17.1.0.7 and earlier, select the Enable Auto Lock enable users to request re-locks.
and Confirm upon Extension request check box to enable automatic lock
2 Select the Enable Re-Locks for TPO Clients check box to enable system
and confirmation of extension requests. If you are using Encompass 17.2 and
administrators to manage (enable/disable) the re-lock feature in Encompass
later, this setting is now located on the Auto-Lock settings screen.
and TPO Connect for TPO clients.
11 If you are using Encompass 17.1.0.7 and earlier, select the Enable Auto Lock
NOTE: This setting was added in the Encompass 17.4 November Service
and Confirm upon Cancellation request check box to enable automatic lock
Pack.
and confirmation of cancellation requests. If you are using Encompass 17.2
and later, this setting is now located on the Auto-Lock settings screen. 3 In the Active Lock section:
NOTE: This sub-section was added in the Encompass 17.3 August Service
Customize Investor Name Import Pack.
1 In the Customize Investor Name Import section, select the Customize
• Select the Only allow Re-Lock (Historical Pricing) only when a current
investor name import check box to configure the investor name import from
lock exists check box to set the default lock request type in the Request
the Encompass Product and Pricing Service into Encompass.
Type field on the Lock Request Form when a current lock exists.
2 Select an option to configure how the name is imported:
• When the check box is selected, the Lock Request Form's Request Type
• Always save the investor name to the Encompass investor name field. field is set to Re-Lock when an existing lock (active or expired) exists. (The
• Always save the investor name to the Encompass lender name field. New Lock option will not be available in the Request Type drop-down list.)
• Select the Allow Get Pricing (Historical) Requests for Re-Locks check
• Save the investor name to the Encompass lender name field only for
wholesale programs. box to enable the Get Pricing button on the Lock Request Form when a user
is requesting a re-lock.
NOTE: You can create and save different name import option settings for each
preferred provider. When you select a provider, any previously configured settings NOTE: This setting was renamed in the Encompass 17.3 August Service
for the provider are applied. Pack from Allow Get Pricing Requests for Re-Locks to Allow Get Pricing
(Historical) Requests for Re-Locks.
Elapsed Tine Setting Between Product and Pricing and Lock Request • Select the Allow Re-Locks outside of Lock Desk Hours check box to
1 In the Elapsed Time Setting Between Product and Pricing and Lock Request enable re-locks to be submitted outside of Lock Desk hours.
section, select the check box at the bottom of the screen to set a limit on the NOTE: This setting was moved in the Encompass 17.3 August Service pack.
amount of time that can expire from the time pricing was last imported (by It went from being the last setting to the second setting in this section.
clicking the Get Pricing button on the Lock Request Form) until the lock
request is submitted.

• If you are using Encompass 20.1 .0.6 or later, select the Allow New Locks Lock Extension Price Adjustment
outside of Lock Desk Hours check box to enable re-locks on active locks, with 1 In the Lock Extension Price Adjustment section, select the Enable lock
a Request Type set to "New Lock", to be requested when the Lock Desk is extension requests check box to allow users to request lock extensions.
closed.
• When the check box is selected, the Request Extension button displays on
NOTE: This setting is only enabled when the Product and Pricing provider is the Lock Request Form and Secondary Lock Tool.
set to “No Provider Selected”.
NOTE: If the check box is not selected, the Request Extension button will
4 In the For Inactive Locks (Cancelled or Expired) section: be disabled on the Lock Request Form and the Secondary Lock Tool.
• Select the Get current pricing after [enter number] days of Lock 2 Set the number of extension days.
Expiration or Cancellation Date to set the number of days that must pass
• Unlimited extension days - Enables an unlimited number of lock extension
before users can get current pricing on an expired or canceled lock.
days.
• If this setting is selected, the Get Pricing button on the Lock Request Form
• Original Lock Period days - Enables the number of lock extension days to
is enabled as follows:
equal the number of days in the original lock period.
• Expired Lock - Once the Lock Expiration Date (field ID 762) is
greater than the number entered in the setting. • Limit extensions to not exceed [enter number] days - Enables a user
defined number of lock extension days (between 1 and 999).
• Canceled Lock - Once the cancellation date from the cancellation log
is greater than the number entered in the setting. • Limit extended locks to not exceed [enter number] total lock days -
Indicates the total number of lock days allowed (includes the original lock
• If this setting is not selected, the Get Pricing button is always enabled and
term).
current pricing is always retrieved.
• If the Enable lock extension requests setting is not selected, this setting
• Select the Limit Re-Locks to not exceed [enter number] total Re-Locks
is disabled.
to set the maximum number of re-locks allowed for a loan. The default value
is “2”. • This setting works with all the Control options.
• If this setting is selected, the system checks whether the re-lock request • The default value for this field is “90”.
has exceeded the setting’s limit. • This setting works in conjunction with the Limit locks to not exceed
• If the limit is exceeded, an error message, “The Re-Lock Limit for
[enter number] total extensions setting, and the Limit extensions to
Inactive Locks has been exceeded. The Re-Lock Request cannot be not exceed [enter number] days setting, if selected. For example:
processed.” is displayed. • Original lock was 45 days
• If the limit has not been exceeded, the re-lock is processed. • Limit extensions to not exceed 20 days
• If the setting is not selected. the system checks the number of re-lock • Limit extended locks to not exceed 90 total lock days
transactions. • Limit locks to not exceed 3 total extensions
• If the system limit of 10 is met, an error message, “The Re-Lock Limit You are allowed up to 3 extensions for a total number of 65 lock days (45
for Inactive Locks has been exceeded. The Re-Lock Request cannot (original lock) + 20 (limit extensions to days) = 65).
be processed.” is displayed.
In this example, the number of lock days does not exceed 90 (limit
• If the system limit of 10 has not been met, the re-lock is processed.
extensions to total lock days).
• Select the Apply a Re-Lock fee of [enter amount] for each Re-Lock to
• Limit locks to not exceed [Enter Number] total extensions – Indicates the
apply a fee to re-locks. Both negative and positive amounts up to 3 decimal
total number of extensions allowed.
places are accepted.
• If the Enable lock extension requests setting is not selected, this setting
• If the setting is selected, the specified re-lock fee populates the appropriate
is disabled.
Re-Lock Fees field on the Detailed Lock Request Form and Secondary
Lock Tool. • This setting works with all the Control options except “Company controls
extension days and price adjustments by extension occurrence”.
• If the setting is not selected, no re-lock fee is applied.

• The default value for this field is “3”. 5 Repeat Steps 1-4 until you have added all the required entries.
• This setting works in conjunction with the Limit locks to not exceed 6 To edit an entry, select the entry, click the Edit icon, and adjust the entry.
[enter number] total extensions setting, and the Limit extensions to
7 To delete an entry, select the entry, and click the Delete icon.
not exceed [enter number] days setting, if selected.
• Allow daily adjustment - Select this check box to enter the price adjustment
3 Select a Control Option:
per day as a negative number. When a user requests an extension for a
• No company control - Users can set the number of days and price specified number of days, this number is multiplied by the number of days in
adjustments for their extension requests. If this options is selected, no further the request to calculate the total pricing adjustment for the extension.
configuration is required for the lock extension setting.
NOTE: If you select the check boxes for both Fixed extension days and
• Company controls extension days and price adjustments- The company adjustment and Allow daily adjustment, the Fixed adjustments will be applied
creates predefined settings that control the number of days users can select when a user selects or enters a number of days that matches one of the Fixed
for extension requests and the associated pricing adjustments. entries you have created, and the Allow Daily Adjustment pricing will be applied
• Company controls extension days and price adjustments by extension when the user enters a number of days that does not match one of the fixed
occurrence - When this option is selected, an Adjustment Per Lock entries you have created. If you clear both check boxes, the lock extension
Extension table is displayed. request feature will be disabled.
• Extension # - Automatically increments up to “10”.
Lock Cancellation
• Days to Extend - Value must be greater than “0”.
1 In the Lock Cancellation section, select the Enable lock cancellation in
• Price Adjustment - Value should be entered as a negative number. Secondary Registration Tool check box to allow locks to be canceled from
In addition: the Secondary Registration screen.
• The Allow Extensions to be no more than xx Days setting is cleared and • When the check box is selected, a Cancel Lock button displays on the
disabled. Secondary Registration screen when a loan has a current lock that is not
• When a lock extension is requested from the Lock Request Form or
expired.
Secondary Registration, the Days to Extend and Price Adjustment fields 2 If the Enable lock cancellation in Secondary Registration Tool check box
are disabled and determined by this setting. has been selected, you can select the Enable lock cancellation requests on
• You cannot request an extension past the extension request number Lock Request Form check box to allow a persona to request a lock
configured in this setting. cancellation from the Lock Request Form.
4 If you selected the Company controls extension days and price adjustments • When the check box is selected, a Cancel Lock button displays on the Lock
option, you have several options for setting the allowable days and pricing Request Form when a loan has a current lock that is not expired.
adjustments for an extension:
Configure User Access to EPPS Summary Documents
• Fixed extension days and adjustment - Create individual entries that
include a specified number of days and an associated adjustment price. If your users will be submitting rate lock requests to the Encompass Product and
When users request an extension on the Lock Request form, they can select Pricing Service (EPPS), you can configure settings in EPPS and Encompass to
one of these predefined entries from a list. authorize those users to return the summary documents to the Encompass
eFolder, and to give users permission to view the documents. For detailed
To Create Entries for Fixed Extension Days and Adjustments instructions, see the Product and Pricing help topic in the online help.
1 Select the Fixed extension days and adjustment check box.

3 Type a number in the Days to Extend column.
4 Click the cell in the Price Adjustment column and then enter the
adjustment as a negative number.

Secondary Lock Fields • On the Loan Snapshot tab, the fields display at the bottom of the tab in a new
Loan Additional Information section.
Use the Secondary Lock Fields setting to create descriptions of common values
used for base price, profitability, lock type, base rate, and base ARM margin To Add a Field:
adjustments. These descriptions display on the Lock Request and Secondary
Registration tools. Users select a description from the list, and then enter a value 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
for the rate adjustment. 2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Lock Request
Additional Fields.
NOTE: Base ARM Margin adjustments are only applicable to the margin
associated with an adjustable rate loan.
3
To Create Drop-down List Items:

2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Secondary
Lock Fields.
4 Click the Lock Request Form or Loan Snapshot tab.

6 In the Add Required Fields window, enter the field IDs for the fields you want
to add to the form, and then click Add.
• The fields display on the forms in the same order that you enter them on the
Add Required Fields window.
3 Click one of the tabs, and then click the New icon.
NOTE: To add more than 10 field IDs, enter the initial 10 field IDs, and then
4 Type a Dropdown value and click OK. click Add More.
5 Add additional items to each tab as required. 7 When finished, click the Save icon.
To Add a Field using the Find Feature:
Lock Request Additional Fields 2 In the Find a Form section on the left, select a form.
Use the Lock Request Additional Fields setting to add fields to the Lock Request 3 Right-click a field to select it. The field turns orange.
form and the Loan Snapshot in the Secondary Registration tool.
• On the Lock Request form, the fields display on a new Additional Fields tab.

Auto-Lock • Select the Enable Auto Lock and Confirm upon lock request check box
to enable automatic lock and confirmation of lock requests.
This setting provides the ability to designate which lock submissions are not
• Historical pricing and worst case pricing tool requests will also be
eligible for Auto-Lock.
automatically locked and confirmed.
• The Auto-Lock setting is supported only when the Encompass Product and
• Select the Enable Auto-Lock for Re-Locks for Active and Inactive Locks
Pricing Service (EPPS) is selected as the product and pricing engine. If EPPS check box to enable automatic lock and confirmation of re-lock requests,
is not the product and pricing engine, this setting will be disabled. regardless of the Request Lock Status on the Lock Request Form.
• If the Enable Auto Lock and Confirm upon lock request check box is not
• Get Pricing requests will also be automatically locked and confirmed.
selected, the Auto-Lock Exclusion Criteria and Auto-Lock Exclusion Criteria
• Select the Enable Auto Lock and Confirm upon Extension request check
Rules sections will be disabled.
box to enable automatic lock and confirmation of extension requests.
To Set Up Auto-Lock Settings • Select the Enable Auto Lock and Confirm upon Cancellation request
check box to enable automatic lock and confirmation of cancellation
requests.
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Auto-Lock.
4 In the Auto-Lock Exclusion Criteria section, select which criteria should be
excluded from auto-lock and confirm. If Enable Auto Lock and Confirm upon
lock request or Enable Auto-Lock for Re-Locks is selected, the request will
not be auto-locked and confirmed if any of the loan/lock criteria match the
selected (check marked) criteria in this section.
3 In the Auto-Lock Enablement section, select your options for auto-lock and
confirm.
• The “Parent” (section) setting must be selected (e.g., Loan Type, Channel,
NOTE: To consolidate all auto-lock related settings, the Auto Lock and Confirm
Loan Program, etc.) before any “Child” entries under the “Parent” can be
settings on the Product and Pricing setting screen have been moved to this
selected.
section.
• If Enable Auto Lock and Confirm upon lock request is not selected, this
section will be disabled.

• For Loan Program or Lock Plan Code, when the Add icon is clicked, a pop- • Click the New icon to open the Auto-Lock Exclusion Criteria Rule pop-up
up screen that accepts free form text is displayed. screen.
• In the Create a Rule Name field, enter a name for your rule.
• Add button - When entries have been made and the Add button is clicked,
any completed rows are populated onto the Loan Program grid with any • In the Advanced Conditions box, apply the conditions for the rule.
duplicates automatically dropped.The dialog box will then close. • Click the Lookup icon (magnifying glass) to open the Advanced
• Add More button - When entries have been made and the Add More Conditions Editor.
button is clicked, any completed rows are populated onto the Loan
Program grid with any duplicates automatically dropped. The entries in the
dialog box are cleared and available for additional entries.
5 In the Auto-Lock Exclusion Criteria Rules section, you can create and manage
rules that control the values that are not eligible for auto-lock. If Enable Auto
Lock and Confirm upon lock request is selected, the request will not be
auto-locked and confirmed if any of the exclusion rules are active. Auto-Lock
Exclusion Criteria Rules can only be created using field IDs on the Lock
Request Form.
• Click the Add Filter icon to open the Add/Edit Search Filter pop-up screen.

• Click the Lookup icon (magnifying glass) o open the Select Field pop-up 3 On the Investor Templates window, click the New icon.
screen.
• Add fields, found on the Lock Request Form, to the Add/Edit Filter pop-up
screen.
• Complete the remaining fields.
• When done, click OK.
• Repeat until you have added all the filters needed, and then click OK.
• When your rule is complete, click Save.
• If a Parent setting is cleared but there are Child entries selected under the
Parent, a message is displayed that states the Child entries will be disabled
but will persist and be displayed (but cannot be edited).
Investor Templates
Use the Investor Templates tool to create investor information that users can
apply to fields on Loan Trades screens as well as the Secondary Lock, Secondary
Registration, and Shipping Details tools.
To Create an Investor Template:

2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Investor Templates. 4 On the Create/Edit Investor Template window, enter the Investor Name, complete
information on each tab, and then enter information in the Loan Trade
Management and HMDA Information sections at the bottom of the window (refer
to the detailed instructions below).
TIP: The information on each tab (Secondary, Ship To, Customer Service, and
Trailing Docs) can be saved as separate entries in the Business Contacts tool
under the Investor category. The information is then available to apply as
needed (such as on the Shipping Detail form).

Secondary Tab 2 In the Delivery Time Frame field, enter the number of days to add to the
This is the basic information for the investor. The Name may be the same as the Commitment Date to determine the expected Investor Delivery Date.
Investor Name, or the name of a third-party, subsidiary, or branch that manages
bulk sales for the investor. HMDA Information Section
• Select an option for Type of Purchaser to have the selection populated to the
Ship To Tab Type of Purchaser field on the HMDA Information form when the investor
The name and contact information for the company that the loan documents are template is applied to a loan file.
shipped to.
Customer Service Tab EPPS Loan Program Table

The name and contact information for the company that will handle customer- This setting enables users to select loan programs that can be matched against
service issues related to the loan. EPPS for eligibility and loan pricing when setting up trade loan eligibility.
Trailing Docs Tab To Populate the EPPS Loan Program Table Setting:
The name and contact information for the company that will receive post-closing 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
trailing documents. 2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click EPPS Loan Program
Table.
Payment Tab
The name and contact information for the company that will receive payments.
Insurance Tab
The name and contact information for the company that will provide insurance.
Note Delivery Tab 3 Click Populate from EPPS in the right hand corner.
The name and contact information for the company that the note is delivered to. 4 Enter your EPPS login credentials when the EPPS login dialog box is
displayed, and then click Continue.
Tax Notice Tab
5 Click OK after the import is completed.
The name and contact information for the company that will provide tax notices.
NOTE: If you click Populate from EPPS again, a warning message will
appear and the table will be cleared before it is repopulated.
Mortgage Insurance Tab
The name and contact information for the company that will provide mortgage To Delete EPPS Loan Programs
insurance.
1 Select the programs you want to delete.
Loan Delivery Tab 2 Click the Delete icon.
The name and contact information for the company 3 Click Yes when prompted to confirm your action.
Loan Trade Management Section

1 If this investor purchases bulk loans, select Yes. The investor template will be Trade Management Setup
available for selection on the Loan Trades tab. Use the Trade Management Setup setting to manage the Trade Management
module.

Trade Management Fields Move an Option
Use the Trade Management Fields setting to create and edit options that display • Select an option, and then click the Up and Down icons to reposition the option.
on the specified drop-down lists on the Details tabs for Security Trades, Loan The order of the options in the setting sets the order of the options on the drop-
Trades, Master Commitments, and Correspondent Trades. You can specify the down list.
options that are visible on the drop-down lists for Commitment Type, Trade
Description, Security Type, and Security Term. Delete an Option
• Select an option, and then click the Delete icon.
Add an Option
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Trade Management Tabs
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Select the tabs to be displayed in the Trade Management module.
Trade Management Setup.
• If Enable Security Trades, Loan Search, Loan Trades, and Master
Contracts tab is selected, those tabs are enabled in the Trade Management
module.
NOTE: This is the default option.
• If Enable MBS Pools tab is selected, the MBS Pools tab is enabled in the
Trade Management module.
• When you enable the MBS Pools (Mortgage Backed Security Pools)
functionality, you can track MBS Pools and related fields and to carry
those fields to the loan level.
• If Enable Fannie Mae PE MBS Pools Type and GSE Commitments tab
is selected, both the Fannie Mae PE MBS Pool type and the GSE
Commitments tab is enabled in the Trade Management module.
• If Enable Correspondent Trades tab is selected, the Correspondent Trades
tab is enabled in the Trade Management module.
• If Allow Publish Event for Correspondent Trades is selected, the Last
Published Date and Time column (if displayed) is populated on the
Correspondent Trades View when a trade is published and enables
3 In one of the sections on the setting, click the Add icon and type a Description. "unpublished" trades to be filtered out from Encompass TPO Connect.
4 For Security Type Field Values, you have the option of selecting a Program NOTE:This setting is available in Encompass 20.1 and later.
Type from the list and entering a range of months for the Term. • If Allow Best Efforts for Correspondent Trades is selected, the Best
• The values are populated in the corresponding fields for Security Trades and Efforts commitment type is enabled for correspondent trades.
Loan Trades when the security type is selected from the drop-down list. If the NOTE:This setting is available in Encompass 17.3 and later.
fields are left blank in the setting, existing data in the loan field is not
overwritten when the option is selected. • If Enable Correspondent Masters tab and enforce Masters for all
Delivery Types (Includes Auto-create for individual Delivery Types is
5 When finished, click OK. selected, the Correspondent Masters tab is enabled in the Trade
Management module.
Edit an Option
• To disable this setting, you must first remove all correspondent trades
1 Select an option, and then click the Edit icon. from correspondent master commitments.
2 Edit the option, and then click OK.

• If Enable Auto-create of Correspondent Trades for Individual Delivery • If EPPS Loan Program Eligibility/Pricing is selected, TPO Connect
Type is selected, Encompass will automatically create correspondent trades users can select EPPS loan programs, determine loan eligibility using
for all individually confirmed lock requests. EPPS loan programs, and obtain LLPA and SRP pricing from EPPS.
• If Enable Correspondent Masters tab and enforce Masters for all NOTE: If EPPS is not selected as the product and pricing provider
Delivery Types (Includes Auto-create for individual Delivery Types is on the Product and Pricing setting (under Secondary Setup), this
selected, then the setting is automatically selected and cannot be cleared. setting is disabled.
• If Enable Correspondent Masters tab and enforce Masters for all • If Loan Assignment to Correspondent Trade is selected, TPO Connect
Delivery Types (Includes Auto-create for individual Delivery Types is users can assign loans to correspondent trades.
not selected, then the setting is available to be selected or cleared. NOTE: When Loan Eligibility to Correspondent Trade is selected, this
• When both Allow Best Efforts for Correspondent Trades and setting is automatically enabled.
Enable Auto-create of Correspondent Trades for Individual
• If Loan Deletion from Correspondent Trade is selected, TPO Connect
Delivery Type are enabled, correspondent trades for both “Individual
users can remove one or more loans from correspondent trades.
Best Efforts” and “Individual Mandatory” loans being locked can be
created. • If none of the check boxes are selected, a warning, indicating at least one
Trade Management tab setting is required, is displayed.
• When Allow Best Efforts for Correspondent Trades is disabled and
Enable Auto- create of Correspondent Trades for Individual
Loan Synchronization
Delivery Type is enabled, correspondent trades for “Individual
Mandatory” loans being locked can be created, but correspondent Save the mapping of Trades fields for synchronization with Loan Data fields for
trades for “Individual Best Efforts” loans being locked cannot be loan/correspondent trades and MBS pools so you do not need to set it each time
created. loans are updated.
• When an individual loan is locked and a correspondent trade is auto- • If Apply selections below to all updated loans is selected, when you click the
created: Update Selected Loans/Update All Loans button on the Loans tab for a trade
• The Commitment Type in the Correspondent Buy Side Lock and
or pool, the Apply to All Loans check box will be selected in the Loan Data
Pricing Summary column of the lock snapshot is populated with the Synchronization pop-up window. Otherwise, the check box will not be selected.
Commitment Type in the lock request. • If Start update immediately after selecting Update Loans is selected, the
• The Delivery Type in the Correspondent Buy Side Lock and Pricing
Loan Data Synchronization pop-up window will not be displayed when the
Summary column of the lock snapshot is populated with the Delivery Update Selected Loans/Update All Loans button on the Loans tab for a trade
Type in the lock request. or pool is clicked and the trade or pool will automatically be placed in the Trade
Update Queue. Otherwise, the pop-up window will be displayed.
• If Enable TPO Trade Management is selected, the Trade Mgmt tab under
External Company Setup Company Details is enabled. The fields selected on the Loan Trades and MBS Pools tabs in this section will be
displayed in the corresponding (trade or pool) Loan Data Synchronization pop-up
• If View Correspondent Trade is selected, TPO Connect users can view window when the Update Selected Loans/Update All Loans button is clicked on
the correspondent trade pipeline, view correspondent trade details, and the trade or pool’s Loans tab.
view assigned loans.
NOTE: When Enable TPO Trade Management is selected, this setting is Auto Correspondent Trade Commitment Numbering
automatically enabled.
Select whether or not to have Encompass auto generate correspondent trade
• If View Correspondent Master Commitment is selected, TPO Connect commitment numbers.
users can view the correspondent master commitment pipeline, view
NOTE: Each correspondent trade commitment number must be unique.
correspondent master commitment details, and view assigned
correspondent trades. If the setting is enabled:
• If Loan Eligibility to Correspondent Trade is selected, TPO Connect • The trade commitment number has a maximum of 15 characters.
users can find eligible loans (based on trade filters).

• You can indicate a starting number. For example, if the starting number is 1500, • Or, type one or more characters and click Find. The first occurrence of the
when a correspondent trade (CT) is created, that commitment number will be characters in any column is found.
1500, the next will be 1502, the next will be 1503, and so on.
• Once saved, you can edit the starting number. For example, if the original
starting number is 1500, a CT is created with the commitment number of 1500,
and then the starting number is changed to 1000, the next CT will have a
commitment number of 1001, the next will be 1002, and so on.
NOTE: If the starting number is changed, a warning, indicating the starting
number will be applied to all new correspondent trades created, is displayed.
If the setting is not enabled, your users must manually enter a correspondent
trade commitment number.
Fannie Mae Product Name Values

Use this section to manage the list of Fannie Mae loan products that will be
available for users to select when viewing GSE Commitment details and Fannie
Mae PE MBS Pool details in the Trades feature.
NOTE: The product name cannot contain any commas.
Adjustment Templates
Use the Adjustment Templates setting to create templates of price adjustments
that are applied to the loans in a trade. Price adjustments are based on 8 Select an Operator, enter (or select) required Values, and then click OK.
characteristics of the loan or the borrower; for example, the amount of the loan or
• The Operator and Value define how the field will be used to define the
the borrower's credit score.
adjustment. For example: Field ID= 1109 (Loan Amount), Operator = Greater
than, Value = 250000.
To Create an Adjustment Template:
9 For multiple filters, use the AND/OR button to indicate how the filters are
applied. Use and when you want all the selected filters to apply to the loans.
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Use or when you want to locate loans that match any of the selecte3d filters.
Adjustment Templates.
10 For multiple filters, use parentheses to control the order in which the filters are
3 Click the New icon. evaluated. Click Parentheses, select the filters to group, click the New icon,
4 Enter a Name and Description for the template, and then click the New icon to and then click OK.
add price adjustment details. 11 Back on the Create/Edit Template window, double-click the cell in the Price
TIP: If your template is for investor-specific adjustments, include the investor's Adjustment column, and then type a percentage value for the adjustment when
name in the template Name and/or Description. the condition is met.
5 Type a price adjustment, and then click the New icon. • If the investor will pay the adjustment amount when the conditions are met,
enter a positive number. If the investor will receive a discount, enter a
6 On the Add/Edit Search Filter window, click the Lookup icon. negative number.
7 On the Select Field window, double-click to select a field from the list. The list 12 To add more adjustment entries, click the New icon, and repeat steps 5-8.
is comprised of a default set of loan fields and any loan fields added to the
• Or, to place a new entry above an existing entry, select an existing entry, click
Reporting Database.
Insert, and repeat steps 5-8.

13 When finished, click Save. 4 Click the Save icon.
To Set Loan Estimate Rate Lock Expiration Default:

Lock Desk Setup 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
Use the Lock Desk Setup setting to manage expiration settings, enable Seller 2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Lock Desk Setup.
commitment terms, configure the lock desk calendar, and set up lock desk hours
and Overnight Rate Protection (ONRP).
Expiration Settings
Use the Expiration Settings tab to set the starting point for calculating the rate lock
expiration date (field ID 762 on the Loan Estimate Page 1 and other input forms)
and enable the Seller commitment terms.
NOTE: By default, the starting point is the date the rate is locked. 3 Set the time and time zone when the rate lock should expire.
To Set the Starting Point for the Rate Lock:
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. To Enable Seller Commitment Terms:
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Lock Desk Setup. NOTE: This feature was introduced in the Encompass 19.2 release.
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Lock Desk Setup.
3 To use the Origination lock terms when loans are committed between
Correspondent sellers and buyers, select Use standard Lock Term fields
(761, 432, 762) in the Loan File to represent Commitment Terms. This is
3 Select one of the two options for the start of the lock period. the default setting.
4 Click the Save icon. 4 To use the Seller commitment terms when loans are committed between
Correspondent sellers and buyers, select Use Commitment Term fields
To Set Behavior When Expiration Date is Excluded Day: (4527, 4528, 4529) in the Correspondent Loan Status Tool to represent
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Commitment Terms.
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Lock Desk Setup. NOTE: In addition, the Channel must be set to “Correspondent”.
• If this option is selected, a message “By enabling the use of Commitment
Term fields, standard Lock Term fields (761, 432, 762) in the Loan File will no
longer be updated upon Lock/Commitment confirmation for loans in the
Correspondent channel. Do you wish to continue?” will be displayed.
• Select OK to close the pop-up message and enable the option.
3 Select one of the two options for how to treat the expiration date when it is an • Select Cancel to close the pop-up message and enable the default option.
excluded day. 5 Click the Save icon.

Calendar • Custom Lock Desk Calendar - The administrator can select the days to
exclude from the calendar.
Use the Calendar tab to set the lock desk calendar.
NOTE: Federal holidays are blocked out by default.
To Select a Lock Expiration Calendar: • To configure the calendar:
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. • At the top left of the screen, click the Back or Forward arrows to
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Lock Desk Setup. change the calendar year.
3 Click on the Calendar tab. • Click a date to exclude it from the calendar. A pink background is added
to the date.
• Click an excluded date to include it in the calendar. The pink
background is removed from the date.
• Select Exclude Saturdays to exclude all Saturdays from the calendar.
• Select Exclude Sundays to exclude all Sundays from the calendar.
5 At the top right of the screen, select the Apply to Lock Extensions check box
to apply the lock expiration calendar settings to lock extensions.
Lock Desk Schedule/ONRP

Use the Lock Desk Schedule/ONRP tab to manage when lock requests are
allowed to be submitted and specify time and dollar limits for ONRP by channel.
You can set up a central Lock Desk or Lock Desks by channel (Retail, Wholesale,
or Correspondent), as well as set up Saturday and Sunday Lock Desk hours.
If Overnight Rate Protection (ONRP) has been enabled, the specified Lock Desk
End Times will establish the ONRP Start Times for those channels/days of the
week. If the Saturday or Sunday Lock Desk hours are specified, then any
associated ONRP Weekend/Holiday Coverage will be disabled and specific
4 Select one of the three options for the start of the lock period:
ONRP hours will need to be set up that complement the Saturday or Sunday Lock
• U.S. Postal Calendar - Lock expirations cannot occur on Sundays or legal Desk hours if a special ONRP time window(s) is desired on the weekend.
holidays. The read-only calendar blocks out Sundays and federal holidays.
24 Hour Lock Desk
• Company Calendar - The administrator can select days to exclude from
your company calendar. The read-only calendar blocks out the days selected You can now set up a 24 hour Lock Desk for every weekday and/or Saturday and
by your administrator. Sunday. When setting up a 24 hour Lock Desk, we strongly recommend that both
the Start and End Times be entered as 12:00 AM. This will avoid having the Lock
• To configure the company calendar, click Compliance Calendar (under Desk open on one day and closed on the next.
Loan Setup > Compliance Calendar), select Our Company Calendar,
and then click days to exclude from your business calendar. NOTE: Whenever Lock Desk hours are set to 24 hours, the corresponding ONRP
Settings will not allow the entry of an ONRP time window.
NOTE: The Company Calendar is also used to indicate business days when
determining compliance with RESPA regulations. Be sure your lock
To Set Up the Lock Desk Hours:
expiration settings do not conflict with RESPA compliance.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and ten click Settings.
• None - Lock expirations may occur on any day of the week.The read-only
calendar does not show any blocked out dates. 2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Lock Desk Setup.

3 Click on the Lock Desk Schedule/ONRP tab. • If the Start and End Times are the same, the lock desk will be open for 24
hours.
NOTE: We strongly recommend that both the Start and End Times be
entered as 12:00 AM. This will avoid having the lock desk open on one day
and closed on the next.
3 Enter the message that will be displayed when a lock is submitted outside of
the lock desk hours. This is a required field and cannot be blank.
NOTE: A default message is provided and will be used if it is not edited.
4 Select the Shut Down Lock Desk (Temporary) check box if the lock desk
must be temporarily shut down for emergency maintenance or other unusual
circumstance. This is a required field and cannot be blank. It will be enabled
for all three channels.
NOTE: When Shut Down Lock Desk (Temporary) is selected, no lock
requests will be accepted by Encompass during that time and the Lock Desk
Shut Down message will be displayed.
5 Enter the message that will be displayed when Shut Down Lock Desk
(Temporary) is selected.
Channel Lock Desk
4 Select the Enable Encompass Lock Desk Settings check box to enable the Three sets of Lock Desk settings (one for each channel) are displayed as tabs
tab and transfer management of the lock desk from EPPS (or TPO Connect) and only the selected channel is displayed in the ONRP Settings section.
to Encompass. 1 Select Channel Lock Desk Hours.
5 Select either Central Lock Desk Hours for one Lock Desk, or Channel Lock 2 Select the channel you want to set up Lock Desk hours for.
Desk Hours for Lock Desks by channel. 3 Enter a start and end time for the Lock Desk. For Saturday and Sunday, you
Central Lock Desk must select Saturday Hours and/or Sunday Hours first.
NOTE: The lock desk hours can now flow from one day into the next.
One set of Lock Desk settings is displayed and all three channel tabs are
displayed in the ONRP Settings section. • If ONRP is enabled (for any channel) and the Lock Desk End Time is
changed, a warning will be displayed stating that the ONRP Start Time will
1 Select Central Lock Desk Hours.
also be updated.
2 Enter a start and end time for the Lock Desk. For Saturday and Sunday, you
• If the ONRP End Time overlaps with the Lock Desk Start Time, a warning
must select Saturday Hours and/or Sunday Hours first.
will be displayed.
NOTE: The lock desk hours can now flow from one day into the next.
• If the Start and End Times are the same, the lock desk will be open for 24
• If ONRP is enabled (for any channel) and the Lock Desk End Time is hours.
changed, a warning will be displayed stating that the ONRP Start Time will NOTE: We strongly recommend that both the Start and End Times be
also be updated. entered as 12:00 AM. This will avoid having the lock desk open on one day
• If the ONRP End Time overlaps with the Lock Desk Start Time, a warning and closed on the next.
will be displayed. 4 Enter the message that will be displayed when a lock is submitted outside of
the lock desk hours. This is a required field and cannot be blank.

5 Select the Shut Down Lock Desk (Temporary) check box if the lock desk 4 Select Enable ONRP for the appropriate channels to enable that channel’s
must be temporarily shut down for emergency maintenance or other unusual settings.
circumstance. This is a required field and cannot be blank. It will be enabled • The ONRP Start Time is set to the Lock Desk End Time and cannot be
for all three channels. edited.
NOTE: When Shut Down Lock Desk (Temporary) is selected, no lock
requests will be accepted by Encompass during that time and the Lock Desk • The ONRP End Time cannot be past the Lock Desk Start Time.
Shut Down message will be displayed. NOTE: If Weekend/Holiday Coverage is selected, the ONRP End Time
6 Enter the message that will be displayed when Shut Down Lock Desk must be set to A.M.
(Temporary) is selected. 5 Select whether you want the ONRP coverage to be continuous or a specific
NOTE: A default message is provided and will be used if it is not edited. time period.
7 Click the Save icon. 6 If you select Continuous Coverage:
To Set Up ONRP Channel Setting: edited.
You can set up ONRP to align with the Lock Desk hours by channel when present • Weekend/Holiday Coverage is selected and cannot be edited.
(Retail, Wholesale, or Correspondent), as well as set up Saturday and Sunday 7 If you select Specify Time:
ONRP hours when enabled in the Lock Desk Hours section of the Lock Desk
Setup setting. • Enter the ONRP End Time.
• Select whether you want Weekend/Holiday Coverage.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and ten click Settings.
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Lock Desk Setup. 8 Select whether you want No Maximum Limit or not.
• If selected, the ONRP Dollar Limit $ and ONRP Tolerance % are blank and
3 Click on the Lock Desk Schedule/ONRP tab.
cannot be edited.
edited.
• ONRP Tolerance % is an optional field and supports up to 2 digits.
To Set Up the ONRP Over Limit Message

1 Enter any additional information you would like the requestor to know about a
lock request that is over the daily limit.
2 Click View Message to see the standard and addendum messages in a pop-
up window.

SRP Templates 3 On the SRP Templates window, click the New icon.
Use the SRP Templates setting to create templates of Service Release Premium
(SRP) adjustments that users can then select from the Trade Management
feature and apply to the loans in a trade. A different template is typically created
for each investor.
To Create an SRP Template:

2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click SRP Templates.
4 On the Create/Edit SRP Table window, type the Name and Description that
users will see when selecting the template.
5 In the SRP Details section, enter a minimum and maximum Loan Amount to
establish the remover applying the Base SRP and adjustments.
6 Type the Base SRP value, as a percent of the loan.

7 Type the Base SRP Adjustment percent for loans whose escrow has been 3 Click the New icon.
waived. This is typically a negative value.
NOTE: To waive a loan's escrow, select the Waived option for the Impounds
Waived field on the Lock Request Form or the Secondary Registration tool
(Current Loan tab).
8 If additional adjustments are required for specific locations:
• Select a location from the SRP Adjustment Based on Geography list.
• Click the SRP Adjustment field to the right of the location and type the
adjustment percent. This adjustment percent is added to the Base SRP
value.
• Click the SRP Adjustment, if Impounds are Waved field to the right of the
location and type the adjustment percent. This adjustment percent is added
to the Base SRP value if impounds are waived in the specified state or
geographic location.
• Select and add additional location-specific adjustments as required.
9 When finished entering SRP values for the range, click the New icon to add the
SRP details to the SRP table.
10 If prompted, click Yes to save your changes to the current SRP pricing.
11 Repeat steps 5 through 10 to create entries for additional loan-amount ranges.
12 Click Save to save the template. 4 Type a Template Name and Description.
5 Select the borrower and/or seller check boxes for those fees that will be
deducted from the loan amount.
Funding Templates NOTE: The template will only be applied to fees that were paid by the selected
Use the Funding Templates setting to create templates of the fees that are payer (borrower or seller). For example, if you select the borrower check box
typically deducted from the loan amount when calculating the wire transfer for line 1302 (Pest Inspection), but the actual fee was paid by the seller, the fee
amount on the Funding Worksheet. will not be deducted from the wire transfer amount. If appropriate, you may
want to select both the Borrower and Seller check boxes.
To Create a Funding Template: 6 When finished, click Save.
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Funding Templates.
Servicing
The funder of a loan may need to temporarily assume mortgage servicing
responsibilities until the loan has been transferred for purchase. This includes the
collection of loan payments and distribution of escrow payments.
Use the Servicing screen to define the mortgage statement printing/mailing date,
forms to use for printing mortgage statements, and fees for late payments.

To Configure Servicing Terms: Correspondent Purchase Advice
This setting enables the Payment History and Escrow Details tabs on the
2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Servicing. Correspondent Purchase Advice Form, and enables key values to be set for the
loan purchase calculations.
To Set Up Correspondent Purchase Advice Settings:

2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Correspondent
Purchase Advice.
3 Select the number of days prior to the payment due date that the mortgage
statement should be printed and mailed. 3 Select Enable Payment History tab and calculations if you want to display
4 Select one or more forms to use for printing the mortgage statements. the Payment History tab and enable any calculations on the tab.
• To add a form to the list, click the New icon, select the form, and then click NOTE: If this setting is not selected, the Enable Escrow Details tab and
Select. calculations will be disabled.
• To remove a form from the list, select a form, and then click the Delete icon. 4 Select Enable Escrow Details tab and calculations if you want to display the
5 To enter late fees, select a state, and then enter the Minimum and Maximum Escrow Details tab and enable any calculations on the tab.
amount that can be charged for a late payment in that state. NOTE: If the Enable Payment History tab and calculations setting is not
6 Click the Save icon to save your changes. selected, this setting will be disabled.
5 In the Cutoff Calendar Day – day of the month field, enter the day of the
month to be used as the cutoff day. The calculations will use dates that are
either before the entered day or on/after the entered day. The Cutoff Calendar
Day set is based on the number of days needed by the investor to satisfy the
RESPA 15-day servicing transfer notification rule.
6 In the Number of Months – Payment Amortization to display field, enter the
number of months to be displayed in the Payment Amortization Table on the
Payment History tab.

7 In the Per Diem Interest – Days per year drop-down list, select how many 6 Use the Edit, Delete, Up, and Down buttons to edit, delete, or change the
days in the year to use in the per diem interest calculation. position of the payout entries.
8 In the Per Diem Interest – Rounding drop-down list, select how you want the 7 When finished, click the Save icon.
per diem interest to be rounded.
NOTE: When Enable Payment History tab and calculations is enabled, the To Create a Purchase Advice Template:
Per Diem Interest settings will override the Interest calculation on the Purchase 1 In the Purchase Advice Template area, click the New icon.
Advice tab of the Correspondent Purchase Advice Form. When Enable 2 Type a name for the template and then (with the new purchase advice template
Payment History tab and calculations is not enabled, the selected ‘Interest’ selected) click the Edit icon.
parameters on the Purchase Advice tab of the Correspondent Purchase
Advice Form will be used instead. 3 On the Create/Edit Template window, type a Description for the template.
Users will see this description when they select from the list of templates.
4 In the left column, type a new description or select a description for the payout
Purchase Advice Form from the list you configured using the Payout Dropdown List.
Use the Purchase Advise Form settings to create two types of template 5 In the right column, enter a value for the expected payout.
information that users can select from the Purchase Advice Form. The Payouts 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each payout entry.
Dropdown List contains descriptions of commonly used payouts. The Purchase 7 When you have completed all your entries, click Save.
Advice Template list contains complete templates that populate multiple payout
lines with both a description and the expected value of the payout.
To Create Payout Descriptions:

2 On the left panel, click Secondary Setup, and then click Purchase Advice
Form.
3 In the Payouts Dropdown List area, click the New icon.

4 Enter a description for a payout and click Save.
5 Add additional items to the list as required.

Loan Pricing Decimal Places
Use the Loan Pricing Decimal Places Setting to configure the number of decimal
places that display in the loan pricing fields. A list of fields that are affected by the
setting displays at the bottom of the screen.
To Adjust the Number of Decimal Places:

1 Select the 3 or 10 option to set the number of decimal places.
2 When finished, click the Save icon to save your changes.
NOTE: When you change the option from 10 to 3, a confirmation message will
inform you that pricing and pricing adjustments will be rounded to the nearest
thousandth when the setting is saved. Select Yes to implement the setting change
and rounding. Select No to cancel the setting change.

Chapter 11
Contact Setup
Borrower Custom Fields • Type the name of the option and click OK.
• Add additional options as required. Use the Edit and Delete buttons to
Use the Borrower Custom Fields setting to create up to 100 custom fields for your
change or delete entries.
borrower contacts. You can assign a field type to each custom field. There are 17
field types, two of which are drop-down lists of predefined selections that you create. • When finished creating the list, click OK.
7 Add additional custom borrower fields as required.
To Create Borrower Custom Fields:
2 In the left panel, click Contact Setup, and then click Borrower Custom Mapping Borrower Custom Fields to Loan Fields
Fields. You can map custom fields to loan fields so that contact information is
automatically copied to a loan. For example, you can create a custom field for your
contact's monthly income and map it to an existing loan field. The information is
automatically copied to the loan fields when a new loan is created using the
Originate Loan, Order Credit, or Product and Pricing buttons in the Contact Details
section on the Borrower Contacts tab.
You can also configure mapped loan fields to write content back to the custom
fields when borrower contact information is updated in the loan. These updates
occur when a user clicks the Synchronize icon on the Borrower Summary or
when a user updates contact information at the completion of a milestone.
NOTE: If the contact's record is open on the Contacts tab when you synchronize
or update the borrower information, you must close and reopen the contact record
to view the changes.
To Map Borrower Custom Fields to Loan Fields:

3 Click one of the five tabs (Page 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) on which to add the custom field. 1 In the Loan Field ID field, enter the ID for the loan field that will be mapped to
4 In the Custom Tab Name field, type a name for the tab. The name will display the custom field. The Loan Field Description populates automatically.
on the Borrow Contact screen.
5 In the first field (Custom Field 1), type a Field Description, and then (optionally)
select a Field Type.
6 If you selected the field types DROPDOWN or DROPDOWN-Editable,
complete the following steps to add options to the list from which the user will
select. The DROPDOWN-Editable type allows users to select from a list or
type a value.
• Click the Edit icon to the right of the Field Type field.
• On the Custom Field Options window, click New.
Chapter 11: Contact Setup 156

NOTE: To find a loan field ID, open the loan and move your mouse over the Borrower Contact Update
field. The field ID displays.
By default, users are prompted to update borrower contact information when the
2 To map loan field changes back to a custom field, select the Both Ways option. Completion milestone is finished. Use the Borrower Contact Update screen to
3 Click the Save icon. change the milestone to update the information earlier.
When finished, you can click the Lookup icon to the right of each Loan Field
ID to view the ID, description, type, and mapping relationship. To Change the Milestone Selection:
2 In the left panel, click Contact Setup, and then click Borrower Contact
Borrower Contact Status Update.
Use the Borrower Contact Status setting to create a predefined list of custom
statuses for your borrower contacts. The Status field (and list of custom statuses)
displays on the Extra tab of the Borrower Contacts screen.
To Create a Borrower Contact Status:

2 In the left panel, click Contact Setup, and then click Borrower Contact
Status.
3 Select the milestone where the update prompt will occur.

3 Click the New icon and the type the name of the status.

Business Custom Fields 6 If you selected the field types DROPDOWN or DROPDOWN-Editable,
complete the steps below to add options to the list from which the user will
Use the Business Custom Fields setting to create up to 100 custom fields for your select. The DROPDOWN-Editable type allows users to select from a list or
business contacts. You can also create up to 20 category-specific fields for each type a value.
business category. There are 17 field types, two of which are drop-down lists of
• Click the Edit to the right of the Field Type field.
predefined selections that you create.
• On the Custom Field Options window, click New.
To Create Business Custom Fields: • Type the name of the option and click OK.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. • Add additional options as required. Use the Edit and Delete buttons to
2 In the left panel, click Contact Setup, and then click Business Custom change or delete entries.
Fields. • Click OK.
7 Add additional custom borrow fields as required.
To Create Category-Specific Custom Fields:

1 On the Business Custom Fields screen, click the Custom Category
Fields tab.
2 Select the category the new fields will apply to, such as Appraiser.
3 Complete steps 5 through 8 above to add custom fields for the
selected category.
Mapping Custom Category Fields to Loan Fields

You can map custom category fields to loan fields so users can automatically copy
content when a business contact is added to a loan using the Address Book. You
can also configure the mapped loan fields to write content back to a business
contact's record on the Contacts tab. The information is automatically copied to
the custom fields when a new contact is added to your business contacts using
data from a loan.
3 Click one of the Page tabs where the custom fields will be added.
4 Type a name for the tab. The name will display on the Business Contact tool.
5 In the first field (Custom Field 1), type a Field Description, and then select a
Field Type (Field Types are optional).

To Map Custom Category Fields to Loan Fields: Business Categories
1 On the Custom Category Fields tab, in the Loan Field ID field, enter the ID for
Use the Business Categories setting to create custom categories for your
the loan field that will be mapped to the custom field. The loan field description
business contacts that meet the specific requirements of your business.
populates automatically.
To Create a Business Category:
2 In the left panel, click Contact Setup, and then click Business Categories.
3 Click the New icon, and then type the name of the business category.
Public Business Contact Groups

Use the Public Business Contact Groups setting to create subsets of your public
business contacts. Using business contact groups, you can create groups that are
NOTE: To find a loan field ID, open the loan and move your mouse over the targeted to the needs of different groups of users.
field. The field ID displays.
For example, you can create a group of title companies that do business in the
2 To map your loan field changes back to the custom fields, select the Both geographic area where a branch office is located. This makes it easier for the
Ways option. users at that branch office to quickly search for and find an appropriate title
3 Click the Save icon. company.For a business contact to be accessible by other users, it must be a
member of a public business contact group.
After you finish, you can view the IDs, descriptions, types, and mapping
relationships for the configured fields by clicking the Lookup icon to the right Assign Public Business Contact Groups to User Groups
of the Loan Field ID field.
Public business contact groups are assigned to groups of users on the Resources
tab of the User Groups setting. You can assign more than one public business
contact group to each user group. This is also where you assign access rights
(View or Edit) for the contacts in the group. In this way, the access rights are
dependent on the assigned user group.

To Create a Public Business Contact Group: • To remove a contact, select a contact, and then click the Delete icon.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 3 When finished with group edits, click Save.
2 In the left panel, click Contact Setup, and then click Public Business Contact
Categories. Advanced Searches when Adding Contacts
1 Click the Advanced Search button on the Add Contacts window.
2 To add a new search criteria:
• To add a new criteria at the bottom of the list, click the New icon.
• To insert the new criteria on the row above an existing criteria, select the
existing criteria, and then click the Insert button.
3 On the Add/Edit Search Filter window, click the Lookup icon to select a field
as a search criteria.
4 Select a field from the list and click OK.
• Or, type one or more characters in the Find field and then click Find. The first
occurrence of the characters in any column is found. Continue clicking Find
to view additional occurrences.
5 Select an Operator, enter (or select) a Value, and then click OK.
• The Operator and Value define how the field will be used to search for loans.
For example: Field ID= 1109 (Loan Amount), Operator = Greater than, Value
= 250000.
6 Click OK.
3 Click the New icon. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 6 to add more filters.
4 On the Group Details window, type the Group Name and then click the New 8 To use parentheses to control the order in which multiple filters are evaluated,
icon to add contacts to the group. click Parentheses, select the filters to group, click the New icon, and click OK.
5 On the Add Contacts window, select one or more contacts, and then click Add. 9 Use the AND/OR button to determine how search criteria are used together.
Example: If you search for Prospects and Hot Leads, use AND to search for
• Select or type values in the fields below the column headings to filter the list contact who belong to both categories (Prospects who are also Hot Leads).
of displayed contacts. Or, click the Advanced Search button to create Use OR to view contacts who fall into either category (all Prospects as well as
advanced search criteria. Refer to Advanced Searches when Adding all Hot Leads).
Contacts on page 160.
10 When finished, click Apply to run the advanced search.
6 Back on the Group Details window, click Save.
11 To clear an Advanced Search, click the Clear button in the upper right.
To View and Edit a Public Business Contact Group:
1 On the Public Business Contact Groups screen, select a contact group, and
then click the Edit icon.
2 On the Group Details window:
• To change the group name, type the new name in the Group Name field.
• To view a list of the public business contact groups a contact belongs to, click
the Group icon to the left of a contact.
• To add contacts to group, click the New icon. Select and add contacts as in

Email Server Settings 2 Click Test Settings to send a test message to your email address using the
Server Information (Outgoing Mail Server and Port).
Use the Email Server Settings options to specify the email server used to send
email merges to contacts. Depending on the options selected here, users can To Allow Outlook or SMTP Configuration by User
define their own settings using the Email Settings feature.
• Click this option to allow each user to select Microsoft Outlook or the SMTP
server to send the email merge message. Enter and test the Company SMTP
To View Email Server Settings Options:
Settings by following steps 1 and 2 above.
2 In the left panel, click Contact Setup, and then click Email Server Settings.
Use Outlook for All Users

• Select this option to use Outlook to send all email merge messages
Use SMTP for All Users

Click this option to use your SMTP server to send all email merge messages.
1 In the Company SMTP Settings section, type values for the default Server
Information and Login Information.
• Select the Users must enter their own login information check box to
require each user to enter their own SMTP User Name and Password.
• Select the Allow users to enter personal SMTP settings check box to give
users the choice of using the company defaults or entering their own SMTP
server and login information.

Chapter 12
Loan Templates
Use the Loan Templates options to create templates and sets of default data for
frequently-used loan scenarios and information.
NOTE: Encompass provides the ability to maintain public and personal versions
of resources such as loan templates, reports, and custom print forms. Personal
resources are created and maintained by each user for their own use. Public
resources are available to an expanded group of users.
Loan Programs
A Loan Program is a template of predefined values that display primarily on the
Truth-In-Lending Disclosure statement and the 1003 application. You can
significantly reduce data entry time and improve accuracy by setting up Loan
Programs for the types of loans you process most often.
When you select a Loan Program to use with a loan, the data from the template
is copied to the loan forms. You can leave the data as is, or change values as
needed. The original data on the template is not affected.
To Create a Loan Program:

1 On the menu bar, click Encompass and then click Settings.
2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Loan Programs.
3 On the Loan Programs screen, select the Public or Personal folder in which to
add the template.
4 Click the New icon, type the name of the loan program, and then (with the new
template selected) click the Edit icon. 5 On the Loan Program Details window, type a Description.
6 If the data in a template conflicts with a business rule, select the Template data
will ignore business rules check box to ignore the conflicting business rule
and apply the template data to the loan.
• If the check box is not selected, the business rule will take precedence over
the template data.
NOTE: This feature is available only if it has been enabled by your system
administrator (using Admin Tools’ Settings Manager) and applies only to public
templates.
7 Complete the loan template as described in the following steps, and then
click Save.
Chapter 12: Loan Templates 162

Heading Fields Additional Fields
1 To associate a closing cost program with the loan program, click the Find • In the Mortgage Insurance section, click the Edit icons to calculate
button to select the appropriate template.
• the mortgage insurance premiums and terms. For detailed instructions, refer to
2 Select a Loan Doc Type Code. Calculating Mortgage Insurance Premiums.
• In the Program Requirements section, enter the enter the minimum
Basic Fields
requirements for the borrower to qualify for this loan program.
Use the Basic Fields section to apply a Plan Code and enter basic loan
• Indicate the types of insurance required and, if purchased from the creditor, the
information that will be used in the template. Enter loan purpose, loan type, and
annual premium.
property information as needed. Enter any additional terms required for the loan
program type. For example, rates for buydown and ARM mortgages, biweekly • Use the Late Charges and Assumption sections to enter information related to
payments, potential negative amortization, and construction mortgage details. late charges and assumability.
Plan Code
1 Click the Plan Code button to apply a plan code to the template. Closing Costs
• Fields applied from a plan code are disabled and cannot be edited. A Closing Cost is a template of predefined values that display primarily on the
2 Select a Plan Type option: eDisclosure or Closing Docs. Good Faith Estimate statement and the 1003 application. You can significantly
reduce data entry time and improve accuracy by setting up closing cost templates
• A list of loan programs displays.
for the types of loans you process most often.
3 To view details about the loan program, including the values that will be added
When you select a closing cost template to use with a loan, the data from the
to the loan file if selected, select the loan program, and then click the View
template is copied to the loan forms. You can leave the data as is, or change
Plan Code Details icon.
values as needed. The original data on the template is not affected.
4 To add a plan to the template, select a plan, and then click Select.
To Create a Closing Cost Template:
To Add Plan Codes to the List of Available Plan Codes:
1Click the New icon.
2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Closing Costs.
2At the top of the Select Plan Code window, select an investor from the list.
3 On the Closing Costs setting, select the Public or Personal folder in which to
•A list of loan programs provided by the investor displays.
add the template.
3To view details about the loan program, including the values that will be added 4 Click the New icon, select the option to apply the template to the
to the loan file if selected, select the loan program, and then click the View 2015 Itemization or the 2010 Itemization.
Plan Code Details icon.
4To add the program to the list of available plan codes, select one or more
plans, and then click Add.
5Click Yes to confirm the addition of the plan to your company's plan code list.
•The program is added to the Company Plan Codes list.
6To add additional plans to the plan codes list, repeat steps 2 through 5.
NOTE:To add one or more programs plan codes at the same time, press Ctrl
on your keyboard, and then click to select the programs to add.
5 If an investor is associate with the Plan Code, select the investor from the list
to apply investor information to the loan file and closing documents.
6 Click OK to confirm the addition of the plan to the template.

5 Type the name of the template, and then (with the new template selected) click General Guidelines
the Edit icon. • Type the costs and fees assigned to the borrower, seller, or both. As necessary,
type a description of the cost in the space provided.
• Use the Paid To list and the three check boxes to specify the payee and other
characteristics of the fee.
• If the template is for the 2010 Itemization, use the Paid By list to specify who will
pay the fee. If the template is for the 2015 Itemization, you can also click the Fee
Details icon associated with the fee and use the Amount Paid by section of the
Fee Details window to specify who will pay the fee.
• With templates that are applied to 2015 Itemization, data entered in the Fee
Details windows is copied to the form when the template is applied to a loan.
• For calculated fields, Encompass places the value in the Borrower field. If you
type a value in the associated Seller field, that amount is deducted from the
Borrower value.
• Click the Address Book icon to select providers from your business contacts. If
you type a name in a field, you can then right-click to add a new contact to your
business contacts.
• In the 900, 1000, 1100, 1200, and 1300 sections, use the Edit icons to open a
calculator to determine the associated field value.
• In the Government Recording and Transfer Charges section, use the Find icons
to select predefined formulas to calculate the charges.
Costs and Fees Designations

6 On the Closing Cost Template Details window, type a Description, and When you record costs and fees in sections 800 through 1300, use the Paid By
complete the form as described below. drop-down list and the four check boxes to specify the payor and other
7 If the data in a template conflicts with a business rule, select the Template data characteristics of the fee. Totals for each designation are located in the Closing
will ignore business rules check box to ignore the conflicting business rule Costs Summary section.
and apply the template data to the loan. When you record costs and fees in sections 800 through 1300, Use the Paid By
• If the check box is not selected, the business rule will take precedence over and Paid To lists and the three check boxes to specify the payor, payee, and other
the template data. characteristics of the fee.
NOTE: This feature is available only if it has been enabled by your system 1 Type the amount of the fee in the Borrower or Seller columns (or both).
administrator (using the Settings Manager in the Admin Tools) and applies only 2 If the value in the Borrower column will be paid by someone other than the
to public templates. borrower, use the Paid By drop-down list to indicate who will pay the fee,
8 When finished, click Save. Broker (B), Lender (L), or Other (O).
3 If the template is for the 2010 Itemization, select one or more check boxes as
appropriate:
• P (Paid outside closing/Paid through closing) - When the P check box is
selected, a pop-up window allows you to indicate how much of the fee is
being paid outside closing (POC) or through closing (PTC).
• B (Borrower select) - The borrower will locate a provider for the service.

• A (APR fees) - Borrower costs that are used to calculate the APR. Sections 800 through 1300
• Use the Paid To list to indicate the recipient of the fee: Broker (B), Lender (L), 800
Other (O), Seller (S) or Investor (I).
Fees paid in connection with the loan, typically by the borrower.
4 If the template is for the 2015 Itemization, you can select one or more check
900
boxes as appropriate in sections 800 through 1300.
• P (Paid outside closing/Paid through closing) - All or part of the fee is
Fees for future services, such as mortgage insurance for the upcoming year, that
being paid outside closing (POC) or paid through closing (PTC). are paid when the loan closes.
• B (Borrower select) - The borrower has opted to locate a provider for this 1000
service. Selecting this check box causes both the Borrower can shop for and Fees deposited in the escrow account established by the lender.
Borrower did shop for check boxes to be selected on the Fee Details window
for the fee. Clearing one or both of the check boxes on the Fee Details 1100
window also clears this check box on the 2015 Itemization. Fees collected by the lender when the loan closes, and then distributed to outside
• A (APR fees) - Borrower costs that are used to calculate the APR. service providers.
• Use the Paid to column in sections 800 through 1300 to indicate to whom the 1200
fee will be paid. Fees collected by the lender when the loan closes, and then distributed to local
• B (Broker) - The fee is paid to the broker. The value is placed in the Paid and state agencies. For lines 1202 through 1206, you can use the Find icons to
To Broker column on the MLDS. select a predefined formula to calculate the associated value.
• L (Lender) - The fee is paid to the lender (creditor). 1300
• S (Seller) - The fee is paid to the seller. The value is placed in the From Charges and other miscellaneous fees not already recorded in sections 800
GFE Seller column on the MLDS. through 1200.
• I (Investor) - The fee is paid to the investor.
• A (Affiliate) - The fee is paid to an affiliate of the lender or the broker
• O (Other) - The fee is paid to someone other than the broker, lender, seller Input Form Sets
or investor. The value is placed in the Paid To Others column on the Use the Input Form Sets setting to create sets (templates) of forms to displays in
MLDS. the forms list on the loan workspace. Input Form Sets are available to use as a
5 If the template is for the 2015 Itemization, you can click the Fee Details icon to component of a loan template or can be applied individually from within a loan.
the left of a fee entry to open the Fee Details pop-up window. Use the pop-up
window to edit the information entered in the check boxes and the Paid to and To Create an Input Form Set:
Paid by drop-down lists described above. The Fee Details window enables 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass and then click Settings.
you to enter more detailed information about the fees, including the entities
who are paying the fee in part or in whole (Borrower, Seller, Broker, Lender, 2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Input Form Sets.
and Other), the amount paid by each entity, and the portion of the payment that 3 On the Input Form Sets screen, select the Public or Personal folder in which to
falls into different payment categories (Financed, PTC, PAC, and POC). add the set.
Changes made in the pop-up window are reflected on the amounts shown on
4 Click the New icon, type the name of the input form set, and then (with the new
the 2015 Itemization.
forms set selected) click the Edit icon.
Section 700
The distribution and payors of sales and broker commissions.

2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Settlement Service
Providers.
3 On the Settlement Service Providers screen, select the Public or Personal
folder in which to add the template.
4 Click the New icon, type the name of the template, and then (with the new
template selected) click the Edit icon.
5 On the Input Form Set Details window, type a Description.

6 Select one or more forms in the Predefined Input Forms list, and click Add.
• Use the ---Line--- option to add a separation line between groups of forms. 5 On the Settlement Service Provider Details window, type a Description.
7 To remove forms, select one or more forms in the Selected Input Forms list, 6 In the Settlement Service Provider List section, click the New icon.
and then click Remove.
7 In the Settlement Service Provider section:
8 To change the display order, select a form in the Selected Input Forms list, and
then click Up or Down. • To add a provider from your business contacts, click the Address Book icon,
select a provider, and then click Select.
NOTE: By default, only providers that have been categorized as No Category
are displayed in the Business Contacts window. Click Clear to remove this filter
and display all of your providers.
Settlement Service Providers
8 Repeat steps 6-7 to add additional providers.
Use the Settlement Service Providers setting to create predefined lists
(templates) of settlement service providers to display in the Settlement Service 9 To remove providers, select one or more providers on the Settlement Service
Provider List form. These templates are available to use as a component of a loan Providers List, and then click the Delete icon.
template or can be applied individually from within a loan. 10 To change the display order, select a provider on the Settlement Service
Providers List, and then click the Up or Down icon.
To Create a Settlement Service Provider Template:

11 If the data in a template conflicts with a business rule, select the Template data 4 Click the New icon, enter the name of the template, and then (with the new
will ignore business rules check box to ignore the conflicting business rule template selected) click the Edit icon.
and apply the template data to the loan. If the check box is not selected, the
business rule will take precedence over the template data.
NOTE: This feature is available only if it has been enabled by your system
administrator (using the Settings Manager in the Encompass Admin Tools) and
applies only to public templates.
Affiliated Business Arrangement Templates

Use Affiliated Business Arrangement templates to create templates pre-populated
with business affiliate information. For lenders that use the same affiliates for
every business transaction, authorized users can apply the template to their loan
file and include the affiliate information in the Affiliated Business Arrangements
input form.
To Create an Affiliated Business Arrangement Template:

2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Affiliated Business
Arrangement Templates.
3 On the Affiliated Business Arrangements screen, select the Public Affiliates
or Personal Affiliates folder in which to add the template. 5 In the Description field, enter a description for the template.
6 In the Affiliated Business Arrangements section, click the New icon to add a
business affiliate to the template.
7 In the Affiliate section, enter business affiliate details.
• Click the Address Book icon to select a lender from your Business Contacts.
8 Repeat steps 6-7 to add additional business affiliates to the template.
9 To manage the list order of the affiliates in the Affiliated Business
Arrangements section, select an affiliate and then click the up or down arrow
to move the affiliate up or down in the list.
NOTE: The order of the affiliates within the list determines the sequence of the
printed disclosures (the first affiliate’s disclosure is printed first, and so on).
10 If the data in the template conflicts with a business rule, select the Template
data will ignore business rules check box to ignore the conflicting business
rule and apply the template data to the loan.
the template data.

Document Sets 6 From the Milestone list, select a milestone with which to associate the selected
documents.
Use the Document Sets setting to create sets of documents to meet the
7 Select one or more documents from the Predefined Documents list and click
requirements of various loan scenarios or particular lenders. Document sets are
Add.
available to use as a component of a loan template, or can be applied individually
from within a loan. 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to add documents to the set for different milestones.
NOTE: Use the Documents tool to create and edit documents and their tracking 9 To remove documents from the set, select one or more documents from the
properties. Tracked Documents list, and then click Remove.
10 Click Save.
To Create a Document Set:
2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Document Sets. Task Sets
3 On the Document Sets tool, select the Public or Personal folder in which to add Use the Task Sets setting to group predefined tasks into tasks sets that are
the set. associated with particular milestones. Task sets can then be added to loan
templates. When the template is used to create a loan, the tasks in the task set
4 Click the New icon, type the name of the document set, and then (with the new
display on the appropriate milestone worksheet.
document set selected) click the Edit icon.
NOTE: Use the Tasks setting to create tasks.
To Create a Task Set:

2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Task Sets.
3 On the Task Sets screen, select the Public or Personal folder in which to add
the set.
5 On the Document Set Template Details window, type a Description.

4 Click the New icon, type the name of the task set, and then (with the new task Data Templates
set selected) click the Edit icon.
Use the Data Templates setting to create templates of default loan data. Data
templates are available to use as a component of a loan template set or can be
applied individually from within a loan.
To Create a Data Template:

2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Data Templates.
3 On the Data Templates screen, select the Public or Personal folder in which to
add the template.
4 Click the New icon, type the name of the template, and then (with the new
template selected) click the Edit icon.
5 On the Task Set Template Details window, type a Description.

6 From the Milestone list, select a milestone with which to associate the
selected tasks.
7 Select one or more tasks from the Predefined Tasks list and click Add.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to add tasks to the set for different milestones.
9 To remove tasks from the set, select one or more tasks from the Tracked Tasks
list, and then click Remove.
10 Click Save.
5 On the Data Template Details window, from the RESPA-TILA Form Version
drop-down list, select the version of the forms that will be used for the loan
when this template is applied.
NOTE: Using the RESPA-TILA Form Version option located at the top of the
Forms menu, an authorized user can open a loan file and select an option to
use the 2015, 2010, or pre-2010 version of the RESPA-TILA forms only for the
loan file that is open. The forms used in other loan files are not affected. Note
that the option to switch between versions of loan forms is no longer available
after a loan has been disclosed to a borrower.

6 On the Data Template Details window, type a Description. • Settlement Service Providers - A predefined list of providers used to populate
7 To add data, select an input form from the list on the left, and then enter the Settlement Service Provider List form.
required information on the form. • Document Sets - A set of documents that meet the requirements of a common
8 Repeat step 7 to add data to additional forms. loan scenario such as an FHA or ARM loan.
9 If the data in a template conflicts with a business rule, select the Template data • Task Sets - A set of milestone-specific tasks that are completed during the
will ignore business rules check box to ignore the conflicting business rule loan's workflow.
and apply the template data to the loan. • Data Templates - A set of default loan data that is automatically populated on
loan forms when you start a loan.
the template data. • Affiliate Template - A template pre-populated with multiple business affiliate
NOTE: This feature is available only if it has been enabled by your system information that can be applied to the loan file and include the affiliate
administrator (using the Settings Manager in the Admin Tools) and applies only information in the Affiliated Business Arrangements input form.
to public templates.
Data Conflicts
It is possible to create a loan template set with conflicting data from different
NOTE: When creating a template, do not enter predefined mortgage insurance template components. For example, a loan template set could include a loan
information on the MIP/PMI/Guarantee Fee Calculation tool. Values entered here program with a loan term of 360 months and a misc. data template with a loan
could cause discrepancies in the APR values that display on different loan forms. term of 240 months.
If data conflicts exist in a loan template set, the following rules are used.
Loan Template Sets • Data in a data template is overridden by the same data in other template
components.
Use the Loan Template Sets tool to create templates of loan data, documents, and
tasks for frequently-used loan scenarios. Using loan template sets saves time and • If a loan program references a closing cost template, the data in the referenced
improves the accuracy of loan information. When you start a new loan, the New closing cost template is overridden by the data in a separate closing cost
Loan (or Select Loan Template) window opens, from which you can select a template.
template to apply to the loan.
To Create a Loan Template Set:
About public and personal loan templates
Each loan template set is comprised of one to nine components that are
2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Loan Template Sets.
separately maintained. The components are used in different combinations to
create each loan template set. 3 On the Loan Template Sets setting, select the Public or Personal folder in
which to add the set.
• Loan Programs - A template of predefined loan terms and properties that
display primarily on the Truth-In-Lending Disclosure statement and the 1003
application.
• Milestone Template - A template consisting of milestones grouped together by
a common factor such as channel or loan type. When the loan template is
applied to a loan file (or is used to when starting a new loan file), the milestones
in the milestone template are applied to the loan file. Each milestone needs to
be completed to process the loan.
• Closing Costs - A template of predefined closing costs that display primarily on
the Good Faith Estimate statement and the 1003 application.
• Input Form Sets - The input forms to display in the forms list on the loan
workspace.

4 Click the New icon, type the name of the loan template set, and then (with the • Click the Go To button to display the folder where the default template is
new template set selected) click the Edit icon. located. The templates in the folder display on the Loan Templates Set table.
NOTE: Default loan templates sets are not set on a company-wide basis. Default
loan template sets are set by individual users.
Default Template Setting

By default, when a template is applied to a loan file, all template fields (including
blank fields) overwrite the associated fields in the loan. The user also has the
option of selecting a check box so that only fields from the template that contain
a value are applied.
Using the Default Template Setting screen, you can select which option to use as
the default action for each type of template: apply only fields that contain a value
or apply all fields. At the time that a template is applied, the user can still change
the default option.
To Set the Default Template Action:

2 In the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Default Template
Setting.
3 For each of the three template types, select the associated check box if you
want the template to apply only fields that contain a value. If left unchecked, all
template fields (including blank fields) will be applied.
5 On the Loan Template Details window, type a Description.

6 In the Templates section, click the button for one of the nine template
components, select a predefined component from the displayed list, and then
click Select.
7 Repeat step 6 to add up to eight components to the loan template.
8 Click Save.
To Set a Default Template Set:

• On the Loan Template Sets screen, select a template set and click Set as
Default.
The selected template set is placed in the Current Default Template field at the top
of the screen. This template is used when you originate a loan and click the Default
Template button.

Configurable Workflow Templates 5 A Workflow Sub Category row is displayed.
Use the Configurable Workflow Templates setting to create channel specific

workflow views for Connect modules that captures data from Encompass and
displays the workflow and current status of the loan (as defined for the workflow).
NOTE: Currently, this feature is only enabled for Encompass TPO Connect.
6 Enter a unique Workflow Sub Category within the Workflow Category.

NOTE: The "Workflow Sub Category" field label is merely a visual cue. Enter
your desired sub category name, such as "Conditional Approval", over
"Workflow Sub Category". You can enter a maximum of 30 characters.
• At least one workflow sub category is required.
To enable this setting, the Connect module must be provisioned and the user must
be designated as an Administrator or Super Administrator. In addition, the • Workflow sub categories can be repeated between workflow categories, if so
appropriate channels must be selected on the Channel Options setting (under desired.
Loan Setup) to display the associated tab (up to three) on the Configurable • You can enter a maximum of 30 characters.
Workflow Templates setting.
7 Enter a Date Field ID. This field is required.
Wholesale – Select Banked Wholesale to display the Wholesale tab.
• The field ID must exist within Encompass (it cannot be a virtual field).
Delegated and Non-Delegated– Select Correspondent to display the
• The field ID must be defined as a Date or Date/Time field.
Delegated and Non-Delegated tabs.
• You cannot have duplicate Date Field IDs within the same workflow category.
To Add the Initial Workflow Category and Workflow Sub Category: 8 The Date Field Description is populated by Encompass based on the Date
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Field ID entered.
2 On the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Configurable 9 Select an eFolder document from the Document Name drop-down list, if
Workflow Templates. applicable.
10 If an eFolder document was selected, you can select another eFolder
document from the second Document Name drop-down list, if applicable.
• You cannot have duplicate documents within the same workflow sub
category.
11 Click on the Disabled slider to enable your new workflow category.
12 Click Save to save your changes.
NOTE: If you decide to Cancel your changes, you will be returned to the
Wholesale tab, regardless of which tab you are on when you click Cancel. In
3 Click on the channel tab where you want to add a workflow template. addition, the reverted values (if any) will be displayed on the Wholesale tab.
4 Enter a unique Workflow Category. This field is required and accepts up to 30 When you navigate to the Non-Delegated or Delegated tabs, they will display
characters. the values entered prior to any changes you made.
NOTE: The "Workflow Category" field label is merely a visual cue. Enter your
desired category name, such as "Underwriting", over "Workflow Category".

To Add Additional Workflow Categories: 3 Click on the channel tab where you want to edit a workflow template.
1 Locate where you want to add your new workflow category. 4 To edit a Workflow Category, click in the field.
2 Click on the Add icon ( ) next to the existing workflow category above that 5 To edit Workflow Sub Category fields, double-click in the field.
location. 6 Click Save to save your changes.
3 A new Workflow Category/Workflow Sub Category is displayed below the
existing workflow category/workflow sub category. To Delete Workflow Categories or Workflow Sub Categories:
NOTE: Currently, there is a maximum limit of 20 workflow categories per 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
channel.
2 On the left panel, click Loan Templates, and then click Configurable
Workflow Templates.
3 Click on the channel tab where you want to delete workflow categories/sub
categories.
4 To delete a Workflow Category, click on the Delete icon ( ) next to that
category.
NOTE: All sub categories within the workflow category will also be deleted.
5 To delete a Workflow Sub Category, click on the Delete icon ( ) next to that
sub category.
To Add Additional Workflow Sub Categories:
NOTE: A warning message, "One or more deletes have been requested for
1 Locate where you want to add your new workflow sub category. these settings, the deletes will permanently remove those entries. Do you wish
2 Click on the Add icon ( ) next to the existing workflow subcategory above the to continue?" [Yes] [No], is displayed for any deleted entries. Selecting Yes
location. saves the change, while selecting No cancels the save and returns the grid
back to its values before any changes were made.
3 A new Workflow Sub Category is displayed below the existing workflow sub
category. To Sequence Workflow Categories or Workflow Sub Categories:
NOTE: Currently, there is a maximum limit of 20 workflow sub categories per 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
channel.
Workflow Templates.
3 Click on the channel tab where you want to sequence workflow categories/sub
categories.
4 To move a Workflow Category, click on the Order icon ( ) next to that category,
drag the category to where you want it, and then drop it.
5 To move a Workflow Sub Category, click on the Order icon ( ), drag the sub
category to where you want it, and then drop it.
• A workflow sub category cannot be moved outside of it’s associated workflow
To Edit Workflow Categories or Workflow Sub Categories category.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 6 Click Save to save your changes.
Workflow Templates.

Chapter 13
Tables and Fees

Escrow and Title Tables 7 In the Fees section, click the New icon, and add values to calculate the fees
for different dollar ranges:
Use the Escrow and Title options to create tables of fees for purchase and
• In the Range Up To field, type the dollar amount up to which the rates apply.
refinance loans. Each table contains parameters for calculating the fees charged
by a company. Once tables are created, you can select them from the Good Faith • In the Base field, type the base fee for the range.
Estimate or California MLDS. The fee is calculated and placed on the form. • In the + Factor field, type a percentage to multiply by the value of the Based
On selection. For example: .003 * Loan Amount.
To Create a Table:
• Click OK.
8 Repeat step 7 to add additional ranges and rates.
2 On the left panel, click Tables and Fees, and then click Escrow or Title.
9 In the Calculation section:
• Select a Based On option, indicating the basis for calculating the fee.
• Select Round Up or Round Down, and type the To Nearest $ to which the
calculation should be rounded.
• Type the With Offset $ amount that will be used in the fee calculations.
NOTE: For an example of how to use the offset amount, refer to the Escrow
or Title online help topic.
HELOC Table
Use the HELOC Table setting to create the example data that is used on the
HELOC custom form, “Important Terms of Our Home Equity Line of Credit.” The
data in the example tables shows how the annual percentage rate and minimum
monthly payments for a HELOC loan with an outstanding balance of $10,000
would change based on changes to the index.
Once tables are created, you can select them from the HELOC Management input
form by clicking the Find icon next to the Historical Table field on the HELOC
Program tab.
You can create two types of HELOC tables in the setting:
4 In the Table Name field, type a name. Typically, the Table Name is the name of • Dynamic Tables are used with Encompass 19.3 and later. These tables are
a company. based on the exact scenario of the loan file to which they are applied and are
5 Select a Purpose. used to run complex calculations based on the payment scenario in a loan.
6 When creating a Title table, select a Type for the table.
Chapter 13: Tables and Fees 174

• Static Tables display on custom versions of the Important Terms Disclosure 7 Repeat step 8 to add additional entries for each year that will be included in the
output form exactly as the table is entered in the setting. Static tables are no example data. If your index has the same value in multiple years, click the
longer supported on the dynamically generated HELOC output forms that were Duplicate button to copy the index value and enter the new year value. This is
introduced with the Encompass 19.3 release and are maintained solely to useful when setting up a Prime rate, which had a 3.25 % value for multiple
support previously existing output forms for the custom HELOC Important Terms years.
Disclosure. 8 When finished, click OK on the Edit HELOC Historical Index Table window.
To Access the HELOC Table Setting: To Create a Static Table:

1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 1 Click the New icon.
2 On the left panel, click Tables and Fees, and then click HELOC Table. 2 Select Static Table, and then click OK.
To Create a Dynamic Historical HELOC Table:

2 Select Dynamic Table, and then click OK.
3 In the HELOC Table Name field, type a name, and then select an Index Name
from the list.
4 Select the day and month when the index starts. You can configure multiple
index start dates, for example by month or by quarter. If your company uses
multiple index start dates depending on when loans are originated, you may
configure multiple tables, each with different start day and month.
5 Enter a Default Historic Margin for the table. This margin is used with the
historical index data entered to calculate the APR disclosed for each year in
the historical example.
6 Click Add, use the Year and Index fields to create an entry for a specific year,
and then click OK.
3 In the HELOC Table Name field, type a name.

NOTE: Typically the Table Name is the name of a lender.
4 Click Add and use the Minimum Monthly Payment window to create sample
data for each year as follows.
• Type the Year, such as 2009.
• Click a Period Type, Draw or Repayment.
• Type the Index %, Margin %, and APR % for the year.
• Click OK.
5 Repeat step 5 to add additional entries for each year that will be included in the
example data.
6 Click OK on the Edit HELOC Table window.

MI Tables • On the Select Field window, scroll down and double-click the desired field.
• You can also type one or more letters (or numbers) of the field description in
Use the MI Tables settings to determine the kinds of mortgage insurance data
the Find field and click Find. The first occurrence of the characters in any
users can populate into fields on the MIP/PMI Calculation tool. Mortgage
column is found. Select the desired field and click OK.
insurance (MI) tables enable you to set up scenarios that define specific types of
loans and to associate different mortgage insurance data with each type of loan. 6 The Operator and Value fields enable you to specify how the selected field will
filter data. Click the Operator, then type a Value.
The MI Tables settings allows you to create and manage your own MI tables,
download existing FHA and VA tables from the server, and create and manage • Examples: field = Lender Name, Operator = Starts With, Value = I; field =
sub folders that help you organize MI tables for your conventional loans. Loan Amount, Operator = Between, From = 200000, To = 400000.
7 Click OK.
Create and Manage MI Tables
8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 until the scenario contains all the criteria needed.
The Conventional, FHA, VA, and Other tabs enable you to create and manage
your own MI tables. Click a tab, and then add, edit, delete, or duplicate scenarios NOTE: With multiple filters, you can use parentheses to group together filters.
in your MI tables. Example: to filter by loan amount and state, with different loan amounts per
state, create 2 sets of filters (Loan Amount and Subject Property State) in
To Add a Scenario to a Table: parentheses. Click the Parentheses button, select the filters, click the New
icon, and then click OK.
NOTE: To change the qualifier (Joint) between multiple criteria from AND to
2 On the left panel, click Tables and Fees, and then click MI Tables.
OR, click the And/Or button.
3 Click one of the first four tabs (Conventional, FHA, VA, or Other), and then
9 When finished creating filters, enter the following information on the MI
click the New icon at the top of the MI Tables list.
Scenario screen:
4 Click Create, and then click the New icon on the Scenario Builder window.
• 1st Premium – For most loans, enter the Mortgage Insurance premium for
the loan.
• Subsequent Premium – (VA loans only) If the borrower has had a previous
VA loan, enter the premium here. Otherwise, leave this field blank.
• 1st monthly MI – Enter the monthly mortgage insurance payments that the
borrower will make when the mortgage payments begin.
• 1st monthly MI months – The number of months for which the first monthly
MI will be paid.
• 2nd monthly MI – If the borrower is scheduled to make an additional series
of payments after the initial monthly mortgage insurance payments have
ended, enter the percentage rate.
• 2nd monthly MI months – The number of months for which the 2nd monthly
MI will be paid.
• Cut-off – The LTV ratio at which the MI will no longer be required.
10 Click OK.
5 Enter a field ID, or click the Lookup icon to select from a list of commonly used
fields as follows.

Download Pre-Configured Tables • MSA Code – The code for the Metropolitan Statistical Area where the county
is located.
Use the FHA (Download) or VA (Download) tab to download up-to-date MI
tables for FHA and VA loans from the server. Default versions of these tables are • Limits – The maximum allowable loan available for properties with 1, 2, 3,
shipped with Encompass, but updated FHA or VA tables can be downloaded as or 4 units.
needed. • County Transaction Date – The date when a county boundary was last changed.
NOTE: The last download time and date are listed next to the Download tab to • Limit Transaction Date – The date when the FHA last updated the county
help you identify the last downloaded table and verify if the FHA and VA MI tables loan limit.
are using the latest values.
• Last Modified – The date when the table entry was last updated or modified.
To Download an FHA or VA MI Table from the Encompass Server: • Customized - If you edit the county limit information, True displays in the
column.
1 Click the FHA (Download) or VA (Download) tab.
The FHA regularly updates county limit data, so a mechanism is provided for
2 Click the Download button.
quickly synchronizing the table over the Internet. It is recommended that you
3 To replace your current FHA or VA data with the new MI tables, click Yes when synchronize data every few weeks to stay current.
the confirmation box displays.
Complete the steps on the following page to update county limit information.
Create and Manage Sub Tabs When finished, click the Save icon.
When using the Conventional tab, you can also create and manage sub tabs as
To Enforce Limits:
needed to organize your MI scenarios. The Conventional tab includes a default
General sub tab. You can also use the New Tab, Rename Tab, and Delete Tab 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
Icons on the upper-right of the screen to create, rename, or delete additional sub 2 On the left panel, click Tables and Fees, and then click FHA County Limits.
tabs. For example, a company might use sub tabs to organize mortgage .
insurance options that are available from the various mortgage insurance
companies they do business with.
Note: The default General tab on the Conventional tab cannot be renamed
or deleted.
FHA County Limits

FHA county limits are the maximum amounts allowed for FHA loans based on the
county in which the property is located. The County Limits table is used to
automatically populate the county limit amount for an FHA loan on the FHA
Management form and to warn the user if the loan exceeds the limit.
The FHA County Limits setting includes a default table that includes the following
information:
• SOA Code – The Section-of-the-Act code indicating the program under which
the FHA mortgage is insured.
• State – The state in which the county is located.
• In the Find County field, type the name of the county you want to locate, and
• County Name – The name of the county.
then click Find. For multiple counties with the same name, continue clicking
• County Code – The FHA 1-to-3-digit code for the county. Find until you locate the correct county.
• Or scroll down the list and select a county.

3 Select the Do not allow loan amount higher than maximum county limit to 3 Click the New icon.
be entered check box to prevent users from entering a loan amount (in field
1109 on any form) that is higher than the county limit.
• If this check box is selected, the Enforce County Loan Limit check box on
the Borrower Summary - Origination input form in new FHA loan files is
automatically selected by default.
To Synchronize the Table via the Internet:

1 Select an update site from which data will be downloaded into your table.
• Select one of the default HUD (Housing and Urban Development) download
sites.
• Or select the editable field and enter the URL for an alternate site.
2 Click the Synchronize button, and then click the Save icon.
4 Type a Fee Description that describes the use or purpose of the fee. For
To Edit County Information:
example: California recording fee.
1 Select a county and click the Edit icon.
5 Select Loan Amount or Purchase Price as the basis of the calculation.
2 Edit limit values as required, and then click Save.
6 Type a Rate for the calculation and an optional flat rate in the + Additional $
NOTE: If you make edits and then synchronize your data, the edits will be field. If required, you can enter only a flat rate.
replaced with the synchronized data.
7 Click OK.
City Tax, State Tax, and User Defined Fee

Itemization Fee Management
Use the City Tax, State Tax, and User Defined Fee options to create formulas that
calculate government recording and transfer fees. After formulas are created, you Use the Itemization Fee Management setting to create a list of predefined closing
can select them from the Good Faith Estimate or 1003 application. The required costs that users can select when completing the 2015 Itemization form (when
fee is calculated and placed on the form. using the 2015 RESPA-TILA forms) or the 2010 Itemization and 2010 HUD-1
forms (when using the 2010 RESPA forms). These fields can then be mapped to
the appropriate fee fields in the Encompass Compliance Service. Users can then
To Create a Fee Record:
order a compliance report without requiring an administrator to map manually
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. entered closing fees as they are added to the system.
2 On the left panel, click Tables and Fees, and then click City Tax, State Tax, When applied, the predefined fee descriptions are assigned to the appropriate
or User Defined Fee. sections of the 2015 Itemization, 2010 Itemization or 2010 HUD-1 where users
can select them from the drop-down lists for the appropriate fields. Users must
select fees from the predefined list unless a persona is given permission to
manually overwrite and enter fees.
NOTE: Your administrator can set a date when all new loans will use the 2015
RESPA-TILA forms by default. Within a loan file, you can switch between the 2015
forms (2015 Itemization, Loan Estimate, Closing Disclosure, REGZ-LE, REGZ-
CD), the 2010 forms (2010 Itemization, 2010 GFE, REGZ-TIL, Closing REGZ,
and HUD-1), and the pre-2010 Itemization and HUD-1 as long as you have not yet

sent your initial disclosure to the borrower. Click Forms on the Encompass menu To Select Sections of the Forms Where Fees are Available:
bar, point to RESPA-TILA Form Version, and then click Old GFE and HUD-1, • For each fee, select a check box to choose one or more sections of the 2015
RESPA 2010 GFE and HUD-1, or RESPA-TILA 2015 LE and CD. Itemization, 2010 Itemization, and 2010 HUD-1 forms where the fee can be
NOTE: Refer to “Compliance Review Setup” on page 241 for information about selected from the drop-down lists.
setting up the Encompass Compliance Service. • Select the Apply to Itemization check box to apply your selections to the 2015
Itemization, 2010 Itemization, and 2010 HUD-1 forms.
To Access the Setting:
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. To Map Compliance Fees:
2 On the left panel, click Tables and Fees, and then click Itemization Fee Select fees that are currently in your Fee List and assign them to a corresponding
Management. compliance or UCD fee provided by the Encompass Compliance Service. All fees
must be mapped to specific fees in the Encompass Compliance Service in order
Fee List Tab for the compliance reports to produce complete and accurate results. Standard
Use the Fee List tab to select the predefined fees that will be available to your fees are automatically mapped to the appropriate compliance fee, however you
users, and to select the sections of the 2015 Itemization, 2010 Itemization and can change the mapped field if necessary. The Compliance fees are intended for
2010 HUD-1 where the fees will be available to users. When finished, click the the fields on the 2015 Itemization, 2010 Itemization, and 2010 HUD-1 forms, while
Save icon to save your changes. the UCD fees are intended for the fields on the Closing Disclosure form.For
detailed information about how the Encompass Compliance Service interprets
and treats specific fees, as well as tips and best practices for managing and
mapping fees, refer to the Using the Encompass Compliance Service guide. This
guide also provides a description of each mapped compliance field available in
the Encompass Compliance Service.
1 On the Fee List tab, locate the closing fee in the Fee List.
2 Locate the compliance fee in the Compliance Fees list in the top-right corner
or the UCD fee in the UCD Fees list in the bottom-right corner of the screen.
• Select Show All to display the full list of available compliance or UCD fees.
3 Drag the fee to the Fee List, and then drop the compliance or UCD fee on the
Encompass fee. The fee name displays in the Mapped Compliance Fee or
Mapped UCD fee column accordingly.
NOTE: The Encompass Compliance Service truncates fee names containing
To Add Fees to the List:
the text string “To: [a service provider or contact name]” for Fee mapping
• To add a new fee, click the New icon, type a name for the fee, and then click OK. purposes. For example, “Flood Certificate To: Landsafe Flood” will be
• To import fees from a Closing Costs template, click the Import Fees button, truncated to “Flood Certificate” and that will be used for mapping purposes.
click Import Fees from Closing Cost Templates, select a template, and then
click Select.
Persona Overwrite Tab
By default, when users are entering fee descriptions on the 2015 Itemization,
• To import the Encompass default list of fees, click the Import Fees button, click
2010 Itemization, and HUD-1 forms they must select fees (i.e., fee descriptions)
the Import Compliance Default Fees, and click Yes on the confirmation
from the predefined list you created using the steps above. However, you can use
message. The default fees and the applicable section selections display on the
the Persona Overwrite tab to give permission (based on persona) to users to
list, replacing any previous fees on the list.
manually enter their own fee descriptions or overwrite existing fee descriptions in
To Delete a Fee From the List:
• Select a fee on the list, and then click the Delete icon.

these fields. You can grant this permission for specific sections of the forms or for 4 In the right panel, click the Loan tab, go to the Itemization Fee Management
2010 and 2015 Itemization sections 800 through 1300. When finished, click the section, and then select check boxes to define which fields can be updated by
Save icon to save your changes. users with this persona.
The Itemization Fee Management settings on the Personas setting’s Loan tab
impacts these Persona Overwrite settings in the following ways:
• If persona access has not been granted via the Persona Overwrite settings nor
• the Itemization Fee Management settings in the Personas setting, the persona
will not be able to edit the fee description.
• If persona access has only been granted via the Persona Overwrite settings, the
persona cannot edit the description at all since they have not been granted
persona access to the field in the Itemization Fee Management settings in the
Personas setting.
To Allow Personas to Manually Enter Fees: • If the persona has only been granted access to the Fee Description via the
Itemization Fee Management settings in the Personas setting, the persona can
1 Click the Persona Overwrite tab, and select a persona from the list in the left select a value for the fee description from the drop-down list.
panel.
• If the persona has been granted access to the Fee Description via the
2 In the right panel, select the sections of the 2010 forms in which the specified Itemization Fee Management settings in the Personas setting and been granted
persona will be allowed to enter their own fees. access via the Persona Overwrite settings, the persona can choose a value
Additional Itemization Fee Management Persona Options from the drop-down or enter their own description (if the Apply to Itemization
check box in the Itemization Fee Management setting has been selected).
The persona overwrite settings configured here impact the settings configured in
the Itemization Fee Management persona options located on the Loan tab in the Templates Ignore Fee Mgmt Persona/Biz Rules setting in Encompass Admin
Personas setting. In addition, the Templates Ignore Fee Mgmt Persona/Biz Rules Tools
impact these persona overwrite settings as well.
When the Templates Ignore Fee Mgmt Persona/Biz Rules setting in Admin Tools
The Itemization Fee Management section on the Loan tab in the Personas setting is enabled, applicable fee data in public Loan Program, Closing Cost, and Data
can be used to help ensure only authorized users can adjust fees on the 2015 templates will overwrite existing Itemization fee attributes entered by these
Itemization and remain compliant with fee tolerance rules. Here you configure authorized personas when the template is applied to the loan file.
which fee attributes on the 2015 Itemization input form can be modified by
authorized personas. Administrators can authorize selected personas to modify To Enable This Admin Tools Setting:
fee attributes such as fee descriptions and amounts, along with the Borrower can
shop for and Borrower did shop for options. 1 On your Windows task bar, click the Start menu or Start icon, navigate to the
Ellie Mae Encompass program folder, and then click Admin Tools.
Note that personas must now be provided with the required access rights via
2 Double-click Settings Manager.
these settings in order to edit these fee attributes. For example, to enable a
persona to enter or edit a fee in the Borrower column on the 2015 Itemization, the 3 Select Components from the Category list.
administrator must select the Borrower amount only check box for the persona. 4 For the Templates Ignore Fee Mgmt Persona/Biz Rules setting, double-click
an option, and then click Enabled from the Value list.
To Define Persona Access to Itemization Fees:
2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Personas.
3 In the Create a persona section, select a persona.

LO Compensation plan to apply to the originator. When the date entered in this date field is the
same or later then the start date for the plan (and the date occurs before the
The LO Compensation setting enables administrators to configure loan originator plan’s end date if one exists), the plan will be applied to the originator.
compensation plans that specify the criteria applied when calculating For example, let’s say you set the start date of a plan as 06/12/2014 and the
compensation paid to loan originators. Here the administrator can create or edit Trigger Basis field being used is 745 which is the Encompass field ID
any number of plans for loan officers, third party originators (brokers), lenders, assigned to the Application Date field. With these settings in place, the
specific companies or branches, and activate or deactivate a plan. compensation plan will go into effect for the loan when the Application Date
After a plan is created and activated, the administrator assigns it to a loan officer entered for the loan is 06/12/2014 or later.
using the Organization/Users option in Encompass Settings. To assign a plan to NOTE: The date field specified here applies to all compensation plans. If you
a wholesale lender or third party originator (broker), the administrator must use change the Trigger Basis field after compensation plans have already started
the External Company Setup setting. (and have not ended), the new date field will be used for those plans and all
other compensation plans going forward.
To Set Up Default LO Compensation Plan Data:
NOTE: Some users may want to use a different Trigger Basis field for loans in
Use the Default Plan Settings section to set up default values to apply to each new different loan channels. For example, they may use one Trigger Basis field for
LO Compensation plan that is created. loans in their Banked-Retail loan channel and use a different Trigger Basis field
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. for loans in their Banked-Wholesale loan channel. This can be accomplished
by creating and using a custom field. When creating the custom field, a
2 On the left panel, click Tables and Fees, and then click LO Compensation. calculation would be required with logic that explains something to the effect of
3 In the Default Plan Settings section at the bottom of the LO Compensation If “Banked-Retail” = copy this date [date field] to the Trigger Basis field; If
screen, use the Loan Officer/Broker Value drop-down list to indicate to whom “Banked - Wholesale” = copy this date [date field] to the Trigger Basis field.
the compensation plan will apply: loan officers, brokers, or both. 5 Type the minimum number of days in which this plan will be in effect in the
• This setting helps determine which plans will be available to assign to Minimum Term # Days field. Note that this term will not start until the plan is
different originators. For example, let’s say you select Loan Officer here. activated and assigned to a loan originator.
Later on, when you are ready to assign a plan to a loan officer, only plans that • If an administrator tries to assign a different compensation plan to the
have been identified as Loan Officer plans are available to assign. When you originator before the minimum term of days is reached, a warning message
are assigning a plan to a lender or third party originator, this type of plan is displayed that informs the administrator that the start date for the new plan
would not be available to assign to them. occurs prior to the “earliest change date” (i.e., prior to the minimum term of
NOTE: If you select Both for the Loan Officer/Broker Value, the plan is days being reached). The administrator can then continue to assign a
available to assign to loan officers lenders, and third party originators. different plan or cancel the operation.
6 For the Loans to be Exempt option, select the type of loans for which LO
Compensation will never be applied:
HELOC and/or Investment Property.
NOTE: LO compensation plans will never be applied to loans in your
Correspondent loan channel, nor to loans where broker compensation is being
4 In the Trigger Basis field, type the Encompass field ID of the field that paid by the borrower.
Encompass will use to determine which compensation plan to apply. By
default, the Application Date (field ID 745) is used, but you can enter the field 7 To round the compensation amount to the nearest dollar, select To Nearest $
ID for any date field in Encompass. from the Rounding drop-down list.
• When assigning a compensation plan to an originator (later in this process),

8 The Lender Paid/Borrower Paid/Exempt option applies to the LO
you will need to provide a start date for the plan (i.e., the date that the plan Compensation tool itself, not compensation plans. Here you can select an
will go into effect). With that in mind, you also need to identify a Trigger Basis option from the drop-down list to indicate the default value that will display in
field which is the date field Encompass uses to determine the compensation the Borrower / Lender Paid field (field ID LCP.X1 in the Compensation Plan
Details section) every time you open the LO Compensation tool: Lender Paid,

Borrower Paid, or Exempt. The Borrower / Lender Paid field on the LO 8 Use the % Amount field and the associated drop-down list to indicate the
Compensation tool indicates who is paying the broker compensation or if the percentage of the total loan amount the plan will pay or to indicate the
loan is exempt and an LO compensation plan is not being applied. percentage of the base loan amount the plan will pay.
9 Click the Save icon. NOTE: Encompass always calculates LO compensation based on the total
loan amount (field ID 2). If you choose to base your plan on the base loan
To Create an LO Compensation Plan: amount (field ID 1109), the compensation percentage and flat charge
populated to the Broker Compensation line in section 801 of the 2010 or 2015
Itemization will not match the corresponding values in the LO Compensation
2 In the left panel, click Tables and Fees, and then click LO Compensation. tool. Instead, these values are adjusted so that the total compensation amount
3 To create a new compensation plan, click the New icon. being paid to the broker is the same on the 2010 or 2015 Itemization and the
LO Compensation tool. For information about adjusting the values on the
• If you configured Default Plan Settings, the corresponding fields are auto-
Itemization form to match the values in the LO Compensation tool, refer to the
populated accordingly in the LO Comp Plan Details window. You may edit all
2010 Itemization or 2015 Itemization help topic.
these default values except for the Trigger Basis field. To edit the Trigger
Basis field, you must do so in the Default Plan Settings section. 9 Use the Minimum $ and Maximum $ fields to enter the minimum (floor) and
maximum (ceiling) amount the plan will pay.
4 In the LO Comp Plan Details window, type a Name and Description for the
plan. 10 To update the Trigger Basis field, you must update the Default Plan Settings
section.
5 Using the Loan Officer/Broker Value drop-down list, indicate to whom the
compensation plan will apply: loan officers, brokers, or both. NOTE: The Plan Users section lists the loan originators to whom this plan is
assigned. If this is a brand new plan, no loan originators will be listed here.
• This setting helps determine which plans will be available to assign to
Once you assign the plan to a branch, loan officer, or broker, they will be listed
different originators. For example, let us say you select Loan Officer here.
on the appropriate tab.
Later on, when you are ready to assign a plan to a loan officer, only plans that
have been identified as Loan Officer plans will be available to assign. When 11 At the top of the window, select the Active check box to activate the plan.
you are assigning a plan to a lender or third party originator, this type of plan • After you activate the plan, the Activation Date is populated with the current
would not be available to assign to them. date (i.e., “today’s date”). This value cannot be changed once the plan is
NOTE: If you select Both for the Loan Officer/Broker Value, the plan is activated. If you deactivate this plan, and then reactivate it, this date will
available for assignment to loan officers, lenders, and third party originators. remain unchanged and still reflect the original activation date.
6 Type the minimum number of days in which this plan will be in effect in the NOTE: If you want to make changes to this plan after you click the Active
Minimum Term # Days field. check box, you must clear the Active check box and then make your changes.
After you activate a plan and assign it to an originator, you will not be permitted
NOTE: This term will not start until the plan is activated.
to make any changes to the plan.
• If an administrator tries to assign a different compensation plan to the
12 Click Save.
originator before the minimum term of days is reached, a warning message
is displayed that informs the administrator that the start date for the new plan
occurs prior to the “earliest change date” (i.e., prior to the minimum term of
days being reached). The administrator can then continue to assign a
different plan or cancel the operation.
7 To round the compensation amount to the nearest dollar, select To Nearest $
from the Rounding drop-down list.

Chapter 14
Dynamic Data Management

Dynamic Data Management (DDM) is a scenarios-based rules engine that Fee Rules
ensures that the value of any fee or field is automatically populated for various
loan scenarios as defined by the administrator. With DDM, you can control the Use Fee rules to create and manage fee data population to the 2015 Itemization
order of operations and ensure that the right field value is populated for the right input form. You can create fee rules for itemization lines under Section 800, 900,
scenario. This provides more control. 1000, 1100, 1200 and 1300 to populate the fields that are not auto-calculated by
Encompass. Within each fee rule you can create multiple fee scenario conditions
DDM is easier to organize and maintain. It helps overcome the challenges that are unique and define how fee data should be populated when a loan file
associated with maintaining hundreds of closing cost templates, and, provides satisfies a unique fee scenario condition.
better visibility to the administrator on the rules that have been setup. With
Dynamic Data Management, you can create a look-up table for a fee or a field Creating a fee rule includes identifying the fee line and associating it with unique
based on multiple variables. Using a look-up table eliminates complex advanced fee scenarios. You may create unique fee scenarios with conditions that a loan file
code and makes it easier to maintain the rule as changes happen. must satisfy and accordingly define Value Types for how data needs to be
populated for the user-entry fields in 2015 Itemization.
Dynamic Data Management also opens more possibilities for automation. For an
end user, it is about minimizing data entry and having accurate / consistent data
in the loan. With the automation, you reduce origination cost and time.
Field Rules
To access the Dynamic Data Management settings, go to Encompass > Settings
> Dynamic Data Management. Use the Field Rules setting to manage auto-population of data for standard
Encompass fields. Establishing a field rule is done in the same way that you would
For detailed information about using the Fee Rules, Field Rules, Data Tables, and create a fee rule. The difference is that, while a fee rule is driven by a fee line from
Global DDM Settings, view the Dynamic Data Management User Guide. 2015 Itemization, a field rule is driven by a collection of fields that you choose to
include. You can choose the fields you want for a field rule by entering the field
Top Use Cases for Dynamic Data Management IDs, or by importing from a Data template or a .csv file having field and field
The following two categories of use cases are the most recommended for DDM: values. Once you add the list of fields for the field rule, you can create field
• Migrating field triggers that run advanced code, update the value of one or more
scenarios to define unique conditions and what values needs to be populated to
fields, and, copynew value into one or more fields – The triggers that run those fields in the loan file when the loan file satisfies one of the field scenarios.
advanced code give you the best bang for the buck as DDM helps eliminate
advanced code with Data Tables and makes it easier to get visibility & main the
rule. Data Tables
• Moving fees from closing cost templates – The high maintenance lender fees A data table is a user-defined table structure from which you can look-up values
such as Underwriting, or Processing fees are the best ones to target as moving for a field. You can define the table structure to include standard Encompass
those to Dynamic Data Management eliminates the challenge of updating 100’s fields, custom fields, and virtual fields you need to validate in order to populate a
of closing cost templates when those fees change. value for a field in the loan file. Once you define the data table structure by adding
For more details on these use cases, view the Top Use Cases for Dynamic Data the required fields, you can add rows to the table to define the data conditions. For
Management document. each row you add, you have the ability to define what value should be derived as
Output when a loan file satisfies the data row conditions. The derived Output value
will then be assigned to the field that is using the respective data table in the Value
Chapter 14: Dynamic Data Management 183

tab of a fee scenario or field scenario. The data table has 3 Output columns. The
value for these columns is determined by the administrator by using the Global
DDM Settings tool to associate a field with a column.
Creating a data table includes defining the table structure and adding data rows
to the table structure. The table is a set of a dependent fields and an output.
Global DDM Settings

Global DDM Settings includes default and user-defined settings to trigger the user
defined DDM Fee rules and Field rules. Triggering DDM rules would mean the
application of active fee rules and field rules to a loan file. When the fee rules and
field rules are applied to a loan file, Encompass will consider only the scenarios
that are active under each active rule at the time of DDM rule execution.
By default, DDM rules will apply on a Loan Save or Loan Create event. User will
not be able to modify this option.
In addition to loan save, you may choose to trigger DDM rules on a ‘Field Change’
event, specifically when a user modifies a field. You can use the Add icon in the
Fields table to manage your list of impacted fields. Once you add a field, you will
have reference to the number of active and inactive scenarios under which this
field is being referenced.
We strongly recommend thinking through what fields you provide here. The higher
the number of fields you provide here, the bigger the impact on performance for
the user. If the user can wait until the next loan save for the field updates to occur,
then there is no need to add those fields here. However, if there are critical fields
such as Subject Property State (field ID 14) or Loan Program (1401) that you want
updated sooner than the next loan save or other trigger event, then add those
fields here.
Global DDM Settings also enable administrators to define a default global
condition on when DDM rules should stop auto-populating the data in a loan file.
This default stop condition correlates to the advanced code you set up as part of
the condition you configured for a fee rule or field rule. You may modify this default
condition when you define the rule – the rule will be applied based on the stop
condition that exists at the rule level.
More Resources for Dynamic Data Management

View the Dynamic Data Management User Guide for more detailed information
about setting up fee rules, field rules, data tables, and the global DDM settings in
Encompass. You can also review the Top Use Cases for Dynamic Data
Management guide to learn about typical use cases where utilizing the Dynamic
Data Management options provides a more efficient way to automate fee data
rather than templates (especially when the number of templates increase) and a
simpler way to set field values instead of field triggers business rules.
Chapter 14: Dynamic Data Management 184

Chapter 15
Business Rules
Use business rules to create rules that enforce workflow requirements, field 2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Loan Folder
values, and access to loan files. For example, you can specify the documents that Business Rule.
must be received before a milestone can be marked as “finished”. Or you can
define the input forms that are available to a user, based on the loan type.
NOTE: For information on activating and deactivating business rules, refer to
page 204 at the end of this chapter.
Loan Folder Business Rule

Use the Loan Folder Business Rule setting to create and edit business rules that
determine how users can originate and move loans in loan folders.
Origination Rule - The Origination Rule determines the following:
• If a loan can be originated in the specified loan folder. (For example, select No
for a folder in which you place only approved loans. This will remove the ability
to start a loan in this folder.) 3 In the left panel, select a folder from the Loan Folders list.
• If a loan can be duplicated in the specified loan folder. (If Yes, loan files in the 4 Select Yes or No to indicate whether loans can be originated in the folder.
folder can be duplicated.)
• For example, you might select No for a folder in which you place only
• If a loan can be duplicated into the specified loan folder. (If Yes, duplicated loan approved loans.
files can be added to the loan folder.)
5 Select Yes or No to indicate whether loans in the folder can be duplicated.
• If a loan can be imported into the loan folder. (If No, loan files cannot be imported
into the folder.). 6 Select Yes or No to indicate whether duplicated loans can be added to the
folder.
Setup Move Rule - The Setup Move rule defines the requirements which must be
met before loans can be moved to the specified folder. 7 Select Yes or No to indicate whether loans can be imported into the folder.
8 To set a rule to control which loans can be moved into the folder, select the
To Create a Loan Folder Business Rule: Setup Move Rule check box.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. • To permit only loans that have finished a specified milestone, select Finished
Milestone and then select a milestone.
• Or, to permit loans based on the loan status, select Loan Status, and then
select the permitted statuses.
10 Repeat these steps to set business rules for additional folder as required.
11 When finished, click Close.
Chapter 15: Business Rules 185

Loan Action Completion Milestone Completion
Use the Loan Action Completion business rules setting to define the documents, Use the Milestone Completion setting to define and manage business
tasks, fields, and milestones that must be met on the Encompass TPO Connect requirements that must be met before a milestone is finished. You can specify a
website for loan actions to be completed. condition for applying the rule, documents that must be received, and fields that
are required.
You need to create the TPO document containers and TPO tasks in the eFolder
before creating a Loan Action Completion Rule. For more information, refer to For example, you can create a milestone rule that requires that the credit report
“Documents” on page 110 and “Tasks” on page 91. has been received before the File Started milestone can be marked as Finished.
To Create a Loan Action Completion Rule: To Create a Milestone Completion Rule:

1 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Loan Action 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
Completion. 2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Milestone
2 On the Loan Action Completion tool, click the New icon. Completion.
3 In the Create a Rule Name field, type the name of the rule. 3 On the Milestone Requirements screen, click the New icon, and then complete
4 In the Select all Channels this rule applies to section, select the check boxes the fours sections on the Milestone Completion Rule Window.
corresponding to the channels for which the rule will be applied.
5 In the Select a condition for this rule section:
• If you want to apply additional conditions to the rule, select Yes and then from
the Advanced Conditions drop-down list, select TPO Actions.
• Select All of if the rule applies only when all the selections are met.
• Or, select Any of if the criteria selected in section 4 need to be applied
when the conditions in this section are met.
NOTE: Selections in this section are optional.
6 Select one or more of the check boxes corresponding to the TPO loan actions
to which you want to apply the business rule.
7 In the Select required documents, tasks, fields... section:
8 Select a tab, and then click the Add button.
9 Select one or more items in the displayed list, and then click the Add button.
NOTE: If you add conditions to the rule and select specific loan actions in the
Is there a condition for this rule section and then add documents to the
Required Docs tab, a document container will display at the bottom of the
applicable page (i.e., the loan action page) in your Encompass TPO Connect Create a Rule Name
site. Documents that you indicate as required in the business rule must be • Type the name of the rule.
uploaded before the loan action can be completed by the TPO. (The Submit
button on the loan action page will be disabled until the required documents are Select all Channels this rule applies to
uploaded.)
• Select the channels where the rule will be applied.
10 In the Notes/Comments field, type details and helpful notes about the rule as • Select No channel selected to apply the rule to a loan where none of the
needed. channel options are selected.
11 In the Loan Action Completion window, click Save. NOTE: The channel for each loan is specified on the Borrower Summary form.

Is there a condition for this rule 4 When finished, click Add.
• Select No to always apply the rule. 5 Click Save.
• Or select Yes to create a condition for when the rule is applied.
To Select Required Tasks for Each Milestone:
1 Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Purpose.
1 Click the Required Tasks tab and click Add.
2 Select a value for the category, such as Purchase.
2 Select one or more predefined tasks.
expressions to define custom conditions. Click the Lookup icon to select filters 3 Select a milestone from the For Milestone list to indicate the milestone at which
for the Advanced Conditions option. For detailed information, refer to “Using the tasks are required.
the Advanced Condition Editor” on page 203. To create your own code, refer • Select the check box if the task must be completed before the loan file can
to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding for Business Rules” on page 289. move to the next milestone.
Select require documents, fields and tasks for each milestone
5 Back on the Required Tasks tab, if necessary, you can change the milestone
Complete the selections described below, as required for each rule. at which the task is required.
To Select Required Documents for Each Milestone: To Create Advanced Conditions to Validate the Milestone Completion:
1 Click the Required Docs tab and click Add. 1 Click the Advanced Conditions tab and click Add.
2 Select Add from All Documents and click one or more documents. 2 Enter code to specify additional conditions for completion of the milestone. For
• Or click Add from Document Set Templates, and click a template of example, you can create custom code to require the completion of three
documents. additional fields when a loan exceeds a specified amount in a particular state.
3 Select a milestone from the For Milestone list to indicate the milestone at which 3 When finished, click OK.
the documents are required. 4 Back on the Advanced Conditions tab, select the code from the list, and then
4 Select the check box to indicate that attachment of an electronic file is required. select the For Milestone at which the code is applied.
5 Click Add. NOTE: Refer to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding for Business Rules” on page 289
for detailed instructions.
6 Back on the Required Docs tab you can select a document and change the
milestone or attachment requirement.
To Save the Rule:
To Select Required Fields for Each Milestone: 1 Enter helpful information as needed in the Notes/Comment field.
1 Click the Required Fields tab. 2 Click Save.
2 Click Add, and then type the field IDs of the required fields.
To Enable Entry of Field Values Directly on the Worksheet:
• Or click Find on the Required Fields tab, select forms from the left, right-click
• After creating your Milestone Completion business rules, you can select the
on the form to select required fields, select a milestone from the For
Milestone list to indicate the milestone at which the fields are required, and Allow users to complete fields on the Milestone worksheet check box in the
then click OK.To select all the fields on a form, click Select All. If needed, Required Fields Rule Setting section to enable loan team members to enter
you can then right-click a field to cancel the selection. required field values directly on the milestone worksheet.
3 Select a milestone from the For Milestone list to indicate the milestone at which NOTE: By default, this check box is not selected. When not selected, loan
the fields are required. team members must click the Go to Fields button on the milestone worksheet
and then enter the field values on the appropriate form or tool in the loan file.
NOTE: To change this milestone later, return to the Required Fields tab, select
a field, and then double-click the milestone in the For Milestone column. Select
the new milestone from the list.

Field Data Entry Is there a condition for this rule
• Select No to always apply the rule.
Use the Field Data Entry setting to define and manage rules that control the
values entered into the fields on input forms. You can specify a condition for • Or select Yes to create a condition for when the rule is applied.
applying 1 Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Purpose.
the rule, required values for the field, and pre-required fields that must be
completed first. For example, you can specify that the borrower's credit score falls 2 Select a value for the category, such as Purchase.
within a specified range for a specified loan program. NOTE: If you select the Advanced Conditions option, you can create
expressions to define custom conditions. Click the Lookup icon to select filters
NOTE: You can also create rules that define the fields that must be completed
for the Advanced Conditions option. For detailed instructions refer to “Using
before a form button is activated. For example, you can specify the fields required
the Advanced Condition Editor” on page 203 at the end of this chapter. To
prior to requesting a lock.
create your own code, refer to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding for Business
To Create a Field Rule: Rules” on page 289.
Add and Apply Field-specific Rules
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Field Data Entry.
1 Click Add.
3 On the Field Data Entry screen, click the New icon.
Create a rule name 2 On the Field Rule window, type the Field ID that the Value and Pre-Required
Fields rules will apply to.
• Type the name of the rule.
• Or, click Find to select the field from an input form.
Select all Channels this rule applies to • Select a form from the list on the left, right-click to select the field the rule will
apply to, and then click OK.
• Select No channel selected to apply the rule to a loan where none of the
channel options are selected
NOTE: The channel for each loan is specified on the Borrower Summary form.

3 Click the Value Rule tab, and select a Rule Type. Field Triggers
• Range - Type values for the Minimum and/or Maximum allowed values.
Use the Field Triggers setting to create and manage rules that execute custom
• Dropdown List - Click New, type the Dropdown Option, and then click OK. actions when the value in a field is changed. You can specify a condition for
Add additional dropdown options as needed. applying the rule, the field ID and criterion for triggering the rule, and the action to
• Editable Dropdown List - Click New, type the Dropdown Option, and then take when the criterion is met.
click OK. Add additional dropdown options as needed. You can also export Field Trigger business rules, one at a time, from an
• Advanced Coding - (Avaliable only if the rule is defined as having no Encompass environment, save them onto your computer and then import the
conditions.) Enter code to define the valid field values. Refer to Appendix C, business rule into another Encompass environment. All Field Trigger business
“Advanced Coding for Business Rules” on page 289 for detailed instructions. rules can be exported and then imported, irrespective of their Status.
4 Click the Pre-Required Fields tab.
To Create a Trigger:
• Click Add, type the field IDs of the fields that must be completed, and then
click Add.
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Field Triggers.
• Or click Find, select a form from the list on the left, right-click to select
pre-required fields, and then click OK. 3 On the Field Triggers screen, click the New icon.
NOTE: To select all fields on a form, click Select All. If needed, you can then
right-click fields that you want to deselect.
To Add and Apply Button Rules:

1 On the Field Rule window, click Add.
2 On the next Field Rule window, click Find.
3 Select a form from the list on the left, right-click to select the button the rule will
apply to, and then click OK.
4 Click the Pre-Required Fields tab.
click Add.
• Or click Find, select a form from the list on the left, right-click to select
pre-required fields, and then click OK.
right-click a field to cancel the selection.
5 When finished, click OK. Create a Trigger Name
• Type the name of the trigger.
To Save the Rule:
1 Enter helpful information as needed in the Notes/Comment field. Select all Channels this rule applies to
2 Click Save. • Select the channels where the rule will be applied.
channel options are selected

Is there a condition for this trigger If You Select Field Value Modified as the Activation Type:
1 Select No to always apply the rule. 1 Enter the field ID for the field associated with the field event. Or click Find,
2 Or, select Yes to create a condition for when the rule is applied. select a form from the left, right-click to select a field, and then click Add.
• Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Purpose. 2 Select the Criterion that will activate the rule, such as Any change in field
value. Depending on the selection, you may be asked to enter additional
• Select a value for the category, such as Purchase.
information as follows:
• If you select Current Role for the category, you can configure the rule to
• When field is set to a specific value - Enter the value in the Value field.
only be applied when a specific role is assigned to finish a specific
milestone. After selecting Current Role, click the Find (magnifying glass), • When field is set in a range of values - Enter the lower and upper limits of
and then select the specific role. Then select the specific milestone from the range in the Range fields (available for numeric fields only).
the drop-down list. • When field is set to an item from a list of values - Create a list of the values
NOTE: If you select the Advanced Conditions option, you can create that will be checked against the value entered in the field. Click Add and
expressions to define custom conditions. Click the Find icon to select filters for then type the value over <New Value> on the list. Repeat the process to
the Advanced Conditions option. For detailed instructions, refer to “Using the add more values to the list.
Advanced Condition Editor” on page 203. To create your own code, refer to If You Select Milestone Completed as the Activation Type
Appendix C, “Advanced Coding for Business Rules” on page 289.
• Select the milestone that will trigger the rule when it is completed.
To Add and Apply Field Events:
3 In the Action section of the window, select the action that will be triggered when
1 Click Add.
the defined criterion is met.
Update the Value of One or More Fields

1 In the Action section, click Add.
2 In the Assign To Field field, enter the field ID of the field that will be
updated.
3 In the Value field, enter the value that will be assigned to the field ID.
• If you select the Evaluate expression as a custom calculation check
box, you can enter a calculation that will be used to determine the assigned
value. Refer to Appendix B, “Loan Custom Field Calculations” for detailed
information on creating custom calculations.
4 Click OK. Repeat to add additional fields to update.
Copy New Value Into One or More Fields

2 In the Copy To Field list, type a field ID over <Enter Field ID>. The value
associated with the Trigger Field ID, will be copied to this field.
2 In the Activation section of the window, select the Activation Type. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add additional fields where the value from the
• Based on the activation type you select, you will be asked to enter additional Trigger Field will be copied.
information as described below.
Mark One or More Tasks as Completed
• If you select Field value modified, or Milestone completed, you will be asked
to enter additional information as follows: • Select the tasks that will be marked as completed when the event is
triggered.

Send an Email to One or More Users 3 On the Automated Conditions screen, click the New icon.
2 Enter the Subject and Body of the email. You can include loan data by
specifying a field ID within square brackets.
3 Select the check box to include the email information in the Loan Log.
4 Click the plus (+) buttons to select the Users and Roles that will receive the
message.
5 Click OK.
Run Advanced Code

1 In the Advanced Code area, enter the code that will be run when then action
is triggered. Refer to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding for Business Rules”
for detailed instructions.
2 Click OK.
Apply Loan Template

1 In the Action section, select Apply loan template from the Action Type list.
2 Click the Find icon next to the Select Loan Template field, and then click Create a Rule Name
Select.
• Type the name of the Automated Conditions rule.
4 When finished adding event details, click OK.

Select all Channels this rule applies to
To Save the Rule: • Select the channels where the rule will be applied.
1 Enter helpful information as needed in the Notes/Comment field. • Select No channel selected to apply the rule to a loan where no channel has
been selected
2 Click Save.
Automated Conditions Select a condition for this rule

Use the Automated Conditions setting to create and manage rules that
automatically populate conditions to the loan file when the Add Automated • Or select Yes to create a condition for when the rule is applied.
Conditions option is selected in the eFolder. Here you can create sets of one or 1 Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Type.
more preliminary, underwriting, and post-closing conditions. When an authorized
user selects the Add Automated Conditions option in eFolder, they can then add 2 Select a value for the category, such as USDA RHS.
these conditions to the loan. NOTE: If you select the Advanced Conditions option, you can create
To Create an Automated Condition Rule: for the Advanced Conditions option or, for detailed instructions on how to
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. create your own code, refer to “Using the Advanced Condition Editor” on
page 203. To create your own code, refer to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Automated Conditions. for Business Rules” on page 289.

Select filters for the Advanced Conditions option: To Save the Rule:
1 Select Advanced Conditions as the category condition, and then click the 1 Enter helpful information as needed in the Notes/Comment field.
Lookup icon on the right. 2 Click Save.
2 Click the New icon to add a new filter.
NOTE: If you have existing filters, the New icon places the new filter at the
bottom of the list. Select an existing filter and then click the Insert button to Persona Access to Fields
insert a new filter above the selected filter.
Use the Persona Access to Fields setting to manage access to fields and buttons
3 On the Add/Edit Search Filter window: on input forms by persona. You can specify a condition for applying the rule and
different access for each persona and condition.
• Or, click the Lookup icon, select a field from the list, and click OK. You can also export Persona Access to Fields business rules, one at a time, from
an Encompass environment, save them onto your computer and then import the
• Or, click the Lookup icon, type one or more characters in the Find field and
business rule into another Encompass environment. All Persona Access to Fields
then click Find. The first occurrence of the characters in any column are business rules can be exported and then imported, irrespective of their Status.
found. Continue clicking Find to view additional occurrences. Select a field
from the list, and click OK.
To Create a Field Access Rule:
4 Select an Operator, enter (or select) a Value, and then click OK. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
• The Operator and Value define how the field will be used. For example: Field
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Persona Access
ID= 1109 (Loan Amount), Operator = Greater than, Value = 250000. to Fields.
5 Click OK. 3 On the Persona Access to Fields screen, click the New icon.
6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add more filters.
7 To use parentheses to control the order in which multiple filters are evaluated,
click Parentheses, select the filters to group, click the New icon, and click OK.
8 Use the AND/OR button to determine how search filters are used together.
Add and activate Automated Conditions:

Select the conditions that will be added to the loan when a user selects the Add
Automated Conditions option in the eFolder.
1 Click Add.
2 On the Select Condition window, select the condition type from the drop-down
list: Preliminary, Underwriting or Post-Closing.
3 Select the conditions to add to the loan, and then click Add.
4 Repeat these three steps to add additional condition types.
5 Click Save.
6 To activate this business rule, select the rule in the Automated Conditions list,
and then click Activate.
• The status is changed to Active.
• The rule is activated for all current, imported, and new loans.

Create a Rule Name • Or, click the Find icon, type one or more characters in the Find field and then
click Find. The first occurrence of the characters in any column are found.
Continue clicking Find to view additional occurrences. Select a field from the
list, and click OK.
ID= 1109 (Loan Amount), Operator = Greater than, Value = 250000.
channel options are selected.
5 Click OK.
Select a condition for this rule 7 To use parentheses to control the order in which multiple filters are evaluated,
1 Select No to always apply the rule. click Parentheses, select the filters to group, click the New icon, and click OK.
2 Or select Yes to create a condition for when the rule is applied. 8 Use the AND/OR button to determine how search filters are used together.
• Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Purpose. 9 When finished, click OK.
To Define Persona Field Access for the Condition:
• If you select Current Role for the category, you can configure the rule
1 Click Add.
to only be applied when a specific role is assigned to finish a specific
milestone. After selecting Current Role, click the Find icon (magnifying • Type the field IDs of the fields to which you will assign persona access, and
glass), select the specific role, and then select the specific milestone then click Add.
from the drop-down list. 2 Or click Find
NOTE: If you select the Advanced Conditions option, you can create • Select forms from the list on the left, right-click to select fields, and then click
expressions to define custom conditions. Click the Find icon to select filters for OK.
the Advanced Conditions option. To use the editor, refer to “Using the
NOTE: To select all the fields on a form, click Select All. If needed, you can
Advanced Condition Editor” on page 203 at the end of this chapter. To create
then right-click field that you want to clear.
your own code, refer to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding for Business Rules” on
page 289. 3 Back on the Field Access Rule window, select a field from the Add a Field list.
4 In the Assign Right list, select an access option for each persona.
To Select Filters for the Advanced Conditions Option:
• View Only / Disabled - The value in the field can be viewed, but not edited.
1 Select Advanced Conditions as the category condition, and then click the The field appears dimmed.
Find icon on the right.
• Edit / Enabled - The value in the field can be edited.
• Hide - The value in the field is hidden. An asterisk displays in the field, and
NOTE: If you have existing filters, the New icon places the new filter at the the field appears dimmed.
bottom of the list. Select an existing filter and then click the Insert button to
insert a new filter above the selected filter. • Does Not Apply - The rule is ignored and has no impact on the persona's
access rights.
3 On the Add/Edit Search Filter window:
5 Click Save.
• Or, click the Find icon, select a field from the list, and click OK.

To Add and Apply Button Access Rules: • By selecting Hide, the FNMA 3.2 file option is not displayed in the Source
1 On the Field Access Rule window, click Find. drop-down list when the user clicks the Import button on the Manage
Borrowers screen.
2 Select a form from the list on the left, right-click to select the button the rule will
apply to, and then click OK. • Do not select the View Only/Disabled, Edit/Enabled, or Does Not Apply
options. They have no impact on the import FNMA 3.2 file option.
NOTE: Some buttons are not available to select in this view. If the button you
are looking for does not display on the selected form in this view you must use 6 Click Save.
a different method to apply a business rule to it. Follow the steps in the sections
above to create and apply a field access rule for the button. To Remove the Persona’s Ability to Import FNMA 3.x Files From the
Pipeline:
3 Back on the Field Access Rule window, select the button from the Add a
Field list. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
4 In the Assign Right list, select an access option for each persona. 2 On the left panel, click Company/User Setup, and then click Personas.
• View Only / Disabled - The button is dimmed. 3 In the left panel, select a persona.
• Edit / Enabled - The button can be clicked. 4 Click the Pipeline tab.
• Hide - The button is hidden. 5 In the Pipeline Tasks section, click the blue Import Loans link.
• Does Not Apply - The rule is ignored and has no impact on the persona's 6 Clear the Fannie Mae 3.x check box, and then click OK.
access rights. 7 Click the Save icon.
5 Click Save.
Configure persona access to buttons on the Secondary Registration and
Access to the Import FNMA 3.2 File Option on the Manage Borrowers Screen MIP/PMI Calculation screen
Users authorized to access the Manage Borrowers screen in Encompass can use 1 On the Field Access Rule window, click Find.
the Import button on the screen to import an FNMA 3.2 file, another loan file, or 2 In the Select a Form section on the left, click Buttons for Business Rule.
contacts to Encompass. Administrators can use the Persona Access to Fields
3 Right-click a button, and then click OK.
business rule to hide the FNMA 3.2 file option from specific personas and prevent
them from using this Import button to import FNMA 3.2 files. 4 In the Assign right list, select an access option for each persona, and then click
Save.
NOTE: In order for this business rule to work effectively, you must also use the
Personas setting to remove the persona’s ability to import FNMA 3.x files from the
To Save the Rule:
Pipeline. Instructions to do this are provided below.
1 Enter helpful information as needed in the Notes/Comment field.
To Configure Access:
2 Click Save.
1 On the Field Access Rule window, click Add.
2 Type the field ID for the Import button, and then click Add. (The field ID for the
Import button is Button_FMBorImport.)
3 Back on the Field Access Rule screen, select Button_FMBorImport in the
Add a Field list.
4 In the Assign Right section, locate the persona, and then double-click the
option in the Rights list.
5 Select the Hide option from the drop-down list.

Persona Access to Loans Select a condition for this rule
Use the Persona Access to Loans screen to manage access to loan files by
persona.You can specify a condition for applying the rule and different access for • Or select Yes to create a condition for when the rule is applied.
each persona and condition. Access can be View Only, Edit All, or Edit Partial. The 1 Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Purpose.
Edit Partial option allows you to grant access to areas of the loan file (such as the
Lock Request tool) as well as specific fields on loan forms. 2 Select a value for the category, such as Purchase.
To Create a Loan Access Rule: expressions to define custom conditions. Click the Lookup icon to select filters
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. for the Advanced Conditions option or, for detailed instructions on how to
create your own code, refer to “Using the Advanced Condition Editor” on
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Persona Access
page 203. To create your own code, refer to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding
to Loans.
for Business Rules” on page 289.
3 On the Persona Access to Loans window, click the New icon.
Define loan file access for each persona
1 In the Loan File Access list, select an access option for each persona.
• View Only -All areas of the loan file can be viewed, but not edited.
• Edit - All areas of the loan file can be viewed and edited.
• Custom - Specific areas of the loan that can be viewed and edited.
• Does Not Apply - The Rule does not apply. The default persona access
rules apply.
Create a Rule Name


• Select No channel selected to apply the rule to a loan where no channel has
been selected

2 If you select Custom for a persona, and then click Select, an Edit Custom • Retain current rights to Unprotected Documents - When selected, the
Access window opens to allow you to select the specific areas of the loan that persona retains the rights currently selected in the Personas setting (on the
can be viewed and edited. Select the appropriate option from a drop-down list Unprotected Documents section of the eFolder tab). When cleared, the
to enable editing for a feature. persona has none of the rights defined in the Unprotected Documents
section.
• Retain current rights to Protected Documents - When selected, the
persona retains the rights currently selected in the Personas setting (on the
Protected Documents section of the eFolder tab). When cleared, the
persona has none of the rights defined in the Protected Documents
section.
• Retain current rights to Create/Duplicate Documents - When selected,
the persona retains the rights currently selected in the Personas setting (in
the Create/Duplicate check box in the General section of the eFolder tab).
When cleared, the persona does not have the right to create or duplicate
documents in the eFolder.
• Retain current rights to Order eDisclosures - When selected, the
persona retains the rights currently selected in the Personas setting (for
the eDisclosure options on the General section of the eFolder tab). When
cleared, the persona does not have the right to send or receive
eDisclosures, add or move eDisclosure documents, or clear eDisclosure
document selections.
• Hide - The feature will not be visible to the persona.
• Retain current rights to Request/Retrieve Borrower Documents -
• View Only - The feature can be viewed, but not edited. When selected, the persona retains the rights currently selected in the
• Edit or Full Edit - The feature can be viewed and edited. Personas setting (in the General section on the eFolder tab) to Request
Borrower Documents and Retrieve Borrower Documents.
• Partial Edit - This option is available for the eFolder Documents Tab option
only. When selected, additional options that control access to features on the • When retrieving, put files into:
eFolder Documents tab display on the Edit Custom Access window: • Document and mark current - Retrieved files are attached to the
document and the Current Version check box is selected for the file in
the Files section of the Document Details window.
• Document and not mark current - Retrieved files are attached to the
document and the Current Version check box is not selected for the
file in the Files section of the Document Details window.
• Unassigned Files - Retrieved files are attached to the Unassigned
Files section of the File Manager.
• Retain current right to Request/Retrieve from Ellie Mae Network
Service - When selected, the persona retains the rights currently selected
in the Personas setting (in the General section on the eFolder tab) to
request and retrieve services from the eFolder via the Ellie Mae Network.
• Retain current rights to Unassigned Files - When selected, the persona
• When retrieving, put files into:
retains the rights currently selected in the Personas setting (on the
Unassigned Files section of the eFolder tab). When cleared, the persona • Document and mark current - Retrieved files are attached to the
has none of the rights defined in the Unassigned Files section. document and the Current Version check box is selected for the file in
the Files section of the Document Details window.

• Document and not mark current - Retrieved files are attached to the • To find fields, click the Lookup icon, select forms from the list, right-click to
document and the Current Version check box is not selected for the select fields, and then click OK.
file in the Files section of the Document Details window.
• Unassigned Files - Retrieved files are attached to the Unassigned
Files section of the File Manager.
NOTE:When the Request/Retrieve Borrower Documents or the
Request/Retrieve from Ellie Mae Services option is selected, a persona
can request and retrieve documents and services without having Browse
and Attach permissions or permission to work with Protected or
Unprotected documents.
3 To specify the fields that the persona can access, in the Fields with Edit Access
section:
• To add fields, click the Add icon, enter up to 10 Field IDs, and then click Add. • To select all the fields on a form, click Select All. If needed, you can then
right-click fields that you no longer want selected.
• To remove a field, select the field on the fields with Edit Access list, and then
4 When finished, click OK on the Edit Custom Access window.
To Save the Rule:

2 Click Save.
Conflicts with Access Rules

Access rights configured in a Persona Access to Loans business rules can
sometimes conflict with rights granted in the Personas setting or in another
Persona Access to Loans business rule.
Loan Access Rights vs Personas Setting

When a persona is given Full Edit, Partial Edit, or View Only rights for the eFolder
Documents tab, the persona will retain or lose some of the rights that are currently
configured in the Personas setting as described below:
Full Edit
• The persona retains all rights currently configured in the Personas setting.

Partial Edit For example, a user is assigned the Loan Opener persona, which is assigned
different rights (View Only and Edit) in two different business rules. The user is
• The persona retains the View All Annotations, Send Files, Send Files to
given View Only rights, the most restrictive right for any of the business rules.
Lender, and Archive Documents rights that are currently configured in the
Personas setting. Multiple Personas and Multiple Business Rules
• The persona’s ability to perform other functions related to files, documents, When multiple business rules apply and a user has multiple personas,
eDisclosures, ordering services, and requesting and retrieving borrower determining the access rights is slightly more complex. First, identify the access
documents will depend on the selections made when the Partial Edit options are rights that each persona has across all the business rules. Each persona will have
configured. the most restrictive right allowed under any of rule. Then compare the results for
View Only each of the personas. The user will have the greatest available right allowed to
either of the personas.
• The persona retains the right to View All Annotations.
For example: A user is assigned to the Loan Opener and Loan Processor
• Aside from viewing rights, the persona loses the right to perform any action
personas, and two business rules apply to the loan file.
related to files, documents, conditions, eDisclosures, or services.
1 Identify the most restrictive access right for each persona across all the rules.
Multiple Persona or Business Rules • The Loan Opener has Edit rights in rule 1 and View Only rights in rule 2, so
When a user has multiple personas or when multiple business rules apply to a the Loan Opener is given View Only rights, the most restrictive right.
loan, Encompass resolves access right conflicts by providing the greatest • The Loan Processor has Edit rights in both rules, so the Loan Processor is
available right to a user under some conditions, and the most restrictive right given Edit rights, the most restrictive right.
under other conditions. The access rights are listed below in descending order,
2 Compare the rights for each persona. The user will have the greatest available
with the greatest available rights at the top and the most restrictive rights at the
right for any of the personas.
bottom:
• The Loan Opener has View Only rights and the Loan Processor has Edit
• Edit or Full Edit
rights, so the user is given Edit rights, the greatest available right.
• Partial Edit
Partial Rights
• View Only
If the Custom option is selected, the Partial Edit option for the eFolder Documents
• Hide Tab contains an additional layer of access options that will need to be resolved
NOTE: Full Edit and Partial Edit are available only when the Custom access when two personas or two business rules both have Partial Edit options selected
option is selected. for the eFolder Documents tab. In these situations, the same logic used with other
access rules is extended to the selections made for the Partial Edit options.
Multiple Personas
• If a user has two personas with different Partial Edit options selected, the user
When a user has multiple personas, the user is given the greatest available right will have the greatest available rights in the Partial Edit options for each of the
(the highest level of access available for any of the personas assigned to the personas. In this case, the user will be given all the rights selected for all the
user). personas assigned
For example, if a user has a Loan Opener persona with View Only rights and a • If multiple business rules apply, the user has only the most restrictive rights in
Loan Processor persona with Edit rights, the user is given Edit rights, the greatest the Partial Edit options for any of the business rules. In this case, the user will
available right for any of the user's personas. be given only options that are selected in both business rules.
Multiple Business Rules • The options to Retain current rights to Request/Retrieve Borrower Documents
When multiple Persona Access to Loans business rules apply at the same time, and Retain current rights to Request/Retrieve from Ellie Mae Network Services
the user is given the most restrictive right (lowest level of access allowed under also have drop-down lists with the greatest available right at the top and the
any of the rules that apply). most restrictive at the bottom. If multiple personas or rules have different drop-

down options selected for a Request/Retrieve option, the greatest available right 2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click
is given when comparing personas and the most restrictive right is applied when Role Access to Documents.
comparing business rules.
Role Access to Documents

Use the Role Access to Documents setting to control access to loan documents
in the eFolder. You can define the default access by role, and also specify those
roles who's access to documents is protected. When access to a document is
protected for a specific role, access cannot be revoked for the role, and the
document cannot be deleted by a team member assigned to that role.
NOTE: To grant access to a specific set of users (for example, a processing
department), create a user group containing the users. Then create a role that
includes the user group. When you grant access to the role, all members of the
group will have access to the document.
To Define Default Access:

Use the Default Access section to set up default document access for each role, based
on the role that adds the document to the eFolder. The Others group contains users
who are not assigned to a role. These defaults can be overridden in a specific loan by
selecting a document in the eFolder and then clicking the Access button (unless the
document is protected).
3 In the Default Access section, select a role from the list on the left.
4 In the list on the right, select the roles that can access documents that are
added by the role selected on the left.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each role for which you want to grant access.
6 Select the check box at the bottom of the section to apply the user's default
role-level access rights to product and pricing secondary buy side and
secondary sell side documents even if the user does not have an existing role
in the loan file.

To Define Protected Access: Select all Channels this rule applies to
When a role is selected in the Protected Documents section, access to documents • Select the channels where the rule will be applied.
is Protected for that role. Once access to a document is granted to a protected • Select No channel selected to apply the rule to a loan where none of the
role, (for example an Underwriter) access cannot be revoked by other loan team channel options are been selected.
members and the document cannot be deleted.
1 In the Protected Documents section, select one or more roles who's
documents are protected. Is there a condition for this rule
2 Click the Save icon. 1 Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Purpose.
2 Select a value for the category, such as Purchase.
Input Form List • If you select Current Role for the category, you can configure the rule to only
be applied when a specific role is assigned to finish a specific milestone. After
Use the Input Form List setting to define the input forms to make available for a selecting Current Role, click the Lookup icon (magnifying glass), select the
loan when the specified condition is met. For example, you can create input form specific role, and then select the specific milestone from the drop-down list.
rules based on the type of loan, such as FHA. In this case, only forms required for
NOTE: If you select the Advanced Conditions option, you can write
processing an FHA loan would be made available to your users.
for the Advanced Conditions option or, for detailed instructions on how to
To Create an Input Form List Rule:
create your own code, refer to “Using the Advanced Condition Editor” on
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. page 203. To create your own code, refer to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Input Form List. for Business Rules” on page 289.
3 On the Input Form List screen, click the New icon.
To Select the Input Forms to Add to the Forms Tab:
1 Click Add to open the Add Input Forms window.
• Click All Input Forms, select one or more forms, and then click Add.
• Or, click Input Form Set Templates, select a template, select one or more
forms, and then click Add.
2 Back on the Input Form Rule window, click Save.
To Save the Rule:

2 Click Save.
Loan Form Printing

Use the Loan Form Printing setting to create rules that restrict the printing of forms
until required fields are completed or other custom rules are satisfied. If you
specify fields that must be completed prior to printing, users will receive a
message listing the required fields. For example, you can create a rule that
Create a Rule Name
prevents the Borrower Summary from being printed until the Credit Score for
• Type the name of the rule. Decision Making field has been completed.

You can also create your own advanced coding rules that must be satisfied before Is there a condition for this rule
a form can be printed. In this case, users receive a message explaining why the 1 Select No to always apply the rule.
form cannot be printed.
2 Or select Yes to create a condition for when the rule is applied.
To Create a Loan Form Printing Rule: • Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Purpose.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. • Select a value for the category, such as Purchase.
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Loan Form Printing. • If you select Current Role for the category, you can configure the rule to
3 On the Loan Form Printing screen, click the New icon. only be applied when a specific role is assigned to finish a specific
milestone. After selecting Current Role, click the Lookup icon
(magnifying glass), select the specific role, and then select the specific
milestone from the drop-down list.
expressions to define custom conditions. Click the Lookup icon to use the
Advanced Condition Editor to create these expressions. For detailed
instructions on how to create your own code, refer to “Using the Advanced
Condition Editor” on page 203 and Appendix C, “Advanced Coding for
Business Rules” on page 289.
To Add and Apply Print Suppression Rules:

1 Click Add.
Create a Rule Name


• Select No channel selected to apply the rule to a loan where no channel has
been selected.
2 On the Print Form Suppression Rule window, click Find.

3 Click the Standard Forms or Custom Forms tab, select the folder containing
the form for which you want to create a rule, select the form, and click Select.

4 Click the Required Fields tab. 3 On the Print Auto Selection screen, click the New icon.
click Add.
• Or, click Find, select forms from the list on the left, right-click to select the pre-
required fields, and then click OK.
right-click a field to cancel a selection.
5 Or, click the Advance Coding tab to write your own code to define the print
suppression rule. For detailed instructions on how to create your own code,
refer to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding for Business Rules” on page 289.
6 Select the check box to allow blank forms to be printed, even if the required
fields have not been completed.
To Save the Rule:

2 Click Save.
Print Auto Selection

Use the Print Auto Selection setting to determine the default set of forms that are
automatically selected in the print window for loans that have specified values in
selected fields. For example, you can create a rule that adds forms to the default
print list when a subject properties is located in a specific county. Create a Rule Name:
Print auto selection rules can be applied to individual forms or form groups. When • Type the name of the rule.
you create a rule for a form group, the rule will apply to any form that is added to
the group without having to update the rule. Select all Channels this rule applies to
NOTE: When you open the Print window from a form in a loan file, the associated • Select the channels where the rule will be applied.
output form is automatically added to the Selected Forms list. You can disable the • Select No channel selected to apply the rule to a loan where no channel has
automatic select using the Settings Manager in the Encompass Admin Tools. been selected.
NOTE: The channel for each loan is specified on the borrower summary form.
To Create a Print Auto Selection Rule:
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. Is there a condition for this rule
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Print Auto Selection. 1 Select No to always apply the rule.
2 Or select Yes to create a condition for when the rule is applied.
• Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Purpose.

•If you select Current Role for the category, you can configure the rule to only 2 In the Condition section, define the condition that must be met to trigger the
be applied when a specific role is assigned to finish a specific milestone. selection of forms listed in the Action section below.
After selecting Current Role, click the Lookup icon (magnifying glass), • Type a Field ID, or click Find, select forms from the list on the left, right-click
select the specific role, and then select the specific milestone from the to select a field, and then click OK.
drop-down list.
• Select a option to define the field parameters.
expressions to define custom conditions. Click the Lookup icon to select filters • Define the field values that must be met to satisfy the condition and trigger
for the Advanced Conditions option or, for detailed instructions on how to the action.
create your own code, refer to “Using the Advanced Condition Editor” on NOTE: The required values are dependent upon your selection from the list
page 203. To create your own code, refer to Appendix C, “Advanced Coding above. For example, if you selected Value is Between, you will be asked to
for Business Rules” on page 289. enter two values to define a range of values.
3 In the Action section, select the forms (or form groups) that will be selected for
To Create a Rule to Select Print Forms:
printing if the condition is met.
1 Click Add.
• Click Add Forms, select forms from the list on the left, click the Add > button
to move them to the Selected Forms list, and then click Add.
• Click Add Form Groups, select a form group, and then click OK.
• Back on the Add/Edit Field Event window, select forms, and then click
Remove Forms if needed.
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 above to add additional condition statements to the
rule.
To Save the Rule:

2 Click Save.
Using the Advanced Condition Editor

If you define a business rule by selecting the Advanced Conditions option as the
condition, use the Advanced Condition Editor to create the code.

1 Select Advanced Conditions as the category condition, and then click the Activating and Deactivating Business Rules
Lookup icon on the right.
Once you create rules, you will control the timing of when they are activated and,
when necessary, deactivated.
To Activate and Deactivate a Business Rule:

1 On the list of business rules, select a rule, and then click Activate.
• The status is changed to Active.
• The rule is activated for all current, imported, and new loans.
• When a change is made to a value in a loan file that impacts a rule, the rule
will be tested and the user notified of any discrepancies.
2 To deactivate a business rule, select a rule, and then click Deactivate.

NOTE: If you have existing filters, the New icon places the new filter at the
bottom of the list. Select an existing filter and then click the Insert button to
insert a new filter above the selected filter.
3 On the Add/Edit Search Filter window:
• Or, click the Lookup icon, select a field from the list, and click OK.
• Or, click the Lookup icon, type one or more characters in the Find field and
then click Find. The first occurrence of the characters in any column is found.
Continue clicking Find to view additional occurrences. Select a field from the
list, and click OK.
ID= 1109 (Loan Amount), Operator = Greater than, Value = 250000.
5 Click OK.
7 To use parentheses to control the order in which multiple filters are evaluated,
click Parentheses, select the filters to group, click the New icon, and click OK.
8 Use the AND/OR button to determine how search filters are used together.

Appraisal Order Management Appraisal Ordering Options Tab
Use the Appraisal Order Management setting to configure the appraisal ordering Use the Appraisal Ordering Options tab to select the ordering option associated
process for different types of loans. The setting allows administrators to select a with each loan type, and to set up the personas that can use this option to order
loan type and then select the configuration options used for that loan type. appraisals. Be sure to set up the personas and ordering options for each loan type
as needed.
For example, the ordering process can be configured so that appraisal requests
for conventional loans are submitted using an automated ordering process, while
requests for FHA loans can be sent to an internal order desk for submittal.
Five configuration options are available:
• No administrative controls – Uses the default Encompass settings for
ordering appraisals. Users order appraisals based on how individual users have
set up the selections for their Ellie Mae Network.
• Approved appraisers only – Allows users to select from a list of appraisers or
AMCs who are set up by the administrator for specific loan types and property
locations. When an order is placed, the user selects an appraiser from the list of
approved providers and submits the order to the appraiser.
• Automated ordering - Random – Defines rules for selecting appraisers from a
list set up by the administrator for specific loan types and property locations.
When an order is submitted, users do not see a list of providers and have no
input into appraiser selection. The order is sent to an appraiser that is selected
randomly from the list of approved appraisers available for the property ZIP
Code and loan type. This option cannot be used with AMCs that are integrated
into the Ellie Mae Network.
• Automated ordering - Rotating – This setting is the same as Random
Automated Ordering described above, except the appraisers are selected from To Select the Ordering Options for a Loan Type:
the list in rotating order. After orders have been placed with all the appraisers
1 On the Appraisal Ordering Options tab, select a loan type from the list.
for that ZIP Code and loan type, the selection process starts at the beginning of
the list again. 2 Select an ordering option from the list.
• Internal order desk – Defines rules for submitting orders through an internal 3 To save your changes, click the Save icon.
order desk. When a user requests an order, they do not see a list of providers. NOTE: For the No administrative controls option, no further configuration is
The order is sent to an authorized internal order desk user who is then required. Use the instructions below to configure the other appraisal ordering
responsible for submitting the order to an approved appraiser or AMC by options.
selecting from a list that is set up by the administrator. The internal order desk
user is responsible for all communication with the appraiser or AMC and for To Configure Persona Settings:
keeping the user who requested the order updated on the appraisal order's
status. On the Appraisal Ordering Options tab, in the personas section, select the
appropriate check boxes. The permissions set up here determine the options and
To Access the Appraisal Order Management Setting: actions the persona has access to when ordering an appraisal.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. • Enable Ordering - Give a persona permission to order an appraisal.
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Appraisal Order • Allow COD - Allow the persona to select COD from the Paid By drop-down list
Management. when ordering appraisal.
3 On the Appraisal Order Management screen, click Change Settings.k

• Allow Invoice - Allow the persona to select Invoice from the Paid By drop-down in Encompass Settings). Although the Allow Comments for Accepted
list when ordering appraisal. Orders option is disabled for all personas, the internal order desk user is
• Send Purchase Price - Include the purchase price of the subject property when granted this permission. This allows them to send comments and attachments
the order is submitted to the appraiser. to the appraiser after the order is submitted and accepted by the appraiser.
Comments and attachments are sent from the Send Comments to Appraiser
• Allow Comments for Accepted Orders-Allow the persona to send comments section on the Appraisal Order Status window, which is accessed by clicking
and attachments to the appraiser after the appraisal request is submitted and the Document icon next to the Order Appraisal button on the Services tab.
the order is accepted by the appraiser. Comments and attachments are sent The internal order desk user is the only user who is authorized to communicate
from the Send Comments to Appraiser section on the Appraisal Order Status with the appraiser.
window, which is accessed by clicking the Document icon next to the Order
Appraisal button on the Services tab. 2 In the Internal Order Desk Options section, enter the Encompass user ID for
each user you are authorizing to be an internal order desk user. These users
NOTE: If you selected the Internal Order Desk option, complete the additional are authorized to submit appraisal orders for other users.
steps described below.
NOTE: Use commas to separate multiple entries, and make sure users who
Configure the Internal Order Desk Option are assigned to the internal order desk have the required loan access rights to
open loans to submit appraisal orders.
If you selected the Internal Order Desk ordering option, you must set up the
internal order desk option (which includes setting up the appraisal ordering rights 3 Next, enter the email address for each individual that will receive an email
for each persona and authorizing specific users to be internal order desk users) notification when a user requests an appraisal. Be sure to include the email
and ensure the authorized internal order desk users have the required loan address of the authorized internal order desk users so they are notified when
access rights so they can access the appropriate loans when an appraisal order an appraisal is requested by other users.
is submitted. Follow the steps below: 4 Click the Save icon to save your changes.
1 On the Appraisal Ordering Options tab, in the personas section, select the 5 Click Close to close the Appraisal Management window.
appropriate check boxes. The permissions set up here determine the options
and actions the persona has access to when ordering an appraisal. Set Up the Required Loan Access for Internal Order Desk User
NOTE: For example, if you set up a loan officer with just the Enable Ordering Provide the required loan access settings to the authorized internal order desk
option, they can view the Order Appraisal window and submit the order, but users so that they can access the loan when an appraisal order is submitted by
they cannot access the Paid By drop-down list, nor is the purchase price another user.
displayed.
1 On the left panel in Encompass Settings, click Company/User Setup, and
• Enable Ordering - Give a persona permission to order an appraisal. then click Organization/Users.
Remember, when the user requests an appraisal the order is sent to the
2 In the upper panel, click to select the organization folder in which the internal
internal order desk user who then submits the order to an appraiser or AMC.
order desk user is located. You may need to expand the hierarchy to locate the
• Allow COD - Allow the persona to select COD from the Paid By drop-down folder.
list when ordering appraisal.
3 Select the user in the Enabled Users list, and then click the Edit icon.
• Allow Invoice - Allow the persona to select Invoice from the Paid By drop-
4 In the Access to Subordinates’ Loans section, select Access to all loans in
down list when ordering appraisal.
the same level, and then select Edit.
• Send Purchase Price - Include the purchase price of the subject property
5 Optionally, you may select Edit Subordinates’ Loans, but this is not a
when the order is submitted to the appraiser.
required setting for internal order desk users.
• Allow Comments for Accepted Orders - This option is disabled for all
6 Click Save to save the settings.
personas.
NOTE: When you select the Internal Order Desk ordering option, the
appropriate check boxes for each persona are automatically selected based on
the permissions set up in the Personas settings (under Company/User Setup

Manage Appraisers Tab 2 On the Appraisers Directory window, click the Add icon, enter the appraiser’s
information, and then click Save.
Use the Manage Appraisers tab to manage the list of appraisers who can fulfill
orders, to grant specified users permission to edit the list of approved appraisers,
and to configure the appraiser selection rules for specific loan types and property
locations.
• Or, click the Add From Business Contacts icon to open the Business
Contacts Tool and select an appraiser.
• Or, click the All Appraisers tab, enter or select search criteria by ZIP Code,
location or lender. Select an appraiser or AMC from the list, and then click
Add to My Appraisers.
To Add or Remove Appraisers From the List of Approved Appraisers: NOTE: Appraisal management companies (AMCs) will not be selected when
a user orders an appraisal via the automated ordering process.
1 To add an appraiser, click the Manage Appraisers tab, and then click the Add
icon. 3 To remove an appraiser or AMC from the My Appraisers tab, select the
appraiser or AMC you wish to remove, and then click the Delete icon.
4 Continue adding or removing appraisers until your list is complete, and then
click Close.
• The appraisers display on the Manage Appraisers tab.
To Allow Users to Edit the List of Approved Appraisers

1 To grant specified users permission to edit the list of approved appraisers, click
the Permissions link on the upper-right.
2 On the Permissions for Manage Appraisers Tab window, enter the user ID for
each user, separating multiple entries with commas.

3 When finished, click OK. To Configure the LO Compensation Rule:
NOTE: When one of the specified users orders an appraisal, a Manage 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
Appraisers link displays on the Order Appraisal window. Users click the link to 2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click LO Compensation
access the list of approved appraisers. They can then add and delete approved Rule.
appraisers, or edit the service areas and loan types for an approved appraiser.
To Create Appraiser Selection Rules for Loan Types and Locations:

1 On the Manage Appraisers tab, select an appraiser from the Appraisers list.
2 On the State and County panel, select an individual state from the drop-down
list, or select ALL to select all states and counties. If you selected an individual
state, select one or more entries from the List of Counties and ZIP Codes, and
click the Right Arrow icon to add the counties to the list of Selected Counties
and ZIP Codes.
• To select a specific ZIP Code within a county, click the plus sign to the right
of the county.
• To add more than one county at a time, click a county name, press and hold
the CTRL key, and then click the Left Arrow icon.
3 To remove a state or county, select it from the Selected Counties and ZIP
Codes list, and then click the Left Arrow icon.
4 On the right, select the check boxes for the types of loans the appraiser is
allowed to service.
5 Click the Save icon in the upper-right of the Appraiser Options panel to save
3 Using the Select Control Option drop-down list, select how strictly you want to
the changes, and then click Close.
enforce the LO Compensation Rule.
Enforce Compliance to the LO Compensation Paid-by Rule
LO Compensation Rule When this option is selected, users are prevented from designating different
fees in section 801 that are being paid to the broker as Paid by Borrower and
The Truth In Lending rule that went into effect on April 1, 2011 changes the way
Paid by Lender (or someone else other than the borrower). In other words, if
compensation may be paid to the loan originator, which includes mortgage
one compensation fee being paid to the broker is being paid by the borrower,
brokers and loan officers. The rule prohibits any person other than the borrower
then all other compensation fees must be paid by the borrower as well. Or, if
from paying compensation to a loan originator in a transaction where the borrower
one of the fees is being paid by someone other than the borrower, then all other
pays the originator directly.Use the LO Compensation Rule to control how Paid by
compensation fees paid to the broker must be paid by someone other than the
fees are assigned in the 801 section of the 2010 or 2015 Itemization, 2010 HUD-
borrower as well.
1 Page 2, and Section 32 HOEPA input forms and prevent any person other than
the borrower from paying the loan originator. • The LO Compensation Violation message displays any time the user violates
the new loan originator compensation requirements by indicating that
Based on your company policy, you can select from four options to determine how
different fees will be paid to the broker by both the borrower and someone
the LO Compensation Rule is enforced:
else other than the borrower. In order to close the message and proceed with
• Enforce compliance to the LO Compensation paid-by rule the loan, the user must select Make all Paid by Borrower to set each fee as
• Display a warning when compensation fields are not compliant Paid by the Borrower or Make all Paid by 3rd Party to set each fee as Paid
by Lender (or someone else other than the borrower).
• Do not enforce compliance or display a warning
• Treat seller-paid broker compensation as borrower-paid or paid by a third party

Display Warning When All Compensation Fields Are Not Compliant 2 On the left panel, select Business Rules, and then Collateral Tracking.
When this option is selected, the LO Compensation Violation message
displays any time the user designates different fees in section 801 as Paid by
Borrower and Paid by Lender (or someone else other than the borrower),
warning them that the originator compensation requirements have been
violated. The user can choose to set each fee as Paid by the Borrower, set
each fee as Paid by Lender (or someone else other than the borrower), or they
can select Take No Action and proceed with the loan despite the violation.
Do Not Enforce Compliance or Display a Warning
When this option is selected, users are not prevented from (or warned against)
designating different fees in section 801 as Paid by Borrower and Paid by
Lender (or someone else other than the borrower). The LO Compensation
Violation message will not display at any time, regardless of how fees are
being paid to the broker.
4 Select the fields on the 2010 or 2015 Itemization, 2010 HUD-1 Page 2, and
Section 32 HOEPA input forms that will be subject to the rule.
• The fields listed here represent every fee field in section 801 of the 2010 and
2015 Itemization, 2010 HUD-1 Page 2, and Section 32 HOEPA input forms.
• Every field in the list is selected by default. This means each field is subject
to the rule.
• If you do not want a field to be subject to the rule, clear the field’s check box.
• When the rule is enforced, the Broker Fees field and Broker Compensation
field are always subject to the rule. This setting cannot be changed.
5 To enable seller-paid fees to be paid as borrower-paid, select Borrower for
the Treat seller-paid broker compensation as option.
To Manage Collateral Tracking Options:
• With Borrower selected, users may enter loan originator
(broker) compensation fees as being paid by the seller or the borrower (or 1 In the Preferred Carrier Dropdown List section, create and manage the
both) without triggering an LO Compensation Violation message. preferred carrier options available for the Carrier field on the Shipping Status
tab of the Collateral Tracking tool.
NOTE: The first entry in the list will be the preferred carrier.
2 If you want to schedule document shipments at the same time Final Docs are
Collateral Tracking Setting received, select Enabled.
Use Collateral Tracking Setting to enable the Collateral Tracking tool and manage 3 In the DOT/Mortgage section, select Enabled to edit the fields in this section
the rules that trigger the scheduling and behavior of the tool. and the DOT/Mortgage tabs on the Collateral Tracking tool.
NOTE: All fields in this section are required.
To Access the Collateral Tracking Setting:
• For the initial request, enter the number of trigger days.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. On the left panel,
• For the initial request, enter the number of days between follow-ups.
select Business Rules, and then Collateral Tracking.
• For the return request, enter the number of days between follow-ups.

4 In the Final Title Policy section, select Enabled to edit the fields in this section
and the Final Title Policy tabs on the Collateral Tracking tool.
NOTE: All fields in this section are required.
• For the initial request, enter the number of trigger days.
• For the initial request, enter the number of days between follow-ups.
• For the return request, enter the number of days between follow-ups.

Chapter 16
System Administration
This chapter describes administrative tools used to manage and monitor your To Send an Email Message to Users:
installation; including server settings, event logs, system passwords, and current To send an email to a user, there must be an email address in the user's profile.
users.
1 Select the users you want to send the email message to, and then click Email.
Administration tools are accessed from the Encompass Settings feature, and from
the Admin Tools application. In most cases, you must log in as the admin user to • Your email application opens with the selected users added.
use each tool. 2 Type the subject and content and send the email.
To Send a Broadcast Message to Users:

Current Logins 1 Select the users to whom you want to send the message.
Use the Current Logins setting to view and manage users who are logged in. 2 Click Broadcast Message.
3 In the Broadcast Message window, type the message text and click Send.
To Open from within Encompass:
• A message, entitled Encompass Broadcast Message, is immediately sent to
1 Log in as the admin user. the selected users.
3 On the left panel, cIick System Administration and then click To Log Users Out of Encompass:
Current Logins. 1 Select the users to log out.
• A snapshot displays the users who are currently logged in. 2 Click Logout.
4 Click the Refresh icon to update the information. • The selected users are immediately logged out and receive a message
informing them that the system administrator has logged them out.
To Open from the Admin Tools Application:
1 On your Windows task bar, click the Start menu or Start icon, navigate to the
Ellie Mae Encompass program folder, and then click Admin Tools. All User Information
2 Double-click Online User Manager. Use the All User Information setting to view all users, find a user in the
organization hierarchy, send emails to selected users, and generate a report
showing all the users in your system. This setting is only available if you are
logged in as the admin user.
To View User IDs:

1 Log in as the admin user.
3 On the left panel, cIick System Administration and then click All User
Information.
• A list of all User IDs is displayed, whether or not they are logged in.
Chapter 16: System Administration 211

Settings Reports
Use the Settings Reports tool to generate and view organizational structure and
persona settings-based reports. Persona-based settings reports display and map
information from the Personas setting in Encompass Settings.
After the reports are created, they are listed on the Settings Reports page where
you can view report details, re-run reports, and search for reports using filters.
Reports with Completed Status can be opened and then saved onto your
computer. Authorized users can delete, cancel their reports and/or reports created
4 Click the Refresh icon to update the information. by others. You can also view report logs that display information such as who
created the report, when it was created, and the request type.
To View Users Assigned a Specific Persona: NOTE: If you select a criteria, such as All User Licenses, and the information is
• Select a persona (or All Users) from the Select list.
missing in the Company/User Setup settings, the generated report will include a
tab for the licenses but will not contain any data.
To Edit a User Profile: Creating Organization-Based Reports
1 Select a user.
Organization reports map and display information from the Organization/Users
2 Click the Edit icon. setting in Company/User Setup settings in Encompass Settings.
3 On the User Details window, edit the user’s profile as required, and click OK. NOTE: LO Comp Plan Details for organization-based reports include information
for only three plans - the current plan, the one previous to the current plan, and
To Find a User in the Organization Hierarchy: the one after the current plan.
1 Select a user.
To Create an Organization-Based Report:
2 Click the Find in Hierarchy button.
• The Organization/User Setup window opens with the hierarchy expanded to
the user’s organization. 2 In the left panel, click System Administration, and then click Settings
Reports.
To Sort Users by Column Names: 3 In the Search for Reports panel, click the New icon.
1 Select any column name.
2 Select the column name again to toggle between sorting in ascending and
descending order.
To Send an Email Message to Users:

To send an email to a user, there must be an email address in the user's profile.
1 Select the users you want to send the email message to, and then click Email.
• Your email application opens with the selected users added.
2 Type the subject and content and send the email.
To Generate an All Users Report:

• Click the Export icon to export the All User Information data to a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet.

4 In the Generate Settings Report window, Choose Report Type drop-down field, NOTE: To view the Organization Details window go to Encompass >
verify that Organization is selected by default. Settings > Company/User Setup > Organization/Users, select the
organization, and then click the Edit icon.
5 In the Choose Organization panel, click the + (plus) sign to expand your
organization structure, and then click to select the organization for which you
want to create the report. • Organization Licenses - When you select this, License information from
6 Go to the Select Report Options panel. the Organization Details window for the selected organization is
displayed, one tab per selected organization/sub-organization, in your
• In the Report Name field, type the name of the field.
spreadsheet.
• Select the Include Subordinate Organizations check box if you want to
• User Details by Organization - When you select this, information from
include data from the sub-organizations in the report. the User Details panel for the selected organization is displayed, one tab
NOTE: When this check box is selected, data from each sub-organization per selected organization/sub-organization, in your spreadsheet.
is displayed in individual tabs in the spreadsheet. The naming convention for the tabs is [Organization Name]_UserDtls,
where Organization Name is the name of the organization.
• Select one or both of the following options to create a report with
If your organization name includes special characters, they will not be
Organization Details and/or Organization Licenses settings information:
included in the report tab name. For example, organizations with names
• Organization Details - When you select this, information from the such as RegionA_Branch2/3 will be displayed as
Organization Details window for the selected organization is displayed, RegionA_Branch23_UserDtls in your Settings report.
one tab per selected organization/sub-organization, in your spreadsheet. The organization name length is truncated at 22 characters. If duplicate
tab names are created (due to the truncation), the organization name will
be truncated after 19 characters with a #XX numbering scheme suffix.
RECOMMENDATION: Including the User Details by Organization
option and choosing the Include Subordinate Organizations results in
substantially large report sizes, especially if there are more than 1000

organizations and the report is being generated from the top most Creating Persona-Based Reports
organization in the hierarchy. It is strongly recommended that such
Persona-based settings reports display and map information from the Personas
reports are created during off peak hours.
setting in Encompass Settings.
NOTE: To view User Details, go to Encompass Settings >
Company/User Setup > Organization/Users > select the organization, To Create a Persona-Based Report:
go to the Enabled Users panel in the lower part of the window, and then 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
click the Edit icon.
2 On the left panel, click System Administration, and then click Settings
Reports.
3 In the Search for Reports panel, click the New icon.
4 In the Generate Settings Report window, from the Choose Report Type drop-
down field, select Personas.
• All User Details - When you select this, information for all users
associated with your organization are displayed in a single tab of your
spreadsheet.
• All User Licenses - When you select this, information for all users 5 In the Choose Personas panel, select the Show Personas with Internal
associated with your organization are displayed in a single tab of your Access check box to exclude External Personas from your report.
spreadsheet. • Select check boxes corresponding to the personas for which you want to
• Exclude Disabled Users - When you select this, only users Enabled create your report.
logins are included in your report. 6 In the Select Report Options panel type the report name in the Report Name
• Include Disabled Users - When you select this, users with Enabled and field.
Disabled logins are included in your report. • Select check boxes corresponding to the Persona settings tabs for which you
7 Click the Create Report button. want to create the report.
• Click the Select All check box if you want to view access levels for all tabs for
the selected persona(s).

7 Click the Create Report button. Managing Settings Reports
Creating User Group-Based Reports After you have created the report, you can open and view the report, view report
details, re-run reports, and search for reports using filters. Reports with
User Group-based settings reports display and map information from the User Completed Status can be opened and then saved onto your computer. Authorized
Group setting in Company/User Setup setting in Encompass Settings. users can delete, cancel their reports and/or reports created by others. You can
also view report logs that display information such as who created the report,
To Create a User Group-Based Report: when it was created, and the request type.
Reports.
3 In the Search for Reports panel, click the New icon.
4 In the Generate Settings Report window, from the Choose Report Type drop-
down field, select User Groups.
To View and Save Settings Reports:

Reports.
3 On the right panel, click the Download Report link corresponding to the report
you want to view.
• The report may take a few minutes to render as it converts to MS Excel on
your machine.
RECOMMENDATION: Since Organization Settings Reports generated from
the top level of the organization hierarchy with more than 1000 organizations
and including the User Details by Organization result in resource-intensive,
5 In the Choose User Group(s) panel, select the check boxes corresponding to large-sized MS Excel files, it is recommended that you do not run other CPU
the user groups for which you want to create your report. or memory-intensive application when downloading such reports. Ensure that
6 In the Select Report Options panel type the report name in the Report Name your system is line with the Encompass Product System Requirements and
field. Compatibility Matrix recommendations (CPU: Intel Core i5 or i7 @ 3.3GHz or
equivalent AMD, 8GB for 64-bit RAM). For more information, see: Encompass
• Select check boxes corresponding to the User Groups settings tabs for which
Product System Requirements and Compatibility Matrix.
you want to create the report.
• Click the Select All check box if you want to view access levels for all tabs for
the selected persona(s).
7 Click the Create Report button.

4 Click each tab to view the information in the report. To View the Settings Report Log:
1 On the Setting Reports page, click the View Log link corresponding to the
report for which you want to view details such as the username and userid of
the person submitting the report, when the report was submitted, and the type
of report.
5 From the File menu (in Microsoft Excel), click Save As.
6 In the Save As window, click the Save button.
To Filter and Search for Settings Reports:

1 On the Settings Reports page, Report Name field, type the name of the report.
2 From the Request Type drop-down list, select PersonaReport or
OrganizationReport to filter by report type.
3 From the Requested By drop-down list, select the user who has created the
report.
NOTE: You can view reports created by other users only if the persona
assigned to you has View Settings Reports submitted by others enabled.
4 Click the Search button. 2 Click the Close button.
NOTE: You can use one or more of the filters mentioned above to narrow
your search criteria. To Delete a Settings Report:
1 On the Setting Reports page, click to select one or more reports, and on the
To Re-Run Settings Reports: Search for Reports panel, click the Delete (X) icon.
• On the Setting Reports page, click the Re-run link corresponding to the NOTE: Only reports with Completed, Canceled, and Failed statuses can be
report (with Completed or Failed statuses) you want to regenerate. deleted.
NOTE: The Re-run report link is active only if your assigned persona has
Generate & View Settings Report enabled.

2 In the confirmation window, click Yes. Unlock Loan Files
NOTE: You can only delete reports if your assigned persona has Delete Settings
Use the Unlock Loan File feature to unlock a read-only file. When a loan file is
Reports enabled. You can delete reports submitted by others if your assigned
downloaded from the server, the access rights of the file on the server are
persona has both Delete Settings Reports and View Settings Reports generated
changed to read-only until the file is uploaded back to the server. If the
by others enabled.
downloaded file cannot be uploaded back to the server, the server file remains in
a read-only state unless it is unlocked. A file may also become locked if the
connection to the server is lost while the loan file is open.
Loan Reassignment NOTE: To unlock a file, you must have Full Right access to that file.
Use the Loan Reassignment setting to assign a different user to one or more
loans. You may need to reassign users if they leave your company or change To Unlock a Loan File:
roles.
1 Log in as the admin user.
To Reassign a Loan: 2 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. 3 On the left panel, cIick System Administration and then click Unlock Loan
File.
2 On the left panel, cIick System Administration and then click Loan
Reassignment.
4 From the Loan Folder list, select the folder that contains the file or files
to unlock.
5 Select one or more files.
6 Click Unlock.
3 On the Loan Reassignment worksheet, search for and select the loans Lock Types:
to reassign.
The following lock types are indicated in this setting:
• Select a Role, the Name of a user currently assigned to the role, and the
Loan Folder in which the loans are located. • Exclusive - Only one user can edit the loan at a time (i.e., there is an exclusive
lock for the user who locked the loan).
• Click Search.
• Shared (Multi-User Editing) - More than one user can edit the loan at a time.
• Select one or more loans to reassign.
4 Select the role that will have a new user assigned to it, select the user to assign
to the role, and then click Reassign.
• The selected user will replace the current user in the specified role in the
selected loans.

• Shared (Next Generation) - A loan can be edited by different users within non- System Audit Trail
Encompass applications at the same time, such as Encompass Loan Officer
Connect, Encompass TPO Connect, and Encompass Consumer Connect. This Use the System Audit Trail setting to search for entries in the system audit trail
type of lock is treated as an Exclusive lock by Encompass which means only one based on selected criteria. After completing a search, you can export one or more
user can edit the loan in Encompass. entries to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
NOTE: Encompass administrators can use the Encompass Admin Tools to
To Run a Search:
control whether or not multi-user editing is enabled in Encompass. If the Enable
Multi-User Editing policy is enabled in the Settings Manager (in Encompass 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
Admin Tools), then multiple users can edit a loan file at the same time. Therefore, 2 On the left panel, click System Administration, and then click System
the Exclusive lock type will not be indicated or enforced when the Enable Multi- Audit Trail.
User Editing policy is enabled and the Shared (Multi-User Editing) lock type will
be indicated only when this policy is enabled.
Unlock Trade
Use the Unlock Trade setting to unlock Loan trades, MBS pools, and
Correspondent trades when they are stalled in pending status. This feature
provides a log of all trades in pending status being processed but not displayed in
the Trade Update Queue and enables an Encompass admin to “unlock” the trade
and revert it to an “Open” status for Loan trades and MBS pools or “Committed”
status for Correspondent trades.
NOTE: This setting was introduced in the Encompass 19.2 release.
To Unlock a Pending Trade: 3 Select an option from the Category list, and then select an option from the
Action list.
4 If needed, enter a search criteria in the upper-right field.
2 On the left panel, click System Administration, and then click Unlock Trade.
NOTE: The options in the Action list and the name of the upper-right field will
change based on the category selected.
5 Type a User ID in the Action Taken by field to search for actions by that user.
• Or, click the Lookup icon to select a user from the list.
• The grid can be sorted Trade ID/Pool ID/Commitment Number, Trade Type, 6 Use the two Action Time fields to set a time range for the search, if needed.
or Locked By. 7 When finished, click Search.
• The Refresh button refreshes the log and lists the current pending trades not 8 To clear the search criteria, click the Reset icon.
displayed in the Trade Update Queue.
3 Highlight the trades you want to unlock, and then click Unlock. To Export Results to an Excel Spreadsheet:
4 The highlighted trades are removed from the grid and reverted to an “Open” 1 Select one or more entries in the Result section.
status for Loan trades and MBS pools or “Committed” status for Correspondent 2 Click the Excel icon in the upper-right of the Results section.
trades.
• Unlocking a trade is captured in the Trade History.

To Set the Automatic Audit Record Purge Time: To Refresh your Current License:
• Enter the number of days that the audit records will be stored before being 1 On the Encompass Software Registration Wizard, select Refresh the current
automatically purged. license, and then click Next.
2 On the Refresh License Information window, click Next.
3 On the Registration Complete window, click Finish to close the wizard.
Register Encompass
Use the Register Encompass tool to re-register Encompass with a new CD key or
refresh your current license with updates to your license count. Encompass Server Manager
Use the Encompass Server Manager to stop, start, reconfigure, uninstall, and
To Open the Register Encompass Tool:
reinstall the Encompass Server.
Ellie Mae Encompass program folder, and then click Admin Tools. NOTE: The Encompass Server Manager tool applies only to companies that are
running the Encompass server software on a server on the company network. The
2 Double-click Register Encompass. Encompass Server Manager tool is not available if your company uses hosted
server software with the Encompass SmartClient software running on local
computers.
To Open the Encompass Server Manager Tool:

Ellie Mae Encompass360 program folder, and then click Admin Tools.
2 Double-click Encompass Server Manager.
The content of the Encompass Server Manager depends on the current
configuration of your server; as a Windows Service or IIS.
To Re-register a New CD Key:

1 On the Encompass Software Registration Wizard, select Re-register using a
new CD Key, and then click Next.
2 On the CD Key Registration window, type the new CD Key and click Next.
3 On the Confirm Company Information window, verify that the Company Name
and Company Address information are correct, and then click Yes.
4 Click Submit.
5 On the Registration Complete window, click Finish to close the wizard.

To Stop and Start the Encompass Server:
• On the Encompass Server Manager, click Stop or Start, as appropriate.
• To add a permitted address, type the address in the Only allow connections
from field, and then click Add.
• To remove a permitted address, select an address from the list, and then click
Remove.
Port, Compression, and IP Restriction Settings
• To allow connections from any IP address, leave the list blank.
If your Encompass Server is installed as a Windows Service, the Encompass
4 When finished, click OK
Server Manager displays the current Port, Compression, and IP Restriction
settings. If your server is configured to use IIS, the current Compression 5 Back on the Encompass Server Management window, click OK when finished.
setting displays.
The Configuration Wizard
To Change the Settings: Use the Configuration Wizard to:
1 To change the Server Port, type a new Server Port number. • Repair (uninstall and reinstall) the current server configuration
2 Select the Enable or Disable option to change the Compression setting. • Uninstall the server
3 To edit the IP Restrictions for IP addresses, click the Edit button: • Update/modify the server’s client ID
To Repair the Encompass Server:

Use the repair option to uninstall and reinstall the Encompass Server using the
current configuration settings as follows:
1 On the Encompass Server Manager, click Configuration Wizard.
.

2 On the Encompass Server Maintenance window, click Repair the Encompass To Send an Email Message to Users:
Server, and then click Next. To send an email to a user, there must be an email address in the user's
3 On the Server Configuration Summary window, click Install. Encompass profile.
4 On the Server Installation Complete window, click Test Connection to test 1 Select the users you want to send the email message to.
the server.
2 Click Email.
5 Click OK in response to the test completion message, and then click Finish.
Your email application opens with the selected users added to the address line.
To Uninstall the Encompass Server: 3 Enter the subject and content, and then send the email.
Use the uninstall option to uninstall the server. After the server is removed, you
To Send a Broadcast Message to Users:
are given the option to reinstall the server using different configuration settings.
1 Select the users you want to send the message to.
1 On the Encompass Server Manager, click Configuration Wizard.
2 Click Broadcast Message.
2 On the Encompass Server Maintenance window, click Uninstall the
Encompass Server service (or Uninstall Encompass Server from IIS), and 3 In the Broadcast Message window, type the message text, and then click Send.
then click Next. A message, entitled Encompass Broadcast Message, is immediately sent to
3 On the Uninstall Encompass Server window, click Uninstall. the selected users.
4 On the Server Removal Complete window, click Reinstall to reinstall using

To Log Users Out of Encompass:
different settings.
1 Select the users you want to log out of Encompass.
5 On the Server Installation Mode window, click to configure the server as a
Windows Service or as a Web application using IIS, and then click Next. 2 Click Logout.
6 Follow the instructions on the subsequent windows to reinstall your server. The selected users are immediately logged out and receive a message
informing them that the system administrator has logged them out of
Encompass.
Online User Manager
Use the Online User Manager to view and manage users who are logged in to Settings Manager
Encompass.
Use the Settings Manager to modify server settings and enable or disable
To Open the Online User Manager: server-based features.
To Open the Encompass Server Settings Manager:
2 Double-click Online User Manager. Ellie Mae Encompass program folder, and then click Admin Tools.
• If you are prompted to log in to the server, type the User ID, Password, and
2 Click Settings Manager.
Server that you use to log in to Encompass as the admin user.
• If you are prompted to log in to the server, type the User ID, Password, and
3 Click the Refresh icon to update the list. Server that you use to log in to Encompass as the admin user.
To Disable and Enable Logins:

1 Click Disable Logins to stop users from logging into Encompass.
The admin user can still log in.
2 Click Enable Logins to allow authorized users to log into Encompass.

To Set the Components Options: • PDF Print to File - If enabled, a Print to File button displays when the
1 Select Components from the Category list. Documents window opens prior to printing selected forms. Users can click
this button and then save the forms to a PDF file.
• Min Pipeline Auto-refresh Interval (sec) - The number of seconds between
each Pipeline refresh. For example, if set to 60, the Pipeline data will refresh
every 60 seconds. The interval must range from 30 to 3600 seconds.
• Templates Ignore Fee Mgmt Persona/Biz Rules - If enabled, users can
choose to override Business Rules with data from public Loan Program,
Closing Cost, and Data templates. If enabled, users can also choose to
overwrite existing Itemization form fee attributes entered by authorized
personas with applicable fee data from public Loan Program, Closing Cost,
and Data templates when the template is applied to the loan file.
• Duplicate Loan Check - If enabled, a pop-up message displays when a user
attempts to save a loan file that contains data that matches the data in
another loan file. All potential duplicate loans are listed in the message
window. The user can then select a loan and review the file to confirm if it is
a duplicate or not.
•The following fields are reviewed for duplicate data: SSN (field ID 65 and
field ID 97), Email address (field ID 1240 and field ID 1178), First Name
(field ID 4000), Last Name (field ID 4002), Phone Number (field ID 66 and
FE0117), Subject Property Address (field ID 11).
NOTE: When the system checks for duplicate subject property addresses, it
is not just the Subject Property Address field (i.e., the street address) that is
reviewed. The system reviews this field and the City (field ID 12), State (field
ID 14), and Zip (field ID 15) fields as well. The Duplicate Loan Check will be
2 Double-click a component, and then click Enabled or Disabled from the triggered only if all four of these fields (i.e., the complete mailing
Value list. For the Autosave Interval (sec) and Min Pipeline Auto-refresh address) match the complete mailing address used in another loan file.
Interval (sec) options, enter a numeric value. For the Enable External
Reporting Database option, select True or False. NOTE: In a loan file that has been imported into Encompass, the Duplicate
Loan Check is also triggered when one of these trigger fields is updated, for
• Autosave - If enabled, open loan files are saved to each user's local temp the first time, to a value that matches the value in another loan file.
folder. If the user abnormally closes Encompass while working on a loan, the
data can be restored when the user logs back in. • Enable External Reporting Database - You can create an External
Reporting Database (ERDB), which is a Microsoft SQL Server database
• Autosave Interval (sec) - The number of seconds between each autosave.
containing the loan fields used most often in your reports, on a computer
• Autosave User Config - If enabled (and Autosave is globally enabled) users separate from the Encompass Server and the Encompass Database. The
can change the global autosave settings for their computer in the Personal first time you set this option to True, the Register External Reporting
Settings category on the Encompass Settings screen. Database window displays when you click Apply or OK. Use this window to
• Document Scanning - If enabled, users can scan images into the eFolder. enter the connection settings that will connect the External Reporting
Database Application Server (ERDB App Server) to your Encompass loan
• Instant Messenger - If enabled, Encompass users logged in to the same file system, the Encompass Database, and the ERDB.
server can send and receive Encompass instant messages.
NOTE: To make changes to these settings after the database has been
• Calendar Sharing - If enabled, users can request access to other users’ created and registered, click the Re-register ERDB button to display the
calendars and grant other users access to their calendars. window.

After setting the Enable External Reporting Database option to True and To Set the Encompass Docs Solution (EDS) Policy:
saving your connection settings, you must open and set up the loan fields 1 Select EDS from the Category list.
using the External Reporting Database tool. For more information, refer to the
Setting Up the External Reporting Database document. 2 Double-click a policy, and then click True or False from the Value list to enable
or disable the policy.
• Encompass ERDB Server - Enter the name or IP Address of the computer
• EDS Custom Form Processing - Use this policy to control when the
where the ERDB App Server is installed.
processing of Microsoft Word custom forms will be performed by the
• Port - Enter the connection Port for the computer where the ERDB App Encompass Docs Solution instead of the Encompass system. Use this option
Server is installed. (This field is populated with the applicable port by to enable the policy when you are ready to test your custom forms and
default.) ensure they are rendering as expected. You can then disable the policy until
• EncompassData Folder - Enter the file path where the EncompassData you are ready to test your custom forms again.
folder is located when viewed from the ERDB App Server. • By default, this policy is set to False, which ensures that the Encompass
• In the fields provided, enter the ERDB SQL Server and instance name, system will process custom forms (just as in previous versions of
followed by the ERDB name, login ID, and password. Encompass). Set this policy to True to enable the policy and test your
custom forms using the Encompass Docs Solution. Once you have
• Re-enter the External Reporting Database's password in the Confirm
completed testing your custom forms using the Encompass Docs Solution
DB Password field.
and you are ready to use it for your custom forms going forward, you can
• Once the ERDB has been created and registered, you can click Test also set this policy to True. When this policy is set to True, custom Word
Connections to test the connection between the ERDB and the forms generated from the Print menu in Encompass will no longer be
ERDB App Server. returned in Word (.docx) format. They will be returned in PDF format. This
• In the ERDB Server Failure Notification section, enter the required email is by design to maintain consistency and with the understanding that PDF
settings, including the email address where an email will be sent if the forms are editable.
connection to the ERDB is lost.
To Set the eFolder Option:
• Click Test to send a sample email to the contact entered in the To Emails
field. 1 Select eFolder from the Category list.
• Click Save Notification Settings Only to save only the ERDB Server 2 Double-click the View Original Format option, and then click View Original
Failure Notification information. Attachment in Original Format or View Modified Attachment as PDF from
the Value list.
• Click Create Database and Register.
• View Original Attachment in Original Format - The original attachment
NOTE: After the initial database creation and registration, you can click opens in its native viewer. For example, a Word file opens in the Microsoft
Register Only to save changes made to the ERDB. You must stop and then Word application, and a PDF will open in an Adobe PFDF viewer. This is the
restart the Encompass Server in order for the changes to take effect default setting.
NOTE: This option is available with Encompass Banker Edition only and only • View Modified Attachment as PDF - If the attachment has been split,
when you log into Settings Manager using the Local connection. edited, annotated, or merged, the modified attachment displays as a PDF.
• LO Compensation - If enabled, the active LO compensation plans set up in However, if the original attachment has not been split, edited, annotated, or
the LO Compensation setting (in Encompass Settings) are applied to loan merged, the original attachment opens in its native viewer.
files as applicable. If disabled, none of these LO compensation plans are NOTE: This setting applies only when the Document Conversion setting (in
applied to loans. the eFolder Setup settings) is not enabled in Encompass.
NOTE: Even if this component is disabled, the administrator may still utilize
the LO Compensation setting in Encompass Settings to create LO
compensation plans and assign them to loan officers and brokers.
3 Click Apply or OK.

To Set Import Options: 2 Double-click a component, and then click Enabled or Disabled from the
1 Select Import from the Category list. Value list.
• Import - Outlook - If enabled, this option allows users to import borrower and
business contacts from Microsoft Outlook.
• Create New Loan # On Import - If enabled, an Encompass loan number will
be assigned to all imported loans using the Auto Loan Numbering settings.
• Automatic Assignment of Loan Officer - If enabled, when the name of the
loan officer in the loan file does not match an Encompass user, Encompass
will automatically assign a loan officer as follows:
• If the importing user is a loan officer, the loan will be assigned to the
importing user.
• If the importing user is an admin, the user will be asked to select a loan
officer to assign, or to bypass auto-assignment.
• Loan Officer is Allowed to Import - Use this setting to control whether or
not loan officers can import loans where the subject property is in a state in
which they are not licensed. The setting options are:-
• Allow Import - LO can import the loan
• Do Not Set Current Loan Officer - LO can import the loan, but the File
Starter is set as the current user
• Do Not Allow Import - LO cannot import the loan.
• FNMA Loan Import - Use this setting to control whether or not specific
fields in Fannie Mae loan files are recalculated when imported into
Encompass. The setting options are:
• Keep Calculated Value - Fields are locked and values are not changed.
• Use Encompass Calcs - Fields are unlocked and recalculated by
Encompass.Only authorized users are permitted to edit these fields.
(Authorized users click the Lock icon and then update the fields as needed.)
Fields controlled by this setting
• Net Rental Income (field ID 106)
• Estimated Closing Costs (field ID 137)
• Estimated Prepaid Items (field ID 138)
• Closing Costs Paid by Seller (field ID 143)
• PMI, MIP, Funding Fees (field ID 969)
• Debts to be paid by refinanced loan proceeds (field ID 1092)
• Discount (field ID 1093)
• LOS Loan Import - Use this setting to control whether specific fields in Point,
Contour, and Genesis loan files are recalculated when imported into
Encompass. The setting options are:

• Keep Calculated Value - Fields are locked and values are not changed. • TPO WebCenter Application Date Import - Use this setting to control
• Use Encompass Calcs - Fields are unlocked and recalculated by
whether or not the Application Date (field ID 745) is auto-populated with the
Encompass. current date (i.e., “today's date”) when importing loan files from the
Encompass TPO WebCenter or TPO Connect loans into Encompass. The
Fields controlled by this setting setting options are:
• Net Rental Income (field ID 106) • Do Not change - The Application Date is not automatically populated with
• Estimated Closing Costs (field ID 137) the current date after importing the loan file.
• Estimated Prepaid Items (field ID 138) • Use Current Date If Blank - If the Application Date field is blank, the
current date is populated into it after importing the loan file. If a date has
already been entered in the Application Date field, that date will remain in
• PMI, MIP, Funding Fees (field ID 969) the field after importing the loan file.
• Debts to be paid by refinanced loan proceeds (field ID 1092) 3 Click Apply or OK.
To Set Password Options:
• WebCenter/DU 3.2 Application Import Date - Use this setting to control
whether or not the Application Date (field ID 745) is auto-populated with the 1 Select Password from the Category list.
current date (i.e., “today's date”) when importing loan files from the
Encompass WebCenter or Fannie Mae 3.2 loans into Encompass.
• Do Not change - The Application Date is not automatically populated with
the current date after importing the loan file.
• Use Current Date If Blank -If the Application Date field is blank, the
current date is populated into it after importing the loan file. If a date has
already been entered in the Application Date field, that date will remain in
the field after importing the loan file.
• TPO WebCenter Loan Import - Use this setting to control whether or not
specific fields in loans originated in an Encompass TPO WebCenter or TPO
Connect site are recalculated when imported into Encompass. The setting
options are:- Keep Calculated Value - The values in the fields are not
recalculated and may be edited as needed. - Use Encompass Calcs - The
values in the fields are recalculated by Encompass. Only authorized users
are then permitted to edit these fields. (Authorized users click the Lock icon
and then update the fields as needed.)
Fields controlled by this setting
• Net Rental Income (field ID 106)
• Estimated Closing Costs (field ID 137)
• Estimated Prepaid Items (field ID 138)
2 Double-click the name of each option, and then enter values to define the rules
• PMI, MIP, Funding Fees (field ID 969)
for maintaining and setting passwords.
• Debts to be paid by refinanced loan proceeds (field ID 1092)

• Set the first five options to define the requirements for new passwords; such To Set Policies Options:
as minimum password length and the minimum number of upper-case, 1 Select Policies from the Category list.
lower-case, digits, and special characters.
NOTE: For the Min # of Digits setting, enter the amount of numbers that must
be included in the user's password.
• # of Days to Expiration - The number of days before a password must
be changed.
• # of Passwords Before Reuse - The number of times a password must
change before a previous password can be reused.
• # of Days Before Reuse - The number of days before a previously used
password can be reused.
• Password Failure Limit - The number of allowed failed login attempts
before a user’s account is locked. Please note, 0 (zero) is the default value
for this setting. With 0 set here, no number of password login errors will lock
the account. Enter 1 (or a larger number) to specify the number of times the
user can enter an incorrect password before their account is locked.
• Enable Timeout Reset - Use to enable a time-based lock-out period for
users (for example, 15 minutes) so that a series of failed log in attempts
causes the account to be locked for a set period of time. It will then be
automatically unlocked when the time expires.
• Password Failure Lockout Time In Minutes - The number of minutes that
users will be locked out of Encompass after a set number of failed log in
attempts. (The number of failed log in attempts is determined by the
Password Failure Limit value that has been set.)
• Apply Lockout For ‘admin’ User - Use this to enable a timeout reset for the
2 Double-click an option, and then select or enter the appropriate setting in the
user who has been assigned with the admin user ID (i.e., the admin user). Value list.
• Enable Multi-User Editing - If enabled, multiple users can edit a loan file at
• When enabled, the Password Failure Lockout Time In Minutes value will
now be applied to the admin user. the same time. The features that can be edited are determined by each
user’s access rights.
NOTE: To disable or enable this policy, you must log in to the Settings
Manager using a Local connection.
• Hide Changes Made by Others - If enabled, when a user saves or updates
a loan file in multi-user editing mode, the user will see edits made by other
users only if the edits are in conflict with edits made by the user.
NOTE: To disable or enable this policy, you must log in to the Settings
Manager using a Local connection.
• HELOC Important Terms Historical Table Loan Amount - Sets the value
used to calculate the draw period and repayment period for the HELOC
Important Terms disclosure output form.

• Default to RESPA-TILA 2015 LE and CD - Use this setting to specify the have access rights to those milestones. If disabled, a user cannot clear the
date on which the RESPA-TILA 2015 LE and CD forms will be used by Finished check box on a milestone, if subsequent milestones (for which the
default when a new loan is started. By default, this date is set to October 3, user does not have access rights) have been completed.
2015. NOTE: This option is available with Encompass Banker Edition only.
• Default to HMDA 2018 - Select the date when the 2018 HMDA input forms
• After Disclosure Copy fees to GFE - Use this tool to control how fees are
will be used by default when a new loan is started and for existing loans with
updated to the 2010 GFE input form due to a changed circumstance. Your
no disposition date. The setting also sets the default 2018 reporting year view
selection here controls whether or not fees changed directly in the Borrower
for the HMDA Information content on the 1003, HMDA Information, FNMA
column on the 2010 itemization input form or indirectly as the result of a
Streamlined 1003, and other input forms. By default, this date is set to
recalculation (for example, a recalculation that occurs if the loan amount
01/01/2018.
changes) will automatically update in the GFE (Section #) column. The
NOTE: If an existing loan does not have an Action Date (field ID 749) options are:
entered, or if the date is on or after the date set for the Default to HMDA 2018
• Always Update - When selected, fees will always automatically update in
setting, then the loan will use the 2018 HMDA forms. If the Action Date in the
the GFE (Section #) column.
loan is prior to the Default to HMDA 2018 date, then the loan will continue to
use the 2017 HMDA forms. • Selective Update - When selected, fees will automatically update in the
GFE (Section #) column only if one or more select criteria are met. The
• Use CD to Baseline Date - Your company will allow the Closing Disclosure select criteria are:
to reflect changes in costs if an estimated closing cost was disclosed in good
faith for loans with a Closing Date (field ID 748) on or after the date entered • A loan that has never been disclosed (both the Last GFE Sent Date (field
here, regardless of when the Closing Disclosure was provided relative to ID 3137) and Initial GFE Sent Date (field ID 3148) fields are blank) will
consummation. The date is set to 6/1/2018 by default. allow automatic updates to the GFE (Section #) column regardless of
whether the fee is changed directly (i.e., manual key entry) or indirectly
• Itemize Escrow Disbursements - If enabled, the aggregate escrow account
(i.e., change in loan amount, change in calculated value, application of
disclosure is generated with each disbursement itemized on a separate line. new closing cost template, etc.).
Multiple payments within each month are listed separately. If disabled, the
total escrow payments for a month are combined and display in a single line • Changes made after the Changed Circumstance check box (field 3168)
entry for the month. on the 2010 GFE has been selected will automatically update the GFE
(Section #) column regardless of whether the fee is changed directly (i.e.,
• Prevent Aggregate Escrow from moving disbursements - If enabled,
manual key entry) or indirectly (i.e., change in loan amount, change in
disbursement dates do not adjust in the aggregate analysis schedule when calculated value, application of new closing cost template, etc.).
the 1st Payment Date (field ID 682) is changed. When this option is enabled
and an adjustment to the 1st Payment Date causes an escrow due date to • A loan where the GFE has expired (the GFE Expiration Date (field ID
fall outside the date range in the aggregate analysis schedule, that date does 3140) is earlier than today’s date) and the Borrower has not expressed
not display in the schedule. an intent to continue with the loan (the Borrower intends to continue with
this loan check box (field ID 3164) is not selected) will allow all fees on
• Loan Amount Rounding - If enabled, all loan amounts are rounded to the
the 2010 itemization input form to automatically update on the GFE
nearest full dollar value. Note that FHA loan amounts are always rounded, (Section #) column whenever the fee is changed directly (i.e., manual key
regardless of the selected setting. entry) or indirectly (i.e., change in loan amount, change in calculated
• Interviewer Info Populated From - Use this option to select the File Starter value, application of new closing cost template, etc.).
or the Loan Officer as the source for the interviewer information that appears • Locking a rate, providing rate lock details (lock date and lock term), and
on the bottom of page 3 of the 1003 input form and will print on the bottom of then selecting the Changed Circumstance check box after a loan has
page 3 of the 1003 output form (and on the FNMA Streamlined form). been initially disclosed will allow all fees on the 2010 itemization input
• Allow Non-sequential Milestone Rollback - If enabled, a user with access form to automatically update on the GFE (Section #) column whenever
rights to a milestone can clear the Finished check box, even if subsequent the fee is changed directly (i.e., manual key entry) or indirectly (i.e.,
milestones in the workflow have been completed. The Finished check boxes change in loan amount, change in calculated value, application of new
on the subsequent milestones will also be cleared, even if the user does not closing cost template, etc.).

• Manual Update - When selected, fees will not automatically update in the to Encompass Loan Officer Connect nor Encompass Developer Connect
GFE (Section #) column. Instead, loan team members need to manually at this time. The updates required in these two products that are required
update these fees or create business rules to control how these fees are in order for this setting to be applied to them will be implemented in a
updated. future release of Encompass Loan Officer Connect and Encompass
NOTE: Clicking the Copy Borrower column to 2010 GFE button on the Developer Connect.
2010 Itemization will result in these fees being copied to the 2010 GFE 9 When finished, click Close.
even if this option is selected.
• TPO Originator - Use this setting to control the name that is entered in the
• Include Unsubscribe Link in Emails - If enabled, emails sent using the Loan Originator field (field ID 1612) on the 1003 Page 3.
Campaign or email merge features on the Contacts tab will include an • Keep_TPO_Originator - When selected, the TPO that originated the loan
unsubscribe option that recipients can select to be removed from your email in TPO WebCenter or TPO Connect is populated to the Loan Originator
list. field.
• This setting is available only when the Encompass Server is running under
• Update_TPO_Originator_With_Assigned_LoanOfficer - When
IIS. If the Encompass Server is running under TCP or IIS/TCP, this setting selected, the name of the loan officer assigned to the loan in Encompass
is not visible. is populated to the Loan Originator field.
NOTE: To disable or enable this policy, you must log in to the Settings • Allow Lock Snapshot Recapture - Use this setting to control whether the
Manager using a Networked connection. Allow Lock Snapshot Recapture tool is enabled or disabled. By default, the
• Allow access from certain IPs - If set to Enabled, you can specify the IP tool is disabled.
addresses from which users are allowed to access Encompass. 3 Click Apply or OK.
To Configure Access Based on IP Addresses: To Set Printing Options:

1 Double-click the Value column, and select Enabled from the list. 1 Select Printing from the Category list.
2 Click Apply.
3 Click the Set Allowed IPs button.
4 Click the Add icon, and then select a user from the User list:
NOTE:Select Everyone to apply the same IP settings for all users.
5 Select the options for IP Address Range or IP Address.
6 Enter the address or range of addresses, and then click Save.
7 Repeat steps 4-6 until all your users are added.
8 Select the Apply to Encompass Connect products… check box at the
top of the window to enable users to access Encompass Loan Officer
Connect and Encompass Developer Connect if their systems use any of
the IP ranges or IP addresses you have specified. Note that you only need
to select this check box if you want to provide access to these Connect
products. This setting will still be applied to Encompass even if this check
box is not selected. Users on systems using the specified IP ranges or IP
addresses will still be able to access Encompass accordingly, even if you
do not select this check box.
NOTE:Please note, although this new option to enable this setting to be
applied to Encompass Loan Officer Connect and Encompass Developer
Connect was introduced in Encompass 18.4, the setting will not be applied

2 Double-click a printing setting, and then click and then click one of the options. To Register the Encompass SDK:
• Standard Forms Location - Use this option to specify where standard 1 On your Windows task bar, click the Start menu or Start icon, navigate to the
Encompass forms are stored; on the Client machine or the Server. The Ellie Mae Encompass program folder, and then click Admin Tools.
Client selection provides better performance, while the Server selection 2 Double-click Register Encompass SDK and follow the instructions in the
provides easier maintenance. configuration wizard.
• Print State License # on 1003 - If enabled, values entered in the NMLS
Loan Originator ID and LO State License Number fields on page 3 of the
1003 input form display in the Loan Originator Identifier field on page 3 of
the printed 1003 form; values entered in the Company ID and Company
State License Number fields on page 3 of the 1003 input form display in the
Loan Origination Company Identifier field on page 3 of the printed 1003
form.
If disabled, only the NMLS Loan Originator ID entered in the 1003 input
form displays in the Loan Originator Identifier field on page 3 of the printed
1003 form; Company ID entered in the 1003 input form displays in the Loan
Origination Company Identifier field on page 3 of the printed 1003 form.
NOTE: In this disabled mode, the printed 1003 form does not display Loan
Originator Identifier and Loan Origination Company Identifier fields even if
the LO State License Number and Company State License Number fields are
populated in Encompass.
• Autoselect current form when printing - If enabled, the form currently
open in Encompass will automatically appear in the Selected Forms list on
the Print window. If disabled, you will need to manually add forms to this list.
NOTE: You can also use the Print Auto Selection setting (in the Encompass
Settings) to determine the default set of forms that are automatically selected
in the Print window for loans that have specified values in selected fields. If
the Autoselect current form when printing option is enabled, both the current
form and the Print Auto Selection forms will be automatically selected in the
Version Manager
Print window. Use the Version Manager tool to manage how and when service packs and critical
• Word Background Printing - If enabled, the Print window does not display
patches (periodic maintenance releases previously known as hot updates) are
when users print a Word document (such as a custom form). The document applied to your Encompass software.
prints to the user’s default printer in the background. If disabled, the Print • A service pack is a planned monthly update.
window displays when the user prints a Word document; users have the
• A critical patch is an unplanned update that is necessary to address a critical
ability to modify the print settings on this window.
defect or compliance change.
3 Click Apply or OK.
By default service packs and critical patches are applied automatically to all your
Encompass users. You also have the option to manually approve each service
pack or critical patch before it is applied. If you select the manual option, you can
Register Encompass SDK test each service pack or critical patch in a test environment prior to applying it to
If you have written applications that use the Encompass SDK, use this tool to your Encompass system.
register the API runtime. NOTE: With manual updates, you must open the Version Manager to review and
NOTE: You must have an API runtime license to complete the process. approve new service packs or critical patches as they become available.
Otherwise, they will not be applied.

To Install a Service Pack or Critical Patch: Apply Service Packs or Critical Patches to Test
1 Access each of the end-user computers where the Encompass SmartClient Environments
application is installed. When you select the manual update option, a Test Client ID is automatically
2 On the Windows task bar, click the Start menu or Start icon, navigate to the generated and displays at the bottom of the screen. The Test client ID allows your
Ellie Mae Encompass program folder, and then click Admin Tools. company to test the service pack or critical patch before applying it to all your
users.
3 Double-click Version Manager.
4 If you are prompted to log in to the server, type the User ID, Password, and To Create a Test Environment:
Server that you use to log in to Encompass as the admin user.
1 Download the CreateSCShortcut ZIP file from:
5 In the Encompass Version Manager window: http://download.elliemae.com/encompass/support/CreateSCShortcut.zip.
• If the option to apply all service packs and critical patches automatically is 2 Extract the contents of the ZIP file. The process will vary depending on your
selected, you do not need to take any action. All current and future updates ZIP application.
are applied automatically.
3 In the CreateSCShortcut folder, double-click the CreateSCShortcut.exe
• If the option to manually approve and apply service packs and critical patches program, and click Run.
is selected, select a service pack or critical patch from the list, and then click
4 Type a name for the shortcut, and then click Create to create a desktop icon
Approve.
for your test environment.
5 Double-click the icon for the test environment, and then click Run.
6 Enter your Test Client ID in the login dialog, and then click Login to connect to
your test environment.
To Configure Version Manager in Your Test Environment:

1 Log in to your test environment using your Test Client ID.
2 Complete the steps described in “To Install a Service Pack or Critical Patch:”
on page 230.
Reporting Database
Use the Reporting Database tool to create a database of the loan fields used most
often in your reports. When you use the reporting database, the time required to
perform a search and return results is greatly reduced.
In Encompass Banker Edition, the reporting database is also used to designate
fields for which you want to create an audit trail. Whenever a change is made to
one of these fields in a loan file, Encompass creates a record of the change which
includes the date, the ID and name of the user who made the change, and the
value the field was changed to.
To Open the Reporting Database:

2 Click Reporting Database.

• If you are prompted to log in to the server, enter the User ID, Password, and To Import a Text File That Contains Field Information:
Server that you use to log in as the Admin user. Create a text file (*.txt) that contains the required field information and then
import the file into the Reporting Database. Or, you can export the fields
To Edit the Reporting Database: currently listed in the Selected Fields section to a .txt file, edit the file as
1 To add fields to the reporting database, use one of the following methods. needed, and then import the file to the Reporting Database.
1 Click the Export icon.
To Manually Select Fields from the Fields Section:
2 In the Export to field, enter the file path/location where the file will be
• Select one or more fields from the tabs in the Fields section, and then click exported.
Add.
3 In the File Name field, type a file name. By default, the file name will be
NOTE:Most of the fields on the Team Members, Milestones, Documents, automatically set to Fields-[today’s date].txt.
Conditions, and Post-Conditions tabs will have more than one instance
associated with each loan file. For example, if you select the Document Title 4 Click OK, then click OK again in the confirmation window.
field, a window will open from which you will select the name of a specific 5 Next, open the text file.
document. The text file is comma-delimited, with the first line listing each header field
• To find fields on the Fields tab, type numbers or letters in the Find field. in the Selected Fields pane of the Reporting Database (Field ID, Pair,
The first occurrence of the characters in the Field ID, Description, or Type Description, etc.) followed by each field entry that was listed.
columns is found. Click Find Next to move to subsequent occurrences. 6 Edit the file. You can change existing field information, add new field
• If you know the field ID or one or more fields, click the New icon, enter the information, or deleted fields.
IDs manually, and click Add. 7 When finished, save the file.
8 Back in the Reporting Database, click the New icon.
9 In the Add Required Fields window, click Import.
• Any new fields that were added to the text file are added to the bottom of
the list in the Selected Fields pane.
• If an invalid field ID was added in the text file, a warning window displays,
listing each invalid field ID. Invalid field IDs are not added to the Selected
Fields pane.
2 To remove a field, select a field in the Selected Fields section, and then click
the Remove button.
3 To edit a field, select a field in the Selected Fields section and then click the
Edit icon.
• Change the field Description and Field Size as needed.

• Use the Borrower Pair drop-down list to select the co-mortgagor pair to Import Fields from a Text File
include in the report.
You can Create a text file (*.txt) that contains the required field information and
then import the file into the Reporting Database. Or, you can export the fields
currently listed in the Selected Fields section to a .txt file, edit the file as needed,
and then import the file to the Reporting Database.
To Import Fields from a Text File:

1 Click the Export icon.
2 In the Export to field, enter the file path/location where the file will be exported.
3 In the File Name field, type a file name. By default, the file name will be
automatically set to Fields-[today’s date].txt.
4 Click OK, then click OK again in the confirmation window.
5 Next, open the text file.
• Select the Use index for this Field check box to create an index for that • The text file is comma-delimited, with the first line listing each header field in
column in the database table. the Selected Fields pane of the Reporting Database (Field ID, Pair,
Description, etc.) followed by each field entry that was listed.
NOTE: For fields that you commonly use to filter reports, creating indexes for
those fields can reduce report generation time. However, indexes also 6 Edit the file. You can change existing field information, add new field
increase the size of the database and can increase the time required to save information, or deleted fields.
a loan file. 7 When finished, save the file.
• Select the Include in Audit Trail check box to create an audit trail for this field. 8 Back in the Reporting Database, click the New icon.
• Select the Include in Audit Trail check box to create an audit trail when 9 In the Add Required Fields window, click Import.
changes are made to this field in a loan file. • Any new fields that were added to the text file are added to the bottom of the
NOTE: This option is available with Encompass Banker Edition only. list in the Selected Fields pane.
• Click OK. • If an invalid field ID was added in the text file, a warning window displays,
listing each invalid field ID. Invalid field IDs are not added to the Selected
4 When all selections and changes have been made, click Update to update
Fields pane.
your database.
5 Click Yes to confirm the update.
6 Click Yes or No when asked if the newly added fields should be made Settings Sync
accessible to all personas.
Use the Settings Sync Tool to import Encompass settings from one system to
7 When the database has been updated, click Yes to populate the database. another. The tool enables you to log into two systems at the same time, where you
8 Click OK in response to the completion message. can select settings on one system and copy them to the second system. This tool
will most commonly be used to copy settings from the production environment to
NOTE: If fields in the Reporting Database exceed the recommended number
the test environment to prepare for testing and then back to the production
(1500), a warning message displays each time the administrator opens the
environment after changes are made. Settings that are supported by the tool
Reporting Database, explaining that performance may be affected.
include business rules, personas, and user groups

To Open the Settings Sync Tool: Rather than synchronize all settings from one system to another, the Settings
1 On your Windows task bar, click the Start menu or Start icon, navigate to the Sync Tool is designed to enable administrators to pick and choose the specific
Ellie Mae Encompass program folder, and then click Admin Tools. record(s) to be synchronized between two systems.
2 Double-click Settings Sync Tool.
Check System IDs
3 On the Encompass Settings Tool Log In window, enter the following login
Each Encompass system is assigned a unique identification number (system ID),
information for your production environment.
on which certain settings are associated. A setting associated with a system ID
• User ID- admin will be available in that Encompass system, but will not be available in another
• Password- [created during installation] system with a different system ID.
• Connection- Networked Two systems may share a system ID. If a system was created by copying or
syncing the database from another system, these two systems will share the
• Server- [The name of your Encompass server]
same ID.
4 Enter the login information for your test environment.
• Click Tools, and then click Compare Encompass System IDs to check if the
5 Click Log In. two systems share the same system ID.
To Copy Settings From One System to Another: To Change the Panel Orientation:
1 To copy settings from the production environment on the left panel to the test 1 To align the panels from side-by-side to top and bottom, click View, and then
environment on the right panel, click the right arrow. click Toggle Left-Right/Top-Bottom.
2 Click a tab at the top of the screen to view the setting, and then change the 2 Repeat step 1 to realign the panels to side-by-side.
setting as needed on the right panel.
3 Repeat step 2 to view and change additional settings.
4 After testing the settings in the test environment, click the left arrow to copy Commitment Terms Data Migration Tool
the settings from the test environment back to the production environment. Use the Commitment Terms Data Migration Tool to copy existing Lock Term fields
NOTE: When a setting is selected to be synchronized to another system, to the Commitment Term fields on the Correspondent Loan Status Tool. This
Encompass synchronizes only the main Encompass code that is required for that migration tool only works for loans with a Channel of “Correspondent” and can
particular setting. For example, when synchronizing a user group, the Settings only be run once per loan. However, the migration tool can be run multiple times
Sync Tool synchronizes all of the main settings for the user group to the other with different sets of loans as a Correspondent client's migration strategy dictates.
system. Since the user group is the primary setting the administrator is In addition, the tool should only be run when the setting to use the new
synchronizing, it is only the main user group settings that gets synchronized to the Commitment Term fields is enabled.
other system. As a result there may be other user accounts or settings in other NOTE: Ellie Mae recommends you run the migration tool after work hours and
areas that need to be created in order to have all the settings of the user group after all loan files are closed.
synchronized between the two systems. The Settings Sync Tool will insert the
minimum data required to have that record created on the other system. In this WARNING: Once the data migration is processed, it cannot be reversed using the
case when synchronizing a user group, a user account is created on the other migration tool. Any changes needed after the data migration will need to be
system but other peripheral settings, such as the persona(s) assigned to the user, handled manually.
are not inserted/synchronized. Prior to running the migration tool, you must create the CSV file of GUID IDs that
Using this same logic, when an administrator is synchronizing a user account, all you will use as input during the migration process. This is similar to the HMDA
of the main code associated with the user account (including the user’s assigned Batch Update process requirements.
persona(s)) is synchronized to the other system since the user account is the
primary setting to be synchronized. All the main settings for the selected user To Run the Commitment Terms Data Migration Tool:
account will be synchronized. 1 On your Windows task bar, click the Start menu or Start icon, navigate to the

2 Complete the Admin Tools – Launcher, including a Server and Client ID, and
then click Login.
3 Double-click on Commitment Terms Data Migration Tool.
• If needed, log into Encompass.
4 Browse and select an Input File to batch upload GUID IDs to define the
migration population.
• Upload file must be a CSV file.
5 Click Execute to run the migration tool.
• The migration tool copies the following data:
• Lock Date (field ID 761) to Commitment Date (field ID 4527)
• # of Days (field ID 432) to Commitment Period (field ID 4528)
• Expiration Date (field ID 762) to Commitment Expiration Date (field ID
4529)
• Rate is Locked (field ID 2400) to Loan is Committed (field ID 4532)
In addition, the Save Loan is Committed (field ID 4532) is copied to the
LoanSummary table.
6 When the migration is completed:
• If the migration was successful for all GUID IDs, a message is displayed that
the batch processing is complete, in the Processing Status window.
• If the migration is not successful for all GUIDs, a message is displayed that
there were errors while processing the loan, above the Processing Status
window.
• If you click the Display Errors button, a list of errors is displayed.
• If you click the Export Errors button, the list of errors is exported.
• The values in fields 761, 432, 762, 3941, and 2400 will not be removed.

Chapter 17
Additional Services
Use these settings to manage user access to the licensed add-ons and additional To Manage User Licenses:
services available in Encompass. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass and then click Settings.
• E-Document Management (Electronic Document Management or EDM) 2 In the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click E-Document
• Company Status Online Management.
• eDisclosure Fulfillment 3 Select one or more check boxes to specify which users are authorized to use
Electronic Document Management's paid services, including self-paid users.
• Compliance Review Setup
• Enabled Users - Indicates the number of licenses assigned to users, not
• 4506T Service
including self-paid licenses.
• TQL Services
• Allowed Licenses - Indicates the total number of company licenses
• Appraisal Service purchased, not including self-paid licenses.
• Title Service NOTE: If the server you are logged in to does not recognize a user, the text
• Fraud Service (Not Recognized) displays in the Organization column and the row appears
red. This situation can occur if the user has been deleted.
• Fannie Mae Services
NOTE: The self-paid option is available for users to pay for their own licenses,
• Valuation Service
separate from those purchased by your company. The Self-Paid column
• Flood Service indicates whether or not the user has registered for the self-paid option. To
• Scanned Document Uploader Service register, the user should contact your Ellie Mae sales representative.
• North Carolina Compliance Report 4 Click the Save icon to save your changes.
E-Document Management Company Status Online

The E-Document Management feature, or Electronic Document Management Use the Company Status Online setting to set up a company's default templates
(EDM), provides a centralized interface to request, manage, submit, and store and triggers for the Status Online tool and to authorize Encompass users to use
electronic documents. With EDM, loan officers and processors can both access the Status Online feature, including the Status Online Tool and the Personal Status
and work on the latest documents right within Encompass and send and receive Online setting. If a user is authorized to use the Status Online feature, a Status
critical loan documents faster. Online update is triggered when the user exits a loan after making changes that
match the criteria set in the Company Status Online setting. If your company is a
All of your users can use the eFolder to view, browse, attach, scan, and edit the TPO Connect customer, your administrator can also set up your company's
documents associated with a loan, however, only authorized users can access default TPO Connect templates and triggers for the Status Online tool.
EDM. Contact your Ellie Mae sales representative to learn more about EDM.
Use the E-Document Management license setting to select the users who will be
using EDM.
Chapter 17: Additional Services 235

Updates are published to a secure website (the Encompass Consumer Connect, 2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Company Status
the Ellie Mae Loan Center, or your TPO Connect site) where authorized borrowers Online.
and partners can track the progress of a loan at any time from any Internet
connection. Updates can also be configured to send your borrowers and partners
rich HTML email notifications that provide more detailed information about the
update.
About Update Triggers

Each template the administrator creates contains a trigger that prompts a Status
Online update when an event is achieved. The administrator can create a trigger
based on the achievement of a milestone, the receipt of a document, or the entry
of a value in a specified field. Users can override the settings in the template when
they update the status for a specific loan.
The administrator configures each status update to send out automatic or manual
updates when a trigger event occurs:
• Automatic - The Status Online update is sent automatically without any action 3 On the Company Status Online Templates or TPO Status Online
on the part of the Encompass user who is working in the loan. Templates tab, click the New icon.
• Manual - The Encompass user who is working in the loan decides whether or 4 Complete the procedures described below, and then click the Save icon to
not to send the update manually. If a reminder has been created, a prompt save your changes.
displays when the user exits a loan after a Status Online update has been
triggered. Select Trigger:
• Select No Trigger to create an option that is not tied to a trigger.
Company and TPO Status Online Templates
Use the Company Status Online Templates tab to create the templates and NOTE: Select No Trigger, only if you plan to select the Manually Update
triggers for your Company Status Online updates. If you are a TPO Connect option for the Update Method in the Configure Status Online Update section.
customer, the TPO Status Online Templates tab is also visible. Use this tab to • If you select the Milestone Finished trigger, select a milestone from the list.
create the templates and triggers for your TPO Connect Status Online updates.
On both tabs, the templates display in a list that includes the Name, Status Trigger,
Update Method, and Email Message (email template) selected for each template.
Add a Status Online Option:


• If you select the Document Received trigger, select a document from the list. • If you fill all the available entry fields and need to add more fields, click
Add More. The selected fields are added to the list of trigger fields and
the Add Fields entries are cleared for additional entries.
3 When finished, click Add.
Select Fields from Forms:

2 Select a form on the left panel.
3 Right-click one or more fields on the form.
NOTE: The documents in the list are based on the documents added to the
Documents setting under eFolder Setup in the Encompass Settings.
• If you select the Field Value Entered trigger, select one or more fields. The
selected fields are added to the list of trigger fields. The update is triggered when
values are entered in all of the selected fields:
Select Fields Based on Field IDs

4 Continue selecting forms and fields until you are finished, and then click OK.
2 Type one or more field IDs.

Configure Status Online Update: Send Notification Email (Optional):
1 Type a Status Description. This is the description your borrowers and partners If you created email templates (see below), you can select predefined content to
will see when you publish Status Online updates. include in the notification email.
1 Select a template from the Email Template list.
• Click the Lookup icon to view the content of the selected template.
2 Select Loan Officer, File Starter, or Current User from the From list.
• The email for the selected user will display in the From field when the email
notification is sent.
• Selecting Me will cause your email address to always display as the sender,
even if another user sends the update.
• Selecting Current User will use the email address of whichever user is
sending the update.
3 In the To section, select the check box for one or more recipients who will
receive the email notification.
Work with Status Online Templates

After creating Company Status Online templates or TPO Status Online templates,
you can edit or delete templates as needed.
Edit a Template:
1 On the Company Status Online Templates or TPO Status Online
Templates tab, select a template on the list and click the Edit icon.
2 Edit the Status Description and the Trigger options, and then click Save.
2 Select an Update Method:
Delete a Template:
• Automatic Update - Updates are sent automatically when a user exits a loan
file after a trigger event occurs. No action is required on the part of the 1 On the Company Status Online Templates or TPO Status Online
Encompass user who is working in the loan. Templates tab, select an option on the list and click the Delete icon.
• Manual Update - A prompt displays when a user exits a loan file after a
2 Click Yes in response to the confirmation message.
trigger event occurs. The prompt window allows the Encompass user who is
working in the loan to decide whether to send the update manually.
3 If you select the Manual Update option, select a Reminder option:
• No reminder - When a user exits a loan, if a Status Online option has been
triggered, the user will not be prompted with an update message. However,
if an email template has been added to the trigger, an Email Notification
window displays when the user manually published the update, allowing the
user to adjust the email subject, message, and recipient email addresses.
• Remind users when they exit the loan - When a user exits a loan, if one of
the options has been triggered, the Status Online Tool will open and the user
will be prompted to update Status Online.

Email Templates 2 To insert an image, click the Image icon to open the Insert Image window,
select a file, and then click Insert.
Use the Email Templates tab to create preconfigured email messages that can be
attached to Status Online options and sent to borrowers or partners instead of • To add an image to the Insert Image window, click the Add icon, browse to
typing an email text each time you send an update. the image, and then click Open.
• To delete an image from the Insert Image window, select an image, and then
Add an Email Template: click the Delete icon.
1 On the Email Templates tab, click the New icon to open the Email Template 3 To insert a hyperlink, highlight the link text, click the Hyperlink Icon, and select
Details window. an option:
• To have the link open the WebCenter or Loan Center, select The
• To have the link open a website, select General web address, and then
enter the URL for the website in the format http://www.websitename.com
• To have the link open the recipient's email application, select Email address,
and then enter the email address that you want to display in the email To line.
4 To insert the signature of the Encompass user who is sending the update, click
the Insert icon, select the Signature option, and then click Insert.
NOTE: If you paste content into the HTML editor from another text editor (for
example Word or Notepad), additional paragraph tags may be copied into the
HTML code from the other text editor, which could cause the signature to
display below the location where you pasted it. To adjust the signature location,
open the source code, as described in Step 7, and remove the duplicate <P>
and </P> tags from around the signature.
5 To insert a commonly used field, click the Insert icon, select the Commonly
Used Field option, select a field from the list, and then click Insert.
6 To insert any Encompass field, select the Other Field option:
• Type the field ID.
• Or click the Lookup icon, select a form in the left panel, right-click a field in
the left panel, and then click OK.
7 To modify the HTML code for the template, or to insert your own HTML code
2 Type a Subject for the email. for a template, right-click the content screen, click View Source, edit or enter
the HTML code, and then click Update.
3 Type the content of the email message in the text box.
4 Click Save.
Edit an Email Template:
Format an Email Template:
1 On the Email Templates tab, click the Edit icon to open the Email Template
Use the toolbar on the Email Template Details window to format the content of an Details window.
email template:
2 Select a template from the list, and then click the Edit icon.
1 On the Email Templates tab, select a template from the list, and then click the
Edit icon. 3 Edit the Subject and message, and then click Save.

Duplicate an Email Template: eDisclosure Fulfillment
1 On the Email Templates tab, select a template from the list, and then click the
RESPA and RESPA-TILA regulations state that once a mortgage broker (or
Duplicate icon.
mortgage provider) receives an application or information sufficient to complete
2 Change the Subject, edit the message content as required, and then click the application, the lender who agrees to go forward on the application (or the
Close. mortgage broker) must provide the initial disclosures, including the GFE or Loan
Estimate, to the borrower within three business days.The lender is responsible for
Delete an Email Template: determining whether or not the GFE or Loan Estimate has been provided.
• On the Email Templates tab, select a template from the list, and then click the After a loan team member sends the required initial disclosures to a borrower
Delete icon. using the eFolder's eDisclosures option, the eDisclosure Fulfillment service
automatically notifies them when the borrower fails to view the documents in the
Users package electronically within a specified time.
The Users tab allows administrators to give Encompass users access to the
When the notification is sent, the eDisclosure Fulfillment service prepares a
Status Online feature, including the Status Online Tool and the Personal Status
securely printed version of the disclosure package and sends it to the borrower on
Online setting.
the date of your choice. The package is prepared by Ellie Mae and sent via the
U.S. Postal Service (USPS).
To set up the notifications you want the service to send and the date when the
printed disclosure package should be prepared and sent to the borrower, you
must first start the service, and then make your selections on the Send
eDisclosures window that displays during the Send eDisclosure Documents
process. For more information on these eDisclosure Fulfillment service options,
view the eDisclosure Fulfillment Service topic.For more information on
eDisclosure Fulfillment service options, including how to set up notifications and
setting the date when the printed disclosure package should be prepared and sent
to the borrower, view the “eDisclosure Fulfillment Service” online help topic.
To Start or Stop the eDisclosure Fulfillment Service:

NOTE: By default, this service is turned off.
2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click eDisclosure
Fulfillment.
1 On the Users tab, select the Publish Updates check box to give a user • To start the service, click the Start Service button located in the upper-right
permission to publish status online updates and access the Status Online Tool. corner.
• When the Publish Updates check box is selected, a selected check box • To stop the service, click the Stop Service button located in the upper-right
displays in the Configure Personal Status Online column, indicating that the corner.
user has also been granted access to the Personal Status Online setting.
3 Select or clear the Check to schedule Fulfillment Service for all packages
2 Clear the Configure Personal Status Online check box to remove a user's check box.
access to the Personal Status Online setting.
• When the check box is selected, the Schedule a Fulfillment Service for
3 At the bottom of the screen, select an option to apply the personal templates this package check box is selected by default on the Send eDisclosures
of the File Starter or Loan Officer for a new loan. window when an Encompass user sends an eDisclosure package to the
borrower.

• When the check box is not selected, the Schedule a Fulfillment Service for Custom reports cannot be used unless you obtain a custom service code (e.g.,
this package check box is not selected by default in the Send eDisclosures excluding Saturdays from a report) from Ellie Mae Technical Support.
window when a user sends an eDisclosure package. The user will have the
option to select the Schedule a Fulfillment Service for this package check What is the Purpose of Each Review?
box themselves to schedule the Fulfillment Service when they send
eDisclosures. TILA/TILA-RESPA Review
This TILA review includes comparisons, tests, functions and calculations based
on the Truth In Lending Act and Mortgage Disclosure Improvement Act (MDIA).
Compliance Review Setup Specifically, the Encompass Compliance Service recalculates the finance charge
An individual with an Encompass admin user ID can use the Compliance Review amount, amount financed, APR, total of payments, payment schedule, and the
Setup to configure the Encompass Compliance Service. The Encompass amortization schedule. The MDIA test validates that the loan's disclosure dates
Compliance Service provides an instant loan file check and determines if a loan are in compliance with the "3-7-3 rules" set forth in the MDIA. Note that the
complies with selected state and federal regulations. MDIA test is optional and you can choose to exclude it from your compliance
reports. The results of the review display in the TILA-Tolerance and TILA-Payment
This setup tool allows administrators to select the type of report they want to use sections of the compliance report.
and choose the type of reviews to include based on your organization's unique
interpretations and compliance policies. For example, by default, the Premium The TILA-RESPA review applies to closed-end loans secured by 1-4 unit
(Subscription) report includes several reviews including the Federal Truth-In- dwellings attached to real property, where the application is taken on or after
Lending Act Tolerance Test (TILA) review and the Approved Fannie Mae Points & October 3, 2015.
Fees and "HUD-HOEPA" Mortgage Thresholds review. However, administrators NOTE: This review does not apply to open-end HELOCS (field ID 1172 equals
can elect to remove the TILA review from the report when applied to a loan or add HELOC) or loans not made primarily for personal, family, or household purposes
additional reviews to the report. (field ID QM.X110).
The following report types are available: If the Encompass Compliance Service does not receive enough information to
NOTE: The Standard Report (Subscription) option is still provided in the Report determine whether the loan is secured by real property, it will apply the TILA-
drop-down list however this report type is a legacy product and not available to RESPA Rules to all closed-end loans secured by 1-4 unit dwellings, made
new Encompass Compliance Service customers. For more information please primarily for personal, family, or household purposes, where the application date
contact your Ellie Mae sales representative. is on or after October 3, 2015 and where the Encompass Form Version is
TILA-RESPA 2015 LE and CD.
• Premium - There are two types of Premium reports: Subscription and Closed
Loan Pricing. By default, both types of Premium reports contain the Federal
TILA Right of Rescission
Truth-In-Lending Act (TILA) Tolerance Tests, Federal Home Ownership and
Equity Protection Act (HOEPA) State and Local High Cost Thresholds, The TILA Right of Rescission review tests a non-purchase money closed-end loan
Approved Fannie Mae Points & Fees and "HUD-HOEPA" Mortgage Thresholds, secured by a 1-4 unit primary dwelling to determine whether it is in compliance
Higher Priced Mortgage the State Consumer Credit Law, Home Mortgage with TILA rescission timing requirements. The Right of Rescission test compares
Disclosure Act (HMDA), and Rate Spread reviews. the disclosed right to cancel expiration date and the loan disbursement date to the
compliance review’s calculated right to cancel expiration date and returns an
NOTE: Companies using the Subscription option agree to pay for Encompass
exception if either date is earlier than the earliest allowable date.
Compliance Service fees as set forth in the Encompass Compliance Service
contract, while companies using Closed Loan Pricing pay pursuant to their
Closed Loan Agreement with Ellie Mae. Click the Terms & Conditions link on High Cost Review
the Report tab in the Setup Wizard for details about each agreement. This review checks for compliance with HOEPA and applicable state and local
jurisdictions. The Encompass Compliance Service calculates the high cost
• Custom - Custom reports are set up by Ellie Mae based on your company's
thresholds as defined in HOEPA and by applicable state and local jurisdictions to
configuration and loan volume. The Premium reviews can be included in a
determine if a loan is considered a high cost loan. The federal, state, and local
Custom report, plus Licensing reviews and custom business rules to enforce
APR and Points and Fees threshold calculations ensure proper classification of
internal compliance policies or investor-specific program requirements.

fees by ascertaining to whom the fee is paid (for example, lender, affiliate, • Higher-rate, higher-risk, higher-priced, subprime, non-prime, and rate spread
originator, or provider) and by whom the fee is paid. The results of the review loans
display in the High Cost section of the compliance report. • Prepayment penalty prohibitions and limitations
• Late fee dollar amount limits and length of late fee grace periods
Higher Priced Mortgage Review
• Interest accrual start dates
This review calculates thresholds and ensures critical regulatory requirements are
met with respect to "higher priced mortgage loans" (HPML). HPML thresholds are • Negative amortization prohibitions
calculated according to Section 12 C.F.R. § 226.35(a)(1) of the Regulation Z. • Balloon payment prohibitions or term limitations
Effective October 1, 2009, Regulation Z defines HPMLs to include loans with an
APR above a specified threshold. The threshold for a first-lien loan is 1.5% or • Payment and term limitations
more above the average prime offer rate for a comparable loan (which is not an The results of this review display in the State Rules section of the compliance
unusual interest rate). The threshold for a second lien is 3.5% or more. If the loan report.
is classified as an HPML, the Encompass Compliance Service analyzes the loan's
prepayment penalties to determine if they are prohibited under Regulation Z. The Home Mortgage Disclosure Act (HMDA) Review
results of the review display in the Higher Priced section of the compliance report.
This review evaluates the pertinent loan data to HMDA requirements. The
FFIEC Validity and Quality edits are processed against the HMDA fields. The
GSE Review results of the review display in the HMDA section of the compliance report. Note
This review includes the following: that this review is optional, so you can choose to not include it in your compliance
• Fannie Mae Points & Fees - The review calculates the allowable Fannie
reports.
Mae points and fees thresholds as defined in the Fannie Mae Lender Letter
03-00, issued April 11, 2000 (and codified in Fannie Mae's Selling Guide Part Rate Spread Review
VII, Section 104.11), as updated and amended based upon loan data. This review provides an alert advising the lender of the HMDA Rate Spread on a
• Freddie Mac Points & Fees - The review calculates the allowable Freddie Higher-Priced Mortgage Loan. The Encompass Compliance Service uses the
Mac points and fees thresholds as defined in the Freddie Mac Industry Letter, greater of the Disclosed APR, Encompass APR, or calculated APR as the loan's
issued December 28, 2000 (and codified in Freddie Mac's Seller/Servicer APR for comparison purposes. The HMDA-LAR Rate Spread reporting
Guide Section 22.32), as updated and amended based upon loan data. requirement occurs when the difference between the loan's APR and the average
prime offer rate for a comparable transaction is equal to or greater than 1.5% for
• GSE HUD-HOEPA Mortgage High Cost Thresholds - The review
first liens or 3.5% for subordinate liens.
calculates the high cost thresholds as defined in the Fannie Mae Selling
Guide Part VII, Section 104.15, as updated and amended, and the Freddie
FHA Review
Mac Single-Family Seller/Servicer Guide Chapter 22, as updated and
amended, based upon loan data. The FHA review evaluates FHA loans and identifies certain issues in the following
areas: Seller Contribution Limit, Tax Service Fee Prohibition, Late Charge and
The results of the review display in the GSE section of the compliance report.
Grace Period Limits, ARM Adjustment and Rate Restrictions, MSA Loan Limits,
and Loan Term Limits.
Consumer Credit Review
The State Rules review applies the requirements of over 340 U.S. state laws for Citi Mortgage Rules
consumer residential mortgage loans secured by real property. It enforces the
This review includes certain CitiMortgage® policies available to approved
laws as they relate to:
correspondents.
• Usury rate ceilings percentage caps
• Prohibited fees OFAC Review
• Fee percentage or dollar amount limits The OFAC review compares all of the loan's borrower names and aliases against
the Office of Foreign Assets Control's (OFAC) Specially Designated Nationals,
Blocked Persons and Countries List (i.e., the "SDN" list), Bureau of Industry and

Security Denied Persons list maintained by the U.S. Department of Commerce, NMLS Registration Review
as well as similar lists established by the Canadian and British governments. In The NMLS (Nationwide Mortgage Licensing System) Registration Review review
addition, the Encompass Compliance Service may validate the format for the verifies an individual loan originator’s NMLS information against NMLS data using
borrower's and the co-borrower's Social Security numbers and verifies the Social NMLS B2B Access. The review may be used to test for the applicable individual
Security number against the government's Death Master File list and the "pocket loan originator’s NMLS registration information on seasoned loans, with the
book" numbers list. applicable data and information at the time the loans were closed.
VA Review The Encompass Compliance Service will return Warning or Failure messages if
the loan originator's NMLS unique identifier, name, or license number does not
The VA Enterprise Review contains rules to test for some of the prohibited terms match the NMLS registration data provided by NMLS B2B Access. The service
on VA loans. This review contains the following enterprise rules: also will return the name and license(s) associated with the individual loan
• Federal - Late Charge Limitation (VA) originator’s NMLS unique identifier for easy reference.
• Federal - Grace Period Limitation (VA)
Ability To Pay/Qualified Mortgage Review
• Federal - Discount Points May Not Be Financed in a Purchase Money Loan (VA)
This review checks loans for compliance with the Consumer Financial Protection
• Federal - Discount Points May Not Be Financed in a Cash-Out Refinance Loan Bureau’s (CFPB) amendment to Regulation Z (taking effect on applications on or
(VA) after January 10, 2014) that implements sections 1411, 1412, and 1414 of the
• Federal - Discount Points Limitation in a Rate and Term Refinance Loan (VA) Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (Dodd-Frank Act)
(Warning) and prohibits creditors from making most residential mortgage loans against a
closed end first or junior lien secured by a 1 - 4 unit dwelling unless the creditor
• Federal - Loan Origination Fee 1% Limitation (VA)
makes a reasonable, good faith determination of the consumer's ability to repay
• Federal - Unallowable Itemized Fees (1% Maximum) (VA) the loan. In addition, the rule establishes certain protections for creditors who
• Federal - Loan Origination Fee and Unallowable Itemized Fees Charged (VA) make a “qualified mortgage”. Once the Ability to Repay/Qualified Mortgage review
is run on a loan file, a report is provided that details rate thresholds, fee
• Federal - Rate and Term Refinance Itemized Fees Charged (VA) (IRRL
assessments and discount points that count towards the 3% QM ceiling. This will
Warning)
be reflected under the Ability-to-Repay/Qualified Mortgage Review heading in the
report.
LO Compensation Review
The LO Compensation Review will provide a Warning message on a closed-end Flood Zone Enterprise Rule
loan secured by a 1-4 unit dwelling with an Application Date on or after April 1,
This review checks whether the subject property is in a flood zone. If the subject
2011 that includes the Mortgage Broker (loan originator) receiving any of the
property is in a flood zone, (field ID 2366), an exception message will be returned
following fees from someone other than the Borrower:
if a Flood Insurance Reserve (i.e., a charge mapped to "Insurance Impound -
• Loan Discount (Fee ID 2) Flood" in the Itemization Fee Management) is not included in the loan.
• Yield Spread Premium (Fee ID 12)
Licensing Tests
• RESPA - Your Charge/Credit (Points) amount (Fee ID 15)
Ellie Mae maintains a nationwide database of over 450,000 licensed mortgage
• Prepaid Interest (Fee ID 31)
entities, including lenders and brokers, that is updated as frequently as state
• Interest Rate Buydown Fee (Fee ID 158) regulatory agencies make new licensing information available. The custom
The Encompass Compliance Service will provide a Warning message on a License review uses this database to determine the following:
closed-end loan secured by a 1-4 unit dwelling with an Application Date on or after • The lender assigned to the loan is licensed in a particular jurisdiction.
April 1, 2011 that includes the Mortgage Broker (loan originator) receiving
• The license is active and in good standing.
compensation directly from the Borrower and from another person.
• The license authorizes the lender to originate this transaction type.

The results of the review display in the License section of the compliance report. Report Tab
1 On the Report tab, select a report type from the Report drop-down list.
To Access Compliance Review Setup:
NOTE:The Standard Report (Subscription) option is still provided in the Report
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. drop-down list however this report type is a legacy product and not available to
2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Compliance new Encompass Compliance Service customers. For more information please
Review Setup. contact your Ellie Mae sales representative.
3 If this is the first time you are accessing Compliance Review Setup, click the
Get Setup button in the upper-right corner.
4 If you have already completed the setup but want to change the settings, click
the Change Setup button in the upper-right corner.
Compliance Review Setup Wizard 2 Select the check box to authorize the report purchase.
Use the Compliance Review Setup wizard to select a compliance report type, 3 The Channel option (field ID 2626) selected on the Borrower Summary form
configure the types of reviews to include in the loan check, specify your company's indicates how your company is handling a specific loan, such as Brokered or
lending licenses, set up automatic reporting, enable users to manually run a Banked-Retail, and as you proceed through the Compliance Review Setup
report, and map closing cost fees to the appropriate fields in the Compliance wizard, you will indicate how the loan's channel will be used to trigger certain
Service. compliance tests, to determine which milestone will be used to trigger
compliance reports, and to determine which conditions to apply before running
a compliance report. Use the Default Channel drop-down list to select the
default channel that the system will use for loans where a channel has not been
selected on the Borrower Summary form.
NOTE: If necessary, the Automatic Ordering tab provides a Loan Channel
option where you can indicate that you do not want the system to run a
compliance review if a loan channel has not been selected on the Borrower
Summary form.

4 Using the Configuration Options section, you can set up the review so that rate • To print the company name entered in the Name field on the Company
spread data and geocode data is automatically populated to the HMDA Information page in Encompass Settings on the compliance report, do not
Information form and control the company name that is printed to the top of the select the Use Company Name from 1003 Page 3 check box. This name
compliance report. will print to all compliance reports, regardless of their origination channel.
• To automatically populate the Rate Spread (field ID HMDA.X15),
(If the Use Company Name from 1003 Page 3 check box is currently
MSA Number (field ID 699), County Code (field ID 1396), State Code (field selected, clear the check box.)
ID 1395), and Census Tract (field ID 700) fields on the HMDA Information • To display expanded fee details in the compliance report, select the Display
form during a loan check, select Import Geocode and Rate Spread Data. Expanded Fee Details in Compliance Report check box.
Data from the report will be added to the appropriate fields only if the field is • To automatically add comments to new compliance report results in the TQL
blank. Select Overwrite Existing Field Data to automatically import data Services tool, select the Automatically add comments to new compliance
from the report into the loan fields even if the field contains data. report results in the TQL Services tool check box.
NOTE: In order for the rate spread data to be included in the loan check, you 5 In the Reviews to include section, select your reviews, based on your selection
must also select the Rate Spread Review check box from the list of reviews in Step 1.
at the top of the tab.
NOTE:Companies using the Subscription option agree to pay for Encompass
• Select an option for the Rate Spread value. Compliance Service fees as set forth in the Encompass Compliance Service
NOTE: If the Import Geocode and Rate Spread Data check box is not contract. Click the Terms & Conditions link on the Report tab in the Setup
selected, these options are disabled. Wizard for details about each agreement.
• Round Rate Spread - The rate spread is rounded to two decimal places, • Standard Report (Subscription)
based on the value in the third decimal place. If the third decimal place is The Standard Report (Subscription) is a legacy product and not available to
0 to 4, the value is round down. If the third decimal place is 5 to 9, the value new Encompass Compliance Service customers. For more information
is round up. please contact your Ellie Mae sales representative.
For example, if the rate spread is 10.254, then it should be round down to This option includes the following reviews:
10.25. If the rate spread is 10.299, then it should be round up to 10.30.
• TILA/TILA-RESPA Review
NOTE:This is the default option.
• HOEPA Review
• Truncate Rate Spread - The rate spread is truncated to two decimal
• Higher Priced Mortgage Review
places.
• GSE Review
For example, if the rate spread is 10.254, then it should be truncated to
10.25. If the rate spread is 10.299, then it should be truncated to 10.29. • Consumer Credit Review
• Home Mortgage Disclosure Act (HMDA) Review
• Regardless of which option is selected, if the rate spread has less than two
decimal places, zeros are added so the rate spread has two decimals. If the • Rate Spread Review
rate spread is a number less than 10.0 (e.g., 9.99), a leading zero is added • FHA Review
so the ten's place always has a digit. • Citi Mortgage Rules
• To print the company name that is entered in the Company Name field (field • OFAC Review
ID 315) on the 1003 - Page 3 input form, select the Use Company Name
• VA Review
from 1003 Page 3 check box.
• LO Compensation Review
• If you want the company name entered on the 1003 - Page 3 to print to the
compliance report only for loans going through specific loan origination • NMLS Registration Review
channels, select the check box (or check boxes) for the desired channel. • Ability to Repay/Qualified Mortgage Review
For example, if you want this name to print to the compliance report for all • Flood Zone Enterprise Rule
loans going through the Banked - Retail or Brokered origination channels,
select the Banked - Retail and Brokered check boxes.

For information on setting up these reviews, refer to the Premium Report • Select Run Components only when a specific Milestone is reached
(Subscription) or Premium Report (Closed Loan Pricing) section. if you want a component to be run when a specific milestone is reached.
A list of components is displayed.
• Premium Report (Subscription) or Premium Report (Closed Loan
Pricing) • In the Milestone column, select which milestone will trigger each
component to run.
1 Clear the TILA/TILA-RESPA Review check box if you do not want to
include the TILA/TILA-RESPA review in the loan check. • By default, the Enabled check box will be selected and the
component will run when the specified milestone is reached. If the
2 If you are including the TILA/TILA-RESPA Review, click the Edit icon to
Enable check box is cleared, that component will be disabled.
designate required channels, milestones, fields that must be satisfied
before the TILA/TILA-RESPA Review will run, manage which components Additional Settings Tab
of the review is run, when the finance charge tolerance portion of the • In the TILA Finance Charge Run Conditions section, if you want the
review will run, how a rebate will be treated, select whether the Loan finance charge tolerance portion of the review to run, select Run
Estimate or Closing Disclosure preview will be run, or select whether Review only when a certain Milestone is reached from the drop-
investment properties will be included in the TILA-RESPA rules. down list, and then select the milestone from the appropriate drop-down
Review Requirements Tab list. Select a milestone for each loan channel as needed.
• In the Required Channel Types section, if you want the TILA/TILA- NOTE:The Select Additional Condition applies to the entire TILA/TILA-
RESPA Review to be included in the loan check only for loans in a RESPA Review.
specific loan channel, select the Channel check box, and then select • The available milestones under each corresponding TILA Review
the check box for each loan channel you want to specify. finance charge run condition channel are ones that are equal to or
• Select No additional condition from the drop-down list if you do not later than the milestones selected in the TILA/TILA-RESPA Review
want to apply any conditions to the review. run condition channels.
• To restrict the review from being performed until a specific milestone • The milestone selected in the corresponding channel under the
has been finished, select Run Review only when a certain TILA/TILA-RESPA Review run conditions is the default channel
Milestone is reached from the drop-down list, and then select the selected under the TILA Finance Charge run conditions for that
milestone from the appropriate drop-down list. Select a milestone for channel.
each loan channel as needed. • In the Prepaid Finance Charge Credit Settings section, if you want to
NOTE:For loans where a loan channel (field ID 2626) has not been indicate how a rebate should be treated, select an option from the drop-
selected on the Borrower Summary, the system uses the Default down list and then one of the radio button options.
Channel you selected on the Report tab when determining the starting • Apply rebate until Amount Financed equals the Note Amount
milestone for the TILA Review. (Default) - A fee submitted as a negative prepaid finance charge
• To restrict the review from being performed until specific fields are offsets a fee submitted as a positive prepaid finance charge. ECS
populated, select Run Review only when certain Fields are filled allows this until the Calculated Federal Amount Financed equals the
in from the drop-down list, and then select the desired fields from the note amount.
Required Fields list. NOTE:If you select Apply rebate until Amount Financed equals
Components Tab the Note Amount (Default), only the For all Negative Prepaid
Finance Charges option is available.
Each component of the TILA-RESPA Review can be configured to either
be applied or suppressed for an individual loan review. You must select NOTE:ECS will not allow the sum of all fees characterized as a
whether to run a component of the review at all, and at what point prepaid finance charge to go below $0.00.
(milestone) the component should be run. • Apply rebate even if the Amount Financed exceeds the Note
Amount - For all Negative Prepaid Finance Charges - A fee
submitted as a negative prepaid finance charge offsets a fee
submitted as a positive prepaid finance charge. If the sum of all

prepaid finance charge fees is less than $0.00, ECS allows that • Select the 0.125% for regular loans... option to set up the report to note
negative amount to increase the Calculated Federal Amount a violation if there is difference between the disclosed APR and the
Financed above the note amount. current APR greater than .125% when reviewing a loan or if there is a
• Apply rebate even if the Amount Financed exceeds the Note
difference between the disclosed APR and current APR greater than
Amount - For Negative Prepaid Interest Only - A fee submitted as .25% when reviewing an irregular loan
a negative prepaid finance charge offsets a fee submitted as a More Information About APR and Finance Charge Tolerances
positive prepaid finance charge. If the sum of all prepaid finance
When the APR and Finance Charge Tolerance option is included in
charge fees is less than $0.00, ECS allows only negative prepaid
the TILA/TILA-RESPA Review, the Encompass Compliance Service
interest fee to increase the Calculated Federal Amount Financed
does not test for APR over disclosure unless it is configured as part of
above the note amount.
a Custom Report. In addition, the Encompass Compliance Service
• Apply rebate even if the Amount Financed exceeds the Note does not receive sufficient information to determine whether the APR is
Amount - For all Negative Prepaid Finance Charges excluding closer to the "actual APR" and therefore does not test for tolerances
Negative Prepaid Interest - A fee submitted as a negative prepaid pursuant to 12 C.F.R. § 226.22(a)(5).
finance charge offsets a fee submitted as a positive prepaid finance
Regulation Z defines the "accuracy" of the closed-end APR in 12 C.F.R.
charge. If the sum of all prepaid finance charge fees is less than
§ 226.22. As a general rule, the disclosed APR is considered accurate
$0.00, ECS allows all negative prepaid finance charge fees, except
if it is not more than .125% above or below the APR determined in
the negative prepaid interest, to increase the Calculated Federal
accordance with 12 C.F.R. § 226.22(a)(1). In an "irregular transaction",
Amount Financed above the note amount.
the APR is considered accurate if it is not more than .25% above or
NOTE:ECS will not allow the prepaid interest to be less than $0.00. below the APR. An "irregular transaction" is one that includes one or
• In the TILA-RESPA Preview Settings section, if you want to indicate more of the following features (as defined in 12 C.F.R. § 226.22(a)(2)
which preview (Loan Estimate or Closing Disclosure) should be and (3)):
performed for a specific loan channel, select the milestone from the • Multiple advances
appropriate drop-down list.
• Irregular payment periods, or
NOTE:You should only consider this setting when there is one or more
• Irregular payment amounts (other than an irregular first period or an
Loan Estimates included within Disclosure Tracking but no included
irregular first or final payment)
Closing Disclosures.
Because most creditors and secondary market purchasers prefer a
• In the Investment Property Applicability section, if you want to include
more conservative test, you have the option of using the more
investment properties in the TILA-RESPA (Know Before You Owe)
restrictive 0.125% for all loans option or applying "the benefit of the
rules, select one or both of the check boxes.
quarter" to irregular transactions (i.e., the 0.125% for regular loans
• Select Apply TILA-RESPA Rules to Investment Properties if you and 0.25% for irregular loans option). If you chose to apply the more
want to include investment properties in the TILA-RESPA rules. liberal test to irregular transactions, the Encompass Compliance
• Select Apply TILA-RESPA Rules to Owner-Occupied Rental Service uses the following criteria to determine the loan's status as
Properties if you want to include owner-occupied rental properties in irregular:
the TILA-RESPA rules. • A closed-end loan secured by a 1-4 unit dwelling that has:
• When finished, click Save. • More than one advance in the payment stream
3 If you are including the TILA/TILA-RESPA Review, select the tolerance to • More than three payment streams
apply to loan reviews using the APR and Finance Charge Tolerance
• Payments that are not equal in amount (except for the first and/or
options.
last payment), or
• Select 0.125% for all loans to set up the report to note a violation if there
• Payment periods that are not equal (the first payment period can
is a difference between the disclosed APR and the current APR
be different).
greater than .125% when reviewing any type of loan.

4 Clear the MDIA check box if you do not want to include the MDIA review •To restrict the review from being performed until a specific milestone
in the loan check. has been finished, select Run Review only when a certain Milestone
NOTE:When the MDIA check box is selected, the MDIA review will be is reached from the drop-down list, select the milestone from the
performed on all loans, including investment properties. appropriate drop-down list, and then select a milestone for each loan
channel as needed.
5 Select the TILA Right of Rescission check box to include the
NOTE:For loans where a loan channel (field ID 2626) has not been
TILA ROR review in your loan check If you are including this review, click
selected on the Borrower Summary, the system uses the Default
the Edit icon to designate required channels or milestones that must be
Channel you selected on the Report tab when determining the starting
satisfied before the review will be performed on the loan.
milestone for the GSE Review.
• To indicate that you want the TILA ROR to be included in the loan check
• To restrict the review from being performed based on loan type, select
only for loans in a specific loan channel, select the Channel check box,
and then select the check box for each loan channel you want to Run Review only when certain Fields are filled in from the drop-
specify. down list, and then select the type of loans you want to be reviewed
from the Required Loan Types list.
• To restrict the review from being performed until a specific milestone
• When finished, click Save.
has been finished, select Run Review only when a certain Milestone
is reached from the drop-down list, select the milestone from the 8 Clear the HMDA Review check box if you do not want to include the
appropriate drop-down list, and then select a milestone for each loan HMDA review in the loan check.
channel as needed. 9 If you are including the HMDA Review, click the Edit icon to designate
NOTE:For loans where a loan channel (field ID 2626) has not been required channels, milestones, or fields that must be satisfied before the
selected on the Borrower Summary, the system uses the Default HMDA Review will run.
Channel you selected on the Report tab when determining the starting • To indicate that you want the HMDA Review to be included in the loan
milestone for the TILA ROR. check only for loans in a specific loan channel, select the check box for
• When finished indicating required loan channels or milestones, click each loan channel you want to specify or select the Channel check box
Save. to select all channels.
• When working with dates for this review, input the last day of the RTC • By default, Run Review only when a certain Milestone is reached is
expiration regardless of the funding date. selected in drop-down list. This selection restricts the review from being
performed until a specific milestone has been finished. Select a
6 Clear the GSE Review check box if you do not want to include the GSE
milestone for each loan channel (default setting is “Submittal”) as
HUD-HOEPA Mortgage High Cost Thresholds review in the loan check.
needed.
7 If you are including the GSE Review, click the Edit icon to designate
NOTE:For loans where a loan channel (field ID 2626) has not been
required channels, milestones, or loan types that must be satisfied before
the GSE Review will run.
Channel you selected on the Report tab when determining the starting
• To indicate that you want the GSE Review to be included in the loan milestone for the HMDA Review.
check only for loans in a specific loan channel, select the Channel
• Select No additional condition from the drop-down list if you do not
check box, and then select the check box for each loan channel you
want to specify. want to apply any conditions to the review.
• Select No additional condition from the drop-down list if you do not • To restrict the review from being performed until specific fields are
want to apply any conditions to the review. populated, select Run Review only when certain Fields are filled in
from the drop-down list, and then select the desired fields from the
Required Fields list.
10Clear the NMLS Registration Review check box if you do not want to
include the NMLS review in the loan check.

11If you include the NMLS Review, click the Edit icon to indicate if the review • To restrict the review from being performed until a specific milestone
is performed as of the application date, consummation date, or both. has been finished, select Run Review only when a certain
• In the NMLS Review Date section, select the milestones at which the Milestone is reached from the drop-down list, and then select the
NMLS review should be run. milestone from the appropriate drop-down list. Select a milestone for
each loan channel as needed.
NOTE:You can select either the Application Date, Consummation Date,
or both. NOTE:For loans where a loan channel (field ID 2626) has not been
• If only the Application Date is selected, the NMLS Review only checks Channel you selected on the Report tab when determining the starting
the loan’s current finished milestone as of the application date. milestone for the Ability to Repay/Qualified Mortgage Review.
• If only the Consummation Date is selected, the NMLS Review only Components Tab
checks the loan’s current finished milestone as of the consummation
date. Each component of the Ability to Repay/Qualified Mortgage Review can be
configured to either be applied or suppressed for an individual loan review.
• If you select both the Application and Consummation date for a You must select whether to run a component of the review at all, and at
milestone, select whether registration is required as of BOTH the what point (milestone) the component should be run.
Application Date AND Consummation Date or as of EITHER the
Application Date OR Consummation Date in the drop-down field. • Select Run components only when a specific Milestone is reached
if you want a component to be run when a specific milestone is reached.
• If both the Application Date and the Consummation Date are selected
A list of components is displayed.
and the drop-down selection is “Application Date AND Consummation
Date”, the NMLS Review checks the loan’s current finished milestone • In the Milestone column, select which milestone will trigger each
as of the application date and the consummation date, and returns a component to run.
failure if the loan officer is not registered/sponsored as of either date. • By default, the Enabled check box will be selected and the
• If both the Application Date and the Consummation Date is selected component will run when the specified milestone is reached. If the
and the drop-down selection is “Application Date OR Consummation Enable check box is cleared, that component will be disabled.
Date”, the NMLS Review checks the loan’s current finished milestone Additional Settings Tab
as of the application date and the consummation date, and returns a
failure if the loan officer is not registered/sponsored as of both dates. • The Ability-to-Repay Loan Type field (field ID QM.X23) on the
ATR/QM Management tool’s ATR/QM Eligibility tab is automatically
• When finished, click Save. populated based on specific data in the loan file. The value populated
12Clear the Ability to Repay/Qualified Mortgage Review check box if you to this field determines what type of ATR review the Encompass
do not want to include the ATR/QM review in the loan check. Compliance Service performs. In the Default Ability to Repay Loan
Type section, select a default ATR loan type. For loans where the
13If you are including the Ability to Repay/Qualified Mortgage Review, click
Ability-to-Repay Loan Type field (field ID QM.X23) on the ATR/QM
the Edit icon to designate required channels that must be satisfied, as well
Management tool’s ATR/QM Eligibility tab is blank, the compliance
as conditions that must be met, before the review will be performed on the
review will run the ATR/QM rules that apply to the ATR loan type
loan.
selected here.
Review Requirements Tab
• The Qualified Mortgage Loan Type field (field ID QM.X24) on the
• To indicate that you want the Ability to Repay/Qualified Mortgage ATR/QM Management tool’s ATR/QM Eligibility tab is automatically
Review to be included in the loan check only for loans in a specific loan populated based on specific data in the loan file. The value populated
channel, select the check box for each loan channel you want to specify to this field determines what type of QM review you want the
or select the Channel check box to select all channels. Encompass Compliance Service to perform. In the Default Qualified
• Select No additional condition from the drop-down list if you do not Mortgage Loan Type section, select a default QM loan type. For loans
want to apply any conditions to the review. where the Qualified Mortgage Loan Type field (field ID QM.X24) on

the ATR/QM Management tool’s ATR/QM Eligibility tab is blank, the Fee, Escrow Waiver Fee, Funding Fee, HOA Certification Handling Fee,
compliance review will run the ATR/QM rules that apply to the QM Interest Rate Buy Down Fee, Loan Tie In Fee, MERS(R) Registration Fee,
loan type selected here. Modification/Amendment Fee, Mortgage Insurance Application Fee, Office
Expenses, Other Impound, Processing Fee, Program Participation Fee,
Recording Fees-Assignment, Reinspection Fee, RESPA-Our Origination
14Select any additional reviews to include in the loan check. Charge RESPA-Title Services and Lender's Title Insurance, RESPA- Your
15Click Next. Charge/Credit (Points), Rush Fee, Servicing Release Premium, Signing Agent
Fee, Yield Spread Premium, Subordination Fee, Underwriting Fee, Unknown
• Custom Report
Fee-Finance Charge, VA Funding Fee, Verification Fee, Wire Transfer Fee,
Custom reports are set up by Ellie Mae based on your company's Appraisal Desk Review Fee, Appraisal Field Review Fee, Appraisal Review
configuration and loan volume. Contact your sales representative to Fee, Document Preparation Fee, Document Redraw Fee, Notary Fee, Payoff
determine the reviews to include the report. Custom reports cannot be used Demand Fee, Settlement or Closing Fee, Subordination Preparation Fee, and
unless you obtain a custom service code (e.g., excluding Saturdays from a Unknown Fee-Non Finance Charge.
report) from Ellie Mae Technical Support.
New Jersey Mortgage Loan Provisions (NJAC 3:1-16) Position
For information on setting up the reviews, refer to the Premium Report
(Subscription) or Premium Report (Closed Loan Pricing) section. Select this check box to deviate from the standard Encompass Compliance
Service rules and apply modified rules to certain New Jersey first lien closed-
6 In the Compliance Deviations section, select the New Jersey First Lien Third loan fee exceptions.
Party Fee Position, New Jersey Mortgage Loan Provisions (NJAC 3:1-16)
Position, or Washington First Lien Fee Position check box to deviate from NOTE: This check box was introduced in the ECS December 2017 Service
the standard Encompass Compliance Service rules and apply modified rules Pack.
to certain New Jersey first lien third party fee exceptions, certain New Jersey • After selecting the check box, read the Ellie Mae, Inc. Amendment to
first lien closed-loan fee exceptions, or certain Washington first lien fees. Agreement Governing the Use of the Encompass Compliance Service.
New Jersey First Lien Third Party Fee Position • If you agree with the terms, select the I have read, fully understand, accept
Select this check box to deviate from the standard Encompass Compliance and agree... check box, and then click I Accept.
Service rules and apply modified rules to certain New Jersey first lien • If you do not agree to the terms, click I Decline, and then click Yes to confirm
third-party fee exceptions. your decision. The position will not be in effect when compliance reports are
run.
• After selecting the check box, read the Ellie Mae, Inc. Amendment to
Agreement Governing the Use of the Encompass Compliance Service. By selecting this option, the system will not apply the fee limitation rules under
NJAC 3:1-16.2, based upon other New Jersey or federal law requirements, to
• If you agree with the terms, select the I have read, fully understand, accept
a State or Federally-chartered bank, savings bank, savings and loan
and agree... check box, and then click I Accept.
association, or credit union that is located in New Jersey or has a branch office
• If you do not agree to the terms, click I Decline, and then click Yes to confirm located in New Jersey.
your decision. The position will not be in effect when compliance reports are
run. Washington First Lien Fee Position
NOTE: If you do not apply this New Jersey First Lien Third Party Fee position, Select this check box to deviate from the standard Encompass Compliance
a Failure message (The New Jersey Licensed Lenders Act (N.J. Rev. Stat. Service rules and apply modified rules to certain Washington first lien fees.
17:11C-23; N. J. ADC 3:1-16.2) does not allow {(Fee Name) (Fee ID:__)} to • After selecting the check box, read the Ellie Mae, Inc. Amendment to
be charged to the Borrower in NJ.) will be included in the State Rules section Agreement Governing the Use of the Encompass Compliance Service.
of compliance reports run on first lien New Jersey loans if the borrower pays
• If you agree with the terms, select the I have read, fully understand, accept
any of the following fees: Administration Fee, Annual Assessments-Impound,
and agree... check box, and then click I Accept.
Assignment Fee, Assumption Fee, Bankruptcy Monitoring Fee, Bond Fee,
Bond Review Fee, Broker Fees, CLO Access Fee, Closing Protection Letter, • If you do not agree to the terms, click I Decline, and then click Yes to confirm
Compliance Testing Fee, Document Assembly Fee, Escrow Account Servicing your decision. The position will not be in effect when compliance reports are
run.

By selecting this option, you are requesting two modifications to the standard The Encompass Compliance Service user has requested the modification
compliance rules. See below for a definition of the standard rules and the that all first lien Processed Loans be excluded from the Standard Rule.
requested modifications. Pursuant to this request, Modified Rules will be created that will exclude all
first lien Processed Loans submitted by the user from the Standard Rule
• Standard Rule:
described above. The Modified Rules will not fail a first lien Processed Loan
The Encompass Compliance Service applies the Consumer Loan Act when the total of all fees, except for Loan Discount, paid by the Borrower and
("CLA") to all loans made by a CLA licensee secured by real property located paid to the Lender, exceeds 4% of the first $20,000 or 2% percent thereafter
in Washington. The CLA regulator advised outside counsel that only fees of the principal amount of the loan. Therefore, the user will not receive failure
expressly authorized under the CLA are permitted. RCW 31.04.105(2); WAC messages on first lien Processed Loans that would otherwise trigger the
208-620-555; WAC 208-620-560(6). As the regulator interprets this above Standard Rule.
requirement strictly, and the Loan Origination Fee, Loan Discount Fee, and
Commitment Fee are the only fees that a lender is expressly permitted to License Tab
charge as of January 1, 2010, the Encompass Compliance Service will fail
the loan if any fee other than a Loan Origination Fee, Loan Discount, or NOTE: State rules and licensing reviews are not included in Standard Reports.
Commitment Fee is charged to the Borrower and paid to the Lender. The When you reach this point in the Standard Report setup, click Next to proceed to
Encompass Compliance Service applies the CLA lender fee restriction to the Automatic Ordering tab.
both first and subordinate lien loans. 1 On the License tab, select a Broker Type from the drop-down list.
Requested Modification:
The Encompass Compliance Service user has requested the modification
that all first lien Processed Loans be excluded from the Standard Rule.
Pursuant to this request, a Modified Rule will be created that will exclude all
first lien Processed Loans submitted by the user from the Standard Rule
described above. The Modified Rule will not fail a first lien Processed Loan
when any fee other than a Loan Origination Fee, Loan Discount, or
Administration Fee is charged to the Borrower and paid to the Lender.
Therefore, the user will not receive a failure message on first lien Processed
Loans that would otherwise trigger the above Standard Rule.
• Standard Rule:
The Encompass Compliance Service applies the Consumer Loan Act
("CLA") to all loans made by a CLA licensee secured by real property located
in Washington. The CLA regulator advised outside counsel that only fees
expressly authorized under the CLA are permitted. RCW 31.04.105(2); WAC
208-620-555; WAC 208-620-560(6). The Revised Code of Washington
provides: "Every licensee may ... In connection with the making of a loan,
charge the borrower a nonrefundable, prepaid, loan origination fee not to
exceed four percent of the first twenty thousand dollars and two percent
thereafter of the principal amount of the loan advanced to or for the direct
2 If your company is a depository institution, select the company's Home State
benefit of the borrower, which fee may be included in the principal balance of
from the drop-down list.
the loan;" RCW § 31.04.105(2). The Encompass Compliance Service applies
this CLA maximum lender fee restriction to both first and subordinate lien • The home state is the state where the company's main (or home) office is
loans. located. The applicable laws of the home state are applied to the loan.
Requested Modification: • If State Licensed Lender - Non Depository Institution (STLIC) was selected
in step 1, the Home State drop-down list is disabled.

3 To display only licenses for a specific state, select the state from the License • Apply the Credit Grantor Revolving Credit Provisions (Title 12, Subtitle 9)
Type in drop-down list. to all open-end loans secured by a 1-4 unit dwelling on real property
4 Specify each license that your company has by selecting the corresponding located in Maryland consummated on or after January 1, 2019.
check box in the Select column. • Apply the Credit Grantor Closed End Credit Provisions (Title 12, Subtitle
10) to all closed-end loans secured by a 1-4 unit dwelling on real property
• When you select a license, the Exempt check box displays. Select the
located in Maryland consummated on or after January 1, 2019.
Exempt check box if you do not want the Encompass Compliance Service to
apply any license or compliance rules associated with that license in the DO NOT select any of the Credit Grantor Law Election options unless you have
property state. confirmed that the loan documents contain a written election to use the Credit
Grantor Law for that type of loan. Please contact your Ellie Mae sales
• State Licensed Lender - Non Depository Institutions must be licensed in
representative for more information.Statutory Election in Kansas
every state in which it lends unless it is exempt from licensing.
Statutory Election in Kansas
5 Select a statutory election for first lien, subordinate lien, junior, closed-end, and
open-end loans in Maryland and Kansas. Kansas law specifies the loan types subject to the Kansas Usury Law and to
Statutory Election in Maryland the Kansas Uniform Consumer Credit Code (UCCC). However, the Kansas
Usury Law permits the parties to a loan to agree in writing to make the
Maryland law permits a lender to elect to make a loan under the Maryland transaction subject to the UCCC for loans that would otherwise be subject to
Credit Grantor Law if the choice to do so is specified in the loan documents the Usury law. (See Kan. Stat. Ann. §16-207(i)(3).)
[MD COML §12-913.1 and §12-1013.1]. If this election is not made and
• No Statutory Election - If you select this option, the Encompass Compliance
documented in writing, then other laws in Maryland govern the loan.
Service will apply the Kansas Usury Law to all first lien loans with a loan-to-
• No Statutory Election - If you select this option, the Compliance Review value (LTV) of 100% or less and apply the Kansas Uniform Consumer Credit
service will apply the Interest and Usury Provisions to all Maryland loans Code (UCCC) to all subordinate lien loans and all fixed rate first lien loans
consummated on or after January 1, 2019. with an LTV of more than 100%.
• Credit Grantor Law Election (for All Loans) - If you select this option, the • Kansas UCCC Election For All Loans - If you select this option, the
Encompass Compliance Service will: Encompass Compliance Service will apply the Kansas UCCC to all loans
• Apply the Credit Grantor Revolving Credit Provisions (Title 12, Subtitle 9) secured by real property in Kansas.
to all Maryland open-end loans consummated on or after January 1, 2019. 6 The Channel option selected on the Borrower Summary form indicates how
• Apply the Credit Grantor Closed End Credit Provisions (Title 12, Subtitle your company is handling a specific loan, such as Brokered or Banked. Use
10) to all Maryland closed-end loans consummated on or after January 1, the Default Channel drop-down list to select the channel to use for loans where
2019. a channel has not been selected on the Borrower Summary.
• Credit Grantor Law Election (for 1-4 unit, Junior Liens Only) - If you 7 Click Next.
select this option, the Encompass Compliance Service will:
• Apply the Credit Grantor Revolving Credit Provisions (Title 12, Subtitle 9)
to all open-end, subordinate lien loans secured by a 1-4 unit dwelling on
real property located in Maryland consummated on or after January 1,
2019.
• Apply the Credit Grantor Closed End Credit Provisions (Title 12, Subtitle
10) to all closed-end, subordinate lien loans secured by a 1-4 unit dwelling
on real property located in Maryland consummated on or after January 1,
2019.
• Credit Grantor Law Election (for 1-4 Unit Only) - If you select this option,
the Encompass Compliance Service will:

Automatic Ordering Tab • To select a milestone, select the type of report to run: Preview or Review.
By default, reports will be run automatically at the completion of the selected NOTE: Preview reports enable you to test for compliance issues before
milestones. ordering a full compliance review report or disclosing to the borrower. With a
preview, the final loan data is not reviewed. The results are based on the loan's
1 On the Automatic Ordering tab, select Enabled to enable automatic ordering.
current APR and finance charge amounts, not the disclosed values.
• Click Copy these settings to all Channel tabs to copy the milestone
selections you have made on the channel tab you are currently viewing to the
other three channel tabs.
• For loans where a loan channel (field ID 2626) has not been selected on the
Borrower Summary, the system uses the Default Channel you selected on
the Report tab when determining trigger milestones.
• A report can be run on the same loan multiple times at no additional charge.
4 Optionally, select loan criteria to apply to the report. Reports will only be run on
loans that match the selected criteria.
• If you do not select any criteria, the report will be run on all loans.
• If you do not want compliance reports to be run on loans that do not have a
loan channel selected, select Loan Channel, and then ensure that the No
Channel Selected check box is cleared (i.e., not selected). Then select the
check box for each loan channel in which the Automatic Ordering settings will
apply.
5 Click Next.
• After enabling automatic ordering and saving the additional setup settings, if Users Tab
you select Disabled later on, automatic ordering is disabled but the Use this tab to enable users to manually order a report for a loan (all selected
configuration settings you set up are saved for future use. users will be allowed to manually order a report at any point during the loan
2 If automatic ordering is enabled, select the Run an Audit Before Ordering process) and to clear alerts.
check box to display the Compliance Review Audit Results window before a NOTE: If you do not want any users to have rights to manually order reports or
report is run. clear alerts, clear all selected check boxes. Click Yes when asked if you want to
• If errors occur when the report is run, this window opens with a list of the continue to the next tab in the wizard.
errors (typically due to inconsistent data). You can select a list item, and then
1 On the Users tab, select the Order Report check box for each user to whom
click Go to Field to open a form with the field highlighted for entry.
you want to grant manual ordering rights.
3 In the Trigger Milestone section, click the Banked-Retail, Banked-Wholesale,
Brokered, or Correspondent tab, and then select at least one milestone from
the Milestone list. The report will run automatically at the completion of each
selected milestone.
• Using the tabs provided, you can set up different trigger milestones for loans
based on the loan's origination channel.

• To grant manual ordering rights to all users, select the Order Report check • When selected, an unmapped fee will be categorized as Other - Non-Finance
box at the top of the Order Report column so that each user’s check box is Charge (Fee ID 998) if the fee's APR indicator check box (field ID SYS.X17)
selected. on the 2010 or 2015 Itemization form is not selected.
• If you do not want a user to be able to order a compliance report, clear the • An unmapped fee will be categorized as Other - Finance Charge (fee ID 999)
user’s check box. if the fee's APR indicator check box on the 2010 or 2015 Itemization form is
2 To enable a user to clear a “Compliance Review - Did Not Pass” alert that is selected.
returned after ordering a compliance report for a loan, select the Clear Alert 2 Optionally, enter one or more email addresses in the Admin Email Address
check box for the user. text box. If a processing error occurs during the loan review due to a fee that
• Enabled users are provided with a Clear Alert button on the Compliance
was not mapped or was mapped incorrectly, an email alert message will be
Review screen. When viewing a completed compliance report, these users sent to these email addresses.
can click this button to remove the “Compliance Review - Did Not Pass” alert • When adding multiple email addresses, separate each one using a comma
that is added to the Log every time a loan does not pass a loan check. Note or semicolon.
that even though the alert is removed, the loan's compliance issues remain 3 Click Finish.
until they are corrected.
NOTE: For detailed information about how the Encompass Compliance Service
• To enable all users to have access to the Clear Alert button, select the Clear
interprets and treats specific fees, as well as tips and best practices for managing
Alert check box at the top of the Clear Alert column so that each user’s check and mapping fees, refer to the Using the Encompass Compliance Service guide.
box is selected. This guide also provides a description of each mapped compliance field available
• To hide this button from a user, clear the Clear Alert check box for the user. in the Encompass Compliance Service.
3 Use the Search options to filter the Users list or search for users:
To Start the Encompass Compliance Service:
• Select an option from the drop-down list to display only users with the
selected persona in the Users list. The Encompass Compliance Service starts automatically after you have
completed all of the steps in the setup wizard. If you have stopped the service,
• Enter a user's name or other search criteria in the text box and then click
follow these steps to restart it:
Search. User names matching the search criteria are displayed.
1 Click the Start Service button in the upper-right corner.
• Click Clear to remove all search criteria.
2 Click OK.
4 Click Next.
NOTE: Before the service can begin analyzing loans, you must exit Encompass,
Fee Mapping Tab re-open it, and then log back in.
Use this tab to select the option to Use Encompass Finance Charge Indicator
To Stop the Encompass Compliance Service:
for Unmapped Fees and to enter email addresses for error notifications.
1 Click the Stop Service button in the upper-right corner.
NOTE: All of your 2010 or 2015 Itemization fees must be mapped to specific
fields in the Encompass Compliance Service so that compliance reports contain 2 Click Yes in response to the confirmation message.
complete and accurate results. Use the Itemization Fee Management setting in 3 Click OK.
Encompass Settings to map these fees. The Itemization Fee Management help NOTE: Your Compliance Review Setup settings are saved and will be available
topic provides detailed instructions for using the Itemization Fee Management for use the next time you start the service.
setting to map your fees to the corresponding Encompass Compliance Service
fees. It also describes how fees are treated and interpreted by the Encompass
Compliance Service and includes a description of each default fee used by the
service.
1 Select the Use Encompass Finance Charge Indicator for Unmapped Fees
check box to enable the loan's APR setting to determine how unmapped fees
are categorized by the Encompass Compliance Service.

4506T Service • Medium QC - QC is run for essential categories. Alerts are sent when
information required to process the report is missing.
Use the 4506T Service setting to start or stop the 4506-T Service in Encompass,
• No QC - No QC is run on the 4506-T order. Requests are sent to the IRS
and select the Encompass users who can access the service. After you start the
regardless of any issues on the 4506-T form.
service, the selected users can click the Order 4506-T button on the Request for
Transcript of Tax form to order 4506-T products electronically, check the status of NOTE: After you select an option, the types of alerts that users will receive are
orders, and retrieve electronic documents when an order is complete. listed in the QC Alerts section.
6 In the Configuration Options section, select an Income Variance Tolerance
To Select Users and Start the Service: percentage to include when ordering transcripts. This is the allowable
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. difference between the tax information in the loan file and the 4506-T
2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click 4506T Service. transcript.
• When you first access the setting, a sign-up screen displays. To sign up for 7 If there is a possibility that you will publish the loan to an investor, select the
the service, click the Sign Up button, review the license agreement, and then Investor-Specific Rules check box to automatically apply the investor's rules
click I Accept. to Request for Transcript of Tax forms.
NOTE: Investors may have different requirements. Check with your investor
for their requirements.
• Selecting this check box automatically enters 1040 and selects option c
(Record of Account) on line 6, and sets the end dates for the Year or period
requested on line 9 to 12/31 for the previous two years.
3 To narrow the list of users, select a persona from the list or type all or part of a
user's name in the Enter Name field, and then click Search. 8 Select the Default CoreLogic information for section 5 check box to
• Click Clear to clear the search criteria. automatically populated section 5 of the Request for Transcript of Tax input
form with data for CoreLogic (the company that provides 4506-T services
4 Select a check box to grant access to a user, or select or clear the check box
through the Ellie Mae Network) when a user creates a loan.
at the top of the column to grant or deny access to all your users.
• The company name of the Encompass user populates in the First Name field.
NOTE: After you change the user selections, you can click the Restore icon
to return to your previously saved user configuration. • The Encompass user's mailbox number at CoreLogic populates in the Last
Name field.
5 In the QC Alert Level Setup section, select one of the options to configure the
level of quality control alerts that users will receive regarding issues that arise • The CoreLogic address populates in the remaining fields.
when an order is submitted: NOTE: When a new loan is added to Encompass by duplicating or importing
• Full QC - Full QC is run against the 4506-T order. Alerts are triggered when a loan file, existing Section 5 data is not overwritten with CoreLogic data.
any issues are identified. This is the default setting.

9 In the Transcript Configuration Options section, select options to configure To Select Investors:
page numbering and PDF file organization of the 4506-T reports. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click TQL Services.
• In the Custom Page Numbering section, select an option from the drop-down
list to configure how pages are numbered in the file containing your 4506-T
reports.
• In the Multi-Year Reports section, select options to create a single 4506-T
report or multiple reports (one for each year) in PDF format.
• Select the Add transcripts to Verification Timeline screen automatically
after ordering check box to display ordered 4506-T transcripts in the Income
Verification Timeline panel of the Verification and Documentation Tracking 3 Select or clear the individual check boxes to select the investors who will be
Tool. available on the TQL Services tool.
10 To start the service, click the Start Service button. • Or, select or clear the check box at the top of the column to select or clear all
the investor check boxes.
11 After you start the service, click the Stop Service button to stop the service.
4 To set an investor that will be selected by default on the TQL Services tool,
NOTE: When you stop the service, your settings are saved and will be applied select an investor and then click Set Default.
the next time you start the service.
5 In the TQL Services Check Prior to Export panel, select one of the following
12 When finished, click the Save icon. options to configure settings for the export and printouts of documents that do
NOTE: By enabling the 4506T Service, you agree to the terms and conditions in not satisfy TQL Services rules:
the Agreement Governing the Use of the Ellie Mae 4506-T Service document. • No Warning - warning messages will not be displayed and the documents
Click the link at the bottom of the 4506T Service setting to view the agreement. can be printed/exported
• Warning - a warning message will display but the documents can be
printed/exported
TQL Services
• Warning and Hard Stop - warning message will display and the documents
Use the TQL Services setting to select the investors who will be visible on the can be printed/exported only after the TQL Services rules are satisfied
drop-down list in the TQL Services tool. The TQL Services tool can be used to
6 In the TQL Services Check Prior to Send Files to Lender panel, select one of
share 4506-T transcripts, compliance reports, fraud reports and associated
the following options to configure settings for sending files that do not satisfy
commentary with participating investors, enabling them to review the documents
TQL Services rules to lenders:
and ensure loans meet their loan quality requirements. The TQL Services setting
displays the investor's name and a brief description of the type of services • No Warning - warning messages will not be displayed and the documents
required by each investor. can be sent
NOTE: Investors must approve your company before the investor will be • Warning - a warning message will display but the documents can be sent
available to select in the TQL Services setting. Contact your Ellie Mae account • Warning and Hard Stop - warning message will display and the documents
executive to begin the approval process. can be sent only after the TQL Services rules are satisfied

7 Click the Save icon to save your changes. 3 Click the Merchant Account Setup tab.
4 Select one or more check boxes to specify which users are authorized to
charge the borrower for an appraisal order.
Appraisal Service 5 Click the Save icon.
Using the Appraisal Service setting in Encompass Settings, you can set up a
merchant account and enable users to charge the borrower's credit card for Credit Card Payment Setup
appraisal ordering fees before sending the order to the appraiser. You can also set Set up a credit card to be used to pay the transaction fee that appraisers are
up credit card accounts that users can use to pay the transaction fee that required to pay before they can accept an order they receive from Encompass.
appraisers are required to pay in order to view appraisal orders they receive from
Two types of accounts can be created:
Encompass.
• Corporate Credit Card - When ordering an appraisal, authorized users will have
In order to enable users to charge the borrower for an appraisal order, you must
the option to pay the transaction fee using the corporate credit card account.
first complete these steps (in order):
• Encompass User Credit Card - When ordering an appraisal, authorized
• Set up a merchant account with a provider (such as Blue Pay).
users will have the option to enter their own credit card information to pay the
• Indicate that you want to use a merchant account to pay for appraisal orders. transaction fee.
• Authorize users to charge the borrower for the appraisal order.
To Add a Corporate Credit Card Account:
Merchant Account Setup 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
Set up a merchant account to manage credit card and/or debit card transactions 2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Appraisal Service.
for appraisal orders. For instructions or to learn about account requirements or
setup prerequisites, refer to the Set Up a Merchant Account topic in the 3 Click the Credit Card Payment Setup tab.
Encompass online help or contact your merchant account provider.
To Indicate You Want to Use a Merchant Account to Pay for Appraisal Orders:
2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Appraisal Service.
3 Click the Merchant Account Setup tab.
4 Select a provider from the Merchant Account drop-down list.
5 Click the Account Settings button to verify your Account ID and Secret Key,
and then click OK.
Authorize Users to Charge the Borrower for an Appraisal Order

Once you have set up your merchant account with a provider and indicated that you
want to use a merchant account to pay for appraisal orders, you must authorize
selected users to charge the borrower for an appraisal order. Users who are not
authorized here will not see the Borrower Paid by option when ordering appraisals.
To Authorize Users to Charge the Borrower for an Appraisal Order:


4 Click the New icon. 7 Click the Lookup icon to select the users who will have the option to pay the
transaction fee using this credit card.
• Select User Group or Persona from the Search by drop-down list, and then
click to select a group or persona in the list.
• Select a user in the Users list, and then click the right arrow to move the user
to the Selected Users list.
8 Enter the required information in the Credit Card Information and Billing
Information sections.
9 Select the I hereby authorize... check box to authorize the users you selected
in step 7 to charge appraisal order transaction fees to this credit card.
10 Click Save.
To Add an Encompass User Credit Card Account:

4 Enter a description or name for the account.

6 Select Corporate Credit Card from the drop-down list.

5 Select Encompass User Credit Card from the drop-down list. 3 Click the New icon.
6 Click the Lookup icon to select the users who will have the option to pay for
appraisal order transaction fees using their own credit card.
click to select a group or persona from the list.
7 Click Save.
Title Service
Use the Title Service setting to set up credit card accounts to be used to pay the
transaction fee that title/closing companies are required to pay before they can
accept an order they receive from Encompass. After an account is created,
authorized users will have the option to pay this transaction fee on behalf of the
title/closing company before submitting an order to them.
Two types of accounts can be created:
• Corporate Credit Card - When ordering title or closing products, authorized
users will have the option to pay the transaction fee using the corporate credit
card account.
• Encompass User Credit Card - When ordering title or closing products,
authorized users will have the option to enter their own credit card information 4 Enter a description or name for the account.
to pay the transaction fee. 5 Select Corporate Credit Card from the drop-down list.
To Add a Corporate Credit Card Account:

2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Title Service.

6 Click the Lookup icon to select the users who will have the option to pay for Fraud Service
title order transaction fees using this credit card.
To sign up for the Fraud service, contact your Ellie Mae account representative.
They will walk you through the process of signing up for the service.
Once signed up, an individual using the Encompass admin user ID can use the
Fraud Service setting to start or stop the Fraud service in Encompass, and select
the Encompass users who can access the service. After the service is started, the
selected users can click the Order Fraud button on the Borrower Summary form
or the Order button on the TQL Services tool to order a fraud review that identifies
irregular or suspicious information within the loan file and identifies the loan’s
fraud risk.
Currently Encompass Fraud Service supports three vendors - CoreLogic,
• Select User Group or Persona from the Search by drop-down list, and then DataVerify, and First American FraudGuard. Refer to the vendor-specific section
click to select a group or persona in the list. of the Fraud Service help topic in the TQL Services online help.
To Select Users and Start the Service:
2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Fraud Service.
7 Enter the required information in the Credit Card Information and Billing
Information sections.
8 Select the I hereby authorize... check box to authorize the users you selected
in step 6 to charge title orders to this credit card.
9 Click Save.
To Add an Encompass User Credit Card Account:

2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Title Service.
5 Select Encompass User Credit Card from the drop-down list.
6 Click the Lookup icon to select the users who will have the option to pay for
title order transaction fees using their own credit card.
3 When you first access the setting, a sign-up screen displays. To sign up for the
service, click the Sign Up button, review the license agreement, and then click
click to select a group or persona in the list.
I Accept.
user's name in the Enter Name field, and then click Search.
• Click Clear to clear the search criteria.
7 Click Save.

5 Select a check box to grant access to a user, or select or clear the check box 6 When you receive the BSC number from CoreLogic via email, return to the
at the top of the column to grant or deny access to all your users. Fraud Service setting and enter the number in the BSC Customer Number field.
TIP: After you change the user selections, you can click the Restore icon to
return to your previously saved user configuration.
6 In the Company Information section, enter your company's
Fannie Mae Services
MERS Organization ID. Use the Fannie Mae Services setting to enable and configure the Desktop
• Before entering the MERS Organization ID, you must set up CoreLogic (the
Underwriting and EarlyCheck workflow for your Fannie Mae users.
third-party service provider of the Fraud Service) as your company’s MERS
vendor on your MERS account. Click the link provided in the Company
Enabling Automated Ordering of Fannie Mae Products
Information section or visit this URL for instructions: Automatic ordering for both the DU and EarlyCheck workflows are disabled by
http://www.elliemae.com/go/encompass/fraud-manager/mers-setup- default. Authorized users need to first enable and then update the workflow based
instructions.asp on their organization’s business needs.
7 Enter your company's BSC Customer Number as provided by Ellie Mae, or
To Enable Automated Ordering of Fannie Mae Products:
request a BSC number as described in the To Request a BSC Number
procedure below. 1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings.
8 Select the check box in the Additional Loan Actors section to include the name 2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Fannie Mae
and category/role (for example, Buyer's Agent or Underwriter) for selected loan Services.
actors in the fraud report request. This allows CoreLogic (the third-party
service provider of the Fraud Service) to issue alerts for loan actors who are
flagged in their fraud database.
9 If you selected the check box in Step 8, use the Loan Actors section to specify
the loan actors who will be included in the fraud request.
10 To start the service, click the Start Service button.
11 After you start the service, click the Stop Service button to stop the service.
NOTE: When you stop the service, your settings are saved and will be applied
the next time you start the service.
To Request a BSC Number:

1 To request a BSC number from CoreLogic (the third-party service provider of
the Fraud Service), click Request BSC Number.
2 The Requestor Information is populated, using the data from your Company
Information setting under the Company/User Setup setting.
3 The Email To field is populated with the email address of the Encompass
administrator making the request.
4 Optionally, click the Lookup icon next to the CC field to select additional users
who will also receive email notifications.
5 Review and edit your company information as needed, click Request, and DU
then close the confirmation message when it displays.
The DU tab displays by default when you access the Fannie Mae Services setting.
• A request is sent to CoreLogic via email.

To Enable DU Automated Workflow and Update the Settings: • In the Clear Alert column, select check boxes corresponding to users who
1 In the Automatic Ordering section, click the Enabled button. can clear Fannie Mae-related alerts in the Alerts & Messages tab in the loan
file.
NOTE: Automatic ordering of DU reports is Disabled by default.
9 In the Organization Setup section, click in the Fannie Mae Institution Name and
2 In the Default Channel section drop-down list, click to select one of the Fannie Mae ID fields and type in your organization’s Fannie Mae credentials.
following values to designate a channel for loans that do not have a loan
• The Organization Name, Code, Address, City, State, and Zip fields are
channel (Field ID 2626 is blank):
automatically populated from the Organization Details setting in Encompass
• The default selection for this field is Banked - Retail. Settings, Organization/Users setting.
3 In the Trigger Milestones section, specify the milestones at which the DU report • To add an organization that uses a different set of Fannie Mae credentials,
will be run automatically for each loan channel. click the New icon, and in the Add an Organization window, type in the
4 Click the Auto-run when key data changes check box to automatically select credentials, and click OK.
the Fannie Mae-recommended milestones (Application and Underwriting) at 10 Click the Save icon on the top right corner of the page.
which the DU should be run. When this check box is selected, a DU order will
also run automatically when any of the following field IDs are updated in 11 In the confirmation window, click OK.
Encompass:
EarlyCheck
• FANNIESERVICE.X6
• FANNIESERVICE.X5 To Enable EarlyCheck Automated Workflow and Update the Settings:
• FANNIESERVICE.X4 1 Click the EarlyCheck tab and in the Automatic Ordering section, select the
• FANNIESERVICE.X3 Enabled button.
• 2301 NOTE: Automatic ordering of EarlyCheck reports is Disabled by default.
• ULDD.X31 2 In the Default Channel section drop-down list, click to select one of the
following values to designate a channel on loans that do not have a loan
5 Click the Run Report check box corresponding to the milestones at which you
channel (Field ID 2626 is blank):
want to the DU reports to be ordered automatically.
• Banked Wholesale
• The Milestone column displays a list of the milestones (out of the box and
customized) available in your Encompass instance. The Fannie Mae • Brokered
Mapping column displays generic milestones that correspond to the • Correspondent
milestones available in your instance.
The default selection for this field is Banked - Retail.
6 Click the Apply settings to all channels link to copy the Banked - Retail
settings to the other channels (Banked - Wholesale, Brokered, and 3 In the Trigger Milestones section, specify the milestones at which EarlyCheck
Correspondent). will be run automatically for each loan channel.
• OR, click each channel tab and manually update the settings.
4 Select the Auto-run when key data changes check box to automatically
select the Fannie Mae-recommended milestones (Underwriting, Pre-Closing,
7 In the Loan Criteria section, optionally, select the check boxes to define the Post-Closing, and Pre-Delivery) at which EarlyCheck should be run. When this
loan criteria for which DU reports will be ordered automatically. check box is selected, an EarlyCheck order will also run automatically when
NOTE: If you do not select any settings in this section, DU reports will be any of the following field IDs are updated in Encompass:
ordered for all loan types. 5 In the confirmation window, click Yes.
8 In the Users section, click in the Fannie Mae Institution Name and Fannie Mae 6 For additional information on the Trigger Milestones setup refer to the DU
ID fields and type in the user’s Fannie Mae credentials, if the users have their section since functionality of the DU and EarlyCheck tabs are similar.
own credentials (in addition to your company’s credentials for Fannie Mae).
7 Refer to steps 7-11 of the DU section for information on how to configure the
EarlyCheck tab, since the functionality of the two tabs are similar.

Valuation Service 5 Click the entry in the CoreLogic Username column, and then enter the
CoreLogic user name for the user.
Use the Valuation Service setting to give users permission to order Automated
Valuation Model (AVM) reports from the TQL Services tool through the
Correspondent Collateral Valuation Program (CCVP) provided by CoreLogic. The
Automated Valuation Model provides an estimated value for single-family,
condominium, townhouse, and planned unit development (PUD) properties.
CCVP provides two AVM reports: PASS and HistoryPro Review. When an order
is submitted through the TQL Services tool, a request is submitted for both
reports. A loan must pass one of the reports to be published to Citibank.
CoreLogic runs the PASS report first. If PASS fails, CoreLogic runs the HistoryPro NOTE: Each user accessing the valuation service is assigned a unique user
Review report. If HistoryPro is successful, the user can publish to Citibank. name by CoreLogic. Contact CoreLogic at 886-894-1168 to acquire a user
name for an Encompass user.
NOTE: Before enabling users in the Valuation Service setting, your company
must open an account with CoreLogic's CCVP program. Contact CoreLogic by 6 In the Company Information section, enter your company's BSC Customer
email at CorrespondentPrograms@corelogic.com to sign up for the program. Number from CoreLogic.
To Enable Users:
2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Valuation Service.
user's name in the Enter Name field, and then click Search. NOTE: This BSC Customer Number may be different from the BSC Customer
• Click Clear to clear the search criteria. Number used for the Fraud Service. Contact your CoreLogic account
representative for additional information.
4 Select a check box to grant access to a user, or select or clear the check box
at the top of the column to grant or deny access to all your users. 7 When finished, click the Save icon.
Flood Service
Currently Encompass Flood Service supports two vendors - CoreLogic and
ServiceLink. Refer to the vendor-specific section of the Flood Service help topic
in the TQL Services online help for setup information.
Starting Encompass Flood Service (CoreLogic)
To get started, contact your Ellie Mae account representative to receive a new
customer setup form. Complete this form and return it to your Ellie Mae account
representative. You will receive your Flood Service login credentials from
CoreLogic within one business day. Encompass admins can then log into the
Flood Service Settings area using the login credentials, start the service, and
grant access rights to specific users.
To Start the Encompass Flood Service (Powered by CoreLogic):


2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Flood Service. To Start Encompass Flood Service (Powered by CoreLogic) for Sub-
NOTE: If the service has not yet been enabled for your system, the Flood Organizations:
Service panel displays an Encompass Flood Service splash screen. 1 Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
3 In the Organization Setup section of the Flood Service panel, enter your 2 In the Organization Setup section, click the New icon.
CoreLogic credentials.
• Click inside the CoreLogic Username and CoreLogic Password fields and
then enter the information.
3 In the Add an Organization window, select the organization that needs to be

set up for CoreLogic Flood Service.
4 In the CoreLogic Username and CoreLogic Password fields, type your
CoreLogic credentials, and then click OK.
4 In the Enabled Users section, select one or more check boxes to specify which
users are authorized to use the Flood Service. • The sub-organization is listed in the Organization Setup section.
• To narrow the list of users, select a Persona from the list or type all or part of 5 Click the Save icon.
a user's name in the Enter Name field, and then click Search. Click Clear to 6 Click Close.
clear the search criteria.
5 When finished, click the Save icon. Starting Encompass Flood Service (ServiceLink)
NOTE: If you have not entered the required information, Encompass displays To get started, contact your Ellie Mae account representative. They will work with
messages with guidelines for completing the Flood Service activation process you to sign up for the service and ensure the service is then activated in your
Encompass system. After activation, Encompass administrators work directly with
6 Complete the missing information and then click Start Service on the top right ServiceLink to obtain an ServiceLink Account ID. After receiving the account ID,
corner of the page. administrators can grant access rights to specific users and start the service in
Encompass.
Starting the Flood Service for Sub-Organizations (CoreLogic)
You can also enable Flood Service for sub-organizations, such as branch offices
or departments within an organization that process their billing independently.

To Start the Encompass Flood Service (Powered by ServiceLink): 4 In the Enabled Users section, select one or more check boxes to specify which
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. users are authorized to use the Flood Service.
2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Flood Service. TIP: To narrow the list of users, select a Persona from the list or type all or part
of a user's name in the Enter Name field, and then click Search. Click Clear to
NOTE: If the service has not yet been enabled for your system, the Flood clear the search criteria.
Service panel displays an Encompass Flood Service splash screen.
6 Click the Start Service button on the top right corner of the page.
Starting the Flood Service for Sub-Organizations (ServiceLink)

For Encompass 9.0 and later, admins can also enable Flood Service for sub-
organizations, such as branch offices or departments within an organization that
process their billing independently.
To Start Encompass Flood Service for Sub-Organizations:

2 On the left panel, click Additional Services, and then click Flood Service.
3 In the New Client Setup Request section, click the New Account Request
Form link to download the form. Complete the form and email it to
floodsetup@lpsvcs.com. You can also fax the completed form to 866-315-
0736.
You will receive your ServiceLink Account ID via email within one business day.
4 In the Organization Setup section, click the New icon.
3 In the Organization Setup section of the Flood Service panel, enter your
ServiceLink Account ID.
NOTE: Click inside the ServiceLink Account ID field and then enter the
information.
5 In the Add an Organization window, select the organization that needs to be

set up for Encompass Flood Service.

6 In the ServiceLink Account ID field, enter your enter the ServiceLink Account To Configure the Scanned Document Uploader:
ID received in step 2, and then click OK. 1 Click the Scanned Doc Uploader program icon on your desktop.
• The sub-organization is listed in the Organization Setup section.
8 Click Close.
Scanned Document Uploader Service

The Scanned Document Uploader Service enables users to scan documents into
an FTP-capable scanner, specify a local network drive where the scanned
documents will be stored, and have the Encompass eFolder automatically retrieve
the documents. The Scanned Document Uploader Service eliminates the need to
save scanned documents and then manually upload them to the eFolder. The
service is available for all user who have purchased Encompass EDM.
To Install the Scanned Document Uploader:

1 To open the installation file, click the link below:
http://download.elliemae.com/encompass/install/EDMScanDoc/download.htm
2 Click the link for the version of the utility that you want to download, and then 2 Enter the following information in the configuration window:
click Run. • Client ID - Your company 10-digit Encompass Client ID.
3 When the Encompass EDM Scanned Document Uploader Installation Wizard • Password - Your company Ellie Mae Network password.
opens, click Next.
• Email -Address where email notifications will be sent when the scanner
4 Enter your Full Name and Organization, and then select an option to install the moves documents to the destination folder.
application for Anyone who uses this computer or Only for me, and then
click Next. • Scan Directory - The destination where the scanner will store the
documents:
5 To install the program in the default folder shown on the wizard, click Next.
• Type an IP Address or computer name.
• Or click Browse to select a new installation folder, and then click Next.
• Or click the button to browse to select a directory.
6 On the Ready to Install the Application window, click Next to install the
application. • Scan Frequency - Frequency with which the application will check the
scanner and move any new documents to the destination folder.
7 After the application is installed, click Finish to exit the installation wizard.
3 Click the Stop Service or Start Service button to stop or start the scanning
• A Scanned Doc Uploader program icon will be installed on your desktop.
service.

North Carolina Compliance Report To Create North Carolina Compliance Report Files:
1 Click the Pipeline tab in Encompass.
For loans in North Carolina, use the Pipeline menu to create the files needed to
submit a North Carolina Compliance Report to the North Carolina Office of 2 On the menu bar, click Pipeline.
Commissioner of Banks (NCCOB). After the files are created, you will need to edit 3 Point to Compliance Services, and then point to Generate North Carolina
the content of the Main Loan file to change the formatting of specific fields to meet Compliance Report.
North Carolina guidelines. After the Main Loan file is revised, you can submit the
report to the NCCOB.
NOTE: Only a user with the Super Administrator persona (or the administrator
logging into Encompass using the admin user ID) can create these reports.
What loans need to be reported?

• Any loan that your company originated that you "Decisioned" in the quarter.
"Decisioned" means the loan was denied (adverse action), withdrawn, or closed
during the quarter. The origination date is NOT what is used to determine the
quarter.
• The loan must be a valid application which means at minimum these six pieces
of information were collected by the originator:
• the borrower’s name;
• the borrower’s gross monthly income;
• the borrower’s Social Security Number (e.g., to enable the loan originator to
obtain a credit report);
• the property address;
• an estimate of the value of the property; and
• the mortgage loan amount sought.
Use the State Specific Information form for North Carolina to enter and review
disclosure information required for properties in North Carolina. Applicable data
from this form is exported to the report generated by Encompass for the North
Carolina Compliance Reports. To view details about the data that must be
uploaded for each loan, including the Encompass fields where this data is
entered, refer to the Generating and Uploading North Carolina Compliance NOTE: If one or more input fields required to generate the report are not
Reports guide in the Encompass online help. currently included in the Encompass Reporting Database, a message
prompting you to notify your Encompass administrator about the missing fields
is displayed. To help ensure the most complete and accurate report data, be
sure to ask your administrator to add the required fields to the Reporting
Database.
4 Select a time period for the report, select the dates when the date field that will
be used to indicate when an application was received by the originating and
funding entities, and select one or more loan folders that contains the loans for
which you want to run the report.

5 Click Generate. To Format the Main Loan File Before Submission:
1 Open the Main Loan file, and then delete the Data tab.
2 Modify the values of the fields listed below based on North Carolina
requirements. These fields are imported from Encompass, but the formatting
must be modified to match NCCOB requirements:
• AdverseActionReason
• CreditScore
• IsRefinancedBySameLender
• LienPriority
• LoanDocumentTypeDescription
• LoanPurpose
• LoanSource
• LoanStatus
6 Click Yes when the confirmation screen informs you that the HUD-1 Fee Data • MortgageProgram
File (the first of two reports) will be generated. • MortgageType
7 Browse to the folder where you want to save the file and click Save. • Occupancy
8 Click Yes when the confirmation screen informs you that the Main Loan file (the • PropertyType
second of two reports) will be generated. • RefinanceReason
3 The fields listed below are populated when the Main Loan file is created using
a calculation based on another field. Validate the accuracy of the calculation
for your needs.
• IsCallProvision
• IsEscrowedFunds
• IsFourYearPaymentChange
• IsLot25AcresOrMore
• IsNegativeAmortization
• IsPMICancelledAtMidPoint
• PaymentFrequency
• WithdrawnDate
9 Browse to the folder where you want to save the file and click Save.
4 When finished, save the file as a .csv file.
After you save the files, you must edit and reformat the Main Loan file, and then
To view information about the fields in the Main Loan file for the North Carolina
save it as a .csv file before submitting it to the North Carolina Office of
Compliance Report, including the fields in Encompass used to populate the report
Commissioner of Banks.
and the field content that you must edit, add, or review before submitting the file
to the NCCOB, refer to the Generating and Uploading North Carolina Compliance
Reports guide in the Ellie Mae Resource Center of the Encompass online help.

Submit Reports to the NCCOB
After reformatting the Main Loan file, submit the report to the NCCOB.
To Upload the Report to the NCCOB Website:

1 Visit the NCCOB website at:
https://www.nccob.org/online/nmls/companylogin.aspx
2 Click the appropriate link to view the applicable login page (i.e., Mortgage
Company Login).
3 Enter your NCCOB License Number, Fed TaxID, and the last 4 digits of the
Qualifying Individuals Social Security Number or your company Access Code
if you have one.
4 Once you are logged in, there is a link to the NCCOB Loan Data Upload User
Guide on the welcome screen.
5 Follow the instructions to upload the XML file to the website.
NOTE: If you do not already have login credentials for your company, contact the
NCCOB at (919) 733-3016 to request your company login information. For
questions regarding technical requests, send email to NCCOB at
NCCOBDevelopers@nccob.gov.
When is the Upload Due?

Each quarterly update is due to the NCCOB 45 days after the end of the quarter
as follows:
• 1st quarter is due May 15.
• 2nd quarter is due Aug 14.
• 3rd quarter is due Nov 14.
• 4th quarter is due Feb 14.

Chapter 18
File Access Management
Grant File Access
.
Use the Grant File Access setting to grant or revoke loan file access rights. By
default, the ability to access loans is based on settings in the user profile, the
user’s position in the organization hierarchy, and the access granted when the
user is a member of a loan team. For more information, refer to
Organizations/Users section on page 21.
The two access rights are as follows:
• R/W Right - R/W (Read/Write) access permits the user to view and make
changes to a loan.
• Full Right (R/W and assignment rights) - Full Right access permits the user to
view and make changes to a loan, to assign access rights to other users, and to
unlock a loan. 3 Search for and select the loans to grant access to.
NOTE: Users with an assigned role of Administrator can also assign loan access • Select a Role, the Name of the user currently assigned to the role, and the
rights to another user. Loan Folder in which the loans are located.
• Click Search.
Additional Information • Select one or more loans.
• If you assign R/W Right and then want to revoke that right, click the Full Right NOTE: Each loan on the list shows the name of the borrower and the users
option in the Revoke section. The user whose read/write right was revoked may that have R/W or Full Right access to the loan. If a user does not have Full
still be able to view the loan (as well as use the loan information in reports and Right access, (access only) displays after the name.
Dashboard displays) if the loan owner is positioned directly below in the
organization hierarchy. 4 From the list of users, select one or more users to assign rights to. You can
select a Role to filter the list of users.
• If you click the Assignment Right option in the Revoke section for a user who
has been granted Full Right access, the user will still have Read/Write Right. 5 Select the access assignment option: R/W Right or Full Right.
• If you revoke Full Right access to a loan, the user whose Full Right access was 6 Click Assign.
revoked may still be able to view the loan (as well as use the loan information in • The users and the selected rights are added to the loans.
reports and Dashboard displays) if the loan owner is positioned directly below in
the organization hierarchy.
To Assign Access Rights:

2 In the left panel, click Personal Settings, and then click Grant File Access.
Chapter 18: File Access Management 270

To Revoke Access Rights:
1 Search for and select the loans from which you will revoke rights.
• Select a Role, the Name of the user currently assigned to the role, and the
Loan Folder in which the loans are located.
• Click Search.
• Select one or more loans.
2 From the list of users, select one or more users from whom to revoke rights.
You can select a Role to filter the list users.
3 Select the rights to revoke: Assignment Right or Full Right.
4 Click Revoke.
The selected rights are revoked from the loans.
NOTE: Rights are revoked as appropriate. For example, if you select a user
and access rights that do not exist on the selected loan, the request is ignored.
Chapter 18: File Access Management 271

Chapter 19
Importing and Exporting Data and Settings

This chapter describes how to import system settings, custom forms, loans, and Custom Forms
contacts. You can also export contacts to a CSV file.
You can import .doc or .rtf formatted forms from Calyx Point or other sources.
NOTE: Import loan files and contacts after completing the system setup tasks
described in chapters 5, 6, and 7. NOTE: The Custom Forms feature does not support variable fields within text
boxes. If a form contains text boxes, remove them before importing the form.
Calyx® Point® Settings To Import a Custom Form:

1 On the menu bar, click Encompass.
You can import loan programs, closing costs, and custom loan fields.
2 On the Encompass Settings menu bar, click Import, and then click Custom
To Import a Loan Program or Closing Cost Template: Forms.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass.
2 On the Encompass Settings menu bar, click Import, and then click Calyx
Point Loan Programs or Calyx Point Closing Costs.
3 Click Calyx Point or Other Custom Forms, and then click Continue.
3 On the Import Point Template Files window:

• In the Source section, locate and open the folder containing the templates.
• Select one or more templates (or click Select All).
4 In the Destination section, click to select the Public or Personal folder in which
to import the template.
5 Click Import.
Chapter 19: Importing and Exporting Data and Settings 272

4 In the Source section on the window, open the folder containing the forms, and
then select one or more forms.
• If you selected the Other Custom Forms option and are importing
documents from other LOSs, clear the check box at the bottom of the window
to remove data fields from the document.
5 In the Destination section, click to select the Public or Personal folder in which
to import the custom form.
6 Click Import.
Contacts
You can import borrower and business contacts from Microsoft Outlook or a
Comma Separated Value (CSV) file and export contacts to a CSV file.
NOTE: You can also synchronize Business Contacts, Borrower Contacts,
Calendar appointments, and Tasks List with contacts, appointments, and tasks in
Microsoft Outlook or ACT! (contacts and appointments only). Refer to
“Synchronization” in Chapter 9, “Contact Management,” in the Encompass User’s 2 On the Data Source window, click Import from Microsoft Outlook, and then
Guide. click Next.
NOTE: You can also import business contacts from Calyx Point Cardex. Calyx
Point borrower contacts are created during import of loan files.
Import Public or Personal Contacts

When you import contacts, you may have the option to set access to the contacts
as public or personal. Whether or not the option is available depends on user and
system settings. The following guidelines apply.
• For borrower contacts, if the check box on the Borrower Contacts tab is selected
for your User Group, all imported borrower contacts will be public (viewable by
your superiors in the organization hierarchy).
• For business contacts, if you have edit access to Public Business Contacts (as
defined in your User Group), you can set the access level to Contacts to Public.
To Import Contacts from Microsoft Outlook:

1 Click the Contacts tab, click Borrower Contacts (or Business Contacts) on
the menu bar, and then click Import Borrower Contacts (or Import Business
Contacts).
3 If the Contact Access window opens, click the Personal or Public option, and
then click Next.
4 On the Import from Microsoft Outlook window, click Next.
5 On the Import from Microsoft Outlook window, click Import.

6 On the Select Folder window, select the folder containing the contacts, and • If the first row in your data file contains column headers, select the First row
then click OK. contains header information check box to prevent the headers from being
imported.
• Click Next to proceed.
6 On the Data Mapping window, select each column header to assign the data
to an Encompass field, and then click Import.
NOTE: To import a subset of contacts, create a new Outlook folder and copy the
subset into it. Then import the subset from the new folder.
7 If a Microsoft Outlook message opens (regarding access to your contacts):
• Select the Allow access for check box. 7 Click OK in response to the message.
• Click the number of access minutes.
To Import Contacts from Calyx Point Cardex:
• Click Yes to proceed.
1 Click the Contacts tab, click Business Contacts on the menu bar, and then
8 Click OK in response to the message. click Import Business Contacts.
2 On the Data Source window, click Import from Calyx Point Cardex, and then
To Import Contacts from a CSV File:
click Next.
1 Click the Contacts tab, Borrower Contacts (or Business Contacts) on the
3 If the Contact Access window opens, select the Personal or Public option, and
menu bar, and then click Import Borrower Contacts (or Import Business
then click Next.
Contacts).
4 On the Cardex Import window, click Browse to locate and open the folder
2 On the Data Source window, click Import from a Comma-Separated Values
containing the contacts, and then click Import.
(CSV) file, and then click Next.
NOTE: If a duplicate contact is found, click Overwrite to replace the existing
3 If the Contact Access window opens, click the Personal or Public option, and
contact, New to create a new, duplicate contact, Skip to leave the current contact
then click Next.
and proceed, or Cancel to end the import process. Select the check box to apply
4 On the File Selection window, click Browse to locate and select the CSV file your choice if more duplicate contacts are found.
containing the contacts, and then click Next.
5 Click OK in response to the message.
5 On the Parsing Options window:

Export Contacts Loan Files
You can export borrower and business contacts to a Comma Separated Values You can import Calyx Point and Fannie Mae 3.x loan files directly into Encompass.
(CSV) file. A copy of the contact’s data is exported. Notes and history information
are not exported. • You can import single or multiple files.
• If you import the same file more than once, a new loan file with a new loan
To Export Contacts to a CSV File: number is created for each duplicate file.
1 Select the borrower or business contacts you want to export. • Once you import a loan file, only the system administrator can delete it.
2 Click Borrower Contacts (or Business Contacts) on the menu bar, and then NOTE: Before importing loan files, make sure you have completed the system
click Export Borrower Contacts (or Export Business Contacts). setup tasks: create folders, organizations and users, milestone setup, log setup,
3 On the File Location and Name window, click Browse to select a location for custom fields, loan templates, tables and fees, and contact configuration.
the exported contacts.
• Or, locate the desired location for the file, type a new File name for the
Conversation Log Entries
exported contacts, and then click OK. Conversation Log entries are imported as the first entry in the Conversation Log.
Assignment of Loan Officers

When you import a loan file, the name of the file's existing loan officer is matched
with a designated loan officer if possible.
NOTE: Use the Role Mapping section of the Roles worksheet to select the roles
in your company that carry out Loan Officer, Loan Processor, and Loan Closer
tasks. These designations are used when importing loans and for controlling loan
officer license settings in the user profiles of those users. Refer to “Role Mapping”
on page 30 for detailed instructions.
If an exact match is found:
• The loan is assigned to the matching loan officer.
• A borrower contact is created with the loan officer as the contact owner.
If an exact match is not found:
If you have enabled the Auto Assignment of Loan Officer setting in the Server
Settings Manager:
• The loan is assigned to the loan officer you selected during the import process.
• A borrower contact is created with the newly assigned loan officer as the contact
owner.
NOTE: If you type the name of an existing file, the file will be overwritten with the If you have disabled the Auto Assignment of Loan Officer setting:
data from the exported contacts.
• The loan is not assigned to a loan officer, but the user who imported the file
4 On the Contact Export Wizard window, click Export. appears as the File Starter on the File Started and Qualification worksheets.
5 Click OK in response to the completion message. • A borrower contact is created with the importer as the contact owner.
• Your administrator can assign a user as the new loan officer and borrower
contact owner. This ensures that the loan is assigned correctly and is tracked
properly on the Dashboard and in Reports.

To Import a Loan File: Export to LEF
1 On your Pipeline, click Pipeline on the menu bar, and then click Import to open
An individual with an Encompass admin user ID can create an LEF (Licensee
the Import wizard.
Examination File) from within Encompass when required by state law. LEF is an
2 On the Import window, click the type of files to import, and then click Continue. electronic file format used to compile loan data for submission to state regulators
for examination.
To Create an LEF:
1 Select one or more loans on the Pipeline.
NOTE: You do not need to select loans when creating an LEF for all the loan files
on your Pipeline.
2 On the menu bar, click Pipeline, and then point to Export to LEF.
NOTE: If your administrator has enabled the Auto Assignment of Loan Officer
setting in the Server Settings Manager, you also have the option of selecting and
automatically assigning a user as the new loan officer whenever an imported file's
loan officer does not exactly match an existing user's name.
3 Click Continue.
4 Select one or more files to import and select the destination as follows:
• Click Browse to locate and open the folder containing the loan files.
• Select a Client Type (if applicable).
• Click the files to import (or click Select All).
• From the Loan Folder list, select a folder to import the files into.
• For a Fannie Mae file import, click Browse to select a loan template to apply
to the imported files. Data from the Fannie Mae file will overwrite the existing
data in the loan template.
5 Click Import.
When the import is complete, a message indicates the number of files 3 Click Selected Loans Only to create a file for the selected loan.
successfully imported. • Or, click All Loans on All Pages to create a file for all the loans on your
Pipeline.
4 In the Export to field, type the path to the folder where you want to store the
file, or click the Find icon to browse to the folder.
5 Retype the File Name if needed, and then click OK.
NOTE: The File Name must end with the .lef file extension.

Appendix A
Administration Personas
Encompass ships with the admin User ID, for use by the main administrator of the • The admin account cannot be disabled. Users with a Super Administrator
Encompass environment. The admin user has complete access to all Encompass persona can be disabled.
settings and can work in loan files with free access ignoring all configured
Business Rules. Super Administrators can do everything including:
Encompass also ships with two administration personas that can be assigned to • Create and configure Personas, User Groups, Business Rules, and Workflows.
users who will help with Encompass administration: • Modify all company settings.
• Super Administrator • Create users and give them any persona except Super Administrator.
• Administrator (Global or Local depending on location in the hierarchy) • Users with the Super Administrator persona cannot have their user settings
edited like users with other personas. They always have all rights.
• When a Super Administrator is editing users, they can edit user settings to give
Creating Administrators them special rights. But when they view their own user settings, the View/Edit
• The admin user is the only user who can create users with a Super Administrator Settings button is disabled since they cannot change their own settings.
persona.
Administrator
• All three administration personas can create users with an Administrator
persona. The purpose of the Administrator persona is to allow the admin to create global
and local administrators that help to administer company and branch settings.
• Users can only be assigned the Super Administrator persona if they are at the
top of the hierarchy. • Users with the Administrator persona have access to different settings based on
their location in the hierarchy.
• Users with the Super Administrator persona cannot be moved from top level of
hierarchy. Global Administrators
Users with the Administrator persona that are at the top of the hierarchy are
Super Administrator treated as Global Administrators.
The purpose of the Super Administrator persona is to allow the Admin to delegate • When creating users and assigning personas, Global Administrators can give
all of their duties to other users. Users with the Super Administrator persona are users the Administrator persona.
basically clones of the admin User ID, with the following exceptions.
• Global Administrators can create other Global or Local Administrators, but
• The Super Administrator persona cannot create other users with a Super cannot create Super Administrators.
Administrator persona.
• Global Administrators can edit user settings to give or take away rights.
• The admin cannot be deleted. Users with a Super Administrator persona can be
• Global Administrators cannot edit their own user settings or take away their own
deleted.
Administrator persona. But they can add other personas to their settings (such
• The admin is not forced to change its password. Users with a Super as Loan Officer and Processor), so they can qualify for a role and be assigned
Administrator persona can be forced to change their password. as a loan team member if needed.
• The admin account will never be suspended no matter how many times the user Local Administrators
fails to login with the wrong password. Users with a Super Administrator persona
can be locked out after failed login attempts. Users with the Administrator persona that are not at the top of the hierarchy are
treated as Local Administrators.
Appendix A: Administration Personas 277

• Local Administrators can access the same settings as Global Administrators
when creating users, except that they don't have access to most Company
settings.
• The Company settings that Local Administrators can access are:
• Organization/Users (their level and below)
• Batch Loan Reassignment
• Loan Setup (Custom Print
• Forms and Input Form Builder)
• eFolder Setup (Conditions, Condition Sets, Post-Closing Conditions, Post-
Closing Condition Sets)
• Closing (Plan Code, Alt Lender)
• Local Administrators can only see their level of the organization hierarchy and
below.
• Local Administrators can create users with any of the personas, but they do not
see the Super Administrator persona.
• Since Local Administrators can give users the Administrator persona, and they
can only create users at their level or below, they have the ability to create other
Local Administrators, but not Global Administrators.
• Local Administrators cannot edit their own user settings or take away their own
Administrator persona, but they can add other personas to their settings (such
as Loan Officer and Processor), so they can be assigned as a loan team
member if needed.
Switching Between Global and Local Administrator Rights

If a user who has the Administrator persona is moved from the top of the hierarchy
to a second level or lower folder, they will lose the additional rights that a Global
Administrator has over Local Administrators. If the user is moved from a lower
level to the top of the hierarchy, they will gain the rights of a Global Administrator.
Appendix A: Administration Personas 278

Appendix B
Loan Custom Field Calculations

The Loan Custom Fields setting provides the ability to create calculations for both pre-defined and user-defined custom field IDs. A custom calculation is an expression that
returns a number or text value, which is then saved into the associated custom field. This document describes the types of operations you can use in a custom field calculation,
and provides examples of how to use each one.
Operations and Features

A custom calculation can contain and combination of the following operations and features.
• Simple arithmetic operations, such as addition and subtraction
• Mathematical operations, such as exponentiation and absolute value
• Text-based operations, such as concatenation, truncation, and extraction of characters
• Data-based operations, such as adding a fixed number of days or months to a date
• Values of other fields from the same loan
• Branching and logical operations, such as if...then, AND, and OR
Arithmetic Operations
Arithmetic operations form the basis for most custom calculations and consist of addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), and division (/).
For example, the following custom calculation returns 2% of the value stored in field ID 1109.
0.02 * [1109]
Encompass custom calculations use standard arithmetic order-of-operations rules and allow for use of parentheses to force a specific execution order, for example:
0.02 * ([1109] + [45])
NOTE: Refer to “Using Loan Field Values” on page 284 for details on using the square bracket syntax.
An important consideration when authoring custom calculations is whether or not the specified arithmetic operations can be performed based on the values in the fields. In
the example above, the calculation assumes that both fields 1109 and 45 contain valid numeric data. If either field is blank or contains non-numeric data, the calculation will
fail and the custom field's value will be cleared (refer to “Calculation Errors” on page 288).
Appendix B: Loan Custom Field Calculations 279

Safe Operations
When you are unsure of the potential validity of an arithmetic expression within a calculation, you can use one of the following built-in functions in place of the standard operator.
Function Description Example
Sum(x, y, z, ...) Adds the specified values. If any operand cannot be converted to a number, the entire expression returns an Sum([1109], [45])
empty value.
SumAny(x, y, z, ...) Adds the specified values, ignoring those that cannot be converted to numbers. If none of the values can be SumAny([1109], [45])
converted to a number, the function returns a blank value.
Diff(x, y) Evaluates to x – y if both values are numeric. If either value is non-numeric, the function returns a blank value. Diff([1109], [45])
Mult(x, y, z, ...) Returns the product of the operands. If any of the operands cannot be converted to a number, the function returns Mult([1109], [45])
a blank value.
MultAny(x, y, z, ...) Returns the product of all operands which can be converted to numbers. If none of the values can be converted to MultAny([1109], [45])
a number, returns a blank value.
Div(x,y) Returns the value of x / y if both operands can be converted to numeric values. Otherwise, returns a blank value. Div([1109], [45])
Using these operators, it is possible to write a “safe” version of the example above as:
Mult(0.02, Sum([1109], [45]))
If either field 1109 or field 45 is empty or non-numeric, this expression will evaluate to an empty value. Expressions of this form are most commonly needed when using the
branching function IIF. Refer to “Branching and Logic Operations” on page 286.

Mathematical Operations
Within custom calculations you can employ any of a number of pre-defined mathematical functions to calculate the resulting value. The following table lists the supported
functions.
Abs(x) Returns the absolute value of the specified argument. Abs([101] - [102])
Min(x, y, z, ...) Returns the smallest of a set of values. Min([102], [103], [104])
Max(x, y, z, ...) Returns the largest of a set of values. Max([102], [103], [104])
Sqrt(x) Returns the square root of a value. Sqrt(0.02 * [1109])
Log(x) Returns the natural logarithm (base-e) of the value. Log(1000 + [910])
Log10(x) Returns the base-10 logarithm of the value. Log10(1000 + [910])
Exp(x) Returns the value of ex. Exp([1171] / 100)
Pow(x, y) Returns the value of xy. Pow([1171], 5)
Sgn(x) Returns 1 if x > 0, 0 if x = 0, or -1 if x < 0. Sgn([1093])
Round(x, precision) Rounds the value x to a number of decimal places specified by precision. Round([1109], 2)
Trunc(x, precision) Truncates the value x to a number of decimal places specified by precision. Trunc([1109], 2)
XInt(x, default) Converts the value x to an integer. If x is a string, the integer value it represents is returned. XInt(“230”) or
Non-integral values are rounded to the nearest integer. If the value cannot be converted XInt([1109], 1)
successfully, the optional default value is returned. If no default is provided, the value 0 is
returned.
XDec(x, default) Converts the value x to a decimal. If x is a string, the numeric value it represents is returned. XDec(“245.112”) or
If the value cannot be converted successfully, the optional default value is returned. If no XDec([1109], -1)
default is provided, the value 0 is returned.

Text-based Operations
Depending on the type of field with which the calculation is associated, your calculation may need to return a text-based value instead of a numeric value. For example, if your
field type is defined to be “Y/N”, then your custom calculation should evaluate to either “Y” or “N”, since these are the only two valid values for this field type.
The most basic string operation that can be performed is concatenation, which is done by using the ampersand (&) and operator. For example, the following expression returns
the value of field ID 1109 (the loan amount) preceded by the dollar sign, such as $200,000.00.
“$” & [+1109] & “ USD”
Note that literal strings, such as the “$” and the “ USD” above, are denoted by enclosing the text in double quotes. If the need arises to include the double-quote character
itself in a string literal, it should occur twice.
For example, assuming that field 36 has the value "Joe", the expression
[36] & “ is the “”primary”” borrower for the loan”
would evaluate to:
Joe is the “primary” borrower for the loan
In addition to concatenation, Encompass provides the following string-based functions to assist you in authoring custom calculations.
Trim(x) Removes any whitespace characters from the beginning and end of the value x. Trim([36] & “” & [37])
Left(x, n) Returns the left-most n characters from the value x. If x is shorter than n characters, the whole value Left([37], 5)
is returned.
Right(x, n) Returns the right-most n characters from the value x. If x is shorter than n characters, the whole value Right([37], 5)
is returned.
Mid(x, start, length) Returns the substring of the value x that starts at the specified locations and has the specified length. SubStr([37], 3, 2)
If length is omitted, the entire string after start is returned. The start position is 0-based.
InStr(x, y) Returns the first position of the substring y within the string x. The comparison is case-sensitive. InStr([37], “mith”)
Int2Text(x) Converts an integer value to its spelled out representation, e.g. “Five Hundred Thirty-Four.” Int2Text([4])
Dec2Text(x) Converts a decimal value to its spelled out representation, e.g. “Sixty-Five and Fifty-Three Dec2Text([3])
Hundredths.”
Money2Text(x) Converts a decimal value to its spelled out representation using ‘dollars’ and ‘cents’ notation, e.g. Money2Text([1109])
“Sixty-Five Dollars and Fifty-Three Cents.”
LCase(x) Returns the value of x with all letters converted to lower case. LCase([37])
UCase(x) Returns the value of x with all letters converted to lower case. UCase([37])
Replace(x, y, z) Replaces all instances of the substring y within the string x with the replacement value z, Replace([1264], “Investor”, “Lender”)
and returns the resulting string.

Date-Based Operations
Just as a custom calculation can yield a numeric or test result, it can also yield a date result when the underlying field type is of type DATE. Note that fields that have the
MONTHDAY format do not contain full date values and cannot be used with the functions below.
Day(x) Returns the day portion the date value x. The parameter x must be a valid date or the calculation Day([1402])
will fail.
Month(x) Returns the month portion the date value x. The parameter x must be a valid date or the calculation Month([1402])
will fail.
Year(x) Returns the year portion the date value x. The parameter x must be a valid date or the calculation Year([1402])
will fail.
DateAdd(period, count, x) Add a fixed number of days, months, or years to the date value x. The period should be one of “d” DateAdd(“yyyy”, 1, [1402])
(days), "m" (months), or "yyyy" (years). If any value is invalid, the entire calculation will result in a
blank value.
DateDiff(period, x, y) Computes the difference between the dates x and y in days, months or years. The period should DateDiff("d", [1402], [1403])
be one of "d" (days), "m" (months) or "yyyy" (years). If any value is invalid, the entire calculation
will result in a blank value.
XDateDiff(period, x, y) Computes the difference between the dates x and y in days, months or years. The period should XDateDiff(“d”, [1402], [1403])
be one of "d" (days), "m" (months) or "yyyy" (years). If any value is invalid, the entire calculation
will result in a blank value.
XDate(x, default) Converts the value x to a date. If x is a string, the date value it represents is returned. If the value XDate([1402], “11/30/2010”)
cannot be converted successfully, the optional default value is returned. If no default is provided,
the date 1/1/1 is returned.
XMonthDay(x, default) Converts the value x to a “month-day” value. A month-day is represented as a date within the year XMonthDay(“3/1””)
2000. For example, XMonthDay(“3/15”) would return the date 3/15/2000. If the value cannot be
converted to a month-day value, the optional default is provided.
Today Return’s today’s date. DateAdd(“d”, 7, Today)

Calendar-Based Operations
If your custom field calculation requires access to your company's compliance calendar, the functions below provide the necessary operations to add or adjust dates based
on either the Postal or Business calendar.
Calendar.AddBusinessDays(date, count, moveToNext) Adds the specified number of days from your company's Calendar.AddBusinessDays([763], 5, true)
Business Calendar to the date provided. The moveToNext
parameter is a Boolean which indicates if the date should first
be advanced to the next business day if the date specified is
not a business day.
Calendar.AddPostalDays(date, count, moveToNext) Adds the specified number of days from the US Postal Calendar.AddPostalDays([763], 5, true)
Calendar to the date provided. The moveToNext parameter is
a Boolean which indicates if the date should first be advanced
to the next business day if the date specified is not a business
day.
Using Loan Field Values

Most custom calculations will need to use the value of other loan fields in order to calculate the value for the associated custom field. You can insert a reference to any loan
field which has a defined Field ID by placing the field's ID within square-brackets ([]). Any of the more than 4000 standard fields shipped as part of Encompass, or the loan
custom fields you have already defined, can be referenced in this manner.
For example, the following expression computes 10% of the loan amount (field 1109).
[1109] * 0.1
You can also use loan field values in text-based operations. The following expression builds the borrower’s full name from their first and last names (with a space separating
them.)
[36] & “ “& [37]
By default, when you reference a field, the type of value returned (numeric or text) will be based on the type of the underlying field. For example, a reference to field 1109 (loan
amount) will return a numeric value, whereas a reference to field 36 (borrower first name) will return a string value.
There is one exception to this rule: when a numeric field has not yet been populated, a reference to that field will return an empty string. As a result, you must use care when
writing calculations to consider what will happen when the fields used in the calculation are empty.
For example, consider the following expression:
[101] + [102] + [103] + [104] + [105]

If all five referenced fields contain numeric data, this expression will evaluate to the sum of these values and the result saved into the custom field. However, if any one or
more of these fields is unpopulated, the expression will fail since a string is not valid within a summation. As a result, the custom field's value will be cleared (see the section
on Calculation Errors below).
There are two possible resolutions to this issue:
1 Use the “safe” arithmetic operators. The expression above could be rewritten as:
SumAny([101], [102], [103], [104], [105]
By definition, the SumAny() function ignores any values which are non-numeric and returns the sum of those that are. If none of the values are numeric, the SumAny()
function returns an empty string.
2 Use the numeric field modifier. Field modifiers allow you to provide additional instructions on the format in which the field should be inserted into the code. Modifiers are
inserted within the square brackets but before the field ID, for example [#101]. The following modifiers are available.
Modifier Description Example
# Forces a numeric value to be returned. If the field cannot be converted to a number, the value 0 is returned. [#1109]
- Forces the field value to be returned as an unformatted string. For example, a typical numeric value might return “200000.00”. [-1109]
+ Forces the field value to be returned as a formatted string. For example, a typical numeric value might return “200,000.00”. [+1109]
@ Forces the field value to be returned as a date. If the field cannot be converted to a date, the date 1/1/1 is returned. [@1109]
Using the “#” modifier, the expression above could be rewritten as:
[#101] + [#102] + [#103] + [#104] + [#105]
Note that unlike the SumAny() function that will return a blank value if all of the referenced fields are empty, this expression would evaluate to 0 in that scenario (since each
operand will evaluate to 0).
When you place a reference to another loan field within a custom field calculation, that field will automatically be updated whenever the value of the referenced field is modified.
As a result, you must avoid circular dependencies in your custom field calculations. For example, say you define the following custom field calculations:
CX.FIELD1 = [1109] + [CX.FIELD2]
CX.FIELD2 = [CX.FIELD3] * 2
CX.FIELD3 = [CX.FIELD1] + 20000
Individually, each calculation is valid, but a circular dependency exists between the three fields. The Custom Field Editor will notify you of circular dependencies when they exist.

Branching and Logic Operations
Many custom calculations will require complex branching (if…then) logic in order to arrive at the desired value. To accommodate this need, the custom calculations provide
the IIF() function, which can be used to express if…then…else logic. The basic syntax of this function is as follows:
IIF(Boolean expression, True value, False value)
The first argument to IIF() is an expression that evaluates to either TRUE or FALSE. If that expression evaluates as TRUE, then the IIF function returns the value specified in
the second parameter (the "True value"). Otherwise, the IIF function returns the third parameter, the "False value."
For example, the following custom calculation returns 2% of the loan amount for loan amounts above $100,000 and 5% of the loan amount for loans below $100,000:
IIF([1109] > 100000, 0.02 * [1109], 0.05 * [1109])
The Boolean expression of an IIF statement can use the AND and OR operations to perform more complex logic, for example:
IIF([1109] > 100000 AND [1335] < 20000, 0.02 * [1109], 0.05 * [1109])
Often, you may encounter the need to handle more than just two cases (a TRUE case and a FALSE case). In these scenarios, you can use nested IIF statements. For example,
the following code demonstrates performing a calculation based on the purpose of the loan.
IIF([1811] = "PrimaryResidence", 0.05 * [1109],
IIF([1811] = "SecondHome", 0.02 * [1109],
IIF([1811] = "Investor", 0.01 * [1109], 0)))
The expression above evaluates to 5% of the loan amount if the loan is for the borrower's primary residence, 2% if it's a second home, 1% for an investment property and
return the value "0" if the loan purpose has not yet been specified.
NOTE: When the IIF function is invoked, the calculation engine first evaluates both the second and third parameters of the function before evaluating the Boolean expression.
Therefore, both parameters need to evaluate to valid values even though only one value will be used. For example, the following IIF statement will fail.
IIF(5 > 0, 1, 2 * [36])
The expression 2 * [36] is typically invalid since field 36 contains the borrower's first name (which is typically not numeric). Even though the logical expression 5 > 0 will always
evaluate to TRUE (and thus the value returned by IIF will always be 1), the failure of the third parameter to evaluate successfully will cause the entire calculation to fail.
To work around this issue, you can use any of the following techniques:
• Use the safe arithmetic operations, e.g. IIF(5 > 0, 1, Mult(2, [36])). These operations ensure that no errors will occur.
• Use the field modifiers, e.g. IIF(5 > 0, 1, 2 * [#36]). The numeric conversion modifier will convert non-numeric values to 0, allowing the calculation to be carried out
successfully.
• Use a combination of two custom fields, for example:
CX.FIELD1 = 2 * [36]
CX.FIELD2 = IIF(5 > 0, 1, [CX.FIELD1])
When field 36 is non-numeric, the calculation for field CX.FIELD1 will be invalid and, as a result, the field will be blank. However, the expression for CX.FIELD2 can now be
evaluated successfully since the substitution of the value CX.FIELD1 will always work (even if the value happens to be blank).

As a second example, the expression above that branches based on the loan purpose would be rewritten as follows to ensure safe evaluation regardless of the value in field
1109:
IIF([1811] = "PrimaryResidence", 0.05 * [#1109],
IIF([1811] = "SecondHome", 0.02 * [#1109],
IIF([1811] = "Investor", 0.01 * [#1109], 0)))
In addition, the custom calculation engine provides a few functions which can be used to determine the state of a field so you can add condition logic that behaves appropriately.
IIF(x, truepart, falsepart) Returns the truepart if x is true, the falsepart otherwise. IIF([#1109] > 100000, 10, 20)
IsEmpty(x) Returns a boolean indicating if the value x is the empty string. IsEmpty([1109])
IfEmpty(x, val) Returns the value x if it is non-empty, otherwise returns the value val. IfEmpty([1109], 0)
IsNumeric(x) Returns a boolean indicating if the value x can be converted into a numeric value. IsNumeric([1109])
IsDate(x) Returns a boolean indicating if the value x can be converted to a valid date. IsDate([1402])
List-Based Operations
Evaluating a custom calculation will frequently require logic which involves looking up a value in list of possible values or within a range of values. These operations could be
carried out using one or more nested IIF() expressions as demonstrated above, but the calculation engine offers several functions to simplify this task.
Match(x, value0, value1, …) Returns the index of the first value in the list that matches x. If no match Match([608], "Fixed", "GraduatedPaymentMortgage",
is found, the value -1 is returned. "AdjustableRate", "OtherAmortizationType")
Range(x, value0, value1, …) Returns the index of the first value which is greater than x. Range([1109], 100000, 200000, 500000)
RangeLow(x, value0, value1, …) Returns the index of the first value which is greater than or equal to x. RangeLow([1109], 100000, 200000, 500000)
Pick(x, value0, value1, …) Returns the value whose index is x. Pick([#16] - 1, "1 unit", "2 units", "3 units", "4 units")
Count(value0, value1, …) Returns the number of parameters that are non-empty. Count([36], [37], [98], [99])
Using these functions, this calculation:

IIF([1811] = "PrimaryResidence", 0.05 * [#1109],
IIF([1811] = "SecondHome", 0.02 * [#1109],
IIF([1811] = "Investor", 0.01 * [#1109], 0)))
could be rewritten as:
Pick(Match([1811], "PrimaryResidence", "SecondHome", "Investor", ""),
0.05 * [#1109], 0.02 * [#1109], 0.01 * [#1109], 0)

Advanced Functions
The Encompass Custom Calculation Engine leverages the Visual Basic.NET programming language when evaluating your calculation. As a result, you may make use of any
function which is provided as part of the VB.NET programming language. For a complete reference of these functions, visit Microsoft’s VB.NET Reference.
Keep in mind that your calculation should not invoke any method which can trigger the display of a user interface of any kind as this can cause Encompass or the Encompass
Server to fail.
Calculation Errors
There are two types of errors that can occur when authoring custom field calculations:
• Syntax errors, which are detected when you validate or save the custom calculation
• Runtime errors, which occur during the evaluation of the calculation which Encompass is running
When a runtime error occurs during the evaluation of a custom field calculation, Encompass will clear the field. For example, consider the field calculation:
[1109] * 2
If field 1109 is blank, this calculation will fail and the custom field will also be blank. When field 1109 takes on a numeric value, the calculation will succeed and the custom
field's value will be populated appropriately.
In general, if an error occurs in any part of the calculation, the entire calculation will fail. To avoid this, use the build-in functions (Sum(), Diff(), etc.) or use the field modifiers
described above. Either technique can be used to avoid errors that might otherwise short circuit your calculation.

Appendix C
Advanced Coding for Business Rules

When you create a business rule in Encompass, you can optionally apply Advanced Condition Editor
conditions under which the rule is applied. If you need to define a condition for a
The Advanced Conditions category of business rules provides the Advanced
scenario that is not addressed by the pre-defined condition types, you can use the
Condition Editor to create expressions to define custom conditions. This tool
Advanced Conditions option to create your own custom expression. In addition to
allows you to create a filter which writes the Visual Basic code for you.
custom coding for conditions, you can also create custom code for the Field Rules
or Trigger business rule. Loan Custom Field Calculations
NOTE: For Trigger rules, if you select Update the value of one or more fields The advance coding business rule syntax also leverages the capabilities of the
as the action to take when an event is triggered, you can set the specified field Encompass Custom Field Calculation engine which provides the ability to create
value using a custom calculation. Refer to Appendix B, “Loan Custom Field calculations for both pre-defined and user-defined custom field IDs. In addition,
Calculations” for detailed information. the same calculations can be used in various places within the advanced code.
Prerequisites Advanced Coding for Conditions

The advanced conditions business rule syntax is built on top of the Visual Every business rule you create in Encompass can include a condition under which
Basic.NET programming language, but also leverages the capabilities of the the rule applies. For example, you can define a rule that applies only if the loan is
Encompass Custom Field Calculation Engine. Before attempting to author an for a purchase, or only if the subject property is in a particular state. Using
advanced coding rule, you should have a good understanding of VB.NET syntax conditions, you can define a wide array of rules that apply to all the different loan
and logic flow, as those topics are not covered in this document. Additionally, scenarios handled by your users.
familiarity with the VB.NET language is assumed throughout the rest of this
document.Finally, knowledge of the Advanced Condition Editor and loan custom To simplify the work of defining conditions, Encompass includes a number of pre-
field calculations are recommended. defined condition types to allow simple point-and-click selection. You can, for
example, define a rule that applies only to loans originated in California by
Visual Basic selecting the “Property State” condition type, and then selecting California from
the list provided. The same is the case for conditions based on loan purpose, loan
The advance coding business rule syntax is built on top of the Visual Basic .NET
type, loan status, and so on.
programming language. Before attempting to author an advanced coding rule, it
helps to have a good understanding of the VB.NET syntax and logic flow, as those As you build your business rules, you may require a rule that should be
topics are not covered in this document. conditioned upon a field not provided in the pre-defined list, or that involves
complex logic based on multiple field values. In these cases, you must use the
Use of MsgBox or other UI-related functions is not supported when writing
Advanced Conditions option to author an expression that defines your custom
advanced code within Encompass business rules or triggers. These triggers and
condition. For example, use the following expression to create a rule that is
rules are enforced for all applications that may use the Encompass API, not just
triggered when the loan amount (field 1109) exceeds $500,000.
the Encompass client application. If a non-interactive application were to use the
Encompass API with these triggers and rules in place, the application would hang [#1109] > 500000
indefinitely since there would be no way to respond. To implement interactive pop-
The syntax for business rule conditions is the same as for the Loan Custom Field
ups and messages, it is recommended that you create those in a plug-in. While
Calculations (refer to the Loan Custom Field Calculations document). The primary
this may be a more complicated method, it is a far safer and more robust method.
difference is that the expression you create must evaluate to a Boolean
Appendix C: Advanced Coding for Business Rules 289

(true/false) value. If the expression evaluates to true, the rule is applied; Examples
otherwise, the rule is ignored. If your expression results in an error of any kind, the
rule will not be applied. When authoring the code for an advanced business rule, you are essentially
writing a VB.NET subroutine, in which you can use all of the language constructs
of VB.NET to make the determination of whether the value input by the user is
Examples valid for the corresponding field. The following example will form the basis of the
discussion of how to implement a custom business rule.
The following conditional expression enforces the business rule only if the loan
was originated on or after Jan 1, 2010. If XDec(Value) > [#1109] then
[@MS.START] > #1/1/2010# Fail("This field’s value cannot exceed the amount of
the loan.")
The MS.START field represents the File Started date of the loan and the @ End If
modifier forces Encompass to interpret the field value as a Date. The comparison
value, #1/1/2010#, is enclosed in # characters to represent a literal date value.
This example can be broken into the following components.
Conditions can also involve multiple fields, such as the following expression which
evaluates to true only if the loan amount exceeds $500,000 and the loan is a If...then...End If
refinance.
The conditional syntax, If....then...End If, is taken directly from VB.NET and
[#1109] > 500000 And ([19] = "Cash-Out Refinance" Or [19] demonstrates the fact that VB.NET language elements can be employed without
= "NoCash-Out Refinance") any special coding within your rule.
XDec()
Conditions can also involve complex branching using the IIF statement. The
following expression causes the rule to be enforced based on differing loan The XDec() function is a function provided by the Encompass Custom Field
amounts for properties in California versus all other states. Calculation engine and forces the conversion of the parameter to a decimal value.
Refer to the document, Loan Custom Field Calculations for additional information.
IIF([14] = "CA", [#1109] > 200000, [#1109] > 300000)
Value
All of the arithmetic and mathematical operations available to custom field
calculations can be invoked as part of your condition. The Value parameter is the sole argument passed into your business rule at
runtime and represents the data input by the user. Your code must determine
[#110] + [#111] + [#112] >= 0.9 * [#911] whether the value stored in this parameter is appropriate for the field based on the
current state of the loan. The Value is always passed as a string since one
possible value for every field is the empty value (represented by the empty string).
Advanced Coding for Field Rules Therefore, it is unsafe to assume that Value will always have a numeric value even
when your validation code is for a field such as the loan amount.
When you create a Field Rule type of business rule, you have the option of - [#1109]
creating custom validation code for a specific field. This option is available only for
a field rule defined with no other conditions. The square-bracket notation [#1109], is used to insert a reference to another field
within the same loan. This language extension can be used anywhere within your
The Advanced Conditions option allows you to implement custom validation code’s logic except within a string literal. For example, the following code is not
routines for individual loan fields that go far beyond what is permitted by the valid:
standard validation rules. You can use the values of other loan fields, employ
arbitrarily-complex branching logic (if...then...else), or invoke a variety of built-in Dim s as String = "The loan amount is [1109]"
functions to determine whether a value being saved into the field satisfies your The correct way to achieve the desired effect is:
company’s business rules. Additionally, you can customize the message
Encompass displays to the user when invalid values are detected. Dim s as String = "The loan amount is " & [1109]

The # sign is a field modifier that stipulates that the field should be forced to be a Case "30 Year Fixed"
number (in other words, it is the logical equivalent to XDec([1109])). The set of If XDec(Value) > 450000 then
available field modifiers is defined in the Loan Custom Field Calculations Fail("The loan amount cannot exceed $450,000
document. for a 30 year Fixed.")
End If
Fail() End Select
The Fail() subroutine is the function your custom rule should invoke if you have
determined that the Value is inappropriate for the current field. The Fail() routine
The next example compares the value being set into the field to the sum of the
takes one parameter: the message to display to the user. All processing within
several fees pulled from the GFE.
your business rule stops at the point where you call Fail(). No code is executed
beyond that line. Dim sum as Decimal = 0
Dim i as Integer
If a validation rule reaches its end without calling Fail(), the Value is assumed to
be valid for the field. If any exception occurs while executing the business rule, the Dim fieldIds as String() = new String() {"454", "1093",
validation is considered to have failed and the user will receive a notice indicating "640", "641", "329", L228", "L230"}
an error has occurred in the rule.
For i = 0 to fieldIds.Length - 1
sum = sum + XDec(Fields(fieldIds(i)))
Additional Examples Next
Within your rule definition, you may declare and use variables, author loops using
for, for each or while, or invoke any standard functionality provided by the .NET If XDec(Value) > sum then
Framework within the System namespace. You may not invoke any function that Fail("The discount value cannot exceed the sum of the
results in the display of a user interface, nor should you spawn additional threads prepaid charges.")
to perform asynchronous processing. Because your validation rules are enforced End If
at the business level of the Encompass application, these rules may be invoked
The above example demonstrates the use of the Fields collection, which provides
in a scenario when there is no user interface (such as when using a custom
access to the set of loan fields. This collection can be used whenever the ID of the
application written using the Encompass API).
field you are retrieving is determined at runtime. The square-bracket syntax
The following example could be used to enforce restrictions on the loan amount [FieldID] is equivalent to the expression Fields("FieldID").
based on the selected loan program. The Select Case syntax is used for
branching instead of If...then...else, but that choice is entirely a cosmetic one.
Select Case [1401] Advanced Coding for Triggers
Case "5/1 ARM" Unlike all other business rules, which allow you to validate or protect loan data
If XDec(Value) > 650000 then from being seen or modified, triggers provide the unique ability to modify the
Fail("The loan amount cannot exceed $650,000 contents of a loan based on user action or data changes within the loan file.
for a 5/1 ARM.") Although Encompass provides an interface for quickly defining simple triggers
End If that involve very simple logic, your business requirements may demand much
more complexity than is provided by default.
Case "3/1 ARM" NOTE: For Trigger rules, if you select Update the value of one or more fields
If Value <> "" And XDec(Value) < 30000 then as the action to take when an event is triggered, you can set the specified field
Fail("The loan amount must be at least $30,000 value using a custom calculation. For detailed information, refer to the "Loan
for a 3/1 ARM.") Custom Field Calculations" document.
End If

Just as with the Field Data Entry rule described earlier, the Triggers interface in • If you select Field value modified, or Milestone completed, you will be asked
Encompass allows you to author code in VB.NET to represent your custom logic. to enter additional information as described below.
Your code is executed whenever the conditions of the trigger are met, such as 11 In the Action section of the window, select Run advanced code.
when a field is set to a particular value.
12 In the Advanced Code area, enter the code that will that will be run when the
NOTE: If you are creating a field trigger that runs advanced code to update fields, action is triggered.
consider Dynamic Data Management (DDM). DDM provides a Data Table option
that eliminates advanced code and makes it easier to create & maintain rules for 13 Click OK.
updating fees and fields. For more information, see the Dynamic Data 14 When finished adding event details, click OK.
Management User Guide.) 15 Add additional field events as required, and then click Save.
Within your advanced code, you can:
• Read or write the values of the loan's fields
Examples
• Determine the prior and new values of the field the user modified
The examples below illustrate a few of the commonly used techniques that you
• Perform branching and conditional logic can take advantage of when writing your custom trigger code.
• Use any of the functions natively supported by the VB.NET language
The following example uses the Subject Property State field (14) to determine the
The advanced code for a trigger should be written as a VB.NET subroutine which Broker Company Name (315) that is presented on the 1003 Page 3 form.
takes three parameters: FieldID, PriorValue, and NewValue. These variables
If [14] = "CA" then
represent the ID of the field that was changed as well as its prior and new values,
[315] = "California Mortgage Corp"
respectively. Unlike advanced code written for Field Data Entry rules, which is
ElseIf [14] = "MD" then
executed prior to the field's value being set, a trigger is activated after the field's
[315] = "Maryland Home Lending"
value has changed.
Else
Because a trigger can modify other field values in the loan, any rules or triggers [315] = "US Mortgages"
associated with those fields will also be fired. However, a single trigger will never End If
run recursively, meaning that if a trigger makes a change that causes itself to be
fired a second time (or it causes a second trigger to run that would in turn fire the In the previous example, the value of field 315 is set to one of three possible
first trigger again), the trigger will not be executed. This prevents the possibility of values based on the data input into field 14. To set a field value, use the same
an infinite loop caused by triggers firing one another in succession. bracket ([ ]) notation as when retrieving a field value.
1 On the menu bar, click Encompass, and then click Settings. The next example sets the value of a set of custom fields based on the loan
2 On the left panel, click Business Rules, and then click Field Triggers. amount (field 1109) and interest rate (field 3).
3 On the Field Triggers tool, click the New icon. IgnoreValidationErrors
4 Type the name of the rule. [CX.MYPROFIT] = [#1109] * [#3] * 0.02 / 100.0
[CX.ADDLINFO] = "Profit last calculated on " & Now()
5 Select the channels where the rule will be applied.
6 Select No to always apply the rule. If [19] = "NoCashOutRefi" then
[CX.MYPROFIT] = 2 * [#CX.MYPROFIT]
Or, select Yes to create a condition for when the rule is applied.
End If
7 Select a category for the condition, such as Loan Purpose.
8 Select a value for the category, such as Purchase. The first line of the trigger is the keyword IgnoreValidationErrors, which can be
9 Click Add. used only in triggers. This statement tells Encompass to ignore any field rules that
may prevent changes to the fields modified during the execution of the trigger. For
10 I n the Activation section of the window, select the Activation Type. example, if you had a field rule for the CX.MYPROFIT field that restricted access

to the field for certain users, then your trigger would fail when executed by those
users because the rules would be enforced. By using IgnoreValidationErrors, you
enable the trigger to work regardless of the field rules currently in place.
Accessing and Updating Non-Field Data

During the execution of your trigger, you may need to check or update the status
of a milestone, task or document within the loan file. For example, when a certain
field is populated, you may want to mark a Milestone as being completed.
Because there is no fixed set of Field IDs for this type of dynamic data, alternative
methods are provided for reading and writing this data.
Read-only access to most non-field can be obtained thru the user of Virtual Field
IDs. A virtual field ID behaves like a normal Field ID but is dynamic based on the
object it is referencing. For example, to retrieve the date the "Credit Report"
document was received, you can use the virtual field ID
[Document.DateReceived.Credit Report]. Note that the document's title appears
as part of the field ID, indicating that the field ID is dynamic based on the
document you are referencing.
For example, the following code uses the date the Credit Report was received to
set the value of a custom field.
If [@Document.DateReceived.Credit Report] > #3/15/2009#
then
[CX.REPORTDATE] = [Document.DateReceived.Credit
Report]
End If
Virtual fields are limited in their use because they are read-only. For example, the
following code is invalid.
If [Document.DateReceived.Credit Report] = Today
To make changes to data represented by virtual fields, you will need to use one of
the special functions defined below, based on the type of object you want to
manipulate.

Milestone-related Functions
Milestones.IsComplete(x) Returns a Boolean indicating if the specified milestone is complete. The Milestones.IsComplete("Qualification")
value x should represent the name of the desired milestone.
Milestones.SetComplete(x, Marks a milestone as completed or marks it as incomplete if the optional Milestones.SetComplete("Qualification")

optional isComplete) isComplete flag is passed and set to false
Task-related Functions
Tasks.Exists(x) Determines if the specific task is present in the loan. The value x should Tasks.Exists("Contact Borrower")
represent the title of the task.
Tasks.IsComplete(x) Determines if the specified task has been completed. If the task is not Tasks.IsComplete("Contact Borrower")
present, this method returns false.
Tasks.SetComplete(x, optional Marks a task as completed or as incomplete if the isComplete parameter Tasks.SetComplete("Contact Borrower", true)
isComplete) is passed as false.
Document-related Functions
Documents.Exists(x) Determines if a document with the specified title is present in the loan. Documents.Exists("Credit Report")
Documents.IsReceived(x) Determines if a document with the specified title has been received. Documents.IsReceived("Credit Report")
Documents.IsExpired(x) Determines if the specified document has expired. Documents.IsExpired("Credit Report")
Documents.IsOrdered(x) Determines if the specified document has been ordered. Documents.IsOrdered("Credit Report")
The following example demonstrates how to mark a task as completed based on whether a document has been received.
If Documents.IsReceived("Credit Report") then
Tasks.SetComplete("Pull borrower credit")
End If

Index
Numerics borrower custom fields 156 contacts set up 240

broadcasting message borrower contact status 157 starting 240
4506T service sending to users 211 borrower custom fields 156 stopping 240
setup 255 business categories 159 business categories 159 eFolder document groups 112
business contacts business custom fields 158 eFolder documents 110
accessing 40 contact groups 159 eFolder documents stacking templates
A business custom fields 158 exporting 275 113
business rules 185 importing 273 eFolder setup 108
access rights advanced condition editor 203 importing from CSV files 274 condition sets 116
assigning 270 advanced conditions 289 importing from Outlook 224 document conversion 109
revoking 271 field data entry 188 making borrower contacts public 39 document groups 112
accessing files and data 8 field triggers 189 updating borrower contacts 157 document identification 114
account input form list 200 county limits 177 document stacking templates 113
failed login limit 226, 277 loan folder 185 current logins 211 document training 114
adjustment templates 146 loan form printing 200 custom alerts 89 documents 110
Admin Tools milestone completion 186 custom field calculations post-closing conditions 117
online user manager 211 persona access to fields 192 arithmetic operations 279 unassigned document conversion
Register Encompass360 SDK 229 print auto selection 202 operations and features 279 preferences 109
reporting database 230 role access to documents 199 safe operations 280 WebCenter configuration 120
server manager 220 custom fields Ellie Mae Network
settings manager 221 borrower 156 password 12
Version Manager 229 business 158 email
advanced coding for business rules C loan 94 sending to users 211
289 channel options 95 custom forms email server settings 161
Affiliated Business Arrangement client importing 272 Encompass
Templates 167 installation 3 custom print forms 93 registering 219
alerts closing costs 163 Encompass server
compliance alerts 89 closing doc stacking templates 129 starting 219
configuration 88 company information 10 stopping 219
custom 89 DBA names 10 D escrow tables 174
All TPO Contact Information 77 company password 12 data templates 169
appraisal order management 205 Company Rating 71 default input forms 91
appraisal service company status online 235 default template setting 171
setup 257 compliance audit settings 130 disclosure tracking settings 97 F
assigning imported files 275 compliance calendar docs setup 121 fees 178
assigning rights 270 our company calendar 99 closing doc stacking templates 129 FHA county limits 177
audit trail 232 U.S. postal calendar 100 compliance audit settings 130 FHA loans
auto loan number 85 compliance review setup 241 initial disclosure packages 121 county limits 177
automated disclosures 240 compliance review setup wizard 244 document conversion 109 default MI tables 177
autosave 222 condition forms 92 documents field rules
condition sets 116 sets 168 field-specific rules 188
conditional approval letters Dynamic Data Management 183 field-level help 2
B accessing 41 fields
conditions 115 field-specific rules 188
borrower contacts post-closing 117 file rights 270
making public 39 sets 116 E assigning 270
status 157 configuration eDisclosure fulfillment service revoking 271
update 157 setup sequence 8 unlocking loan files 217
Index 295
Flood Service 263 L auto assignment 86 Loan Tab 16
Starting Encompass Flood Service enable auto assignment 86 Pipeline Tab 15
(CoreLogic) 263 license management organization-specific 86 Settings Tab 19
Starting Encompass Flood Service electronic document management MI tables 176 setup sequence 8
(ServiceLink) 264 235 default FHA and VA tables 177 super administrator 277
Starting Flood Service for Sub- status online 235 Milestone Templates 32 Trades/Contacts/Dashboard/Report
Organizations (CoreLogic) 264 LO Compensation Plans 28 creating 33 s Tab 19
Starting Flood Service for Sub- exporting to Excel 28 default settings 33 viewing and editing rights 28
Organizations (ServiceLink) 265 Organization/User setup 24 Global Template Settings 36 piggyback loan synchronization 101
folders User setup 27 Milestones 31 post-closing condition sets 117
loan 87 working with 28 archived 32 post-closing conditions 117
fraud service LO Compensation creating 31 sets 117
setup 260 review 243 moving 32 print form
funding templates 152 rule 208 mortgage insurance tables 176 groups 94
setting 181 multi-user access to loans 226 print form groups 94
loan multi-user editing print forms
accessing loan files 8 enable 226 accessing standard forms 41
G accessing loan templates 40 printing options 228
auto number 85 privacy policy setting 104
GFE print selection 100
importing 275 product and pricing settings tool 135
Global Template Settings 36
glossary of Encompass terms 1
reassigning 217 N public business contact groups 159
unlocking 217 purchase advice form 154
NMLS number 22
loan custom field calculations 279
North Carolina compliance report
loan folder 87
setup 267
H creating 87
HELOC table 174
deleting 87, 88 R
loan programs 162
reassigning loans 217
loan setup O recording fees 178
channel options 95
online help 1 registering Encompass 219
I piggyback loan synchronization 101
organization release notes 2
privacy policy 104
IIS adding 22 reporting database 230
trustee list 100
server name 6 setup considerations 22 resources
loan templates 162
importing organization hierarchy 8, 21 accessing 40
loans
assigning imported files 275 RESPA template 96
multi-user access 226
contacts 273 roles
lock expiration date 147
custom forms 272 creating 30
lock request additional fields 139 P
enabling and disabling 224 default 30
log setup 91
from Calyx Point 272 password shipped with Encompass 30
logging in 6
loan files 275 logging users out 211 company 12
loan numbering 224 logins failure limit 225
Point settings 272 options 225
initial disclosure packages 121
current 211
setting options 225 S
enabling and disabling 211
input form sets 165 personas 13 scanned document uploader service
input forms Access Tab 14 266
default 91 accessing tasks 9 secondary lock fields 139
sets 165 M administrator 277 server
installation 3 creating 14 repairing configuration 220
mapping
client 3 default 13 starting 219
borrower custom fields 156
Instant Messenger 222 eFolder Tab 18 stopping 219
business custom category fields 158
investor templates 142 Forms/Tools Tab 18 uninstalling 220
MERS MIN number 22
Itemization Fee Management 178 Home Tab 14 updating client ID 220
organization specific 23
loan access rules 195 server configuration 220
MERS MIN numbering
Index 296
server settings 221 Lenders 44
email 161 manage companies and branches 63
servicing 152 search for TPO companies and
settlement service provider list 166 branches 63
settlement service provider list form TPO Contacts 64
166 TPO Custom Fields 76
settlement service providers templates TPO Disclosure Settings 81
166 TPO Fees 73
SRP templates 151 TPO Reassignment 75
system audit trail 218 TPO Settings 70
system configurations 3 TQL services
client/server 3 setup 256
system requirements 3 trade management fields 143
transfer fees 178
trustee list 100
T
table list 174
tables and fees U
escrow tables 174 unassigned document conversion
fees 178 preferences 109
HELOC table 174 unlocking loan files 217
title tables 174 user groups 9, 37
tasks 91 creating 38
accessing 9 users 25
role mapping 30 accessing loan files 8
sets 168 adding 26
templates broadcasting message to 211
accessing loan templates 40 deleting 29
closing costs 163 editing persona rights 30
custom print forms 93 emailing message to 211
data conflicts 170 logging out of Encompass 211
data templates 169 moving to another organization 30
default setting 171 specifying LO licensing 29
document sets 168 viewing information 211
input form sets 165 viewing persona rights 30
investor 142
loan 162
loan programs 162
loan template sets 170 V
price adjustments 146 VA loans
RESPA 96 default MI tables 177
settlement service providers 166 setting up MI tables 176
SRP 151 valuation service 263
task sets 168 video tutorials 1
title service viewing user information 211
setup 259
title tables 174
TPO management 45
All TPO Contact Information 77
Banks 43
create TPO company 45
create TPO company/branch 62
Index 297

360BEInstallAdminGuide 10 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

360BEInstallAdminGuide 10 2020

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

360BEInstallAdminGuide 10 2020

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and

For use with Encompass 20.1 Banker Edition

Encompass Installation and Administration Guide - Banker Edition

Sales Reps / AE Tab ..................................................... 50 TPO Docs ............................................................................. 79

Chapter 2: Installing Encompass 3

The Encompass Installation Manager installs each required application and

7 The Updating System window shows the progress of the installation.

Chapter 2: Installing Encompass 4

9 When the Encompass SmartClient Installation wizard opens, click Next.

Chapter 2: Installing Encompass 5

Chapter 3: Logging In to Encompass 6

Chapter 3: Logging In to Encompass 7

Chapter 4: Configuration Guidelines 8

Chapter 4: Configuration Guidelines 9

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 10

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 11

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 12

Personas • Lock Desk (LD) - Receives and processes lock requests.

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 13

Web View Access

3 In the Create a Persona section, click the New icon.

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 14

To Add or Remove Columns

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 15

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 16

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 17

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 18

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 19

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 20

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 21

4 On the Organization Details window, type the Organization

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 22

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 23

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 24

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 25

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 26

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 27

• Click Select. To Export LO Compensation Plan Data to Excel:

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 28

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 29

To Create a Role: Role Mapping

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 30

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 31

NOTE: When an archived milestone is moved to the current list, it is not

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 32

Default Milestone Template Settings

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 33

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 34

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 35

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 36

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 37

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 38

Borrower Contacts Tab

To Define Access to Borrower Contacts:

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 39

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 40

To Define Access to Condition Forms:

To Define Access to Change of Circumstance Options:

Chapter 5: Company/User Setup 41